Mutcd 2003 PDF
Mutcd 2003 PDF
Mutcd 2003 PDF
Part 1
General
2003 Edition
Page TC1-1
TABLES CHAPTER 1A. GENERAL Table 1A-1 Table 1A-2 Table 1A-3 Acceptable Abbreviations......................................................................................................1A-15 Abbreviations That Are Acceptable Only with a Prompt Word............................................1A-16 Unacceptable Abbreviations..................................................................................................1A-17
2003 Edition
Page 1A-1
Page 1A-2
2003 Edition
Standard: All symbols shall be unmistakably similar to or mirror images of the adopted symbol signs, all of which are shown in the Standard Highway Signs book (see Section 1A.11). Symbols and colors shall not be modified unless otherwise stated herein. All symbols and colors for signs not shown in the Standard Highway Signs book shall follow the procedures for experimentation and change described in Section 1A.10. Guidance: Aspects of a devices design should be modified only if there is a demonstrated need. Support: An example of modifying a devices design would be to modify the Side Road (W2-2) sign to show a second offset intersecting road. Option: Highway agencies may develop word message signs to notify road users of special regulations or to warn road users of a situation that might not be readily apparent. Unlike symbol signs and colors, new word message signs may be used without the need for experimentation. With the exception of symbols and colors, minor modifications in the specific design elements of a device may be made provided the essential appearance characteristics are preserved. Although the standard design of symbol signs cannot be modified, it may be appropriate to change the orientation of the symbol to better reflect the direction of travel.
2003 Edition
Page 1A-3
manual or supplement is required, that manual or supplement shall be in substantial conformance with the national Manual on Uniform Traffic Control Devices. 23 CFR 655.603 also states that traffic control devices on all streets and highways open to public travel in each State shall be in substantial conformance with standards issued or endorsed by the Federal Highway Administrator. Support: The Uniform Vehicle Code (see Section 1A.11) has the following provision in Section 15-104 for the adoption of a uniform Manual: (a)The [State Highway Agency] shall adopt a manual and specification for a uniform system of traffic control devices consistent with the provisions of this code for use upon highways within this State. Such uniform system shall correlate with and so far as possible conform to the system set forth in the most recent edition of the Manual on Uniform Traffic Control Devices for Streets and Highways, and other standards issued or endorsed by the Federal Highway Administrator. (b) The Manual adopted pursuant to subsection (a) shall have the force and effect of law. Additionally, States are encouraged to adopt Section 15-116 of the Uniform Vehicle Code, which states that, No person shall install or maintain in any area of private property used by the public any sign, signal, marking or other device intended to regulate, warn, or guide traffic unless it conforms with the State manual and specifications adopted under Section 15-104.
Page 1A-4
2003 Edition
2003 Edition
Page 1A-5
Figure 1A-1. Example of Process for Requesting and Conducting Experimentations for New Traffic Control Devices
FHWA Review
Yes
Sect. 1A.10
Page 1A-6
2003 Edition
H. An agreement to restore the site of the experiment to a condition that complies with the provisions of this Manual within 3 months following the end of the time period of the experiment. This agreement must also provide that the agency sponsoring the experimentation will terminate the experimentation at any time that it determines significant safety concerns are directly or indirectly attributable to the experimentation. The FHWAs Office of Transportation Operations has the right to terminate approval of the experimentation at any time if there is an indication of safety concerns. If, as a result of the experimentation, a request is made that this Manual be changed to include the device or application being experimented with, the device or application will be permitted to remain in place until an official rulemaking action has occurred. I. An agreement to provide semiannual progress reports for the duration of the experimentation, and an agreement to provide a copy of the final results of the experimentation to the FHWAs Office of Transportation Operations within 3 months following completion of the experimentation. The FHWAs Office of Transportation Operations has the right to terminate approval of the experimentation if reports are not provided in accordance with this schedule. Support: A change includes consideration of a new device to replace a present standard device, an additional device to be added to the list of standard devices, or a revision to a traffic control device application or placement criteria. Guidance: Requests for a change to this Manual should contain the following information: A. A statement indicating what change is proposed; B. Any illustration that would be helpful to understand the request; and C. Any supporting research data that is pertinent to the item to be reviewed. Support: Requests for interim approval include consideration of allowing interim use, pending official rulemaking, of a new traffic control device, a revision to the application or manner of use of an existing traffic control device, or a provision not specifically described in this Manual. If granted, interim approval will result in the traffic control device or application being placed into the next scheduled rulemaking process for revisions to this Manual. The device or application will be permitted to remain in place, under any conditions established in the interim approval, until an official rulemaking action has occurred. Interim approval is considered based on the results of successful experimentation, results of analytical or laboratory studies, and/or review of non-U.S. experience with a traffic control device or application. Interim approval considerations include an assessment of relative risks, benefits, and costs. Interim approval includes conditions that jurisdictions agree to comply with in order to use the traffic control device or application until an official rulemaking action has occurred. Guidance: The request for permission to place a traffic control device under interim approval should contain the following: A. A statement indicating the nature of the problem. B. A description of the proposed change to the traffic control device or application of the traffic control device, how it was developed, the manner in which it deviates from the standard, and how it is expected to be an improvement over existing standards. C. The location(s) where it will be used and any illustration that would be helpful to understand the traffic control device or use of the traffic control device. D. A legally-binding statement certifying that the concept of the traffic control device is not protected by a patent or copyright. (An example of a traffic control device concept would be countdown pedestrian signals in general. Ordinarily an entire general concept would not be patented or copyrighted, but if it were it would not be acceptable for interim approval unless the patent or copyright owner signs a waiver of rights acceptable to the FHWA. An example of a patented or copyrighted specific device within the general concept of countdown pedestrian signals would be a manufacturers design for its specific brand of countdown signal, including the design details of the housing or electronics that are unique to that manufacturers product. Interim approval of a specific patented or copyrighted product is not acceptable.) E. A detailed completed research or evaluation on this traffic control device. F. An agreement to restore the site(s) of the interim approval to a condition that complies with the provisions in this Manual within 3 months following the issuance of a final rule on this traffic control device. This agreement must also provide that the agency sponsoring the interim approval will terminate use of the device or application installed under the interim approval at any time that it determines significant safety concerns are directly or indirectly attributable to the device or application. The FHWAs Office of Transportation Operations has the right to terminate the interim approval at any time if there is an indication of safety concerns.
Sect. 1A.10
2003 Edition
Page 1A-7
Option: A State may submit a request for interim approval for all jurisdictions in that State, as long as the request contains the information listed in the Guidance above. Standard: Once an interim approval is granted to any jurisdiction for a particular traffic control device or application, subsequent jurisdictions shall be granted interim approval for that device or application by submitting a letter to the FHWA Office of Transportation Operations indicating they will abide by Item F above and the specific conditions contained in the original interim approval. A local jurisdiction using a traffic control device or application under an interim approval that was granted either directly to that jurisdiction or on a statewide basis based on the States request shall inform the State of the locations of such use. Support: A diagram indicating the process for incorporating new traffic control devices into this Manual is shown in Figure 1A-2. Procedures for revising this Manual are set out in the Federal Register of June 30, 1983 (48 FR 30145). For additional information concerning interpretations, experimentation, changes, or interim approvals, write to the FHWA, 400 Seventh Street, SW, HOTO, Washington, DC 20590, or visit the MUTCD website at http://mutcd.fhwa.dot.gov.
Page 1A-8
2003 Edition
Figure 1A-2. Example of Process for Incorporating New Traffic Control Devices into the MUTCD
Analytical or Laboratory Study Results and/or non-U.S. experimentation
FHWA Review
NO
NO
YES
NO
FHWA prepares Notice of Proposed Amendment Interim approval? FHWA publishes Notice of Proposed Amendment in Federal Register
YES FHWA notifies all States and distributes simplified application form for submission by jurisdictions
Jurisdictions apply for and receive Interim Approval FHWA reviews comments Jurisdictions deploy devices under Interim Approval conditions FHWA prepares Final Rule
No action required
NO
State Manuals must be in substantial conformance with the National MUTCD within 2 years as specified in 23 CFR 655.603(a)
Jurisdictions restore sites of Interim Approval to previous condition and/or comply with Final Rule
Sect. 1 A.11
2003 Edition
Page 1A-9
15. 16. 17. 18. 19. 20. 21. 22. 23. 24. 25. 26. 27. 28. 29. 30. 31. 32.
Manual of Transportation Engineering Studies, 1994 Edition (ITE) Pedestrian Traffic Control Signal Indications, 1985 Edition (ITE) Preemption of Traffic Signals at or Near Railroad Grade Crossings with Active Warning Devices, (ITE) Purchase Specification for Flashing and Steady Burn Warning Lights, 1981 Edition (ITE) School Trip Safety Program Guidelines, 1984 Edition (ITE) Traffic Detector Handbook, 1991 Edition (ITE) Traffic Engineering Handbook, 1999 Edition (ITE) Traffic Signal Lamps, 1980 Edition (ITE) Traffic Control Devices Handbook, 2001 Edition (ITE) Vehicle Traffic Control Signal Heads, Part 11985 Edition; Part 21998 Edition (ITE) Uniform Vehicle Code (UVC) and Model Traffic Ordinance, 2000 Edition (National Committee on Uniform Traffic Laws and Ordinances) Occupational Safety and Health Administration Regulations (Standards - 29 CFR), General Safety and Health Provisions - 1926.20, amended June 30, 1993, Occupational Safety and Health Administration (OSHA) Highway Capacity Manual, 2000 Edition (Transportation Research BoardTRB) Recommended Procedures for the Safety Performance Evaluation of Highway Features, (NCHRP Report 350), 1993 Edition (Transportation Research Board - TRB) Accessible Pedestrian Signals, A-37, 1998 Edition, U.S. Architectural and Transportation Barriers Compliance Board (The U.S. Access Board) Building a True CommunityFinal ReportPublic Rights-of-Way Access Advisory Committee (PRWAAC), 2001 Edition (The U.S. Access Board) The Americans with Disabilities Act Accessibility Guidelines for Buildings and Facilities (ADAAG), July 1998 Edition (The U.S. Access Board) Highway-Rail Intersection Architecture, U.S. Department of Transportation, Federal Railroad Administration (USDOT/FRA)
Page 1A-10
2003 Edition
Sect. 1A.13
2003 Edition
Page 1A-11
18. Crosswalk(a) that part of a roadway at an intersection included within the connections of the lateral lines of the sidewalks on opposite sides of the highway measured from the curbs or in the absence of curbs, from the edges of the traversable roadway, and in the absence of a sidewalk on one side of the roadway, the part of a roadway included within the extension of the lateral lines of the sidewalk at right angles to the centerline; (b) any portion of a roadway at an intersection or elsewhere distinctly indicated as a pedestrian crossing by lines on the surface, which may be supplemented by contrasting pavement texture, style, or color. 19. Crosswalk Lineswhite pavement marking lines that identify a crosswalk. 20. Delineatora retroreflective device mounted on the roadway surface or at the side of the roadway in a series to indicate the alignment of the roadway, especially at night or in adverse weather. 21. Detectablehaving a continuous edge within 150 mm (6 in) of the surface so that pedestrians who have visual disabilities can sense its presence and receive usable guidance information. 22. Dynamic Envelopethe clearance required for the train and its cargo overhang due to any combination of loading, lateral motion, or suspension failure. 23. Edge Line Markingswhite or yellow pavement marking lines that delineate the right or left edge(s) of a traveled way. 24. End-of-Roadway Markera device used to warn and alert road users of the end of a roadway in other than temporary traffic control zones. 25. Engineering Judgmentthe evaluation of available pertinent information, and the application of appropriate principles, Standards, Guidance, and practices as contained in this Manual and other sources, for the purpose of deciding upon the applicability, design, operation, or installation of a traffic control device. Engineering judgment shall be exercised by an engineer, or by an individual working under the supervision of an engineer, through the application of procedures and criteria established by the engineer. Documentation of engineering judgment is not required. 26. Engineering Studythe comprehensive analysis and evaluation of available pertinent information, and the application of appropriate principles, Standards, Guidance, and practices as contained in this Manual and other sources, for the purpose of deciding upon the applicability, design, operation, or installation of a traffic control device. An engineering study shall be performed by an engineer, or by an individual working under the supervision of an engineer, through the application of procedures and criteria established by the engineer. An engineering study shall be documented. 27. Expresswaya divided highway with partial control of access. 28. Flashingan operation in which a signal indication is turned on and off repetitively. 29. Freewaya divided highway with full control of access. 30. Guide Signa sign that shows route designations, destinations, directions, distances, services, points of interest, or other geographical, recreational, or cultural information. 31. High Occupancy Vehicle (HOV)a motor vehicle carrying at least two or more persons, including carpools, vanpools, and buses. 32. Highwaya general term for denoting a public way for purposes of travel by vehicular travel, including the entire area within the right-of-way. 33. Highway-Rail Grade Crossingthe general area where a highway and a railroads right-of-way cross at the same level, within which are included the railroad tracks, highway, and traffic control devices for highway traffic traversing that area. 34. Highway Traffic Signala power-operated traffic control device by which traffic is warned or directed to take some specific action. These devices do not include signals at toll plazas, poweroperated signs, illuminated pavement markers, warning lights (see Section 6F.78), or steady burning electric lamps. 35. HOV Laneany preferential lane designated for exclusive use by high-occupancy vehicles for all or part of a dayincluding a designated lane on a freeway, other highway, street, or independent roadway on a separate right-of-way. 36. Inherently Low Emission Vehicle (ILEV)any kind of vehicle that is certified by the U.S. Environmental Protection Agency and that because of inherent properties of the fuel system design, will not have significant evaporative emissions, even if its evaporative emission control system has failed. 37. Interchangea system of interconnecting roadways providing for traffic movement between two or more highways that do not intersect at grade. 38. Intermediate Interchangean interchange with an urban or rural route that is not a major or minor interchange as defined herein.
Sect. 1 A.13
Page 1A-12
2003 Edition
39. Intersection(a) the area embraced within the prolongation or connection of the lateral curb lines, or if none, the lateral boundary lines of the roadways of two highways that join one another at, or approximately at, right angles, or the area within which vehicles traveling on different highways that join at any other angle might come into conflict; (b) the junction of an alley or driveway with a roadway or highway shall not constitute an intersection. 40. Islanda defined area between traffic lanes for control of vehicular movements or for pedestrian refuge. It includes all end protection and approach treatments. Within an intersection area, a median or an outer separation is considered to be an island. 41. Lane Line Markingswhite pavement marking lines that delineate the separation of traffic lanes that have the same direction of travel on a roadway. 42. Lane-Use Control Signala signal face displaying indications to permit or prohibit the use of specific lanes of a roadway or to indicate the impending prohibition of such use. 43. Legendsee Sign Legend. 44. Logoa distinctive emblem, symbol, or trademark that identifies a product or service. 45. Longitudinal Markingspavement markings that are generally placed parallel and adjacent to the flow of traffic such as lane lines, centerlines, edge lines, channelizing lines, and others. 46. Major Interchangean interchange with another freeway or expressway, or an interchange with a high-volume multi-lane highway, principal urban arterial, or major rural route where the interchanging traffic is heavy or includes many road users unfamiliar with the area. 47. Major Streetthe street normally carrying the higher volume of vehicular traffic. 48. Medianthe area between two roadways of a divided highway measured from edge of traveled way to edge of traveled way. The median excludes turn lanes. The median width might be different between intersections, interchanges, and at opposite approaches of the same intersection. 49. Minor Interchangean interchange where traffic is local and very light, such as interchanges with land service access roads. Where the sum of the exit volumes is estimated to be lower than 100 vehicles per day in the design year, the interchange is classified as local. 50. Minor Streetthe street normally carrying the lower volume of vehicular traffic. 51. Object Markera device used to mark obstructions within or adjacent to the roadway. 52. Occupancy Requirementany restriction that regulates the use of a facility for any period of the day based on a specified number of persons in a vehicle. 53. Occupanta person driving or riding in a car, truck, bus, or other vehicle. 54. Paveda bituminous surface treatment, mixed bituminous concrete, or Portland cement concrete roadway surface that has both a structural (weight bearing) and a sealing purpose for the roadway. 55. Pedestriana person afoot, in a wheelchair, on skates, or on a skateboard. 56. Pedestrian Facilitiesa general term denoting improvements and provisions made to accommodate or encourage walking. 57. Platoona group of vehicles or pedestrians traveling together as a group, either voluntarily or involuntarily, because of traffic signal controls, geometrics, or other factors. 58. Principal Legendplace names, street names, and route numbers placed on guide signs. 59. Public Roadany road or street under the jurisdiction of and maintained by a public agency and open to public travel. 60. Raised Pavement Markera device with a height of at least 10 mm (0.4 in) mounted on or in a road surface that is intended to be used as a positioning guide or to supplement or substitute for pavement markings or to mark the position of a fire hydrant. 61. Regulatory Signa sign that gives notice to road users of traffic laws or regulations. 62. Retroreflectivitya property of a surface that allows a large portion of the light coming from a point source to be returned directly back to a point near its origin. 63. Right-of-Way [Assignment]the permitting of vehicles and/or pedestrians to proceed in a lawful manner in preference to other vehicles or pedestrians by the display of sign or signal indications. 64. Roadsee Roadway. 65. Roadwaythat portion of a highway improved, designed, or ordinarily used for vehicular travel and parking lanes, but exclusive of the sidewalk, berm, or shoulder even though such sidewalk, berm, or shoulder is used by persons riding bicycles or other human-powered vehicles. In the event a highway includes two or more separate roadways, the term roadway as used herein shall refer to any such roadway separately, but not to all such roadways collectively. 66. Roadway Networka geographical arrangement of intersecting roadways. 67. Road Usera vehicle operator, bicyclist, or pedestrian within the highway, including persons with disabilities.
Sect. 1A.13
2003 Edition
Page 1A-13
68. Roundabout Intersectiona circular intersection with yield control of all entering traffic, channelized approaches, and appropriate geometric curvature, such that travel speeds on the circulatory roadway are typically less than 50 km/h (30 mph). 69. Rumble Stripa series of intermittent, narrow, transverse areas of rough-textured, slightly raised, or depressed road surface that is installed to alert road users to unusual traffic conditions. 70. Rural Highwaya type of roadway normally characterized by lower volumes, higher speeds, fewer turning conflicts, and less conflict with pedestrians. 71. Shared Roadwaya roadway that is officially designated and marked as a bicycle route, but which is open to motor vehicle travel and upon which no bicycle lane is designated. 72. Shared-Use Patha bikeway outside the traveled way and physically separated from motorized vehicular traffic by an open space or barrier and either within the highway right-of-way or within an independent alignment. Shared-use paths are also used by pedestrians (including skaters, users of manual and motorized wheelchairs, and joggers) and other authorized motorized and nonmotorized users. 73. Sidewalkthat portion of a street between the curb line, or the lateral line of a roadway, and the adjacent property line or on easements of private property that is paved or improved and intended for use by pedestrians. 74. Signany traffic control device that is intended to communicate specific information to road users through a word or symbol legend. Signs do not include traffic control signals, pavement markings, delineators, or channelization devices. 75. Sign Assemblya group of signs, located on the same support(s), that supplement one another in conveying information to road users. 76. Sign Illuminationeither internal or external lighting that shows similar color by day or night. Street or highway lighting shall not be considered as meeting this definition. 77. Sign Legendall word messages, logos, and symbol designs that are intended to convey specific meanings. 78. Sign Panela separate panel or piece of material containing a word or symbol legend that is affixed to the face of a sign. 79. Speedspeed is defined based on the following classifications: (a) Advisory Speeda recommended speed for all vehicles operating on a section of highway and based on the highway design, operating characteristics, and conditions. (b) Average Speedthe summation of the instantaneous or spot-measured speeds at a specific location of vehicles divided by the number of vehicles observed. (c) Design Speeda selected speed used to determine the various geometric design features of a roadway. (d) 85th-Percentile SpeedThe speed at or below which 85 percent of the motor vehicles travel. (e) Operating Speeda speed at which a typical vehicle or the overall traffic operates. Operating speed might be defined with speed values such as the average, pace, or 85th-percentile speeds. (f) Pace Speedthe highest speed within a specific range of speeds that represents more vehicles than in any other like range of speed. The range of speeds typically used is 10 km/h or 10 mph. (g) Posted Speedthe speed limit determined by law and shown on Speed Limit signs. (h) Statutory Speeda speed limit established by legislative action that typically is applicable for highways with specified design, functional, jurisdictional and/or location characteristic and is not necessarily shown on Speed Limit signs. 80. Speed Limitthe maximum (or minimum) speed applicable to a section of highway as established by law. 81. Speed Measurement Markinga white transverse pavement marking placed on the roadway to assist the enforcement of speed regulations. 82. Speed Zonea section of highway with a speed limit that is established by law but which might be different from a legislatively specified statutory speed limit. 83. Stop Linea solid white pavement marking line extending across approach lanes to indicate the point at which a stop is intended or required to be made. 84. Streetsee Highway. 85. Temporary Traffic Control Zonean area of a highway where road user conditions are changed because of a work zone or incident by the use of temporary traffic control devices, flaggers, uniformed law enforcement officers, or other authorized personnel. 86. Trafficpedestrians, bicyclists, ridden or herded animals, vehicles, streetcars, and other conveyances either singularly or together while using any highway for purposes of travel.
Sect. 1A.13
Page 1A-14
2003 Edition
87. Traffic Control Devicea sign, signal, marking, or other device used to regulate, warn, or guide traffic, placed on, over, or adjacent to a street, highway, pedestrian facility, or shared-use path by authority of a public agency having jurisdiction. 88. Traffic Control Signal (Traffic Signal)any highway traffic signal by which traffic is alternately directed to stop and permitted to proceed. 89. Trainone or more locomotives coupled, with or without cars, that operates on rails or tracks and to which all other traffic must yield the right-of-way by law at highway-rail grade crossings. 90. Transverse Markingspavement markings that are generally placed perpendicular and across the flow of traffic such as shoulder markings, word and symbol markings, stop lines, crosswalk lines, speed measurement markings, parking space markings, and others. 91. Traveled Waythe portion of the roadway for the movement of vehicles, exclusive of the shoulders, berms, sidewalks, and parking lanes. 92. Urban Streeta type of street normally characterized by relatively low speeds, wide ranges of traffic volumes, narrower lanes, frequent intersections and driveways, significant pedestrian traffic, and more businesses and houses. 93. Vehicleevery device in, upon, or by which any person or property can be transported or drawn upon a highway, except trains and light rail transit operating in exclusive or semiexclusive alignments. Light rail transit operating in a mixed-use alignment, to which other traffic is not required to yield the right-of-way by law, is a vehicle. 94. Warning Signa sign that gives notice to road users of a situation that might not be readily apparent. 95. Warranta warrant describes threshold conditions to the engineer in evaluating the potential safety and operational benefits of traffic control devices and is based upon average or normal conditions. Warrants are not a substitute for engineering judgment. The fact that a warrant for a particular traffic control device is met is not conclusive justification for the installation of the device. 95. Wrong-Way Arrowa slender, elongated, white pavement marking arrow placed upstream from the ramp terminus to indicate the correct direction of traffic flow. Wrong-way arrows are intended primarily to warn wrong-way road users that they are going in the wrong direction.
2003 Edition
Page 1A-15
Standard Abbreviation
PM ALT AVE, AV BIKE BLVD CANT CB CNTR CIR CD CNG CT XING D DONT DR E E-BND EV EMER ENT EXPWY FT FM FRWY, FWY FRI HAZMAT HOV HWY RXR
Word Message
Maintenance Meter(s) Metric Ton Mile(s) Miles Per Hour Minute(s) Monday Morning / Late Night Normal North Northbound Parking Parkway Pedestrian Place Pounds Right Road Saturday Service Shoulder Slippery South Southbound Speed Street Sunday Telephone Temporary Terrace Thursday Tires With Lugs Tons of Weight Traffic Trail Travelers Tuesday Two-Way Intersection Two-Wheeled Vehicles US Numbered Route Vehicle(s) Warning Wednesday West Westbound Will Not
Standard Abbreviation
MAINT m t MI MPH MIN MON AM NORM N N-BND PKING PKWY PED PL LBS RHT RD SAT SERV SHLDR SLIP S S-BND SPD ST SUN PHONE TEMP TER THURS LUGS T TRAF TR TRAVLRS TUES 2-WAY CYCLES US VEH WARN WED W W-BND WONT
Sect. 1A.14
Page 1A-16
2003 Edition
Table 1A-2. Abbreviations That Are Acceptable Only with a Prompt Word
Word
Access Ahead Blocked Bridge Chemical Condition Congested Construction Downtown Exit Express Frontage Hazardous Interstate Local Lower Major Minor Oversized Prepare Pavement Quality Roadwork Route Township Turnpike Upper
Abbreviation
ACCS AHD BLKD BRDG CHEM COND CONG CONST DWNTN EX, EXT EXP FRNTG HAZ I LOC LWR MAJ MNR OVRSZ PREP PVMT QLTY RDWK RT, RTE TWNSHP TRNPK UPR
Prompt Word
Road Fog* Lane* [Name]* Spill Traffic* Traffic* Ahead Traffic Next* Lane Road Driving [Number] Traffic Level Accident Accident Load To Stop Wet* Air* Ahead [Distance] Best* Limits [Name]* Level
Sect. 1 A.14
2003 Edition
Page 1A-17
Intended Word
Accident Clears Delay Feeder Left Light (Traffic) Parking Pollution (Index) Reduce Stadium Warning
Common Misinterpretations
Access (Road) Colors Daily Federal Lane (Merge) Left Park Poll Red Standard Wrong
Sect. 1A.14
Part 1
General
2003 Edition
Page TC1-1
TABLES CHAPTER 1A. GENERAL Table 1A-1 Table 1A-2 Table 1A-3 Acceptable Abbreviations......................................................................................................1A-15 Abbreviations That Are Acceptable Only with a Prompt Word............................................1A-16 Unacceptable Abbreviations..................................................................................................1A-17
2003 Edition
Page 1A-1
Page 1A-2
2003 Edition
Standard: All symbols shall be unmistakably similar to or mirror images of the adopted symbol signs, all of which are shown in the Standard Highway Signs book (see Section 1A.11). Symbols and colors shall not be modified unless otherwise stated herein. All symbols and colors for signs not shown in the Standard Highway Signs book shall follow the procedures for experimentation and change described in Section 1A.10. Guidance: Aspects of a devices design should be modified only if there is a demonstrated need. Support: An example of modifying a devices design would be to modify the Side Road (W2-2) sign to show a second offset intersecting road. Option: Highway agencies may develop word message signs to notify road users of special regulations or to warn road users of a situation that might not be readily apparent. Unlike symbol signs and colors, new word message signs may be used without the need for experimentation. With the exception of symbols and colors, minor modifications in the specific design elements of a device may be made provided the essential appearance characteristics are preserved. Although the standard design of symbol signs cannot be modified, it may be appropriate to change the orientation of the symbol to better reflect the direction of travel.
2003 Edition
Page 1A-3
manual or supplement is required, that manual or supplement shall be in substantial conformance with the national Manual on Uniform Traffic Control Devices. 23 CFR 655.603 also states that traffic control devices on all streets and highways open to public travel in each State shall be in substantial conformance with standards issued or endorsed by the Federal Highway Administrator. Support: The Uniform Vehicle Code (see Section 1A.11) has the following provision in Section 15-104 for the adoption of a uniform Manual: (a)The [State Highway Agency] shall adopt a manual and specification for a uniform system of traffic control devices consistent with the provisions of this code for use upon highways within this State. Such uniform system shall correlate with and so far as possible conform to the system set forth in the most recent edition of the Manual on Uniform Traffic Control Devices for Streets and Highways, and other standards issued or endorsed by the Federal Highway Administrator. (b) The Manual adopted pursuant to subsection (a) shall have the force and effect of law. Additionally, States are encouraged to adopt Section 15-116 of the Uniform Vehicle Code, which states that, No person shall install or maintain in any area of private property used by the public any sign, signal, marking or other device intended to regulate, warn, or guide traffic unless it conforms with the State manual and specifications adopted under Section 15-104.
Page 1A-4
2003 Edition
2003 Edition
Page 1A-5
Figure 1A-1. Example of Process for Requesting and Conducting Experimentations for New Traffic Control Devices
FHWA Review
Yes
Sect. 1A.10
Page 1A-6
2003 Edition
H. An agreement to restore the site of the experiment to a condition that complies with the provisions of this Manual within 3 months following the end of the time period of the experiment. This agreement must also provide that the agency sponsoring the experimentation will terminate the experimentation at any time that it determines significant safety concerns are directly or indirectly attributable to the experimentation. The FHWAs Office of Transportation Operations has the right to terminate approval of the experimentation at any time if there is an indication of safety concerns. If, as a result of the experimentation, a request is made that this Manual be changed to include the device or application being experimented with, the device or application will be permitted to remain in place until an official rulemaking action has occurred. I. An agreement to provide semiannual progress reports for the duration of the experimentation, and an agreement to provide a copy of the final results of the experimentation to the FHWAs Office of Transportation Operations within 3 months following completion of the experimentation. The FHWAs Office of Transportation Operations has the right to terminate approval of the experimentation if reports are not provided in accordance with this schedule. Support: A change includes consideration of a new device to replace a present standard device, an additional device to be added to the list of standard devices, or a revision to a traffic control device application or placement criteria. Guidance: Requests for a change to this Manual should contain the following information: A. A statement indicating what change is proposed; B. Any illustration that would be helpful to understand the request; and C. Any supporting research data that is pertinent to the item to be reviewed. Support: Requests for interim approval include consideration of allowing interim use, pending official rulemaking, of a new traffic control device, a revision to the application or manner of use of an existing traffic control device, or a provision not specifically described in this Manual. If granted, interim approval will result in the traffic control device or application being placed into the next scheduled rulemaking process for revisions to this Manual. The device or application will be permitted to remain in place, under any conditions established in the interim approval, until an official rulemaking action has occurred. Interim approval is considered based on the results of successful experimentation, results of analytical or laboratory studies, and/or review of non-U.S. experience with a traffic control device or application. Interim approval considerations include an assessment of relative risks, benefits, and costs. Interim approval includes conditions that jurisdictions agree to comply with in order to use the traffic control device or application until an official rulemaking action has occurred. Guidance: The request for permission to place a traffic control device under interim approval should contain the following: A. A statement indicating the nature of the problem. B. A description of the proposed change to the traffic control device or application of the traffic control device, how it was developed, the manner in which it deviates from the standard, and how it is expected to be an improvement over existing standards. C. The location(s) where it will be used and any illustration that would be helpful to understand the traffic control device or use of the traffic control device. D. A legally-binding statement certifying that the concept of the traffic control device is not protected by a patent or copyright. (An example of a traffic control device concept would be countdown pedestrian signals in general. Ordinarily an entire general concept would not be patented or copyrighted, but if it were it would not be acceptable for interim approval unless the patent or copyright owner signs a waiver of rights acceptable to the FHWA. An example of a patented or copyrighted specific device within the general concept of countdown pedestrian signals would be a manufacturers design for its specific brand of countdown signal, including the design details of the housing or electronics that are unique to that manufacturers product. Interim approval of a specific patented or copyrighted product is not acceptable.) E. A detailed completed research or evaluation on this traffic control device. F. An agreement to restore the site(s) of the interim approval to a condition that complies with the provisions in this Manual within 3 months following the issuance of a final rule on this traffic control device. This agreement must also provide that the agency sponsoring the interim approval will terminate use of the device or application installed under the interim approval at any time that it determines significant safety concerns are directly or indirectly attributable to the device or application. The FHWAs Office of Transportation Operations has the right to terminate the interim approval at any time if there is an indication of safety concerns.
Sect. 1A.10
2003 Edition
Page 1A-7
Option: A State may submit a request for interim approval for all jurisdictions in that State, as long as the request contains the information listed in the Guidance above. Standard: Once an interim approval is granted to any jurisdiction for a particular traffic control device or application, subsequent jurisdictions shall be granted interim approval for that device or application by submitting a letter to the FHWA Office of Transportation Operations indicating they will abide by Item F above and the specific conditions contained in the original interim approval. A local jurisdiction using a traffic control device or application under an interim approval that was granted either directly to that jurisdiction or on a statewide basis based on the States request shall inform the State of the locations of such use. Support: A diagram indicating the process for incorporating new traffic control devices into this Manual is shown in Figure 1A-2. Procedures for revising this Manual are set out in the Federal Register of June 30, 1983 (48 FR 30145). For additional information concerning interpretations, experimentation, changes, or interim approvals, write to the FHWA, 400 Seventh Street, SW, HOTO, Washington, DC 20590, or visit the MUTCD website at http://mutcd.fhwa.dot.gov.
Page 1A-8
2003 Edition
Figure 1A-2. Example of Process for Incorporating New Traffic Control Devices into the MUTCD
Analytical or Laboratory Study Results and/or non-U.S. experimentation
FHWA Review
NO
NO
YES
NO
FHWA prepares Notice of Proposed Amendment Interim approval? FHWA publishes Notice of Proposed Amendment in Federal Register
YES FHWA notifies all States and distributes simplified application form for submission by jurisdictions
Jurisdictions apply for and receive Interim Approval FHWA reviews comments Jurisdictions deploy devices under Interim Approval conditions FHWA prepares Final Rule
No action required
NO
State Manuals must be in substantial conformance with the National MUTCD within 2 years as specified in 23 CFR 655.603(a)
Jurisdictions restore sites of Interim Approval to previous condition and/or comply with Final Rule
Sect. 1 A.11
2003 Edition
Page 1A-9
15. 16. 17. 18. 19. 20. 21. 22. 23. 24. 25. 26. 27. 28. 29. 30. 31. 32.
Manual of Transportation Engineering Studies, 1994 Edition (ITE) Pedestrian Traffic Control Signal Indications, 1985 Edition (ITE) Preemption of Traffic Signals at or Near Railroad Grade Crossings with Active Warning Devices, (ITE) Purchase Specification for Flashing and Steady Burn Warning Lights, 1981 Edition (ITE) School Trip Safety Program Guidelines, 1984 Edition (ITE) Traffic Detector Handbook, 1991 Edition (ITE) Traffic Engineering Handbook, 1999 Edition (ITE) Traffic Signal Lamps, 1980 Edition (ITE) Traffic Control Devices Handbook, 2001 Edition (ITE) Vehicle Traffic Control Signal Heads, Part 11985 Edition; Part 21998 Edition (ITE) Uniform Vehicle Code (UVC) and Model Traffic Ordinance, 2000 Edition (National Committee on Uniform Traffic Laws and Ordinances) Occupational Safety and Health Administration Regulations (Standards - 29 CFR), General Safety and Health Provisions - 1926.20, amended June 30, 1993, Occupational Safety and Health Administration (OSHA) Highway Capacity Manual, 2000 Edition (Transportation Research BoardTRB) Recommended Procedures for the Safety Performance Evaluation of Highway Features, (NCHRP Report 350), 1993 Edition (Transportation Research Board - TRB) Accessible Pedestrian Signals, A-37, 1998 Edition, U.S. Architectural and Transportation Barriers Compliance Board (The U.S. Access Board) Building a True CommunityFinal ReportPublic Rights-of-Way Access Advisory Committee (PRWAAC), 2001 Edition (The U.S. Access Board) The Americans with Disabilities Act Accessibility Guidelines for Buildings and Facilities (ADAAG), July 1998 Edition (The U.S. Access Board) Highway-Rail Intersection Architecture, U.S. Department of Transportation, Federal Railroad Administration (USDOT/FRA)
Page 1A-10
2003 Edition
Sect. 1A.13
2003 Edition
Page 1A-11
18. Crosswalk(a) that part of a roadway at an intersection included within the connections of the lateral lines of the sidewalks on opposite sides of the highway measured from the curbs or in the absence of curbs, from the edges of the traversable roadway, and in the absence of a sidewalk on one side of the roadway, the part of a roadway included within the extension of the lateral lines of the sidewalk at right angles to the centerline; (b) any portion of a roadway at an intersection or elsewhere distinctly indicated as a pedestrian crossing by lines on the surface, which may be supplemented by contrasting pavement texture, style, or color. 19. Crosswalk Lineswhite pavement marking lines that identify a crosswalk. 20. Delineatora retroreflective device mounted on the roadway surface or at the side of the roadway in a series to indicate the alignment of the roadway, especially at night or in adverse weather. 21. Detectablehaving a continuous edge within 150 mm (6 in) of the surface so that pedestrians who have visual disabilities can sense its presence and receive usable guidance information. 22. Dynamic Envelopethe clearance required for the train and its cargo overhang due to any combination of loading, lateral motion, or suspension failure. 23. Edge Line Markingswhite or yellow pavement marking lines that delineate the right or left edge(s) of a traveled way. 24. End-of-Roadway Markera device used to warn and alert road users of the end of a roadway in other than temporary traffic control zones. 25. Engineering Judgmentthe evaluation of available pertinent information, and the application of appropriate principles, Standards, Guidance, and practices as contained in this Manual and other sources, for the purpose of deciding upon the applicability, design, operation, or installation of a traffic control device. Engineering judgment shall be exercised by an engineer, or by an individual working under the supervision of an engineer, through the application of procedures and criteria established by the engineer. Documentation of engineering judgment is not required. 26. Engineering Studythe comprehensive analysis and evaluation of available pertinent information, and the application of appropriate principles, Standards, Guidance, and practices as contained in this Manual and other sources, for the purpose of deciding upon the applicability, design, operation, or installation of a traffic control device. An engineering study shall be performed by an engineer, or by an individual working under the supervision of an engineer, through the application of procedures and criteria established by the engineer. An engineering study shall be documented. 27. Expresswaya divided highway with partial control of access. 28. Flashingan operation in which a signal indication is turned on and off repetitively. 29. Freewaya divided highway with full control of access. 30. Guide Signa sign that shows route designations, destinations, directions, distances, services, points of interest, or other geographical, recreational, or cultural information. 31. High Occupancy Vehicle (HOV)a motor vehicle carrying at least two or more persons, including carpools, vanpools, and buses. 32. Highwaya general term for denoting a public way for purposes of travel by vehicular travel, including the entire area within the right-of-way. 33. Highway-Rail Grade Crossingthe general area where a highway and a railroads right-of-way cross at the same level, within which are included the railroad tracks, highway, and traffic control devices for highway traffic traversing that area. 34. Highway Traffic Signala power-operated traffic control device by which traffic is warned or directed to take some specific action. These devices do not include signals at toll plazas, poweroperated signs, illuminated pavement markers, warning lights (see Section 6F.78), or steady burning electric lamps. 35. HOV Laneany preferential lane designated for exclusive use by high-occupancy vehicles for all or part of a dayincluding a designated lane on a freeway, other highway, street, or independent roadway on a separate right-of-way. 36. Inherently Low Emission Vehicle (ILEV)any kind of vehicle that is certified by the U.S. Environmental Protection Agency and that because of inherent properties of the fuel system design, will not have significant evaporative emissions, even if its evaporative emission control system has failed. 37. Interchangea system of interconnecting roadways providing for traffic movement between two or more highways that do not intersect at grade. 38. Intermediate Interchangean interchange with an urban or rural route that is not a major or minor interchange as defined herein.
Sect. 1 A.13
Page 1A-12
2003 Edition
39. Intersection(a) the area embraced within the prolongation or connection of the lateral curb lines, or if none, the lateral boundary lines of the roadways of two highways that join one another at, or approximately at, right angles, or the area within which vehicles traveling on different highways that join at any other angle might come into conflict; (b) the junction of an alley or driveway with a roadway or highway shall not constitute an intersection. 40. Islanda defined area between traffic lanes for control of vehicular movements or for pedestrian refuge. It includes all end protection and approach treatments. Within an intersection area, a median or an outer separation is considered to be an island. 41. Lane Line Markingswhite pavement marking lines that delineate the separation of traffic lanes that have the same direction of travel on a roadway. 42. Lane-Use Control Signala signal face displaying indications to permit or prohibit the use of specific lanes of a roadway or to indicate the impending prohibition of such use. 43. Legendsee Sign Legend. 44. Logoa distinctive emblem, symbol, or trademark that identifies a product or service. 45. Longitudinal Markingspavement markings that are generally placed parallel and adjacent to the flow of traffic such as lane lines, centerlines, edge lines, channelizing lines, and others. 46. Major Interchangean interchange with another freeway or expressway, or an interchange with a high-volume multi-lane highway, principal urban arterial, or major rural route where the interchanging traffic is heavy or includes many road users unfamiliar with the area. 47. Major Streetthe street normally carrying the higher volume of vehicular traffic. 48. Medianthe area between two roadways of a divided highway measured from edge of traveled way to edge of traveled way. The median excludes turn lanes. The median width might be different between intersections, interchanges, and at opposite approaches of the same intersection. 49. Minor Interchangean interchange where traffic is local and very light, such as interchanges with land service access roads. Where the sum of the exit volumes is estimated to be lower than 100 vehicles per day in the design year, the interchange is classified as local. 50. Minor Streetthe street normally carrying the lower volume of vehicular traffic. 51. Object Markera device used to mark obstructions within or adjacent to the roadway. 52. Occupancy Requirementany restriction that regulates the use of a facility for any period of the day based on a specified number of persons in a vehicle. 53. Occupanta person driving or riding in a car, truck, bus, or other vehicle. 54. Paveda bituminous surface treatment, mixed bituminous concrete, or Portland cement concrete roadway surface that has both a structural (weight bearing) and a sealing purpose for the roadway. 55. Pedestriana person afoot, in a wheelchair, on skates, or on a skateboard. 56. Pedestrian Facilitiesa general term denoting improvements and provisions made to accommodate or encourage walking. 57. Platoona group of vehicles or pedestrians traveling together as a group, either voluntarily or involuntarily, because of traffic signal controls, geometrics, or other factors. 58. Principal Legendplace names, street names, and route numbers placed on guide signs. 59. Public Roadany road or street under the jurisdiction of and maintained by a public agency and open to public travel. 60. Raised Pavement Markera device with a height of at least 10 mm (0.4 in) mounted on or in a road surface that is intended to be used as a positioning guide or to supplement or substitute for pavement markings or to mark the position of a fire hydrant. 61. Regulatory Signa sign that gives notice to road users of traffic laws or regulations. 62. Retroreflectivitya property of a surface that allows a large portion of the light coming from a point source to be returned directly back to a point near its origin. 63. Right-of-Way [Assignment]the permitting of vehicles and/or pedestrians to proceed in a lawful manner in preference to other vehicles or pedestrians by the display of sign or signal indications. 64. Roadsee Roadway. 65. Roadwaythat portion of a highway improved, designed, or ordinarily used for vehicular travel and parking lanes, but exclusive of the sidewalk, berm, or shoulder even though such sidewalk, berm, or shoulder is used by persons riding bicycles or other human-powered vehicles. In the event a highway includes two or more separate roadways, the term roadway as used herein shall refer to any such roadway separately, but not to all such roadways collectively. 66. Roadway Networka geographical arrangement of intersecting roadways. 67. Road Usera vehicle operator, bicyclist, or pedestrian within the highway, including persons with disabilities.
Sect. 1A.13
2003 Edition
Page 1A-13
68. Roundabout Intersectiona circular intersection with yield control of all entering traffic, channelized approaches, and appropriate geometric curvature, such that travel speeds on the circulatory roadway are typically less than 50 km/h (30 mph). 69. Rumble Stripa series of intermittent, narrow, transverse areas of rough-textured, slightly raised, or depressed road surface that is installed to alert road users to unusual traffic conditions. 70. Rural Highwaya type of roadway normally characterized by lower volumes, higher speeds, fewer turning conflicts, and less conflict with pedestrians. 71. Shared Roadwaya roadway that is officially designated and marked as a bicycle route, but which is open to motor vehicle travel and upon which no bicycle lane is designated. 72. Shared-Use Patha bikeway outside the traveled way and physically separated from motorized vehicular traffic by an open space or barrier and either within the highway right-of-way or within an independent alignment. Shared-use paths are also used by pedestrians (including skaters, users of manual and motorized wheelchairs, and joggers) and other authorized motorized and nonmotorized users. 73. Sidewalkthat portion of a street between the curb line, or the lateral line of a roadway, and the adjacent property line or on easements of private property that is paved or improved and intended for use by pedestrians. 74. Signany traffic control device that is intended to communicate specific information to road users through a word or symbol legend. Signs do not include traffic control signals, pavement markings, delineators, or channelization devices. 75. Sign Assemblya group of signs, located on the same support(s), that supplement one another in conveying information to road users. 76. Sign Illuminationeither internal or external lighting that shows similar color by day or night. Street or highway lighting shall not be considered as meeting this definition. 77. Sign Legendall word messages, logos, and symbol designs that are intended to convey specific meanings. 78. Sign Panela separate panel or piece of material containing a word or symbol legend that is affixed to the face of a sign. 79. Speedspeed is defined based on the following classifications: (a) Advisory Speeda recommended speed for all vehicles operating on a section of highway and based on the highway design, operating characteristics, and conditions. (b) Average Speedthe summation of the instantaneous or spot-measured speeds at a specific location of vehicles divided by the number of vehicles observed. (c) Design Speeda selected speed used to determine the various geometric design features of a roadway. (d) 85th-Percentile SpeedThe speed at or below which 85 percent of the motor vehicles travel. (e) Operating Speeda speed at which a typical vehicle or the overall traffic operates. Operating speed might be defined with speed values such as the average, pace, or 85th-percentile speeds. (f) Pace Speedthe highest speed within a specific range of speeds that represents more vehicles than in any other like range of speed. The range of speeds typically used is 10 km/h or 10 mph. (g) Posted Speedthe speed limit determined by law and shown on Speed Limit signs. (h) Statutory Speeda speed limit established by legislative action that typically is applicable for highways with specified design, functional, jurisdictional and/or location characteristic and is not necessarily shown on Speed Limit signs. 80. Speed Limitthe maximum (or minimum) speed applicable to a section of highway as established by law. 81. Speed Measurement Markinga white transverse pavement marking placed on the roadway to assist the enforcement of speed regulations. 82. Speed Zonea section of highway with a speed limit that is established by law but which might be different from a legislatively specified statutory speed limit. 83. Stop Linea solid white pavement marking line extending across approach lanes to indicate the point at which a stop is intended or required to be made. 84. Streetsee Highway. 85. Temporary Traffic Control Zonean area of a highway where road user conditions are changed because of a work zone or incident by the use of temporary traffic control devices, flaggers, uniformed law enforcement officers, or other authorized personnel. 86. Trafficpedestrians, bicyclists, ridden or herded animals, vehicles, streetcars, and other conveyances either singularly or together while using any highway for purposes of travel.
Sect. 1A.13
Page 1A-14
2003 Edition
87. Traffic Control Devicea sign, signal, marking, or other device used to regulate, warn, or guide traffic, placed on, over, or adjacent to a street, highway, pedestrian facility, or shared-use path by authority of a public agency having jurisdiction. 88. Traffic Control Signal (Traffic Signal)any highway traffic signal by which traffic is alternately directed to stop and permitted to proceed. 89. Trainone or more locomotives coupled, with or without cars, that operates on rails or tracks and to which all other traffic must yield the right-of-way by law at highway-rail grade crossings. 90. Transverse Markingspavement markings that are generally placed perpendicular and across the flow of traffic such as shoulder markings, word and symbol markings, stop lines, crosswalk lines, speed measurement markings, parking space markings, and others. 91. Traveled Waythe portion of the roadway for the movement of vehicles, exclusive of the shoulders, berms, sidewalks, and parking lanes. 92. Urban Streeta type of street normally characterized by relatively low speeds, wide ranges of traffic volumes, narrower lanes, frequent intersections and driveways, significant pedestrian traffic, and more businesses and houses. 93. Vehicleevery device in, upon, or by which any person or property can be transported or drawn upon a highway, except trains and light rail transit operating in exclusive or semiexclusive alignments. Light rail transit operating in a mixed-use alignment, to which other traffic is not required to yield the right-of-way by law, is a vehicle. 94. Warning Signa sign that gives notice to road users of a situation that might not be readily apparent. 95. Warranta warrant describes threshold conditions to the engineer in evaluating the potential safety and operational benefits of traffic control devices and is based upon average or normal conditions. Warrants are not a substitute for engineering judgment. The fact that a warrant for a particular traffic control device is met is not conclusive justification for the installation of the device. 95. Wrong-Way Arrowa slender, elongated, white pavement marking arrow placed upstream from the ramp terminus to indicate the correct direction of traffic flow. Wrong-way arrows are intended primarily to warn wrong-way road users that they are going in the wrong direction.
2003 Edition
Page 1A-15
Standard Abbreviation
PM ALT AVE, AV BIKE BLVD CANT CB CNTR CIR CD CNG CT XING D DONT DR E E-BND EV EMER ENT EXPWY FT FM FRWY, FWY FRI HAZMAT HOV HWY RXR
Word Message
Maintenance Meter(s) Metric Ton Mile(s) Miles Per Hour Minute(s) Monday Morning / Late Night Normal North Northbound Parking Parkway Pedestrian Place Pounds Right Road Saturday Service Shoulder Slippery South Southbound Speed Street Sunday Telephone Temporary Terrace Thursday Tires With Lugs Tons of Weight Traffic Trail Travelers Tuesday Two-Way Intersection Two-Wheeled Vehicles US Numbered Route Vehicle(s) Warning Wednesday West Westbound Will Not
Standard Abbreviation
MAINT m t MI MPH MIN MON AM NORM N N-BND PKING PKWY PED PL LBS RHT RD SAT SERV SHLDR SLIP S S-BND SPD ST SUN PHONE TEMP TER THURS LUGS T TRAF TR TRAVLRS TUES 2-WAY CYCLES US VEH WARN WED W W-BND WONT
Sect. 1A.14
Page 1A-16
2003 Edition
Table 1A-2. Abbreviations That Are Acceptable Only with a Prompt Word
Word
Access Ahead Blocked Bridge Chemical Condition Congested Construction Downtown Exit Express Frontage Hazardous Interstate Local Lower Major Minor Oversized Prepare Pavement Quality Roadwork Route Township Turnpike Upper
Abbreviation
ACCS AHD BLKD BRDG CHEM COND CONG CONST DWNTN EX, EXT EXP FRNTG HAZ I LOC LWR MAJ MNR OVRSZ PREP PVMT QLTY RDWK RT, RTE TWNSHP TRNPK UPR
Prompt Word
Road Fog* Lane* [Name]* Spill Traffic* Traffic* Ahead Traffic Next* Lane Road Driving [Number] Traffic Level Accident Accident Load To Stop Wet* Air* Ahead [Distance] Best* Limits [Name]* Level
Sect. 1 A.14
2003 Edition
Page 1A-17
Intended Word
Accident Clears Delay Feeder Left Light (Traffic) Parking Pollution (Index) Reduce Stadium Warning
Common Misinterpretations
Access (Road) Colors Daily Federal Lane (Merge) Left Park Poll Red Standard Wrong
Sect. 1A.14
Part 2
Signs
2003 Edition
Page TC2-1
Page TC2-2
2003 Edition
Section 2B.21 Section 2B.22 Section 2B.23 Section 2B.24 Section 2B.25 Section 2B.26 Section 2B.27 Section 2B.28 Section 2B.29 Section 2B.30 Section 2B.31 Section 2B.32 Section 2B.33 Section 2B.34 Section 2B.35 Section 2B.36 Section 2B.37 Section 2B.38 Section 2B.39 Section 2B.40 Section 2B.41 Section 2B.42 Section 2B.43 Section 2B.44 Section 2B.45 Section 2B.46 Section 2B.47 Section 2B.48 Section 2B.49 Section 2B.50 Section 2B.51 Section 2B.52 Section 2B.53 Section 2B.54 Section 2C.01 Section 2C.02 Section 2C.03 Section 2C.04 Section 2C.05 Section 2C.06 Section 2C.07 Section 2C.08 Section 2C.09 Section 2C.10 Section 2C.11 Section 2C.12 Section 2C.13 Section 2C.14 Section 2C.15 Section 2C.16 Section 2C.17
Mandatory Movement Lane Control Signs (R3-5, R3-5a, and R3-7) ..................................2B-14 Optional Movement Lane Control Sign (R3-6) ....................................................................2B-15 Advance Intersection Lane Control Signs (R3-8 Series) ......................................................2B-16 Two-Way Left Turn Only Signs (R3-9a, R3-9b)...................................................................2B-16 Reversible Lane Control Signs (R3-9d, R3-9f through R3-9i) .............................................2B-17 Preferential Only Lane Signs (R3-10 through R3-15) ..........................................................2B-19 Preferential Only Lanes for High-Occupancy Vehicles (HOVs)...........................................2B-23 Preferential Only Lane Sign Applications and Placement ....................................................2B-24 DO NOT PASS Sign (R4-1)..................................................................................................2B-26 PASS WITH CARE Sign (R4-2)...........................................................................................2B-26 SLOWER TRAFFIC KEEP RIGHT Sign (R4-3) .................................................................2B-26 Slow Moving Traffic Lane Signs (R4-5, R4-6).....................................................................2B-26 Keep Right and Keep Left Signs (R4-7, R4-8) .....................................................................2B-26 DO NOT ENTER Sign (R5-1) ..............................................................................................2B-28 WRONG WAY Sign (R5-1a).................................................................................................2B-28 Selective Exclusion Signs......................................................................................................2B-29 ONE WAY Signs (R6-1, R6-2)..............................................................................................2B-30 Divided Highway Crossing Signs (R6-3, R6-3a)..................................................................2B-30 Parking, Standing, and Stopping Signs (R7 and R8 Series) .................................................2B-36 Design of Parking, Standing, and Stopping Signs ................................................................2B-36 Placement of Parking, Stopping, and Standing Signs ...........................................................2B-38 Emergency Restriction Signs (R8-4, R8-7, R8-8).................................................................2B-39 WALK ON LEFT FACING TRAFFIC and No Hitchhiking Signs (R9-1, R9-4, R9-4a) ....2B-39 Pedestrian Crossing Signs (R9-2, R9-3) ...............................................................................2B-39 Traffic Signal Signs (R10-1 through R10-21).......................................................................2B-41 Photo Enforced Signs (R10-18, R10-19) ..............................................................................2B-43 KEEP OFF MEDIAN Sign (R11-1)......................................................................................2B-43 ROAD CLOSED Sign (R11-2) and LOCAL TRAFFIC ONLY Signs (R11-3 Series, R11-4) ..2B-43 Weight Limit Signs (R12-1 through R12-5) .........................................................................2B-45 Weigh Station Signs (R13 Series) .........................................................................................2B-45 TRUCK ROUTE Sign (R14-1) .............................................................................................2B-46 Hazardous Material Signs (R14-2, R14-3)............................................................................2B-46 National Network Signs (R14-4, R14-5)...............................................................................2B-46 Other Regulatory Signs .........................................................................................................2B-46 Function of Warning Signs ......................................................................................................2C-1 Application of Warning Signs .................................................................................................2C-1 Design of Warning Signs .........................................................................................................2C-1 Size of Warning Signs .............................................................................................................2C-1 Placement of Warning Signs....................................................................................................2C-3 Horizontal Alignment Signs (W1-1 through W1-5, W1-11, W1-15)......................................2C-4 Combination Horizontal Alignment/Advisory Speed Signs (W1-1a, W1-2a)........................2C-7 Combination Horizontal Alignment/Intersection Sign (W1-10) .............................................2C-8 One-Direction Large Arrow Sign (W1-6) ...............................................................................2C-8 Chevron Alignment Sign (W1-8) ............................................................................................2C-8 Truck Rollover Warning Sign (W1-13) ...................................................................................2C-9 Hill Signs (W7-1, W7-1a, W7-1b) ..........................................................................................2C-9 Truck Escape Ramp Signs (W7-4 Series) .............................................................................2C-10 HILL BLOCKS VIEW Sign (W7-6).....................................................................................2C-10 ROAD NARROWS Sign (W5-1) ..........................................................................................2C-10 NARROW BRIDGE Sign (W5-2).........................................................................................2C-11 ONE LANE BRIDGE Sign (W5-3) ......................................................................................2C-12
2003 Edition
Page TC2-3
Section 2C.18 Section 2C.19 Section 2C.20 Section 2C.21 Section 2C.22 Section 2C.23 Section 2C.24 Section 2C.25 Section 2C.26 Section 2C.27 Section 2C.28 Section 2C.29 Section 2C.30 Section 2C.31 Section 2C.32 Section 2C.33 Section 2C.34 Section 2C.35 Section 2C.36 Section 2C.37 Section 2C.38 Section 2C.39 Section 2C.40 Section 2C.41 Section 2C.42 Section 2C.43 Section 2C.44 Section 2C.45 Section 2C.46 Section 2C.47 Section 2C.48 Section 2C.49 Section 2C.50 Section 2C.51 Section 2C.52 Section 2C.53 Section 2D.01 Section 2D.02 Section 2D.03 Section 2D.04 Section 2D.05 Section 2D.06 Section 2D.07 Section 2D.08 Section 2D.09 Section 2D.10 Section 2D.11 Section 2D.12 Section 2D.13 Section 2D.14
Divided Highway (Road) Sign (W6-1) .................................................................................2C-12 Divided Highway (Road) Ends Sign (W6-2) ........................................................................2C-12 Double Arrow Sign (W12-1) .................................................................................................2C-12 DEAD END/NO OUTLET Signs (W14-1, W14-1a, W14-2, W14-2a)................................2C-12 Low Clearance Signs (W12-2 and W12-2p) .........................................................................2C-13 BUMP and DIP Signs (W8-1, W8-2)....................................................................................2C-13 SPEED HUMP Sign (W17-1) ...............................................................................................2C-13 PAVEMENT ENDS Sign (W8-3)..........................................................................................2C-13 Shoulder Signs (W8-4, W8-9, and W8-9a) ...........................................................................2C-14 Slippery When Wet Sign (W8-5)...........................................................................................2C-15 BRIDGE ICES BEFORE ROAD Sign (W8-13)...................................................................2C-15 Advance Traffic Control Signs (W3-1, W3-2, W3-3, W3-4) ................................................2C-15 Speed Reduction Signs (W3-5, W3-5a) ................................................................................2C-15 Merge Signs (W4-1, W4-5) ...................................................................................................2C-16 Added Lane Signs (W4-3, W4-6)..........................................................................................2C-17 Lane Ends Signs (W4-2, W9-1, W9-2) .................................................................................2C-17 Two-Way Traffic Sign (W6-3)...............................................................................................2C-17 NO PASSING ZONE Sign (W14-3) .....................................................................................2C-18 Advisory Exit, Ramp, and Curve Speed Signs (W13-2, W13-3, W13-5) ............................2C-18 Intersection Warning Signs (W2-1 through W2-6) ...............................................................2C-18 Two-Direction Large Arrow Sign (W1-7) .............................................................................2C-20 Traffic Signal Signs (W25-1, W25-2) ...................................................................................2C-20 Vehicular Traffic Signs (W8-6, W11-1, W11-5, W11-5a, W11-8, W11-10, W11-11, W11-12, W11-14) ...................................................................................................................2C-21 Nonvehicular Signs (W11-2, W11-3, W11-4, W11-6, W11-7, W11-9) ...............................2C-21 Playground Sign (W15-1)......................................................................................................2C-23 Use of Supplemental Plaques ................................................................................................2C-23 Design of Supplemental Plaques ...........................................................................................2C-23 Distance Plaques (W16-2 Series, W16-3 Series, W16-4, W7-3a) ........................................2C-23 Advisory Speed Plaque (W13-1)...........................................................................................2C-24 Supplemental Arrow Plaques (W16-5p, W16-6p, W16-7p)..................................................2C-24 Hill-Related Plaques (W7-2 Series, W7-3 Series) ................................................................2C-24 Advance Street Name Plaque (W16-8, W16-8a) ..................................................................2C-24 CROSS TRAFFIC DOES NOT STOP Plaque (W4-4p) .......................................................2C-24 SHARE THE ROAD Plaque (W16-1) ..................................................................................2C-25 High-Occupancy Vehicle (HOV) Plaque (W16-11) ..............................................................2C-25 PHOTO ENFORCED Plaque (W16-10) ...............................................................................2C-25 Scope of Conventional Road Guide Sign Standards...............................................................2D-1 Application ..............................................................................................................................2D-1 Color, Retroreflection, and Illumination .................................................................................2D-1 Size of Signs............................................................................................................................2D-1 Lettering Style .........................................................................................................................2D-2 Size of Lettering ......................................................................................................................2D-2 Amount of Legend...................................................................................................................2D-3 Arrows .....................................................................................................................................2D-3 Numbered Highway Systems ..................................................................................................2D-4 Route Signs and Auxiliary Signs ............................................................................................2D-4 Design of Route Signs.............................................................................................................2D-4 Design of Route Sign Auxiliaries............................................................................................2D-6 Junction Auxiliary Sign (M2-1) ..............................................................................................2D-6 Combination Junction Sign (M2-2) ........................................................................................2D-6
Page TC2-4
2003 Edition
Section 2D.15 Section 2D.16 Section 2D.17 Section 2D.18 Section 2D.19 Section 2D.20 Section 2D.21 Section 2D.22 Section 2D.23 Section 2D.24 Section 2D.25 Section 2D.26 Section 2D.27 Section 2D.28 Section 2D.29 Section 2D.30 Section 2D.31 Section 2D.32 Section 2D.33 Section 2D.34 Section 2D.35 Section 2D.36 Section 2D.37 Section 2D.38 Section 2D.39 Section 2D.40 Section 2D.41 Section 2D.42 Section 2D.43 Section 2D.44 Section 2D.45 Section 2D.46 Section 2D.47 Section 2D.48 Section 2D.49 Section 2D.50 Section 2D.51 Section 2D.52 Section 2E.01 Section 2E.02 Section 2E.03 Section 2E.04 Section 2E.05 Section 2E.06 Section 2E.07 Section 2E.08 Section 2E.09 Section 2E.10 Section 2E.11 Section 2E.12
Cardinal Direction Auxiliary Signs (M3-1 through M3-4).....................................................2D-6 Auxiliary Signs for Alternative Routes (M4 Series)...............................................................2D-7 ALTERNATE Auxiliary Signs (M4-1, M4-1a).......................................................................2D-7 BY-PASS Auxiliary Sign (M4-2) ............................................................................................2D-7 BUSINESS Auxiliary Sign (M4-3) .........................................................................................2D-7 TRUCK Auxiliary Sign (M4-4) ..............................................................................................2D-8 TO Auxiliary Sign (M4-5).......................................................................................................2D-8 END Auxiliary Sign (M4-6)....................................................................................................2D-8 TEMPORARY Auxiliary Signs (M4-7, M4-7a) .....................................................................2D-8 Temporary Detour and Auxiliary Signs ..................................................................................2D-8 Advance Turn Arrow Auxiliary Signs (M5-1, M5-2) .............................................................2D-8 Directional Arrow Auxiliary Signs (M6 Series)......................................................................2D-8 Route Sign Assemblies............................................................................................................2D-9 Junction Assembly...................................................................................................................2D-9 Advance Route Turn Assembly.............................................................................................2D-13 Directional Assembly ............................................................................................................2D-13 Confirming or Reassurance Assemblies................................................................................2D-14 Trailblazer Assembly.............................................................................................................2D-14 Destination and Distance Signs.............................................................................................2D-14 Destination Signs (D1 Series) ...............................................................................................2D-15 Location of Destination Signs ...............................................................................................2D-15 Distance Signs (D2 Series)....................................................................................................2D-16 Location of Distance Signs ...................................................................................................2D-17 Street Name Sign (D3-1).......................................................................................................2D-17 Advance Street Name Signs (D3-2) ......................................................................................2D-19 Parking Area Sign (D4-1)......................................................................................................2D-19 PARK & RIDE Sign (D4-2)..................................................................................................2D-20 Rest Area Signs (D5 Series)..................................................................................................2D-20 Scenic Area Signs (D6 Series) ..............................................................................................2D-20 Weigh Station Signing (D8 Series) .......................................................................................2D-20 General Service Signs (D9 Series)........................................................................................2D-21 Reference Location Signs (D10-1 through D10-3) and Intermediate Reference Location Signs (D10-1a through D10-3a) ............................................................................2D-25 Traffic Signal Speed Sign (I1-1) ...........................................................................................2D-27 General Information Signs (I Series) ....................................................................................2D-28 Signing of Named Highways ................................................................................................2D-29 Trail Signs .............................................................................................................................2D-29 Crossover Signs (D13 Series) ...............................................................................................2D-29 National Scenic Byways Signs (D6-4, D6-4a)......................................................................2D-30 Scope of Freeway and Expressway Guide Sign Standards .....................................................2E-1 Freeway and Expressway Signing Principles ..........................................................................2E-1 General.....................................................................................................................................2E-1 Color of Guide Signs ...............................................................................................................2E-1 Retroreflection or Illumination ................................................................................................2E-2 Characteristics of Urban Signing.............................................................................................2E-2 Characteristics of Rural Signing..............................................................................................2E-2 Memorial Highway Signing.....................................................................................................2E-3 Amount of Legend on Guide Signs .........................................................................................2E-3 Number of Signs at an Overhead Installation and Sign Spreading.........................................2E-3 Pull-Through Signs ..................................................................................................................2E-4 Designation of Destinations.....................................................................................................2E-4
2003 Edition
Page TC2-5
Section 2E.13 Section 2E.14 Section 2E.15 Section 2E.16 Section 2E.17 Section 2E.18 Section 2E.19 Section 2E.20 Section 2E.21 Section 2E.22 Section 2E.23 Section 2E.24 Section 2E.25 Section 2E.26 Section 2E.27 Section 2E.28 Section 2E.29 Section 2E.30 Section 2E.31 Section 2E.32 Section 2E.33 Section 2E.34 Section 2E.35 Section 2E.36 Section 2E.37 Section 2E.38 Section 2E.39 Section 2E.40 Section 2E.41 Section 2E.42 Section 2E.43 Section 2E.44 Section 2E.45 Section 2E.46 Section 2E.47 Section 2E.48 Section 2E.49 Section 2E.50 Section 2E.51 Section 2E.52 Section 2E.53 Section 2E.54 Section 2E.55 Section 2E.56 Section 2E.57 Section 2E.58 Section 2E.59 Section 2F.01 Section 2F.02 Section 2F.03 Section 2F.04
Size and Style of Letters and Signs .........................................................................................2E-5 Interline and Edge Spacing......................................................................................................2E-5 Sign Borders ............................................................................................................................2E-6 Abbreviations ...........................................................................................................................2E-7 Symbols....................................................................................................................................2E-7 Arrows for Interchange Guide Signs .......................................................................................2E-9 Diagrammatic Signs.................................................................................................................2E-9 Signing for Interchange Lane Drops .....................................................................................2E-14 Changeable Message Signs....................................................................................................2E-20 Overhead Sign Installations ...................................................................................................2E-20 Lateral Offset .........................................................................................................................2E-22 Guide Sign Classification ......................................................................................................2E-22 Route Signs and Trailblazer Assemblies ...............................................................................2E-22 Signs for Intersections at Grade.............................................................................................2E-23 Interchange Guide Signs........................................................................................................2E-23 Interchange Exit Numbering..................................................................................................2E-24 Interchange Classification......................................................................................................2E-27 Advance Guide Signs.............................................................................................................2E-27 Next Exit Supplemental Signs ...............................................................................................2E-27 Other Supplemental Guide Signs ..........................................................................................2E-30 Exit Direction Signs...............................................................................................................2E-33 Exit Gore Signs......................................................................................................................2E-33 Post-Interchange Signs ..........................................................................................................2E-34 Distance Signs........................................................................................................................2E-34 Interchange Sequence Signs ..................................................................................................2E-35 Community Interchanges Identification Signs ......................................................................2E-38 NEXT X EXITS Sign ............................................................................................................2E-38 Signing by Type of Interchange.............................................................................................2E-38 Freeway-to-Freeway Interchange...........................................................................................2E-38 Cloverleaf Interchange...........................................................................................................2E-45 Cloverleaf Interchange with Collector-Distributor Roadways ..............................................2E-45 Partial Cloverleaf Interchange ...............................................................................................2E-46 Diamond Interchange.............................................................................................................2E-46 Diamond Interchange in Urban Area.....................................................................................2E-46 Closely Spaced Interchanges .................................................................................................2E-46 Minor Interchange..................................................................................................................2E-47 Signing of Approaches and Connecting Roadways...............................................................2E-47 Wrong-Way Traffic Control at Interchange Ramps...............................................................2E-54 General Service Signs............................................................................................................2E-54 Rest and Scenic Area Signs ...................................................................................................2E-58 Tourist Information and Welcome Center Signs ...................................................................2E-60 Reference Location Signs and Enhanced Reference Location Signs (D10-4, D10-5) .........2E-61 Miscellaneous Guide Signs....................................................................................................2E-62 Radio Information Signing ....................................................................................................2E-63 Carpool and Ridesharing Signing..........................................................................................2E-63 Weigh Station Signing ...........................................................................................................2E-64 Preferential Only Lane Signs.................................................................................................2E-64 Eligibility..................................................................................................................................2F-1 Application...............................................................................................................................2F-2 Logos and Logo Panels............................................................................................................2F-2 Number and Size of Logos and Signs .....................................................................................2F-2
Page TC2-6
2003 Edition
Section 2F.05 Section 2F.06 Section 2F.07 Section 2F.08 Section 2F.09 Section 2F.10 Section 2G.01 Section 2G.02 Section 2G.03 Section 2G.04 Section 2G.05 Section 2G.06 Section 2G.07 Section 2H.01 Section 2H.02 Section 2H.03 Section 2H.04 Section 2H.05 Section 2H.06 Section 2H.07 Section 2H.08 Section 2H.09 CHAPTER 2I. Section 2I.01 Section 2I.02 Section 2I.03 Section 2I.04 Section 2I.05 Section 2I.06 Section 2I.07 Section 2I.08 Section 2I.09 FIGURES
Size of Lettering.......................................................................................................................2F-3 Signs at Interchanges ...............................................................................................................2F-5 Single-Exit Interchanges ..........................................................................................................2F-5 Double-Exit Interchanges ........................................................................................................2F-5 Signs at Intersections ...............................................................................................................2F-5 Signing Policy ..........................................................................................................................2F-6 Purpose and Application..........................................................................................................2G-1 Design......................................................................................................................................2G-1 Style and Size of Lettering......................................................................................................2G-2 Arrangement and Size of Signs...............................................................................................2G-2 Advance Signs .........................................................................................................................2G-2 Sign Locations.........................................................................................................................2G-5 State Policy..............................................................................................................................2G-5 Scope .......................................................................................................................................2H-1 Application of Recreational and Cultural Interest Area Signs................................................2H-1 Regulatory and Warning Signs................................................................................................2H-1 General Design Requirements for Recreational and Cultural Interest Area Symbol Signs ...2H-1 Symbol Sign Sizes...................................................................................................................2H-3 Use of Educational Plaques.....................................................................................................2H-3 Use of Prohibitive Slash ..........................................................................................................2H-3 Placement of Recreational and Cultural Interest Area Symbol Signs ....................................2H-3 Destination Guide Signs........................................................................................................2H-12 EMERGENCY MANAGEMENT SIGNING Emergency Management...........................................................................................................2I-1 Design of Emergency Management Signs................................................................................2I-1 EVACUATION ROUTE Sign (EM-1) ......................................................................................2I-1 AREA CLOSED Sign (EM-2)..................................................................................................2I-2 TRAFFIC CONTROL POINT Sign (EM-3) ............................................................................2I-2 MAINTAIN TOP SAFE SPEED Sign (EM-4).........................................................................2I-3 ROAD (AREA) USE PERMIT REQUIRED FOR THRU TRAFFIC Sign (EM-5)................2I-4 Emergency Aid Center Signs (EM-6 Series) ............................................................................2I-4 Shelter Directional Signs (EM-7 Series) ..................................................................................2I-4
CHAPTER 2A. GENERAL Figure 2A-1 Figure 2A-2 Figure 2B-1 Figure 2B-2 Figure 2B-3 Figure 2B-4 Figure 2B-5 Figure 2B-6 Figure 2B-7 Figure 2B-8 Examples of Heights and Lateral Locations of Signs for Typical Installations .....................2A-9 Examples of Locations for Some Typical Signs at Intersections..........................................2A-10 STOP, YIELD, Speed Limit, FINES HIGHER, and Photo Enforcement Signs .....................2B-9 Unsignalized Pedestrian Crosswalk Signs.............................................................................2B-11 Speed Limit and Turn Prohibition Signs ...............................................................................2B-12 Intersection Lane Control Signs ............................................................................................2B-15 Center and Reversible Lane Control Signs ...........................................................................2B-16 Location of Reversible Two-Way Left-Turn Signs ...............................................................2B-18 Examples of Preferential Only Lane Signs ...........................................................................2B-21 Passing, Keep Right, and Truck Lane Signs .........................................................................2B-27
2003 Edition
Page TC2-7
Figure 2B-9 Figure 2B-10 Figure 2B-11 Figure 2B-12 Figure 2B-13 Figure 2B-14 Figure 2B-15 Figure 2B-16 Figure 2B-17 Figure 2B-18 Figure 2B-19 Figure 2B-20 Figure 2B-21 Figure 2B-22 Figure 2C-1 Figure 2C-2 Figure 2C-3 Figure 2C-4 Figure 2C-5 Figure 2C-6 Figure 2C-7 Figure 2C-8 Figure 2C-9 Figure 2C-10 Figure 2C-11 Figure 2D-1 Figure 2D-2 Figure 2D-3 Figure 2D-4 Figure 2D-5 Figure 2D-6 Figure 2D-6 Figure 2D-6 Figure 2D-7 Figure 2D-8 Figure 2D-9 Figure 2D-10 Figure 2D-11 Figure 2D-12 Figure 2D-13 Figure 2D-14
Traffic Prohibition Signs .......................................................................................................2B-28 Example of Wrong-Way Signing for a Divided Highway with a Median Width of 9 m (30 ft) or Greater........................................................................................................2B-29 ONE WAY and Divided Highway Crossing Signs................................................................2B-30 Examples of Locations of ONE WAY Signs.........................................................................2A-31 Examples of ONE WAY Signing for Divided Highways with Medians of 9 m (30 ft) or Greater ............................................................................................................2A-33 Examples of ONE WAY Signing for Divided Highways with Medians Less Than 9 m (30 ft)............................................................................................................2A-34 Examples of ONE WAY Signing for Divided Highways with Medians Less Than 9 m (30 ft) and Separated Left-Turn Lanes .........................................................2B-35 No Parking Signs (R7 Series)................................................................................................2B-37 No Parking Signs (R8 Series)................................................................................................2B-38 Pedestrian Signs.....................................................................................................................2B-40 Traffic Signal Signs ...............................................................................................................2B-42 Road Closed and Weight Limit Signs ...................................................................................2B-44 Truck Signs ............................................................................................................................2B-45 Seat Belt Symbol ...................................................................................................................2B-46 Horizontal Alignment Signs ....................................................................................................2C-7 Vertical Grade Signs ..............................................................................................................2C-10 Miscellaneous Warning Signs................................................................................................2C-11 Roadway Condition and Advance Traffic Control Signs ......................................................2C-14 Advisory Speed and Speed Reduction Signs ........................................................................2C-16 Merging and Passing Signs ...................................................................................................2C-17 Example of Advisory Speed Signing for an Exit Ramp .......................................................2C-19 Intersection Warning Signs....................................................................................................2C-20 Motorized Traffic and Nonvehicular Signs ...........................................................................2C-22 Nonvehicular Signs................................................................................................................2C-22 Supplemental Warning Plaques .............................................................................................2C-23 Examples of Color-Coded Destination Guide Signs...............................................................2D-2 Arrows for Use on Guide Signs ..............................................................................................2D-3 Route Signs..............................................................................................................................2D-5 Route Sign Auxiliaries ............................................................................................................2D-7 Directional Arrow Auxiliary Signs..........................................................................................2D-9 Illustration of Directional Assemblies and Other Route Signs (For One Direction of Travel Only) (Sheet 1 of 3) ...............................................................2D-10 Illustration of Directional Assemblies and Other Route Signs (For One Direction of Travel Only) (Sheet 2 of 3) ...............................................................2D-11 Illustration of Directional Assemblies and Other Route Signs (For One Direction of Travel Only) (Sheet 3 of 3) ...............................................................2D-12 Destination and Distance Signs.............................................................................................2D-16 Street Name and Parking Signs.............................................................................................2D-18 Rest Area and Scenic Overlook Signs...................................................................................2D-21 Example of Weigh Station Signing .......................................................................................2D-22 General Service Signs ...........................................................................................................2D-23 General Information Signs ....................................................................................................2D-25 Reference Location Signs......................................................................................................2D-26 Examples of Use of the National Scenic Byways Sign ........................................................2D-30
Page TC2-8
2003 Edition
CHAPTER 2E. GUIDE SIGNSFREEWAYS AND EXPRESSWAYS Figure 2E-1 Figure 2E-2 Figure 2E-3 Figure 2E-4 Figure 2E-5 Figure 2E-6 Figure 2E-7 Figure 2E-8 Figure 2E-9 Figure 2E-10 Figure 2E-11 Figure 2E-12 Figure 2E-13 Figure 2E-14 Figure 2E-15 Figure 2E-16 Figure 2E-17 Figure 2E-18 Figure 2E-19 Figure 2E-20 Figure 2E-21 Figure 2E-22 Figure 2E-23 Figure 2E-24 Figure 2E-25 Figure 2E-26 Figure 2E-27 Figure 2E-28 Figure 2E-29 Figure 2E-30 Figure 2E-31 Figure 2E-32 Figure 2E-33 Figure 2E-34 Figure 2E-35 Figure 2E-36 Figure 2E-37 Figure 2E-38 Figure 2E-39 Figure 2E-40 Figure 2E-41 Figure 2E-42 Figure 2E-43 Figure 2E-44 Figure 2E-45 Figure 2E-46 Figure 2E-47 Example of Guide Sign Spreading ..........................................................................................2E-4 Pull-Through Signs ..................................................................................................................2E-4 Diagrammatic Sign for a Single-Lane Left Exit ...................................................................2E-14 Diagrammatic Signs for Split with Dedicated Lanes ............................................................2E-15 Diagrammatic Signs for Split with Optional Lane................................................................2E-16 Diagrammatic Signs for Two-Lane Exit with Optional Lane ...............................................2E-17 Diagrammatic Signs for Two-Lane Exit with Optional Lane ...............................................2E-18 EXIT ONLY on Left with Diagrammatic Sign for Left Lane Dropped at an Interchange...2E-19 EXIT ONLY Panels ...............................................................................................................2E-20 EXIT ONLY Panels for Right Lane Dropped at an Interchange ..........................................2E-21 Interstate and U.S. Route Signs .............................................................................................2E-23 Example of Interchange Numbering for Mainline and Circumferential Routes...................2E-25 Example of Interchange Numbering for Mainline, Loop, and Spur Routes .........................2E-26 Example of Interchange Numbering If Routes Overlap........................................................2E-28 Examples of Interchange Advance Guide Signs....................................................................2E-29 Next Exit Supplemental Advance Guide Signs .....................................................................2E-30 Supplemental Guide Signs for Multi-exit Interchanges ........................................................2E-31 Supplemental Guide Sign for a Park and Ride Facility (Route without Exit Numbering)...2E-31 Supplemental Guide Sign for a Park and Ride Facility (Route with Exit Numbering)........2E-32 Interchange Exit Direction Sign ............................................................................................2E-32 Exit Gore Signs......................................................................................................................2E-34 Post-Interchange Distance Sign .............................................................................................2E-35 Signing of Closely Spaced Interchanges Using Interchange Sequence Signs ......................2E-36 Interchange Sequence Sign....................................................................................................2E-37 Community Interchanges Identification Sign ........................................................................2E-37 NEXT EXITS Sign ................................................................................................................2E-37 Examples of Freeway-to-Freeway Interchange Guide Signs ................................................2E-39 Examples of Guide Signs for Full Cloverleaf Interchange ...................................................2E-40 Examples of Guide Signs for Full Cloverleaf Interchange with Collector-Distributor Roadways ............................................................................................2E-41 Examples of Partial Cloverleaf Interchange Guide Signs .....................................................2E-42 Examples of Diamond Interchange Guide Signs...................................................................2E-43 Examples of Diamond Interchange Guide Signs in an Urban Area......................................2E-44 Examples of Minor Interchange Guide Signs .......................................................................2E-48 Example of Crossroad Signing for a One-Lane Approach....................................................2E-49 Example of Minor Interchange Crossroad Signing ...............................................................2E-50 Examples of Multi-lane Crossroad Signing for Diamond Interchange.................................2E-51 Examples of Multi-lane Crossroad Signing for Partial Cloverleaf Interchange ...................2E-52 Examples of Multi-lane Crossroad Signing for Cloverleaf Interchange...............................2E-53 Examples of Regulatory Signing and Pavement Markings at Exit Ramp Termination to Deter Wrong-Way Entry ...............................................................................2E-55 Examples of Regulatory Signing and Pavement Markings at Entrance Ramp Terminal Where Design Does Not Clearly Indicate the Direction of Flow ..........................2E-56 Examples of General Service Signs (without Exit Numbering) ...........................................2E-57 Examples of General Service Signs (with Exit Numbering).................................................2E-57 Example of Next Services Sign .............................................................................................2E-57 Examples of Rest Area and Scenic Overlook and Welcome Center Signs ...........................2E-59 Enhanced Reference Location Signs .....................................................................................2E-62 Example of Signing for the Entrance to Barrier-Separated HOV Lanes ..............................2E-66 Example of Signing for the Intermediate Entry to and Exit from Barrier- or Buffer-Separated HOV Lanes ................................................................................................2E-67
2003 Edition
Page TC2-9
Figure 2E-48 Figure 2E-49 Figure 2E-50 Figure 2E-51 Figure 2E-52
Example of Signing for the Entrance to and Exit from an Added HOV Lane .....................2E-69 Example of Signing for the Entrance to and Exit from a General Purpose Lane that Becomes an HOV Lane .........................................................................................................2E-70 Example of Signing for a Direct Access Ramp to an HOV Lane from a Park & Ride Facility ...................................................................................................................................2E-71 Example of Signing for a Direct Access Ramp to an HOV Lane from a Local Street.........2E-72 Example of Signing for a Direct Access Ramp between HOV Lanes on Separate Freeways .................................................................................................................2E-73 Examples of Specific Service Signs ........................................................................................2F-3 Examples of Specific Service Sign Locations .........................................................................2F-4 Examples of Tourist-Oriented Directional Signs ....................................................................2G-3 Examples of Intersection Approach Signs and Advance Signs for Tourist-Oriented Directional Signs .........................................................................................2G-4 Examples of Use of Educational Plaques, Prohibitory Slashes, and Arrows .........................2H-4 Examples of General Directional Guide Signs for Conventional Roads................................2H-5 Height and Lateral Position of Signs Located Within Recreational and Cultural Interest Areas.............................................................................................................2H-6 Examples of Symbol Signing Layout .....................................................................................2H-7 Recreational and Cultural Interest Area Symbol Signs...........................................................2H-8 EMERGENCY MANAGEMENT SIGNING Emergency Management Signs.................................................................................................2I-3
CHAPTER 2F. SPECIFIC SERVICE SIGNS Figure 2F-1 Figure 2F-2 Figure 2G-1 Figure 2G-2
CHAPTER 2H. RECREATIONAL AND CULTURAL INTEREST AREA SIGNS Figure 2H-1 Figure 2H-2 Figure 2H-3 Figure 2H-4 Figure 2H-5 CHAPTER 2I. Figure 2I-1 TABLES CHAPTER 2A. GENERAL Table 2A-1 Table 2A-2 Table 2A-3 Table 2A-4 Table 2B-1 Table 2B-2 Table 2C-1 Table 2C-2 Table 2C-3 Table 2C-4 Table 2C-5 Table 2E-1 Table 2E-2 Illumination of Sign Elements ................................................................................................2A-4 Retroreflection of Sign Elements ............................................................................................2A-4 Use of Sign Shapes..................................................................................................................2A-6 Common Uses of Sign Colors.................................................................................................2A-7 Regulatory Sign Sizes..............................................................................................................2B-2 Meanings of Symbols and Legends on Reversible Lane Control Signs ...............................2B-19 Categories of Warning Signs ...................................................................................................2C-2 Warning Sign Sizes..................................................................................................................2C-3 Minimum Size of Supplemental Warning Plaques..................................................................2C-4 Guidelines for Advance Placement of Warning Signs ............................................................2C-5 Horizontal Alignment Sign Usage...........................................................................................2C-8 Minimum Letter and Numeral Sizes for Expressway Guide Signs According to Interchange Classification .................................................................................2E-6 Minimum Letter and Numeral Sizes for Expressway Guide Signs According to Sign Type ...........................................................................................................2E-8
Page TC2-10
2003 Edition
Minimum Letter and Numeral Sizes for Freeway Guide Signs According to Interchange Classification ...............................................................................2E-10 Minimum Letter and Numeral Sizes for Freeway Guide Signs According to Sign Type .........................................................................................................2E-12 Category Chart for Symbols....................................................................................................2H-2 EMERGENCY MANAGEMENT SIGNING Emergency Management Sign Sizes.........................................................................................2I-2
CHAPTER 2H. RECREATIONAL AND CULTURAL INTEREST AREA SIGNS Table 2H-1 CHAPTER 2I. Table 2I-1
2003 Edition
Page 2A-1
Page 2A-2
2003 Edition
2003 Edition
Page 2A-3
Guidance: Except for safety or transportation-related messages, changeable message signs should not be used to display information other than regulatory, warning, and guidance information related to traffic control. Support: Changeable message signs, with more sophisticated technologies, are gaining widespread use to inform road users of variable situations, particularly along congested traffic corridors. Highway and transportation organizations are encouraged to develop and experiment (see Section 1A.10) with changeable message signs and to carefully evaluate such installations so that experience is gained toward adoption of future standards. Information regarding the design and application of portable changeable message signs in temporary traffic control zones is contained in Section 6F.55. Section 1A.14 contains information regarding the use of abbreviations on traffic control devices, including changeable message signs. Option: Changeable message signs (including portable changeable message signs) that display a regulatory or warning message may use a black background with a white, yellow, orange, red, or fluorescent yellow-green legend as appropriate, except where specifically restricted in this Manual for a particular sign. Changeable message signs, both permanent and portable, may be used by State and local highway agencies to display safety or transportation-related messages. State and local highway agencies may develop and establish a policy regarding the display of safety and transportation-related messages on permanent and changeable message signs that specifies the allowable messages and applications, consistent with the provisions of this Manual. Support: Examples of safety messages include SEAT BELTS BUCKLED? and DONT DRINK AND DRIVE. Examples of transportation-related messages include STADIUM EVENT SUNDAY, EXPECT DELAYS NOON TO 4 PM and OZONE ALERT CODE REDUSE TRANSIT. Guidance: When a changeable message sign is used to display a safety or transportation-related message, the requirements of Section 6F.55 should be followed. The message should be simple, brief, legible, and clear. A changeable message sign should not be used to display a safety or transportation-related message if doing so would adversely affect the respect for the sign. CONGESTION AHEAD or other overly simplistic or vague messages should not be displayed alone. These messages should be supplemented with a message on the location or distance to the congestion or incident, how much delay is expected, alternative route, or other similar messages. Standard: When a changeable message sign is used to display a safety or transportation-related message, the display format shall not be of a type that could be considered similar to advertising displays. The display format shall not include animation, rapid flashing, or other dynamic elements that are characteristic of sports scoreboards or advertising displays.
Page 2A-4
2003 Edition
Attached or independently mounted light source designed to direct essentially uniform illumination onto the sign face Light emitting diodes (LEDs)
Symbol or word message Portions of the sign border Symbol or word message Entire sign face
Other devices, or treatments that highlight the sign shape, color, or message: Luminous tubing Fiber optics Incandescent light bulbs Luminescent panels
Sign Element
Symbol Word message Border Symbol Word message Border Background
A material that has a smooth, sealed outer surface over a microstructure that reflects light
Light Emitting Diode (LED) units may be used individually within the face of a sign and in the border of a sign, except for Changeable Message Signs, to improve the conspicuity, increase the legibility of sign legends and borders, or provide a changeable message. Individual LED pixels may be used in the border of a sign. Standard: If used, the LEDs shall be the same color as the sign legend, border, or background. If flashed, all LED units shall flash simultaneously at a rate of more than 50 and less than 60 times per minute. The uniformity of the sign design shall be maintained without any decrease in visibility, legibility, or driver comprehension during either daytime or nighttime conditions. A module of multiple LED units used as a closely-spaced, single light source shall only be used within the sign face for legends or symbols.
Sect. 2A.08
2003 Edition
Page 2A-5
Support: Information regarding the use of retroreflective material on the sign support is contained in Section 2A.21.
Page 2A-6
2003 Edition
Signs
Circle
* No Passing
Pentagon (pointed up) Crossbuck (two rectangles in an X configuration) Diamond Rectangle (including square)
* School Advance Warning Sign * County Route Sign * Highway-Rail Grade Crossing Warning Series Regulatory Series ** Guide Series Warning Series
Trapezoid
Recreational and Cultural Interest Area Series National Forest Route Sign
* This sign shall be exclusively the shape shown. ** Guide series includes general service, specific service, recreation, and emergency management signs.
Standard: Symbol designs shall in all cases be unmistakably similar to those shown in this Manual and in the Standard Highway Signs book (see Section 1A.11). New symbol designs shall be adopted by the Federal Highway Administration based on research evaluations to determine road user comprehension, sign conspicuity, and sign legibility. Guidance: New warning or regulatory symbol signs not readily recognizable by the public should be accompanied by an educational plaque. Option: State and/or local highway agencies may conduct research studies to determine road user comprehension, sign conspicuity, and sign legibility. Educational plaques may be left in place as long as they are in serviceable condition. Although most standard symbols are oriented facing left, mirror images of these symbols may be used where the reverse orientation might better convey to road users a direction of movement.
Sect. 2A.13
2003 Edition
Page 2A-7
Orange
Green
Regulatory Prohibitive Permissive Warning Pedestrian Bicycle Guide Interstate Route State Route US Route County Route Forest Route Street Name Destination Reference Location Information Evacuation Route Road User Service Recreational Temporary Traffic Control Incident Management Changeable Message Signs * School
X X X X X
X X
X X
X X
White
X X X X X
Red
X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X
X X
X X X X
X X X
* Reverse colors or fluorescent yellow-green pixels may also be used on changeable message signs
Yellow
X X X
Page 2A-8
2003 Edition
Standard: All sign lettering shall be in capital letters as provided in the Standard Highway Signs book, except as indicated in the Option below. Option: Word messages on street name signs and destinations on guide signs may be composed of a combination of lower-case letters with initial upper-case letters.
2003 Edition
Page 2A-9
Figure 2A-1. Examples of Heights and Lateral Locations of Signs for Typical Installations
ROADSIDE SIGN
RURAL DISTRICT
Not less than 1.5 m (5 ft)
ROADSIDE SIGN
RURAL DISTRICT
Not less than 1.5 m (5 ft) Not less than 1.8 m (6 ft)
SHOULDER
ROADSIDE ASSEMBLY
RURAL DISTRICT SIGN ON NOSE OF MEDIAN
Not less than 2.1 m (7 ft)
OVERHEAD MOUNTING
Note: See Section 2A.19 for reduced lateral offset distances that may be used in areas where lateral offsets are limited, and in urban areas where sidewalk width is limited or where existing poles are close to the curb.
Sect. 2A.16
Page 2A-10
2003 Edition
0.6 m (2 ft) MIN. MIN. 1.8 m (6 ft) to 3.7 m (12 ft) MIN. 1.8 m (6 ft) to 3.7 m (12 ft) MIN. 1.8 m (6 ft) to 3.7 m (12 ft)
CHANNELIZED INTERSECTION
MAJOR ROAD SIDEWALK 1.2 m (4 ft) MIN. MIN. 1.8 m (6 ft) to 3.7 m (12 ft) MIN. 1.8 m (6 ft) to 3.7 m (12 ft) 0.6 m (2 ft) MIN.
MINOR ROAD
MINOR CROSSROAD
URBAN INTERSECTION
MIN. 1.8 m (6 ft) to 3.7 m (12 ft) MIN. 1.8 m (6 ft) to 3.7 m (12 ft)
DIVISIONAL ISLAND
Note: Lateral offset is a minimum of 1.8 m (6 ft) measured from the edge of the shoulder, or 3.7 m (12 ft) measured from the edge of the traveled way. See Section 2A.19 for lower minimums that may be used in urban areas, or where lateral offset space is limited.
Sect. 2A.16
2003 Edition
Page 2A-11
Support: An order of priority is especially critical where space is limited for sign installation and there is a demand for several different types of signs. Overloading road users with too much information is not desirable. Guidance: Because regulatory and warning information is more critical to the road user than guidance information, regulatory and warning signing whose location is critical should be displayed rather than guide signing in cases where conflicts occur. Information of a less critical nature should be moved to less critical locations or omitted. Option: Under some circumstances, such as on curves to the right, signs may be placed on median islands or on the left side of the road. A supplementary sign located on the left of the roadway may be used on a multi-lane road where traffic in the right lane might obstruct the view to the right. Guidance: In urban areas where crosswalks exist, signs should not be placed within 1.2 m (4 ft) in advance of the crosswalk.
Page 2A-12
2003 Edition
Directional signs on freeways and expressways shall be installed with a minimum height of 2.1 m (7 ft). If a secondary sign is mounted below another sign, the major sign shall be installed at least 2.4 m (8 ft) and the secondary sign at least 1.5 m (5 ft) above the level of the pavement edge. All route signs, warning signs, and regulatory signs on freeways and expressways shall be at least 2.1 m (7 ft) above the level of the pavement edge. Option: The height to the bottom of a secondary sign mounted below another sign may be 0.3 m (1 ft) less than the height specified above. Where signs are placed 9 m (30 ft) or more from the edge of the traveled way, the height to the bottom of such signs may be 1.5 m (5 ft) above the level of the pavement edge. A route sign assembly consisting of a route sign and auxiliary signs (see Section 2D.27) may be treated as a single sign for the purposes of this Section. The mounting height may be adjusted when supports are located near the edge of the right-of-way on a steep backslope. Support: Without this flexibility regarding steep backslopes, some agencies might decide to relocate the sign closer to the road, which might be less desirable. Standard: Overhead mounted signs shall provide a vertical clearance of not less than 5.2 m (17 ft) to the sign, light fixture, or sign bridge, over the entire width of the pavement and shoulders except where a lesser vertical clearance is used for the design of other structures. Option: If the vertical clearance of other structures is less than 4.9 m (16 ft), the vertical clearance to overhead sign structures or supports may be as low as 0.3 m (1 ft) higher than the vertical clearance of the other structures. In special cases it may be necessary to reduce the clearance to overhead signs because of substandard dimensions in tunnels and other major structures such as double-deck bridges. Support: Figure 2A-1 illustrates some examples of the mounting height requirements contained in this Section.
2003 Edition
Page 2A-13
Option: Lesser lateral offsets may be used on connecting roadways or ramps at interchanges, but not less than 1.8 m (6 ft) from the edge of the traveled way. In areas where lateral offsets are limited, a minimum lateral offset of 0.6 m (2 ft) may be used. A minimum offset of 0.3 m (1 ft) from the face of the curb may be used in urban areas where sidewalk width is limited or where existing poles are close to the curb. Support: Figures 2A-1 and 2A-2 illustrate some examples of the lateral offset requirements contained in this Section.
Section 2A.23 Median Opening Treatments for Divided Highways with Wide Medians
Guidance: Where divided highways are separated by median widths at the median opening itself of 9 m (30 ft) or more, median openings should be signed as two separate intersections.
Sect. 2A.19 to 2A.23
2003 Edition
Page 2B-1
Page 2B-2
2003 Edition
Freeway
1500 x 1500 x 1500 (60 x 60 x 60) 1200 x 1500 (48 x 60) 1200 x 1650 (48 x 66) 1200 x 1200 (48 x 48) 1200 x 1350 (48 x 54) 1200 x 1200 (48 x 48) 1200 x 1350 (48 x 54) 1200 x 1500 (48 x 60) 1200 x 1650 (48 x 66) 1200 x 2400 (48 x 96) 1200 x 2550 (48 x 102) 1200 x 1200 (48 x 48)
Minimum
600 x 600 (24 x 24) 750 x 750 x 750 (30 x 30 x 30)
Oversized
1200 x 1200 (48 x 48) 1200 x 1200 (48 x 48) 900 x 1200 (36 x 48)
To Oncoming Traffic 4-Way All Way Yield Here to Peds Yield Here to Pedestrians In-Street Ped Crossing Speed Limit (English) Speed Limit (Metric) Truck Speed Limit (English) Truck Speed Limit (Metric) Night Speed Limit (English) Night Speed Limit (Metric) Minimum Speed Limit (English) Minimum Speed Limit (Metric) Combined Speed Limit (English) Combined Speed Limit (Metric) Fines Higher Turn Prohibition Mandatory Movement Lane Control Optional Movement Lane Control Mandatory Movement Lane Control Advance Intersection Lane Control Two-Way Left Turn Only (overhead mounted) Two-Way Left Turn Only (ground mounted) Reversible Lane Control (symbol) Reversible Lane Control (ground mounted) Advance Reversible Lane Control Transition Signing End Reverse Lane
R1-2a R1-3 R1-4 R1-5 R1-5a R1-6,6a R2-1 R2-1 R2-2 R2-2 R2-3 R2-3 R2-4 R2-4 R2-4a R2-4a R2-6 R3-1,2,3,4, 18 R3-5 series R3-6 R3-7 R3-8,8a,8b R3-9a R3-9b R3-9d R3-9f R3-9g,9h
2B.04 2B.04 2B.11 2B.11 2B.12 2B.13 2B.13 2B.14 2B.14 2B.15 2B.15 2B.16 2B.16 2B.16 2B.16 2B.17 2B.19 2B.21 2B.22 2B.21 2B.23 2B.24 2B.24 2B.25 2B.25 2B.25
R3-9i
Preferential Only Lane Ahead R3-10 series (ground mounted) Preferential Only Lane Operation R3-11 series (ground mounted) Sect. 2B.04
2003 Edition
Page 2B-3
Freeway
1200 (48 1200 (48 x x x x 2100 84) 2400 96)
Minimum
Oversized
R3-13 series
2B.26
3600 x 1950 (144 x 78) 3600 x 2400 (144 x 96) 3600 x 2650 (144 x 106) 3600 x 3100 (144 x 124) 3600 x 2250 (144 x 90) 2550 x 1500 (102 x 60) 1200 x 1500 (48 x 60) 1200 x 1500 (48 x 60) 1200 x 1500 (48 x 60) 1200 x 1500 (48 x 60) 1200 x 1500 (48 x 60) 1200 x 1500 (48 x 60) 1200 x 1500 (48 x 60) 1200 x 1200 (48 x 48) 1050 x 750 (42 x 30) 900 x 900 (36 x 36) 1200 x 1500 (48 x 60) 1200 x 1500 (48 x 60) 900 x 900 (36 x 36) 1200 x 750 (48 x 30) 1200 x 750 (48 x 30)
R3-14 series
2B.26
HOV 2+ Lane Ends (overhead mounted) Do Not Pass Pass With Care Slower Traffic Keep Right Trucks Use Right Lane Truck Lane XX Meters (XX Feet) Keep Right Keep Left Do Not Enter Wrong Way No Trucks No Motor Vehicles Commercial Vehicles Excluded Vehicles with Lugs Prohibited No Bicycles Non-Motorized Traffic Prohibited Motor-Driven Cycles Prohibited Pedestrians, Bicycles, Motor-Driven Cycles Prohibited Pedestrians and Bicycles Prohibited Pedestrians Prohibited One Way One Way Divided Highway Crossing
R3-15 series R4-1 R4-2 R4-3 R4-5 R4-6 R4-7,7a,7b R4-8 R5-1 R5-1a R5-2,2a R5-3 R5-4 R5-5 R5-6 R5-7 R5-8 R5-10a
2B.26 2B.29 2B.30 2B.31 2B.32 2B.32 2B.33 2B.33 2B.34 2B.35 2B.36 2B.36 2B.36 2B.36 2B.36 2B.36 2B.36 2B.36
1650 x 900 (66 x 36) 600 x 750 (24 x 30) 600 x 750 (24 x 30) 600 x 750 (24 x 30) 600 x 750 (24 x 30) 600 x 750 (24 x 30) 600 x 750 (24 x 30) 600 x 750 (24 x 30) 750 x 750 (30 x 30) 900 x 600 (36 x 24) 600 x 600 (24 x 24) 600 x 600 (24 x 24) 600 x 750 (24 x 30) 600 x 750 (24 x 30) 600 x 600 (24 x 24) 750 x 600 (30 x 24) 750 x 600 (30 x 24) 750 x 900 (30 x 36) 750 x 450 (30 x 18) 600 x 300 (24 x 12) 900 x 300 (36 x 12) 600 x 750 (24 x 30) 750 x 600 (30 x 24)
2100 x 1200 (84 x 48) 900 x 1200 (36 x 48) 900 x 1200 (36 x 48) 900 x 1200 (36 x 48) 900 x 1200 (36 x 48) 900 x 1200 (36 x 48) 900 x 1200 (36 x 48) 900 x 1200 (36 x 48) 900 x 900 (36 x 36) 900 x 600 (36 x 24) 750 x 750 (30 x 30) 900 x 1200 (36 x 48) 900 x 1200 (36 x 48) 750 x 750 (30 x 30) 1050 x 600 (42 x 24) 1050 x 600 (42 x 24)
450 x 600 (18 x 24) 450 x 600 (18 x 24) 450 x 600 (18 x 24) 450 x 600 (18 x 24)
1350 x 450 (54 x 18) 900 x 1200 (36 x 48) 900 x 750 (36 x 30)
Sect. 2B.04
Page 2B-4
2003 Edition
Freeway
Minimum
Oversized
Van Accessible No Parking, Bike Lane No Parking (with transit logo) No Parking / Restricted Parking (combined sign)
Tow Away Zone This Side of Sign No Parking on Pavement No Parking Except on Shoulder No Parking No Parking (symbol) Emergency Parking Only No Stopping on Pavement No Stopping Except on Shoulder Emergency Stopping Only Do Not Stop on Tracks Tracks Out of Service Stop Here When Flashing Walk on Left Facing Traffic Cross Only at Crosswalks No Pedestrian Crossing No Pedestrian Crossing (symbol) Use Crosswalk No Hitch Hiking Hitch Hiking Prohibition (symbol) Bicyclists (symbol) Use Ped Signal Bicyclists (symbol) Yield to Peds Keep Left/Right to Pedestrians & Bicyclists (symbols) Travel-path Restriction Pedestrian Crosswalk Sidewalk Closed
R7-201,201a R7-202 R8-1 R8-2 R8-3 R8-3a R8-4 R8-5 R8-6 R8-7 R8-8 R8-9 R8-10 R9-1 R9-2 R9-3 R9-3a R9-3b R9-4 R9-4a R9-5 R9-6 R9-7
2B.40 2B.39 2B.39 2B.39 2B.39 2B.39 2B.42 2B.39 2B.39 2B.42 2B.42 8B.09 8B.10 2B.43 2B.44 2B.44 2B.44 2B.44 2B.43 2B.43 9B.10 9B.10 9B.11
300 x 150 (12 x 6) 300 x 150 (12 x 6) 600 x 750 (24 x 30) 600 x 750 (24 x 30) 600 x 750 (24 x 30) 600 x 600 (24 x 24) 750 x 600 (30 x 24) 600 x 750 (24 x 30) 600 x 750 (24 x 30) 750 x 600 (30 x 24) 600 x 750 (24 x 30) 600 x 600 (24 x 24) 600 x 900 (24 x 36) 450 x 600 (18 x 24) 300 x 450 (12 x 18) 300 x 450 (12 x 18) 450 x 450 (18 x 18) 450 x 300 (18 x 12) 450 x 600 (18 x 24) 450 x 450 (18 x 18) 300 x 450 (12 x 18) 300 x 450 (12 x 18) 300 x 450 (12 x 18)
900 x 1200 (36 x 48) 900 x 1200 (36 x 48) 900 x 900 (36 x 36) 900 x 900 (36 x 36) 750 x 600 (30 x 24) 900 x 1200 (36 x 48) 900 x 1200 (36 x 48) 1200 x 900 (48 x 36) 900 x 1200 (36 x 48) 900 x 900 (36 x 36) 600 x 600 (24 x 24)
1200 x 1500 (48 x 60) 1200 x 1500 (48 x 60) 1200 x 1200 (48 x 48) 1200 x 1200 (48 x 48) 1200 x 900 (48 x 36) 1200 x 1500 (48 x 60) 1200 x 1500 (48 x 60) 750 x 750 (30 x 30)
450 x 600 (18 x 24) 300 x 300 (12 x 12) 450 x 450 (18 x 18) 600 x 750 (24 x 30) 450 x 450 (18 x 18)
R9-8 R9-9
6F.12 6F.13
Sect. 2B.04
2003 Edition
Page 2B-5
Sign
Sidewalk Closed, Use Other Side Sidewalk Closed Ahead, Cross Here Sidewalk Closed, Cross Here Cross On Green Light Only Pedestrian Traffic Signal Signs Countdown Pedestrian Sign Left on Green Arrow Only Stop Here on Red Stop Here on Red Do Not Block Intersection Use Lane with Green Arrow Left (Right) Turn Signal No Turn on Red No Turn on Red Left Turn Yield on Green Emergency Signal Turning Traffic Must Yield To Pedestrians U-Turn Yield to Right Turn Right on Red Arrow After Stop Traffic Laws Photo Enforced Photo Enforced MONFRI (and times) (3 lines) SUNDAY (and times) (2 lines) Left Turn Signal Yield on Green Bike Actuation
MUTCD Code
R9-10 R9-11 R9-11a R10-1 R10-2, 2a,3,3a,3b, 3c,3d,4,4a,4b R10-3e R10-5 R10-6 R10-6a R10-7 R10-8 R10-10 R10-11,11a R10-11b R10-12 R10-13 R10-15 R10-16 R10-17a R10-18 R10-19 R10-20a R10-20a R10-21 R10-22
Section
6F.13 6F.13 6F.13 2B.45 2B.45
Freeway
Minimum
Oversized
2B.45 2B.45 2B.45 2B.45 2B.45 2B.45 2B.45 2B.45 2B.45 2B.45 2B.45 2B.45 2B.45 2B.45 2B.46 2B.46 2B.45 2B.45 2B.45 9B.12
900 x 1050 (36 x 42) 1200 x 750 (48 x 30) 900 x 750 (36 x 30)
1200 x 1500 (48 x 60) 1500 x 1800 (60 x 72) 1200 x 1200 (48 x 48) 750 x 750 (30 x 30)
Sect. 2B.04
Page 2B-6
2003 Edition
Freeway
Minimum
Oversized
Keep Off Median Road Closed Road Closed - Local Traffic Only Weight Limit Weight Limit Weight Limit Weight Limit Metric Plaque Weigh Station Truck Route Hazardous Material National Network Railroad Crossbuck Look
1200 x 1500 (48 x 60) 3000 x 1100 (120 x 84) 900 x 900 (36 x 36) 900 x 900 (36 x 36)
900 x 1200 (36 x 48) 1050 x 1050 (42 x 42) 1050 x 1050 (42 x 42)
Notes: 1. Larger signs may be used when appropriate. 2. Dimensions are shown in millimeters followed by inches in parentheses and are shown as width x height.
2003 Edition
Page 2B-7
Once the decision has been made to install two-way stop control, the decision regarding the appropriate street to stop should be based on engineering judgment. In most cases, the street carrying the lowest volume of traffic should be stopped. A STOP sign should not be installed on the major street unless justified by a traffic engineering study. Support: The following are considerations that might influence the decision regarding the appropriate street upon which to install a STOP sign where two streets with relatively equal volumes and/or characteristics intersect: A. Stopping the direction that conflicts the most with established pedestrian crossing activity or school walking routes; B. Stopping the direction that has obscured vision, dips, or bumps that already require drivers to use lower operating speeds; C. Stopping the direction that has the longest distance of uninterrupted flow approaching the intersection; and D. Stopping the direction that has the best sight distance to conflicting traffic. The use of the STOP sign at highway-railroad grade crossings is described in Section 8B.08. The use of the STOP sign at highway-light rail transit grade crossings is described in Section 10C.04.
Page 2B-8
2003 Edition
Guidance: The decision to install multiway stop control should be based on an engineering study. The following criteria should be considered in the engineering study for a multiway STOP sign installation: A. Where traffic control signals are justified, the multiway stop is an interim measure that can be installed quickly to control traffic while arrangements are being made for the installation of the traffic control signal. B. A crash problem, as indicated by 5 or more reported crashes in a 12-month period that are susceptible to correction by a multiway stop installation. Such crashes include right- and left-turn collisions as well as right-angle collisions. C. Minimum volumes: 1. The vehicular volume entering the intersection from the major street approaches (total of both approaches) averages at least 300 vehicles per hour for any 8 hours of an average day, and 2. The combined vehicular, pedestrian, and bicycle volume entering the intersection from the minor street approaches (total of both approaches) averages at least 200 units per hour for the same 8 hours, with an average delay to minor-street vehicular traffic of at least 30 seconds per vehicle during the highest hour, but 3. If the 85th-percentile approach speed of the major-street traffic exceeds 65 km/h or exceeds 40 mph, the minimum vehicular volume warrants are 70 percent of the above values. D. Where no single criterion is satisfied, but where Criteria B, C.1, and C.2 are all satisfied to 80 percent of the minimum values. Criterion C.3 is excluded from this condition. Option: Other criteria that may be considered in an engineering study include: A. The need to control left-turn conflicts; B. The need to control vehicle/pedestrian conflicts near locations that generate high pedestrian volumes; C. Locations where a road user, after stopping, cannot see conflicting traffic and is not able to reasonably safely negotiate the intersection unless conflicting cross traffic is also required to stop; and D. An intersection of two residential neighborhood collector (through) streets of similar design and operating characteristics where multiway stop control would improve traffic operational characteristics of the intersection.
2003 Edition
Page 2B-9
Figure 2B-1. STOP, YIELD, Speed Limit, FINES HIGHER, and Photo Enforcement Signs
R1-1
R1-3
R1-4
R1-2
R1-2a
OR
OR
R2-1
R2-2
OR
R2-3
R2-6
R10-18
R10-19
Page 2B-10
2003 Edition
Except at roundabout intersections, where there is a marked crosswalk at the intersection, the YIELD sign should be installed in advance of the crosswalk line nearest to the approaching traffic. At a roundabout intersection, to prevent circulating vehicles from yielding unnecessarily, the face of the YIELD sign should not be visible from the circulatory roadway. Option: At wide-throat intersections or where two or more approach lanes of traffic exist on the signed approach, observance of the yield control may be improved by the installation of an additional YIELD sign on the left side of the road and/or the use of a yield line. At channelized intersections, the additional YIELD sign may be effectively placed on a channelizing island.
2003 Edition
Page 2B-11
R1-5
R1-5a
R1-6
R1-6a
Option: Other factors that may be considered when establishing speed limits are the following: A. Road characteristics, shoulder condition, grade, alignment, and sight distance; B. The pace speed; C. Roadside development and environment; D. Parking practices and pedestrian activity; and E. Reported crash experience for at least a 12-month period. Two types of Speed Limit signs may be used: one to designate passenger car speeds, including any nighttime information or minimum speed limit that might apply; and the other to show any special speed limits for trucks and other vehicles. A changeable message sign that changes the speed limit for traffic and ambient conditions may be installed provided that the appropriate speed limit is shown at the proper times. A changeable message sign that displays to approaching drivers the speed at which they are traveling may be installed in conjunction with a Speed Limit sign. Guidance: If a changeable message sign displaying approach speeds is installed, the legend YOUR SPEED XX km/h (MPH) or such similar legend should be shown. The color of the changeable message legend should be a yellow legend on a black background or the reverse of these colors. Support: Advisory Speed signs are discussed in Sections 2C.36 and 2C.46 and Temporary Traffic Control Zone Speed signs are discussed in Part 6.
Page 2B-12
2003 Edition
OR OR
R2-4
R2-4a
R3-1
Sect. 2B.15 to 2B.17
R3-2
R3-3
R3-4
R3-18
2003 Edition
Page 2B-13
B. A supplemental plaque WHEN CHILDREN (WORKERS) ARE PRESENT; or C. A supplemental plaque WHEN FLASHING (similar to the S4-4 plaque shown in Figure 7B-1) if used in conjunction with a yellow flashing beacon. The legend FINES HIGHER may be replaced by multiple values such as FINES DOUBLE or FINES TRIPLE, or by a specific value such as $150 FINE. Standard: The FINES HIGHER plaque shall be a rectangle with a black legend and border on a white background. All supplemental plaques mounted below the FINES HIGHER plaque shall be rectangles with black legends and borders on white backgrounds. The FINES HIGHER plaque shall include a SCHOOL, WORK ZONE, or other applicable designated zone plaque mounted above the applicable regulatory or warning sign. The SCHOOL supplemental plaque shall be rectangular in shape with a black legend and border on a yellow or fluorescent yellowgreen background (same as the S4-3 plaque). The WORK ZONE supplemental plaque shall be rectangular in shape with a black legend and border on an orange background. Guidance: If used, the FINES HIGHER plaque should be located at the beginning of the temporary traffic control zone, school zone, or other applicable designated zone and just beyond any interchanges, major intersections, or other major traffic generators. Agencies should limit the use of the FINES HIGHER plaque to locations where work is actually underway, or to locations where the roadway, shoulder, or other conditions, including the presence of a school, require a speed reduction or extra caution on the part of the road user.
Section 2B.19 Turn Prohibition Signs (R3-1 through R3-4, and R3-18)
Standard: Except as noted in the Option, where turns are prohibited, Turn Prohibition signs shall be installed. Guidance: Turn Prohibition signs should be placed where they will be most easily seen by road users who might be intending to turn. If No Right Turn (R3-1) signs (see Figure 2B-3) are used, at least one should be placed either over the roadway or at a right corner of the intersection. If No Left Turn (R3-2) signs (see Figure 2B-3) are used, at least one should be placed either over the roadway, at the far left corner of the intersection, on a median, or in conjunction with the STOP sign or YIELD sign located on the near right corner. Except as noted in the Option, if NO TURNS (R3-3) signs (see Figure 2B-3) are used, two signs should be used, one at a location specified for a No Right Turn sign and one at a location specified for a No Left Turn sign. If No U-Turn (R3-4) signs (see Figure 2B-3) are used, at least one should be used at a location specified for No Left Turn signs. If combination No U-Turn/No Left Turn (R3-18) signs (see Figure 2B-3) are used, at least one should be used at a location specified for No Left Turn signs. Option: If signals are present: A. The No Right Turn sign may be installed adjacent to a signal face viewed by road users in the right lane. B. The No Left Turn (or No U-Turn or combination No U-Turn/No Left Turn) sign may be installed adjacent to a signal face viewed by road users in the left lane.
Sect. 2B.17 to 2B.19
Page 2B-14
2003 Edition
C. A NO TURNS sign may be placed adjacent to a signal face viewed by all road users on that approach, or two signs may be used. If signals are present, an additional Turn Prohibition sign may be ground mounted to supplement the sign mounted overhead. Where ONE WAY signs are used (see Section 2B.32), Turn Prohibition signs may be omitted. When the movement restriction applies during certain time periods only, the following Turn Prohibition signing alternatives may be used and are listed in order of preference: A. Changeable message signs, especially at signalized intersections. B. Permanently mounted signs incorporating a supplementary legend showing the hours and days during which the prohibition is applicable. C. Portable signs, installed by proper authority, located off the roadway at each corner of the intersection. The portable signs are only to be used during the time that the turn prohibition is applicable. Turn Prohibition signs may be omitted at a ramp entrance to an expressway or a channelized intersection where the design is such as to indicate clearly the one-way traffic movement on the ramp or turning lane. If both left turns and U-turns are prohibited, the R3-18 sign may be used instead of separate R3-2 and R3-4 signs.
Section 2B.21 Mandatory Movement Lane Control Signs (R3-5, R3-5a, and R3-7)
Standard: If used, Mandatory Movement Lane Control (R3-5, R3-5a, and R3-7) signs (see Figure 2B-4) shall indicate only those vehicle movements that are required from each lane and shall be located where the regulation applies. When the mandatory movement applies to lanes exclusively designated for HOV traffic, the R3-5c supplemental plaque shall be used. When the mandatory movement applies to lanes that are not HOV facilities, but are lanes exclusively designated for buses and/or taxis, the word message R3-5d and/or R3-5g supplemental plaques shall be used. The R3-7 word message sign shall be for ground mounting only. If the R3-5 sign is ground mounted on a multi-lane approach, a supplemental plaque (see Figure 2B-4), such as LEFT LANE (R3-5b), HOV 2+ (R3-5c), TAXI LANE (R3-5d), CENTER LANE (R3-5e), RIGHT LANE (R3-5f), BUS LANE (R3-5g), or LEFT 2 LANES, indicating the lane with the appropriate movement shall be added below. The Mandatory Movement Lane Control (R3-7) sign shall include the legend RIGHT (LEFT) LANE MUST TURN RIGHT (LEFT). The Mandatory Movement Lane Control symbol signs (R3-5 and R3-5a) shall include the legend ONLY.
Sect. 2B.19 to 2B.21
2003 Edition
Page 2B-15
OR
R3-5
R3-5a
R3-6
R3-7
OR
R3-8
R3-8a * The diamond symbol may be used instead of the word message HOV. The minimum vehicle occupancy level may vary, such as 2+, 3+, 4+. The words LANE or ONLY may be used with this sign when appropriate.
R3-8b
Guidance: Mandatory Movement Lane Control signs should be accompanied by lane use arrow markings, especially where traffic volumes are high, where there is a high percentage of commercial vehicles, or where other distractions exist. Option: The Straight Through Only (R3-5a) sign may be used to require a road user in a particular lane to proceed straight through an intersection. When the Mandatory Movement Lane Control sign for a left-turn lane is installed back-to-back with a Keep Right (R4-7) sign, the dimensions of the Mandatory Movement Lane Control (R3-5) sign may be the same as the Keep Right sign. Except for the R3-7 sign, Mandatory Movement Lane Control signs may be overhead or ground mounted. The diamond symbol may be used instead of the word message HOV on the R3-5c supplemental plaque.
Page 2B-16
2003 Edition
Optional Movement Lane Control signs shall be used for two or more movements from a specific lane where a movement, not normally allowed, is permitted. The Optional Movement Lane Control sign shall not be used alone to effect a turn prohibition. Option: The word message OK may be used within the border in combination with the arrow symbols of the R3-6 sign.
R3-9a
R3-9b
R3-9d
R3-9f
OR
OR
R3-9g
Sect. 2B.22 to 2B.24
R3-9h
R3-9i
2003 Edition
Page 2B-17
Support: Signing is especially helpful to drivers in areas where the two-way left turn only maneuver is new, in areas subject to environmental conditions that frequently obscure the pavement markings, and on peripheral streets with two-way left turn only lanes leading to an extensive system of routes with two-way left turn only lanes.
Section 2B.25 Reversible Lane Control Signs (R3-9d, R3-9f through R3-9i)
Option: A reversible lane may be used for through traffic (with left turns either permitted or prohibited) in alternating directions during different periods of the day, and the lane may be used for exclusive left turns in one or both directions during other periods of the day as well. Reversible Lane Control (R3-9d, R3-9f through R3-9i) signs (see Figure 2B-5) may either be static type or changeable message type. These signs may be either ground or overhead mounted. Standard: Ground-mounted Reversible Lane Control signs shall be used only as a supplement to overhead signs or signals. Ground-mounted signs shall be identical in design to the overhead signs and an additional legend such as CENTER LANE shall be added to the sign (R3-9f) to indicate which lane is controlled. For both word messages and symbols, this legend shall be at the top of the sign. Where it is determined by an engineering study that lane-use control signals or physical barriers are not necessary, the lane shall be controlled by overhead Reversible Lane Control signs (see Figure 2B-6). Option: Reversing traffic flow may be controlled with pavement markings and Reversible Lane Control signs (without the use of lane control signals), when all of the following conditions are met: A. Only one lane is being reversed. B. An engineering study indicates that the use of Reversible Lane Control signs alone would result in an acceptable level of safety and efficiency. C. There are no unusual or complex operations in the reversible lane pattern. Standard: Reversible Lane Control signs shall contain the legend or symbols designating the allowable uses of the lane and the time periods such uses are allowed. Where symbols and legend are used, their meanings shall be as shown in Table 2B-2. Reversible Lane Control signs shall consist of a white background with a black legend and border, except for the R3-9d sign, where the color red is used. Symbol signs, such as the R3-9d sign, shall consist of the appropriate symbol in the upper portion of the sign with the appropriate times of the day and days of the week below it. All times of the day and days of the week shall be accounted for on the sign to eliminate confusion to the road user. In situations where more than one message is conveyed to the road user, such as on the R3-9d sign, the sign legend shall be arranged as follows: A. The prohibition or restriction message is the primary legend and shall be on the top for word message signs and to the far left for symbol signs; B. The permissive use message shall be shown as the second legend; and C. The OTHER TIMES message shall be shown at the bottom for word message signs and to the far right for symbol signs. Option: The symbol signs may also include a downward pointing arrow with the legend THIS LANE. The term OTHER TIMES may be used for either the symbol or word message sign. Standard: A Reversible Lane Control sign shall be mounted over the center of the lane that is being reversed and shall be perpendicular to the roadway alignment. If the vertical or horizontal alignment is curved to the degree that a driver would be unable to see at least one sign, and preferably two signs, then additional overhead signs shall be installed. The placement of the signs shall be such that the driver will have a definite indication of the lanes specifically reserved for use at any given time. Special consideration shall be given to major generators introducing traffic between the normal sign placement.
Page 2B-18
2003 Edition
R3-9h
R3-9f
R3-9i
R3-9d
R3-9f
R3-9d
R3-9h
Sect. 2B.25
2003 Edition
Page 2B-19
Table 2B-2. Meanings of Symbols and Legends on Reversible Lane Control Signs
Symbol / Word Message
Red X on white background. Upward pointing black arrow on white background. If left turns are permitted, the arrow shall be modified to show left / through arrow. Black two-way left turn arrows on white background and legend ONLY. Black single left turn arrow on white background and legend ONLY.
Meaning
Lane Closed Lane open for through travel and any turns not otherwise prohibited. Lane may be used only for left turns in either direction (i.e., as a two-way left turn lane). Lane may be used only for left turns in one direction (without opposing left turns in the same lane).
Transitions at the entry to and exit from a section of roadway with reversible lanes shall be carefully reviewed, and advance signs shall be installed to notify or warn drivers of the boundaries of the reversible lane controls. The R3-9g or R3-9h signs shall be used for this purpose. Option: More than one sign may be used at the termination of the reversible lane to emphasize the importance of the message (R3-9i). Standard: Flashing beacons, if used to accentuate the overhead Reversible Lane Control signs, shall comply with the applicable requirements for flashing beacons in Chapter 4K. When used in conjunction with Reversible Lane Control signs, the Turn Prohibition signs (R3-1 to R3-4, R3-18) shall be mounted overhead and separate from the Reversible Lane Control signs. The Turn Prohibition signs shall be designed and installed in accordance with Section 2B.19. Guidance: For additional emphasis, a supplemental plaque stating the distance of the prohibition, such as NEXT 1.6 km (NEXT 1 MILE), should be added to the Turn Prohibition signs that are used in conjunction with Reversible Lane Control signs. If used, overhead signs should be located at intervals not greater than 400 m (0.25 mi). The bottom of the overhead Reversible Lane Control signs should not be more than 5.8 m (19 ft) above the pavement grade. Where more than one sign is used at the termination of a reversible lane, they should be at least 75 m (250 ft) apart. Longer distances between signs are appropriate for streets with speeds over 60 km/h (35 mph), but the separation should not exceed 300 m (1,000 ft). Left-turning vehicles have a significant impact on the safety and efficiency of a reversible lane operation. If an exclusive left-turn lane or two-way left-turn lane cannot be incorporated into the lane-use pattern for a particular peak or off-peak period, consideration should be given to prohibiting left turns and U-turns during that time period.
Page 2B-20
2003 Edition
Option: Preferential only lane assignments may be made on a full-time or part-time basis. Guidance: Preferential Only Lane sign spacing should be determined by engineering judgment based on prevailing speed, block length, distances from adjacent intersections, and other considerations. Support: The symbol and word message that appears on a particular Preferential Only Lane sign will vary based on the specific type of allowed traffic and on other related operational constraints that have been established for a particular lane, such as an HOV lane, a bus lane, or a taxi lane. Section 2B.27 contains information regarding the restriction of the use of the diamond symbol to HOV lanes only. The requirements for guide and regulatory signs in advance of all preferential only lanes on freeways are provided in Section 2E.59. Standard: When a preferential only lane is established, the Preferential Only Lane signs (see Figure 2B-7) and pavement markings (see Sections 3B.22 and 3B.23) for these lanes shall be used to advise road users. At the end of a preferential only lane, a Lane Ends (R3-12a or R3-15a) sign shall be used. Guidance: Ground-mounted Preferential Only Lane (R3-10, R3-11, and R3-12 series) signs should be installed where preferential only lanes are implemented on freeways, expressways, and conventional roads. Support: The sizes for Preferential Only Lane signs will differ to reflect the design speeds for each type of roadway facility. Table 2B-1 provides sizes for each type of roadway facility. Guidance: The size of the ground-mounted Preferential Only Lane Operational (R3-11 series) signs should remain consistent to accommodate any manual addition or subtraction of a single line of text for each sign. Support: Consistent sign sizes are beneficial for agencies when ordering sign materials, as well as when making text changes to existing signs if changes occur to operating times or occupancy restrictions in the future. For example, the R3-11c sign has space for one line located below "24 HOURS" if an agency desires to add additional information (such as "Mon. Fri."), yet the R3-11c sign has the same dimensions as the other R3-11 series signs. Guidance: The decision to use a specific ground-mounted or overhead sign for a preferential only lane should be based on an engineering study that considers the available space, the existing signs for adjoining general purpose lanes, roadway and traffic characteristics, the proximity of other overhead signing, the ability to install overhead signs, and any other unique local factors. Support: Figures 2E-46 through 2E-52 show example signing layouts using the R3-10 through R3-15 series signs for various preferential only lane applications. Standard: The R3-10, R3-11, R3-11a, R3-11c, R3-13, R3-13a, R3-14 and R3-14a signs shall be used exclusively with preferential only lanes for high-occupancy vehicles to indicate the particular occupancy requirement and time restrictions applying to that lane. The R3-10a, R3-11b, and R3-14b signs shall be used in situations where a preferential only lane is not an HOV lane, but is designated for use by other types of vehicles (such as bus and/or taxi use). When used, the ground-mounted Preferential Only Lane Operational (R3-11 series) signs shall be located adjacent to the preferential only lane, and the overhead Preferential Only Lane Operational (R314 series) signs shall be mounted directly over the lane. The legend format of the ground-mounted Preferential Only Lane Operational (R3-11 series) signs shall have the following sequence: A. Top Lines: Lanes applicable, such as "RIGHT LANE", "RIGHT 2 LANES", or "THIS LANE" B. Middle Lines: Eligible uses, such as "HOV 2+ ONLY" (or 3+ or 4+), "BUSES ONLY", or other applicable turning movements C. Bottom Lines: Applicable time and day, such as "7 9 AM" or "6:30 9:30 AM, MON-FRI"
Sect. 2B.26
2003 Edition
Page 2B-21
R3-10
R3-10a
R3-10b
R3-11
R3-11a
R3-11b
R3-11c
R3-12
R3-12a
R3-12b
R3-13
R3-13a
R3-14
R3-14a
R3-14b
R3-15
R3-15a
Notes: The diamond symbol may be used instead of the word message HOV. The minimum vehicle occupancy requirement may vary for each facility (such as 2+, 3+, 4+). The occupancy requirement may be added to the first line of the R3-12a, R3-15, and R3-15a signs. Some of the legends shown on these signs are for example purposes only. The specific legend for a particular application should be based upon local conditions, ordinances, and State statutes.
Sect. 2B.26
Page 2B-22
2003 Edition
The legend format of the overhead Preferential Only Lane Operational (R3-14 series) signs shall have the following sequence: A. Top Line: Eligible uses, such as "HOV 2+ ONLY" (or 3+ or 4+), "BUSES ONLY", or other types of vehicles B. Bottom Lines: Applicable time and day, with the time and day placed above the down arrow, such as "7 9 AM" or "6:30 9:30 AM, MON-FRI". When the operating periods exceed the available line width, the hours and days of the week shall be stacked as shown for the R3-14a sign in Figure 2B-7. Option: The diamond symbol may be used instead of the word message HOV. Standard: When the diamond symbol (or HOV abbreviation) is used without text on the ground-mounted Preferential Only Lane (R3-10 series, R3-11 series, and R3-12 series) signs, it shall be centered on the top line of the sign. When the diamond symbol (or HOV abbreviation) is used with associated text on the ground-mounted Preferential Only Lane (R3-10 series, R3-11 series, and R3-12 series) signs, it shall appear to the left of the associated text. When the diamond symbol is used on the overhead Preferential Only Lane (R3-13, R3-13a, R3-14, and R3-14a) signs, it shall appear in the top left quadrant. The diamond symbol shall not be used on the bus, taxi, or bicycle Preferential Only Lane signs. The diamond symbol for the R3-15 and R3-15a signs shall appear on the left side of the sign. Guidance: The Preferential Only Lane Ahead (R3-10a, R3-12, and R3-15) signs should be used for advance notification of preferential only lanes. Standard: The R3-10, R3-10b, R3-13, and R3-13a signs shall be used in situations where agencies determine it is appropriate to provide a sign that defines the operational strategy (such as minimum occupancy or types of vehicles) that is being used to manage or regulate the vehicles that are permitted to use a preferential only lane. Guidance: The legend format of the R3-10 and R3-13 signs should have this sequence: A. Top Line: "HOV 2+ ONLY" (or 3+ or 4+ if appropriate) B. Bottom Lines: "2 OR MORE PERSONS PER VEHICLE" (or 3 or 4 if appropriate) Option: Changeable message signs may be used to supplement static signs where travel conditions change or where multiple types of operational strategies (such as variable occupancy requirements, vehicle types, or pricing policies) are used and varied throughout the day or week to manage the use of, control of, or access to preferential only lanes. Standard: When changeable message signs (see Section 2A.07) are used as regulatory signs for preferential only lanes, they shall be the required sign size and shall display the required letter height and legend format that corresponds to the type of roadway facility and design speed. Option: The ground-mounted Preferential Only Lane Operational (R3-11 series) signs and the overhead Preferential Only Lane Operational (R3-14 series) signs may be used to supplement changeable message signs that are used to convey preferential only lane restrictions. Where additional movements are permitted from a preferential only lane on an approach to an intersection, the format and words used in the legend in the middle lines on the ground-mounted Preferential Only Lane Operational (R3-11 series) signs and on the overhead Preferential Only Lane Operational (R3-14 series) signs may be modified to accommodate the permitted movements (such as "RIGHT TURNS ONLY"). Guidance: The Inherently Low Emission Vehicle (ILEV) (R3-10b) sign should be used when it is permissible for a properly labeled and certified ILEV, regardless of the number of occupants, to use an HOV lane. When used, the ILEV signs should be ground-mounted in advance of and at intervals along the HOV lane based upon engineering judgment. The R3-10b sign is only applicable to HOV lanes and should not to be used with other preferential only lane applications.
Sect. 2B.26
2003 Edition
Page 2B-23
Support: Inherently low emission vehicles are defined by the Environmental Protection Agency (EPA) as vehicles having no fuel vapor (hydrocarbon) emissions. These vehicles must be certified by the EPA as meeting the emissions standards and requirements specified in 40 CFR 88-311-93 and 40 CFR 88.312-93 (c).
Page 2B-24
2003 Edition
Option: HOV lanes may be operated on a 24-hour basis for extended periods of the day, during peak travel periods only, during special events, or during other activities. HOV lanes may take many forms depending on the level of usage and the design of the facility. They may be physically separated from the other travel lanes by a barrier or median, or they may be concurrent with other travel lanes and be separated only by longitudinal pavement markings. Physically separated HOV lanes may be operated in a constant direction or may be operated as reversible lanes. Agencies may select from either the HOV abbreviation or the diamond symbol to reference the HOV lane designation. Support: Inherently low emission vehicle (ILEV) eligibility, testing and certification requirements, labeling, and other regulatory provisions are developed and administered through the Environmental Protection Agency (EPA). EPA is the only entity with the authority to certify ILEVs. Vehicle manufacturers must request the EPA to grant an ILEV certification for any vehicle to be considered and labeled as meeting those standards. According to the EPA, 1996 was the first year that they certified any ILEVs. EPA regulations specify that ILEVs must meet the emission standards specified in 40 CFR 88.311-93 and their labeling must be in accordance with 40 CFR 88.312-93(c). EPA established the ILEV concept to recognize vehicles with no fuel vapor (hydrocarbons) emissions. Zero emission vehicles (electric powered vehicles) that have no emissions are the only other type of clean fuel vehicles that are allowed to use HOV lanes. Option: Agencies may permit a vehicle with less than the required number of occupants to operate on HOV lanes if: A. The vehicle is properly labeled and certified as an ILEV and the lane is not a bus only HOV lane; or B. The HOV lanes are part of a project that is participating in the FHWA Value Pricing Pilot Program (see Section 2 of the Federal-Aid Highway Program Guidance on High Occupancy Vehicle (HOV) Lanes). Standard: Motorcycles shall be permitted to use HOV lanes that receive Federal-aid program funding.
2003 Edition
Page 2B-25
Guidance: When Preferential Only Lane signs are used, the decision to use a specific ground-mounted or overhead sign should be based on an engineering study that considers the available space, the existing signs for the adjoining general purpose traffic lanes, roadway and traffic characteristics, the proximity to existing overhead signing, the ability to install overhead signs, and any other unique local factors. Standard: For all barrier-separated preferential only lanes, an overhead Preferential Only Lane Operational (R3-14 series) sign shall be used at the beginning or initial entry point, and at any intermediate access points or gaps in the barrier where vehicles are allowed to legally access the barrier-separated preferential only lanes. Ground-mounted Preferential Only Lane Operational (R3-11 series) signs shall be used only as a supplement to the overhead signs at the beginning or initial entry point, or at any intermediate access points or gaps in the barrier. Guidance: For all barrier-separated preferential only lanes, an overhead Preferential Only Lane Ahead (R3-15) sign should be installed and located at least 1.6 km (1 mi) in advance of the beginning or initial entry point. Option: For barrier-separated preferential only lanes, ground-mounted R3-10 signs defining the occupancy requirement may be alternated in series with Preferential Only Lane Operational (R3-11, R3-11a, R3-11b, or R311c) signs. These signs may be located at intervals of approximately 1 km (0.6 mi) along the length of the preferential only lane, at intermediate entry points, and at designated enforcement areas as defined by the operating agency. For barrier-separated reversible-flow preferential only lanes, Preferential Only Lane signs may be either static or changeable message type. Standard: For buffer-separated preferential only lanes (painted buffer of 0.6 m (2 ft) or more), an overhead Preferential Only Lane Operational (R3-14 series) sign shall be used at the beginning or initial entry point, and at intermediate access points or gaps where vehicles are allowed to legally access the buffer-separated preferential only lane. Ground-mounted R3-10 signs defining the occupancy requirement shall be located and alternated with Preferential Only Lane Operational (R3-11 series) signs in series at intervals not greater than 1 km (0.6 mi) along the length of the preferential only lane, at designated gaps in the buffer where vehicles are allowed to legally access the preferential only lane, and within designated enforcement areas as defined by the operating agency. Option: For buffer-separated preferential only lanes, overhead Preferential Only Lane Operational (R3-14 series) signs may be used at specific locations and intervals along the length of the preferential only lane to supplement the ground-mounted R3-10 signs defining the occupancy requirement and the Preferential Only Lane Operational (R3-11 series) signs based on an engineering study. Standard: For concurrent-flow preferential only lanes, ground-mounted R3-10 signs defining the occupancy requirement shall be located and alternated with Preferential Only Lane Operational (R3-11 series) signs in series at intervals not greater than 1 km (0.6 mi) along the length of the preferential only lane. Option: For concurrent-flow preferential only lanes, overhead Preferential Only Lane Operational (R3-14 series) signs may be used at specific locations and intervals along the length of the preferential only lane to supplement the ground-mounted R3-10 signs defining the occupancy requirement and the Preferential Only Lane Operational (R3-11 series) signs based on an engineering study. Standard: For direct access ramps to preferential only lanes, a ground-mounted R3-10 sign defining the occupancy requirement and a Preferential Only Lane Operational (R3-11 series) sign shall be used at the beginning or initial entry point for all types of direct access ramps that provide access or lead to preferential only lanes. Option: For direct access ramps to preferential only lanes, an overhead Preferential Only Lane Operational (R3-14 series) sign may be used at the beginning or initial entry point to supplement the required ground-mounted signs.
Sect. 2B.28
Page 2B-26
2003 Edition
Support: Section 2B.26 contains provisions regarding the use of changeable message signs for preferential only lanes. Section 2E.59 contains additional provisions regarding signing for preferential only lanes on freeway and expressway facilities. Figures 2E-46 through 2E-52 show application and placement examples for Preferential Only Lane signs for a variety of preferential only lane situations.
Section 2B.33 Keep Right and Keep Left Signs (R4-7, R4-8)
Option: The Keep Right (R4-7) sign (see Figure 2B-8) may be used at locations where it is necessary for traffic to pass only to the right of a roadway feature or obstruction. The Keep Left (R4-8) sign (see Figure 2B-8) may be used at locations where it is necessary for traffic to pass only to the left of a roadway feature or obstruction.
Sect. 2B.28 to 2B.33
2003 Edition
Page 2B-27
R4-1
R4-2
R4-3
R4-5
R12-6
OR
R4-6
R4-7
R4-7a
R4-7b
R4-8
R4-9
R4-10
Guidance: If used, the Keep Right sign should be installed as close as practical to approach ends of raised medians, parkways, islands, underpass piers, and at other locations where it is not readily apparent that traffic is required to keep to the right. The sign should be mounted on the face of or just in front of a pier or other obstruction separating opposite directions of traffic in the center of the highway such that traffic will have to pass to the right of the sign. Standard: The Keep Right sign shall not be installed on the right side of the roadway in a position where traffic must pass to the left of the sign. Option: The Keep Right sign may be omitted at intermediate ends of divisional islands and medians. Word message KEEP RIGHT (LEFT) with an arrow (R4-7a or R4-7b) signs (see Figure 2B-8) may be used instead of the R4-7 or R4-8 symbol signs. Where the obstruction obscures the Keep Right sign, the minimum placement height may be increased for better sign visibility.
Sect. 2B.33
Page 2B-28
2003 Edition
R5-1
R5-1a
R5-2
R5-3
R5-4
R5-5
R5-6
R5-7
R5-8
R5-10a
R5-10b
R5-10c
An optional word message sign is shown in the Standard Highway Signs book
Sect. 2B.34 to 2B.35
2003 Edition
Page 2B-29
Figure 2B-10. Example of Wrong-Way Signing for a Divided Highway with a Median Width of 9 m (30 ft) or Greater
Guidance: If used, the WRONG WAY sign should be placed at a location along the exit ramp or the one-way roadway farther from the crossroad than the DO NOT ENTER sign (see Section 2E.50).
Page 2B-30
2003 Edition
Guidance: If an exclusion is governed by vehicle weight, a Weight Limit sign (see Section 2B.49) should be used instead of a Selective Exclusion sign. The Selective Exclusion sign should be placed on the right side of the roadway at an appropriate distance from the intersection so as to be clearly visible to all road users turning into the roadway that has the exclusion. The PEDESTRIANS PROHIBITED (R5-10c) or No Pedestrian Crossing (R9-3a) sign should be installed so as to be clearly visible to pedestrians at a location where an alternative route is available. Option: The NO TRUCKS (R5-2a) sign may be used as an alternate to the No Trucks (R5-2) symbol sign. The PEDESTRIANS PROHIBITED (R5-10c) or No Pedestrian Crossing (R9-3a) sign may also be used at underpasses or elsewhere where pedestrian facilities are not provided.
R6-1
Sect. 2B.36 to 2B.38
R6-2
R6-3
R6-3a
2003 Edition
Page 2B-31
Sect. 2B.38
Page 2B-32
2003 Edition
Sect. 2B.38
2003 Edition
Page 2B-33
Figure 2B-13. Examples of ONE WAY Signing for Divided Highways with Medians of 9 m (30 ft) or Greater
Legend Optional Direction of travel
Note: See Figure 2B-10 for examples of placing DO NOT ENTER and WRONG WAY signing.
Sect. 2B.38
Page 2B-34
2003 Edition
Figure 2B-14. Examples of ONE WAY Signing for Divided Highways with Medians Less Than 9 m (30 ft)
Legend Optional Direction of travel
Notes: All signs shown are optional except the STOP signs. See Figure 2B-10 for examples of placing DO NOT ENTER and WRONG WAY signing.
Sect. 2B.38
2003 Edition
Page 2B-35
Figure 2B-15. Examples of ONE WAY Signing for Divided Highways with Medians Less Than 9 m (30 ft) and Separated Left-Turn Lanes
Legend
Notes: All signs shown are optional except the STOP signs. See Figure 2B-10 for examples of placing DO NOT ENTER and WRONG WAY signing.
Typical Mounting
Sect. 2B.38
Page 2B-36
2003 Edition
Section 2B.39 Parking, Standing, and Stopping Signs (R7 and R8 Series)
Support: Signs governing the parking, stopping, and standing of vehicles cover a wide variety of regulations, and only general guidance can be provided here. The word standing when used on the R7 and R8 series of signs refers to the practice of a driver keeping the vehicle in a stationary position while continuing to occupy the vehicle. Typical examples of parking, stopping, and standing signs (see Figures 2B-16 and 2B-17) are as follows: A. NO PARKING ANY TIME (R7-1); B. NO PARKING 8:30 AM TO 5:30 PM (R7-2); C. NO PARKING EXCEPT SUNDAYS AND HOLIDAYS (R7-3); D. NO STANDING ANY TIME (R7-4); E. ONE HOUR PARKING 9 AM-7 PM (R7-5); F. NO PARKING LOADING ZONE (R7-6); G. NO PARKING BUS STOP (R7-7, R7-107, R7-107a); H. RESERVED PARKING for persons with disabilities (R7-8); I. NO PARKING ON PAVEMENT (R8-1); J. NO PARKING EXCEPT ON SHOULDER (R8-2); K. NO PARKING (R8-3); L. No Parking (R8-3a); and M. NO STOPPING ON PAVEMENT (R8-5).
2003 Edition
Page 2B-37
R7-1
R7-2
R7-2a
R7-3
R7-4
R7-8a
R7-5
R7-6
R7-7
R7-8
R7-8b
OR
R7-107
R7-107a
R7-108
R7-200
R7-201
R7-201a
R7-202
R7-203
Sect. 2B.40
Page 2B-38
2003 Edition
R8-1
R8-2
R8-3
R8-3a
R8-4
R8-5
R8-6
R8-7
A. Two 300 x 450 mm (12 x 18 in) parking signs may be used with the red Parking Prohibition sign installed above or to the left of the green Permissive Parking sign; or B. The red Parking Prohibition sign and the green Permissive Parking sign may be combined to form an R7200 sign on a single 600 x 450 mm (24 x 18 in) sign, or on a single 300 x 750 mm (12 x 30 in) sign. At the transition point between two parking zones, a single sign or two signs mounted side by side may be used. The words NO PARKING may be used as an alternative to the No Parking symbol. The supplemental educational plaque, NO PARKING, with a red legend and border on a white background, may be used above signs incorporating the No Parking symbol. Alternate designs for the R7-107 sign may be developed such as the R7-107a sign (see Figure 2B-16). Alternate designs may include, on a single panel, a transit logo, an approved bus symbol, a parking prohibition, the words BUS STOP, and an arrow. The preferred bus symbol color is black, but other dark colors may be used. Additionally, the transit logo may be shown on the bus face in the appropriate colors instead of placing the logo separately. The reverse side of the sign may contain bus routing information. To make the parking regulations more effective and to improve public relations by giving a definite warning, a sign (see Figure 2B-16) reading TOW-AWAY ZONE (R7-201) may be appended to, or incorporated in, any parking prohibition sign. The Tow-Away Zone (R7-201a) symbol sign may be used instead of the R7-201 word message sign. The R7-201a sign may have either a black or red legend and border on a white background. In rural areas, the legend NO PARKING ON PAVEMENT (R8-1) is generally suitable and may be used. If a roadway has paved shoulders, the NO PARKING EXCEPT ON SHOULDER sign (R8-2) may be used as it is less likely to cause confusion. The R8-3a symbol sign or the word message NO PARKING (R8-3) sign may be used to prohibit any parking along a given highway. Word message supplemental plaques (see Figure 2B-17), such as ON PAVEMENT (R8-3c) or ON BRIDGE (R8-3d), may be mounted below the R8-3 or R8-3a sign.
2003 Edition
Page 2B-39
Standard: If the signs are mounted at an angle of 90 degrees to the curb line, two signs shall be mounted back to back at the transition point between two parking zones, each with the appended message THIS SIDE OF SIGN. Guidance: At intermediate points within a zone, a single sign without any arrow or appended plaque should be used, facing in the direction of approaching traffic. Otherwise the standards of placement should be the same as for signs using directional arrows.
Section 2B.43 WALK ON LEFT FACING TRAFFIC and No Hitchhiking Signs (R9-1, R9-4, R9-4a)
Option: The WALK ON LEFT FACING TRAFFIC (R9-1) sign (see Figure 2B-18) may be used on highways where no sidewalks are provided. Standard: If used, the WALK ON LEFT FACING TRAFFIC sign shall be installed on the right side of the road where pedestrians walk on the pavement or shoulder in the absence of pedestrian pathways or sidewalks. Option: The No Hitchhiking (R9-4a) sign (see Figure 2B-18) may be used to prohibit standing in or adjacent to the roadway for the purpose of soliciting a ride. The R9-4 word message sign (see Figure 2B-18) may be used as an alternate to the R9-4a symbol sign.
Page 2B-40
2003 Edition
R9-1
R9-2
R9-3
R9-3a
R10-1
R10-2a
R10-3
R10-3a
R10-3b
R10-3c
Sect. 2B.44
R10-3d
R10-3e
R10-4
R10-4a
R10-4b
2003 Edition
Page 2B-41
Sect. 2B.45
Page 2B-42
2003 Edition
R10-5
R10-6
R10-6a
R10-7
R10-8
R10-10
R10-11
R10-11a
R10-11b
R10-12
R10-13
R10-15
R10-16
OR
R10-17a
R10-20a
R10-21
Sect. 2B.45
2003 Edition
Page 2B-43
Where turns on red are permitted and the signal indication is a RED ARROW, the RIGHT (LEFT) ON RED ARROW AFTER STOP (R10-17a) sign (see Figure 2B-19) should be installed adjacent to the RED ARROW signal indication. Option: In order to remind drivers who are making turns to yield to pedestrians, especially at intersections where right turn on red is permitted and pedestrian crosswalks are marked, a TURNING TRAFFIC MUST YIELD TO PEDESTRIANS (R10-15) sign may be used (see Figure 2B-19). A supplemental R10-20a plaque (see Figure 2B-19) showing times of day (similar to the S4-1 plaque shown in Figure 7B-1) with a black legend and border on a white background may be mounted below a NO TURN ON RED sign to indicate that the restriction is in place only during certain times. Standard: The EMERGENCY SIGNAL (R10-13) sign (see Figure 2B-19) shall be used in conjunction with emergency-vehicle traffic control signals (see Section 4F.02). Option: A U-TURN YIELD TO RIGHT TURN (R10-16) sign (see Figure 2B-19) may be installed near the left-turn signal face if U-turns are allowed on a protected left-turn movement on an approach from which drivers making a right turn from the conflicting approach to their left are simultaneously being shown a right-turn GREEN ARROW signal indication.
Section 2B.48 ROAD CLOSED Sign (R11-2) and LOCAL TRAFFIC ONLY Signs (R11-3 Series, R11-4)
Guidance: The ROAD CLOSED (R11-2) sign should be installed where roads have been closed to all traffic (except authorized vehicles). ROAD CLOSEDLOCAL TRAFFIC ONLY (R11-3) or ROAD CLOSED TO THRU TRAFFIC (R11-4) signs should be used where through traffic is not permitted, or for a closure some distance beyond the sign, but where the highway is open for local traffic up to the point of closure. Standard: The Road Closed (R11-2, R11-3 series, and R11-4) signs (see Figure 2B-20) shall be designed as horizontal rectangles. These signs shall be preceded by the applicable Advance Road Closed warning sign with the secondary legend AHEAD and, if applicable, an Advance Detour warning sign (see Section 6F.18). Option: The word message BRIDGE OUT may be substituted for the ROAD CLOSED message where applicable.
Page 2B-44
2003 Edition
R11-1
R11-2
R11-3a
R11-3b
R11-4 R12-6
R12-6
R12-6
OR
OR
OR
R12-1
R12-2
R12-3 R12-6
R12-6
OR OR
R12-4
R12-5
R12-6
Sect. 2B.48
2003 Edition
Page 2B-45
R14-1
M4-4
R14-2
Page 2B-46
2003 Edition
2003 Edition
Page 2C-1
Page 2C-2
2003 Edition
Signs
Turn, Curve, Reverse Turn, Reverse Curve, Winding Road, Hairpin Curve, 270-Degree Curve Combination Horizontal Alignment/Advisory Speed Combination Horizontal Alignment/Intersection Large Arrow (one direction) Chevron Alignment Truck Rollover Hill Truck Escape Ramp Hill Blocks View Road Narrows Narrow Bridge, One Lane Bridge Divided Road, Divided Road Ends, Double Arrow Dead End, No Outlet Low Clearance Bump, Dip, Speed Hump Pavement Ends Shoulder Slippery When Wet Bridge Ices Before Road Stop Ahead, Yield Ahead, Signal Ahead, Be Prepared To Stop, Speed Reduction Merge, Lane Ends, Added Lane, Two-Way Traffic, Right Lane Ends, Lane Ends Merge Left, No Passing Zone Advisory Speed Cross Road, Side Road, T, Y, and Circular Intersection Large Arrow (two directions) Oncoming Extended Green Truck Crossing, Truck (symbol), Emergency Vehicle, Tractor, Bicycle, Golf Cart, Horse-Drawn Vehicle Pedestrian, Deer, Cattle, Snowmobile, Horse, Wheelchair, Playground XX Feet, XX Miles, Next XX Feet, Next XX MI Advisory Speed Advance Arrow, Directional Arrow, Diagonal Arrow Trucks Use Low Gear, X% Grade Advance Street Name Cross Traffic Does Not Stop Share The Road High-Occupancy Vehicle Photo Enforced Traffic Circle
MUTCD Codes
W1-1 through W1-5, W1-11, W1-15 W1-1a, W1-2a W1-10 W1-6 W1-8 W1-13 W7-1, W7-1a, W7-1b W7-4, W7-4a W7-6 W5-1 W5-2, W5-3 W6-1, W6-2, W12-1 W14-1, W14-1a, W14-2, W14-2a W12-2, W12-2p W8-1, W8-2, W17-1 W8-3 W8-4, W8-9, W8-9a W8-5 W8-13 W3-1, W3-2, W3-3, W3-4, W3-5, W3-5a W4-1, W4-2, W4-3, W4-5, W4-6, W6-3, W9-1, W9-2, W14-3 W13-2, W13-3, W13-5 W2-1 through W2-6 W1-7 W25-1, W25-2 W8-6, W11-1, W11-5, W11-5a, W11-8, W11-10, W11-11, W11-12p, W11-14 W11-2, W11-3, W11-4, W11-6, W11-7, W11-9, W15-1 W16-2, W16-3, W16-4, W7-3a W13-1 W16-5p, W16-6p, W16-7p W7-2, W7-3 W16-8 W4-4p W16-1 W16-11 W16-10 W16-12p
2C.07 2C.08 2C.09 2C.10 2C.11 2C.12 2C.13 2C.14 2C.15 2C.16-17 2C.18-20 2C.21 2C.22 2C.23-24 2C.25 2C.26 2C.27 2C.28 2C.29-30
Roadway Related
Vertical Alignment
Cross Section
Roadway Surface Condition Advance Traffic Control Traffic Flow Change in Speed Traffic Related Intersections Vehicular Traffic
2C.31-35
Nonvehicular
2C.41-42
Distance Speed Arrow Hill-Related Supplemental Street Name Plaques Plaque Intersection Share The Road HOV
Photo Enforced Traffic Circle
Sect. 2C.04
2C.45 2C.46 2C.47 2C.48 2C.49 2C.50 2C.51 2C.52 2C.53 2C.37
2003 Edition
Page 2C-3
Diamond
W1, W2, W7, W8, W9, W11, W14, W15-1, W17-1 W1 Combination, W3, W4, W5, W6, W8-3, W10, W12 W1 - Arrows W1 - Chevron W7-4 W7-4b, 4c W10-9, 10 W12-2p W13-2, 3, 5, W25 W14-3
____
____
____
____
900 x 450 1500 x 750 (36 x 18) (60 x 30) 300 x 450 (12 x 18)
Rectangular
1950 x 1200 1950 x 1200 1950 x 1200 (78 x 48) (78 x 48) (78 x 48) 1950 x 1500 1950 x 1500 1950 x 1500 (78 x 60) (78 x 60) (78 x 60) 600 x 450 (24 x 18) 2100 x 600 (84 x 24) 600 x 750 (24 x 30) 900 x 1200 x 1200 (36 x 48 x 48) 900 (36) Dia.
____
2100 x 600 (84 x 24) 900 x1200 (36 x 48)
____
2100 x 600 (84 x 24) 1200 x 1500 (48 x 60)
____
____
Pennant
750 x 1000 1200 x 1600 x 1600 x 1000 (30 x 40 x (48 x 64 x 64) 40) 750 (30) Dia. 1200 (48) Dia.
Circular
W10-1
____
Notes: 1. Larger signs may be used when appropriate 2. Dimensions are shown in millimeters followed by inches in parentheses and are shown as width x height
Page 2C-4
2003 Edition
Rectangular
2 Lines Arrow
Square
900 x 900 (36 x 36) 1200 x1200 (48 x 48) 750 x 450 (30 x18) 750 x 600 (30 x 24)
Notes: 1. Larger supplemental plaques may be used when appropriate 2. Dimensions are shown in millimeters followed by inches in parentheses and are shown as width x height
Guidance: Warning signs should be placed so that they provide adequate PIEV time. The distances contained in Table 2C-4 are for guidance purposes and should be applied with engineering judgment. Warning signs should not be placed too far in advance of the condition, such that drivers might tend to forget the warning because of other driving distractions, especially in urban areas. Minimum spacing between warning signs with different messages should be based on the estimated PIEV time for driver comprehension of and reaction to the second sign. The effectiveness of the placement of warning signs should be periodically evaluated under both day and night conditions. Option: Warning signs that advise road users about conditions that are not related to a specific location, such as Deer Crossing or SOFT SHOULDER, may be installed in an appropriate location, based on engineering judgment, since they are not covered in Table 2C-4.
Section 2C.06 Horizontal Alignment Signs (W1-1 through W1-5, W1-11, W1-15)
Option: The horizontal alignment Turn (W1-1), Curve (W1-2), Reverse Turn (W1-3), Reverse Curve (W1-4), or Winding Road (W1-5) signs (see Figure 2C-1) may be used in advance of situations where the horizontal roadway alignment changes. A One-Direction Large Arrow (W1-6) sign (see Figure 2C-1 and Section 2C.09) may be used on the outside of the turn or curve. If the change in horizontal alignment is 135 degrees or more, the Hairpin Curve (W1-11) sign (see Figure 2C-1) may be used. If the change in horizontal alignment is approximately 270 degrees, such as on a cloverleaf interchange ramp, the 270-degree Loop (W1-15) sign (see Figure 2C-1) may be used. Guidance: The application of these signs should conform to Table 2C-5. When the Hairpin Curve sign or the 270-degree Loop sign is installed, either a One-Direction Large Arrow (W1-6) sign or Chevron Alignment (W1-8) signs should be installed on the outside of the turn or curve. Option: An Advisory Speed (W13-1) plaque (see Section 2C.46) may be used to indicate the speed for the change in horizontal alignment. The supplemental distance plaque NEXT XX km (NEXT XX MILES) (W7-3a) may be installed below the Winding Road sign where continuous roadway curves exist (see Section 2C.45). The combination Horizontal Alignment/Advisory Speed sign (see Section 2C.07), combination Horizontal Alignment/Intersection sign (see Section 2C.08), or the Curve Speed sign (see Section 2C.36) may also be used.
Sect. 2C.05 to 2C.06
2003 Edition
Page 2C-5
Table 2C-4. Guidelines for Advance Placement of Warning Signs (Metric Units)
Advance Placement Distance
Posted or 85thPercentile Speed (km/h)
30 40 50 60 70 80 90 100 110 120 130
Condition A: Speed Reduction and Lane Changing in Heavy Traffic2
1
Condition B: Deceleration to the listed advisory speed (km/h) for the condition4 03
N/A5 N/A5 N/A5
10
N/A5 N/A5 N/A5
20
N/A5 N/A5 N/A5 N/A5
30
N/A5 N/A5 N/A5 N/A5
40
N/A5
50
60
70
80
90
N/A5 50 m 90 m
100
N/A5
110
60 m 100 m 150 m 180 m 220 m 260 m 310 m 350 m 380 m 420 m 460 m
30 m N/A5
50 m 40 m 30 m 80 m 60 m 55 m 110 m 90 m 80 m
N/A5 N/A5
50 m 40 m 30 m N/A5 N/A5
130 m 120 m 115m 110 m 100 m 90 m 70 m 60 m 40 m 170 m 160 m 150 m 140 m 130 m 120m 110m 90 m 70 m 200 m 190 m 185 m 180 m 170 m 160m 140m 130m 110m
60 m 40 m
230 m 230m 230 m 220 m 210 m 200m 180m 170m 150m 120 m 100 m 70 m
Notes:
1
The distances are adjusted for a sign legibility distance of 50 m for Condition A. The distances for Condition B have been adjusted for a sign legibility distance of 75 m, which is appropriate for an alignment warning symbol sign. Typical conditions are locations where the road user must use extra time to adjust speed and change lanes in heavy traffic because of a complex driving situation. Typical signs are Merge and Right Lane Ends. The distances are determined by providing the driver a PIEV time of 14.0 to 14.5 seconds for vehicle maneuvers (2001 AASHTO Policy, Exhibit 3-3, Decision Sight Distance, Avoidance Maneuver E) minus the legibility distance of 50 m for the appropriate sign. Typical condition is the warning of a potential stop situation. Typical signs are Stop Ahead, Yield Ahead, Signal Ahead, and Intersection Warning signs. The distances are based on the 2001 AASHTO Policy, Stopping Sight Distance, Exhibit 3-1, providing a PIEV time of 2.5 seconds, a deceleration rate of 3.4 m/second2, minus the sign legibility distance of 50 m. Typical conditions are locations where the road user must decrease speed to maneuver through the warned condition. Typical signs are Turn, Curve, Reverse Turn, or Reverse Curve. The distance is determined by providing a 2.5 second PIEV time, a vehicle deceleration rate of 3 m/second2, minus the sign legibility distance of 75 m. No suggested distances are provided for these speeds, as the placement location is dependent on site conditions and other signing to provide an adequate advance warning for the driver.
Sect. 2C.06
Page 2C-6
2003 Edition
Table 2C-4. Guidelines for Advance Placement of Warning Signs (English Units)
Advance Placement Distance
Posted or 85thPercentile Speed
20 mph 25 mph 30 mph 35 mph 40 mph 45 mph 50 mph 55 mph 60 mph 65 mph 70 mph 75 mph Condition A: Speed reduction and lane changing in heavy traffic2 225 ft 325 ft 450 ft 550 ft 650 ft 750 ft 850 ft 950 ft 1100 ft 1200 ft 1250 ft 1350 ft
1
Condition B: Deceleration to the listed advisory speed (mph) for the condition4 03
N/A5 N/A5 N/A5 N/A5 125 ft 175 ft 250 ft 325 ft 400 ft 475 ft 550 ft 650 ft
10
N/A5 N/A5 N/A5 N/A5 N/A5 125 ft 200 ft 275 ft 350 ft 425 ft 525 ft 625 ft
20
N/A5 N/A5 N/A5 N/A5 N/A5 150 ft 225 ft 300 ft 400 ft 500 ft 600 ft
30
N/A5 N/A5 N/A5 100 ft 175 ft 250 ft 350 ft 425 ft 525 ft
40
N/A5 N/A5 100 ft 175 ft 275 ft 350 ft 450 ft
50
N/A5 N/A5 175 ft 250 ft 350 ft
60 50
N/A5 150 ft 250 ft
70
100 ft
Notes: The distances are adjusted for a sign legibility distance of 175 ft for Condition A. The distances for Condition B have been adjusted for a sign legibility distance of 250 ft, which is appropriate for an alignment warning symbol sign. Typical conditions are locations where the road user must use extra time to adjust speed and change lanes in heavy traffic because of a complex driving situation. Typical signs are Merge and Right Lane Ends. The distances are determined by providing the driver a PIEV time of 14.0 to 14.5 seconds for vehicle maneuvers (2001 AASHTO Policy, Exhibit 3-3, Decision Sight Distance, Avoidance Maneuver E) minus the legibility distance of 175 ft for the appropriate sign. Typical condition is the warning of a potential stop situation. Typical signs are Stop Ahead, Yield Ahead, Signal Ahead, and Intersection Warning signs. The distances are based on the 2001 AASHTO Policy, Stopping Sight Distance, Exhibit 3-1, providing a PIEV time of 2.5 seconds, a deceleration rate of 11.2 ft/second2, minus the sign legibility distance of 175 ft. Typical conditions are locations where the road user must decrease speed to maneuver through the warned condition. Typical signs are Turn, Curve, Reverse Turn, or Reverse Curve. The distance is determined by providing a 2.5 second PIEV time, a vehicle deceleration rate of 10 ft/second2, minus the sign legibility distance of 250 ft. No suggested distances are provided for these speeds, as the placement location is dependent on site conditions and other signing to provide an adequate advance warning for the driver.
Sect. 2C.06
2003 Edition
Page 2C-7
W1-1
W1-2
W1-3
W1-4
W1-5
W1-6
W1-8
W1-10
W1-11
W1-13
W1-15
OR
OR
W1-1a
W1-2a
Standard: When engineering judgment determines the need for a horizontal alignment sign, one of the W1-1 through W1-5, W1-10, W1-11 or W1-15 signs shall be used. Option: If the reduction in speed is 20 km/h (15 mph) or greater, a supplemental combination Horizontal Alignment/Advisory Speed sign or Curve Speed (W13-5) sign may be installed as near as practical to the point of curvature. If the reduction in speed is 40 km/h (25 mph) or greater, one or more additional Curve Speed signs may be installed along the curve.
Page 2C-8
2003 Edition
Advisory Speed
< 50 km/h (< 30 MPH) Turn (W1-1)1 Reverse Turn3 (W1-3) > 50 km/h (> 30 MPH) Curve (W1-2)1 Reverse Curve3 (W1-4)
Engineering judgment should be used to determine whether the Turn or Curve sign should be used. Alignment changes are in opposite directions and are separated by a tangent distance of 180 m (600 ft) or less. A Right Reverse Turn (W1-3R), Right Reverse Curve (W1-4R), or Right Winding Road (W1-5R) sign is used if the first change in alignment is to the right; a Left Reverse Turn (W1-3L), Left Reverse Curve (W1-4L), or Left Winding Road (W1-5L) sign is used if the first change in alignment is to the left.
2003 Edition
Page 2C-9
If used, Chevron Alignment signs shall be installed on the outside of a turn or curve, in line with and at approximately a right angle to approaching traffic. Option: A Chevron Alignment sign may be used on the far side of an intersection to inform drivers of a change of horizontal alignment for through traffic. Guidance: Spacing of Chevron Alignment signs should be such that the road user always has at least two in view, until the change in alignment eliminates the need for the signs. Chevron Alignment signs should be visible for a sufficient distance to provide the road user with adequate time to react to the change in alignment.
Page 2C-10
2003 Edition
W7-1 OR W7-3a
W7-1a OR W7-3b
W7-1b
W7-2
W7-2b
W7-3
W7-4d
W7-4e
W7-4f
W7-4
W7-4b
W7-4c
W7-6
2003 Edition
Page 2C-11
W5-1
W5-2
W5-3
W6-1
W6-1a
W6-1b
W6-2
W6-2a
W12-1
OR OR
W12-2
W12-2p
W14-1
W14-1a
W14-2
W14-2a
Page 2C-12
2003 Edition
2003 Edition
Page 2C-13
The DEAD END (W14-1a) or NO OUTLET (W14-2a) signs shall not be used instead of the W14-1 or W14-2 signs where traffic can proceed straight through the intersection into the dead end street or no outlet area.
Page 2C-14
2003 Edition
W3-1*
W3-2*
W3-3*
W3-4
W8-1
W8-2
W8-3
W8-4
W8-5
W8-7
W8-8
W8-9
W8-9a
W8-12
W8-13
W17-1
*An optional word message sign is shown in the Standard Highway Signs book.
Option: An Advisory Speed plaque (see Section 2C.46) may be used when the change in roadway condition requires a reduced speed.
2003 Edition
Page 2C-15
Section 2C.29 Advance Traffic Control Signs (W3-1, W3-2, W3-3, W3-4)
Standard: The Advance Traffic Control symbol signs (see Figure 2C-4) include the Stop Ahead (W3-1), Yield Ahead (W3-2), and Signal Ahead (W3-3) signs. These signs shall be installed on an approach to a primary traffic control device that is not visible for a sufficient distance to permit the road user to respond to the device (see Table 2C-4). The visibility criteria for a traffic control signal shall be based on having a continuous view of at least two signal faces for the distance specified in Table 4D-1. Support: Permanent obstructions causing the limited visibility might include roadway alignment or structures. Intermittent obstructions might include foliage or parked vehicles. Guidance: Where intermittent obstructions occur, engineering judgment should determine the treatment to be implemented. Option: An Advance Traffic Control sign may be used for additional emphasis of the primary traffic control device, even when the visibility distance to the device is satisfactory. Word messages (W3-1a, W3-2a, W3-3a) may be used as alternates to the Advance Traffic Control symbol signs. A supplemental street name plaque (see Section 2C.49) may be installed above or below an Advance Traffic Control sign. A warning beacon may be used with an Advance Traffic Control sign. A BE PREPARED TO STOP (W3-4) sign (see Figure 2C-4) may be used to warn of stopped traffic caused by a traffic control signal or in advance of a section of roadway that regularly experiences traffic congestion. Standard: When a BE PREPARED TO STOP sign is used in advance of a traffic control signal, it shall be used in addition to a Signal Ahead sign. Option: The BE PREPARED TO STOP sign may be supplemented with a warning beacon (see Section 4K.03). Guidance: When the warning beacon is interconnected with a traffic control signal or queue detection system, the BE PREPARED TO STOP sign should be supplemented with a WHEN FLASHING plaque.
Page 2C-16
2003 Edition
OR
W3-5
W3-5a
OR
OR
OR
W13-1
W13-2
W13-3
OR
W13-5
Standard: If used, Speed Reduction signs shall be followed by a Speed Limit (R2-1) sign installed at the beginning of the zone where the speed limit applies. The speed limit displayed on the Speed Reduction sign shall be identical to the speed limit displayed on the subsequent Speed Limit sign.
2003 Edition
Page 2C-17
W4-1
W4-2
W4-3
W4-5
W4-6
W6-3
W9-1
W9-2
W14-3
W16-9p
Page 2C-18
2003 Edition
A Two-Way Traffic (W6-3) sign with an AHEAD (W16-9p) plaque (see Figure 2C-6) should be used to warn road users of a transition from a one-way street to a two-lane, two-way section of roadway (see Figure 2B-12, Sheet 2 of 2). Option: The Two-Way Traffic sign may be used at intervals along a two-lane, two-way roadway and may be used to supplement the Divided Highway (Road) Ends (W6-2) sign discussed in Section 2C.19.
Section 2C.36 Advisory Exit, Ramp, and Curve Speed Signs (W13-2, W13-3, W13-5)
Standard: Advisory Exit, Ramp, and Curve Speed signs shall be vertical rectangles. The advisory Exit Speed (W13-2), Ramp Speed (W13-3), or Curve Speed (W13-5) signs (see Figure 2C-5) shall be used where engineering judgment indicates the need to advise road users of the recommended speed on an exit, a ramp, or a curve. Guidance: When used, the Exit Speed sign should be installed along the deceleration lane. The Exit Speed sign should be visible in time for the road user to make a reasonably safe slowing and exiting maneuver. The Ramp Speed sign should be visible in time for the road user to reduce to the recommended speed. Option: One or more Ramp Speed signs may be used along the deceleration lane, beyond the gore, or along the ramp (see Figure 2C-7). Based on engineering judgment, the Ramp Speed sign may be installed on the inside or outside of the curve to enhance its visibility. A Turn (W1-1) or Curve (W1-2) sign with an Advisory Speed (W13-1) plaque may be used in place of a Ramp Speed sign if it is located such that it clearly does not apply to drivers on the main roadway. A Curve Speed sign may be used at and beyond the beginning of a curve following a Horizontal Alignment and Advisory Speed sign combination, or when there is a need to remind road users of the recommended speed, or where the recommended speed changes because of a change in curvature (see Section 2C.06). Based on engineering judgment, the Curve Speed sign may be installed on the inside or outside of the curve to enhance its visibility. The advisory speed may be the 85th-percentile speed of free-flowing traffic, the speed corresponding to a 16degree ball bank indicator reading, or the speed otherwise determined by an engineering study because of unusual circumstances. Support: A 10-degree ball-bank indicator reading, formerly used in determining advisory speeds, is based on research from the 1930s. In modern vehicles, the 85th-percentile speed on curves approximates a 16-degree reading. This is the speed at which most drivers judgment recognizes incipient instability along a ramp or curve.
2003 Edition
Page 2C-19
R O
OR
OR
Sect. 2C.37
Page 2C-20
2003 Edition
W1-7
W2-1
W2-2
W2-3
W2-4
W2-6
W2-5
W16-12p
W4-4p
W25-1
W25-2
Guidance: The Intersection Warning sign should illustrate and depict the general configuration of the intersecting roadway, such as cross road, side road, T-intersection, or Y-intersection. Intersection Warning signs, other than the Circular Intersection symbol (W2-6) sign and the T-intersection symbol (W2-4) sign, should not be used on approaches controlled by STOP signs, YIELD signs, or signals. The Circular Intersection symbol (W2-6) sign should be installed on the approach to a YIELD sign controlled roundabout intersection. Where the side roads are not opposite of each other, the symbol for the intersection should indicate a slight offset.
2003 Edition
Page 2C-21
Section 2C.40 Vehicular Traffic Signs (W8-6, W11-1, W11-5, W11-5a, W11-8, W11-10, W11-11, W11-12p, W11-14)
Option: Vehicular Traffic (W8-6, W11-1, W11-5, W11-5a, W11-8, W11-10, W11-11, W11-12p, W11-14) signs (see Figure 2C-9) may be used to alert road users to locations where unexpected entries into the roadway by trucks, bicyclists, farm vehicles, emergency vehicles, golf carts, horse-drawn vehicles, or other vehicles might occur. The TRUCK CROSSING (W8-6) word message sign may be used as an alternate to the Truck Crossing symbol (W11-10) sign. Support: These locations might be relatively confined or might occur randomly over a segment of roadway. Guidance: Vehicular Traffic signs should be used only at locations where the road users sight distance is restricted, or the condition, activity, or entering traffic would be unexpected. If the condition or activity is seasonal or temporary, the Vehicular Traffic sign should be removed or covered when the condition or activity does not exist. Option: Supplemental plaques (see Section 2C.43) with legends such as AHEAD, XX METERS (XX FEET), NEXT XX km (NEXT XX MILES), or SHARE THE ROAD may be mounted below Vehicular Traffic signs to provide advance notice to road users of unexpected entries. Standard: The Emergency Vehicle (W11-8) sign with the EMERGENCY SIGNAL AHEAD (W11-12p) supplemental plaque (see Figure 2C-9) shall be placed in advance of all emergency-vehicle traffic control signals (see Chapter 4F). Option: The Emergency Vehicle (W11-8) sign, or a word message sign indicating the type of emergency vehicle (such as rescue squad), may be used in advance of the emergency vehicle station when no emergency-vehicle traffic control signal is present.
Section 2C.41 Nonvehicular Signs (W11-2, W11-3, W11-4, W11-6, W11-7, W11-9)
Option: Nonvehicular signs (see Figure 2C-10) may be used to alert road users in advance of locations where unexpected entries into the roadway or shared use of the roadway by pedestrians, animals, and other crossing activities might occur. Support: These conflicts might be relatively confined, or might occur randomly over a segment of roadway. Option: When used in advance of a crossing, Nonvehicular warning signs may be supplemented with supplemental plaques (see Section 2C.43) with the legend AHEAD, XX METERS (XX FEET), or NEXT XX km (NEXT XX MILES) to provide advance notice to road users of crossing activity. Standard: When used at the crossing, Nonvehicular signs shall be supplemented with a diagonal downward pointing arrow (W16-7p) plaque (see Figure 2C-11) showing the location of the crossing. Option: The crossing location may be defined with crosswalk markings (see Section 3B.17). Pedestrian, Bicycle, and School signs and their related supplemental plaques may have a fluorescent yellowgreen background with a black legend and border. Guidance: When a fluorescent yellow-green background is used, a systematic approach featuring one background color within a zone or area should be used. The mixing of standard yellow and fluorescent yellow-green backgrounds within a selected site area should be avoided. Nonvehicular signs should be used only at locations where the crossing activity is unexpected or at locations not readily apparent.
Sect. 2C.40 to 2C.41
Page 2C-22
2003 Edition
W8-6
W11-1
W11-5
W11-5a
W11-8
W11-10
W11-11
W11-12p
W11-14
W11-2
W11-3
W11-4
W11-6
W11-7
W11-9
W15-1
Sect. 2C.41
2003 Edition
Page 2C-23
W16-1
W16-2
W16-2a
W16-3
W16-3a
W16-4
W16-8
W16-8a
W16-10
W16-11
W16-5p
W16-6p
W16-7p
W16-9p
W16-13p
Section 2C.45 Distance Plaques (W16-2 series, W16-3 series, W16-4, W7-3a)
Option: The Distance Ahead (W16-2 series and W16-3 series) plaques (see Figure 2C-11) may be used to inform the road user of the distance to the condition indicated by the warning sign.
Sect. 2C.42 to 2C.45
Page 2C-24
2003 Edition
The Next Distance (W7-3a and W16-4) plaques (see Figures 2C-2 and 2C-11) may be used to inform road users of the length of roadway over which the condition indicated by the warning sign exists.
2003 Edition
Page 2C-25
Alternate messages such as TRAFFIC FROM LEFT (RIGHT) DOES NOT STOP or ONCOMING TRAFFIC DOES NOT STOP may be used on the W4-4p plaque when such messages more accurately describe the traffic controls established at the intersection. Standard: If the W4-4p plaque is used, it shall be installed below the STOP sign.
2003 Edition
Page 2D-1
CHAPTER 2D. GUIDE SIGNSCONVENTIONAL ROADS Section 2D.01 Scope of Conventional Road Guide Sign Standards
Standard: Standards for conventional road guide signs shall apply to any road or street other than low-volume roads (as defined in Section 5A.01), expressways, and freeways.
Page 2D-2
2003 Edition
2003 Edition
Page 2D-3
The minimum lettering sizes specified herein should be exceeded where conditions indicate a need for greater legibility.
Up Arrow
Down Arrow
Sect. 2D.06 to 2D.08
Page 2D-4
2003 Edition
Option: Arrows may be placed below the principal sign legend or on the appropriate side of the legend. Guidance: At an exit, an arrow should be placed at the side of the sign which will reinforce the movement of exiting traffic. The up-arrow design should be used. The width across the arrowhead should be at least equal to the height of the largest letter on the sign. For short downward pointing arrows on overhead signs, the width across the arrowhead should be 1.75 times the letter height. Diagrammatic signing used on conventional roads should follow the principles set forth in Section 2E.19.
2003 Edition
Page 2D-5
Option: Interstate Route signs may contain the State name in white upper-case letters on a blue background. Standard: Off-Interstate Business Route signs (see Figure 2D-3) shall consist of a cutout shield carrying the number of the connecting Interstate route and the words BUSINESS and either LOOP or SPUR in capital letters. The legend and border shall be white on a green background, and the shield shall be the same shape and dimensions as the Interstate Route sign. In no instance shall the word INTERSTATE appear on the Off-Interstate Business Route sign. Option: The Off-Interstate Business Route sign may be used on a major highway that is not a part of the Interstate system, but one that serves the business area of a City from an interchange on the system. When used on a green guide sign, a white square or rectangle may be placed behind the shield to improve contrast. Standard: U.S. Route signs (see Figure 2D-3) shall consist of black numerals on a white shield surrounded by a black background without a border. This sign shall be used on all U.S. routes and in connection with route sign assemblies on intersecting highways. A 600 x 600 mm (24 x 24 in) minimum sign size shall be used for U.S. route numbers with one or two digits, and a 750 x 600 mm (30 x 24 in) minimum sign size shall be used for U.S. route numbers having three digits. State Route signs shall be designed by the individual State highway agencies. Guidance: State Route signs (see Figure 2D-3) should be rectangular and should be approximately the same size as the U.S. Route sign. State Route signs should also be similar to the U.S. Route sign by containing approximately the same size black numerals on a white area surrounded by a black background without a border. The shape of the white area should be circular in the absence of any determination to the contrary by the individual State concerned. Standard: If County road authorities elect to establish and identify a special system of important County roads, a statewide policy for such signing shall be established that includes a uniform numbering system to uniquely identify each route. The County Route (M1-6) sign (see Figure 2D-3) shall consist of a pentagon shape with a yellow County name and route number and border on a blue background. County Route signs displaying two digits or the equivalent (letter and numeral, or two letters) shall be a minimum size of 450 x 450 mm (18 x 18 in); those carrying three digits or the equivalent shall be a minimum size of 600 x 600 mm (24 x 24 in).
Sect. 2D.11
Page 2D-6
2003 Edition
If a jurisdiction uses letters instead of numbers to identify routes, all references to numbered routes in this Chapter shall be interpreted to also include lettered routes. Guidance: If used with other route signs in common assemblies, the County Route sign should be of a size compatible with that of the other route signs. Option: When used on a green guide sign, a yellow square or rectangle may be placed behind the County Route sign to improve contrast. Standard: Route signs (see Figure 2D-3) for park and forest roads shall be designed with adequate distinctiveness and legibility and of a size compatible with other route signs used in common assemblies.
2003 Edition
Page 2D-7
M3-1
M3-2
M3-3
M3-4
M2-1
M2-2
M4-1
M4-1a
M4-2
M4-3
M4-4
M4-5
M4-6
M4-7
M4-7a
If used, the Cardinal Direction auxiliary sign shall be mounted directly above a route sign or an auxiliary sign for an alternative route.
Page 2D-8
2003 Edition
Standard: If used, the BUSINESS auxiliary sign shall be mounted directly above a route sign.
2003 Edition
Page 2D-9
M5-1
M5-2
M6-1
M6-2
M6-3
M6-4
M6-5
M6-6
M6-7
Page 2D-10
2003 Edition
Figure 2D-6. Illustration of Directional Assemblies and Other Route Signs (For One Direction of Travel Only) (Sheet 1 of 3)
U.S. ROUTE 37
90 m (300 ft)+ -
90 m (300 ft)+ -
(Enlarged, if necessary) 7.6 to 60 m (25 to 200 ft) 7.6 to 60 m (25 to 200 ft)
(Duplicate optional)
STATE ROUTE 18
TRAFFIC SIGNAL
U.S. ROUTE 44
U.S. ROUTE 44
STATE ROUTE 18
STATE ROUTE 3
U.S. ROUTE 37
STATE ROUTE 15
Notes: Lettering on Destination and Distance signs may be in all capital letters or a combination of upper-case and lower-case letters (see Section 2D.05). See Sections 2D.28 through 2D.31 and Section 2D.35 for low-speed and/or urban conditions.
Sect. 2D.28
2003 Edition
Page 2D-11
Figure 2D-6. Illustration of Directional Assemblies and Other Route Signs (For One Direction of Travel Only) (Sheet 2 of 3)
STATE ROUTE 15
U.S. ROUTE 56
90 m (300 ft)+ -
STATE ROUTE 41
U.S. ROUTE 46
Not less than 90 m (300 ft) Not less than 60 m (200 ft)
U.S. ROUTE 56
Notes: Lettering on Destination and Distance signs may be in all capital letters or a combination of upper-case and lower-case letters (see Section 2D.05). See Sections 2D.28 through 2D.31 and Section 2D.35 for low-speed and/or urban conditions.
90 m (300 ft)+ -
Sect. 2D.28
Page 2D-12
2003 Edition
Figure 2D-6. Illustration of Directional Assemblies and Other Route Signs (For One Direction of Travel Only) (Sheet 3 of 3)
U.S. ROUTE 86 STATE ROUTE 4 90 m (300 ft)+ 7.6 to 60 m (25 to 200 ft)
NOT LESS THAN 180 m (600 ft) NOT LESS THAN 120 m (400 ft) NOT LESS THAN 60 m (200 ft)
U.S. ROUTE 55
U.S. ROUTE 86 LINDA ST (Enlarged, if necessary) NOT LESS THAN 60 m (200 ft)
TE
U. S. RO U
0 (9
0 30
m t) 60 0 f to 20 6 7. 5 to (2
57
+ ft) -
RO S. U. U TE 55
Notes: Lettering on Destination and Distance signs may be in all capital letters or a combination of upper-case and lower-case letters (see Section 2D.05). See Sections 2D.28 through 2D.31 and Section 2D.35 for low-speed and/or urban conditions.
Sect. 2D.28
2003 Edition
Page 2D-13
Guidance: In urban areas where speeds are low, the Junction assembly should not be installed more than 90 m (300 ft) in advance of the intersection. Where prevailing speeds are high, greater spacings should be used. Option: Where two or more routes are to be indicated, a single Junction auxiliary sign may be used for the assembly and all route signs grouped in a single mounting, or a Combination Junction sign (see Section 2D.14) may be used.
Page 2D-14
2003 Edition
Directional assemblies should be located on the near right corner of the intersection. At major intersections and at Y or offset intersections, additional Directional assemblies should be installed on the far right or left corner to confirm the near-side assemblies. When the near-corner position is not practical for Directional assemblies, the far right corner should be the preferred alternative, with oversized signs, if necessary, for legibility. Where unusual conditions exist, the location of a Directional assembly should be determined by engineering judgment with the goal being to provide the best possible combination of view and safety. Support: It is more important that guide signs be readable at the right time and place than to be located with absolute uniformity. Figure 2D-6 shows typical placements of Directional assemblies.
2003 Edition
Page 2D-15
Page 2D-16
2003 Edition
D1-1
D1-2
D1-3
D1-1a
D1-2a
D1-3a
D2-1
D2-2
D2-3
Note: Lettering on Destination and Distance signs may be in all capital letters or a combination of upper-case and lower-case letters (see Section 2D.05).
Option: In urban areas, shorter advance distances may be used. Because the Destination sign is of lesser importance than the Junction, Advance Route Turn, or Directional assemblies, the Destination sign may be eliminated when sign spacing is critical. Support: Figure 2D-6 shows typical placements of Destination signs.
2003 Edition
Page 2D-17
Guidance: The control city should remain the same on all successive Distance signs throughout the length of the route until that City is reached. Option: If more than one distant point may properly be designated, such as where the route divides at some distance ahead to serve two destinations of similar importance, and if these two destinations cannot appear on the same sign, the two names may be alternated on successive signs. On a route continuing into another State, destinations in the adjacent State may be shown.
Page 2D-18
2003 Edition
OR
OR
D4-1
D3-1
D3-2
D4-2
In business districts and on principal arterials, Street Name signs should be placed at least on diagonally opposite corners. In residential areas, at least one Street Name sign should be mounted at each intersection. Signs naming both streets should be installed at each intersection. They should be mounted with their faces parallel to the streets they name. Option: To optimize visibility, Street Name signs may be mounted overhead. Street Name signs may also be placed above a regulatory or STOP or YIELD sign with no required vertical separation. At intersection crossroads where the same road has two different street names for each direction of travel, both street names may be shown on the same sign along with directional arrows. Guidance: In urban or suburban areas, especially where Advance Street Name signs are not used, the use of overheadmounted Street Name signs should be considered. If overhead Street Name signs are used, the lettering should be at least 300 mm (12 in) high in capital letters, or 300 mm (12 in) upper-case letters with 225 mm (9 in) lowercase letters. Support: Information regarding the use of street names on supplemental plaques for use with intersection-related warning signs is contained in Section 2C.49.
Sect. 2D.38
2003 Edition
Page 2D-19
Page 2D-20
2003 Edition
2003 Edition
Page 2D-21
D5-1
D5-2
D5-3
D5-4
D5-5
D5-5a
D5-5b
D5-5c
D6-1
D6-2
D6-3
Note: D6-1 through D6-3 signs may use legend AREA, VIEW, or OVERLOOK.
Standard: The standard installation for Weigh Station signing shall include three basic signs: A. Advance sign (D8-1); B. Exit Direction sign (D8-2); and C. Gore sign (D8-3). Support: Example locations of these signs are shown in Figure 2D-10. Option: Where State law requires a regulatory sign (R13-1) in advance of the Weigh Station, a fourth sign (see Section 2B.49) may be located following the Advance sign. Guidance: The Exit Direction sign (D8-2) or the Advance sign (D8-1) should display, either within the sign border or on a supplemental panel, the changeable message OPEN or CLOSED.
Page 2D-22
2003 Edition
D8-3
1.6 km (1 mile)
D8-1
Sect. 2D.45
Page 2D-23
D9-1 Telephone
D9-2 Hospital
D9-3 Camping
D9-6 Handicapped
D9-7 Gas
D9-8 Food
D9-9 Lodging
D9-13a Hospital
Rev. 1 (new D9-20 and D9-20a signs)
Option: Individual States may sign for whatever alternative fuels are available at appropriate locations. Standard: General Service signs, if used at intersections, shall be accompanied by a directional message. Option: The General Service legends may be either symbols or word messages. Standard: Symbols and word message General Service legends shall not be intermixed on the same sign. The Pharmacy (D9-20) sign shall only be used to indicate the availability of a pharmacy that is open, with a State-licensed pharmacist present and on duty, 24 hours per day, 7 days per week, and that is located within 4.8 km (3 mi) of an interchange on the Federal-aid system. The D9-20 sign shall have a 24 HR (D9-20a) plaque mounted below it. Guidance: If used, the word message TRUCK PARKING (D9-16) sign should be placed on a separate panel below the other general motorist services. Support: Formats for displaying different combinations of these services are presented in Section 2E.51. Option: If the distance to the next point at which services are available is 16 km (10 mi) or more, a sign NEXT SERVICES XX km (XX MILES) (D9-17) may be used as a separate panel installed below the General Service sign (see Figure 2E-43). The International Symbol of Accessibility for the Handicapped (D9-6) sign may be used beneath General Service signs where paved ramps and rest room facilities accessible to, and usable by, the physically handicapped are provided. The Recreational Vehicle Sanitary Station (D9-12) sign may be used as needed to indicate the availability of facilities designed for the use of dumping wastes from recreational vehicle holding tanks.
Sect. 2D.45
Rev. 1
Rev. 1
Page 2D-24
2003 Edition
The Litter Container (D9-4) sign may be placed in advance of roadside turnouts or rest areas, unless it distracts the drivers attention from other more important regulatory, warning, or directional signs. A Carpool Information (D12-2) sign (see Figure 2D-12) may be installed as needed (see Section 2E.57). A Channel 9 Monitored (D12-3) sign may be installed as needed. Official public agencies or their designees may be shown as the monitoring agency on the sign (see Section 2E.56). An EMERGENCY DIAL XXX (D12-4) sign along with the appropriate number to dial, may be used for cellular phone communications. A TRAVEL INFO CALL 511 (D12-5) sign (see Figure 2D-12) may be installed if a 511 travel information services telephone number is available to road users for obtaining traffic, public transportation, weather, construction, or road condition information. The logo of the transportation agency or the travel information service or program that is providing the travel information may be incorporated within the D12-5 sign either above or below the TRAVEL INFO CALL 511 legend. Standard: The logo of a commercial entity shall not be incorporated within the TRAVEL INFO CALL 511 sign. The TRAVEL INFO CALL 511 sign shall have a white legend and border on a blue background. Guidance: If the logo of the transportation agency or the travel information service or program is used, the logos maximum height should not exceed two times the letter height used in the legend of the sign. Option: The Emergency Medical Services (D9-13) symbol sign may be used to identify medical service facilities that have been included in the Emergency Medical Services system under a signing policy developed by the State and/or local highway agency. Standard: The Emergency Medical Services symbol sign shall not be used to identify services other than qualified hospitals, ambulance stations, and qualified free-standing emergency medical treatment centers. If used, the Emergency Medical Services symbol shall be supplemented by a sign identifying the type of service provided. Option: The Emergency Medical Services symbol sign may be used above the HOSPITAL (D9-13a) word message sign or H (D9-2) symbol sign or above a sign with either the legend AMBULANCE STATION (D9-13b) or EMERGENCY MEDICAL CARE (D9-13c). The Emergency Medical Services symbol sign may also be used to supplement Telephone (D9-1), Channel 9 Monitored (D12-3), or POLICE (D9-14) signs. Standard: The legend EMERGENCY MEDICAL CARE shall not be used for services other than qualified freestanding emergency medical treatment centers. Guidance: Each State should develop guidelines for the implementation of the Emergency Medical Services symbol sign. The State should consider the following guidelines in the preparation of its policy: A. AMBULANCE 1. 24-hour service, 7 days per week. 2. Staffed by two State-certified persons trained at least to the basic level. 3. Vehicular communications with a hospital emergency department. 4. Operator should have successfully completed an emergency vehicle operator training course. B. HOSPITAL 1. 24-hour service, 7 days per week. 2. Emergency department facilities with a physician (or emergency care nurse on duty within the emergency department with a physician on call) trained in emergency medical procedures on duty. 3. Licensed or approved for definitive medical care by an appropriate State authority. 4. Equipped for radio voice communications with ambulances and other hospitals. C. Channel 9 Monitored 1. Provided by either professional or volunteer monitors. 2. Available 24 hours per day, 7 days per week. 3. The service should be endorsed, sponsored, or controlled by an appropriate government authority to guarantee the level of monitoring.
Sect. 2D.45
2003 Edition
Page 2D-25
OR
I1-1
I-2
I-3
I-5 Airport
I-8 Library
I-11 Recycling
D9-14
D12-1
D12-2
D12-3
D12-4
D12-5
D13-1
D13-2
Section 2D.46 Reference Location Signs (D10-1 through D10-3) and Intermediate Reference Location Signs (D10-1a through D10-3a)
Support: There are two types of reference location signs: A. Reference Location signs (D10-1, 2, and 3) show an integer distance point along a highway; and B. Intermediate Reference Location signs (D10-1a, 2a, and 3a) also show a decimal between integer distance points along a highway. Option: Reference Location (D10-1 to D10-3) signs (see Figure 2D-13) may be installed along any section of a highway route or ramp to assist road users in estimating their progress, to provide a means for identifying the location of emergency incidents and traffic crashes, and to aid in highway maintenance and servicing. To augment the reference location sign system, Intermediate Reference Location (D10-1a to D10-3a) signs (see Figure 2D-13), which show the tenth of a kilometer (mile) with a decimal point, may be installed at one tenth of a kilometer (mile) intervals, or at some other regular spacing.
Sect. 2D.46
Page 2D-26
2003 Edition
OR OR
OR
D10-1
D10-1a
D10-2
OR OR OR
D10-2a
D10-3
D10-3a
Sect. 2D.46
2003 Edition
Page 2D-27
Standard: When Intermediate Reference Location (D10-1a to D10-3a) signs are used to augment the reference location sign system, the reference location sign at the integer kilometer (mile) point shall display a decimal point and a zero numeral. When placed on freeways or expressways, Reference Location (D10-1 to D10-3) signs shall contain 250 mm (10 in) white numerals on a 300 mm (12 in) wide green background with a white border. The signs shall be 600, 900, or 1200 mm (24, 36, or 48 in) in height for one, two, or three digits, respectively, and shall contain the abbreviation km (MILE) in 100 mm (4 in) white letters. When placed on conventional roads, Reference Location (D10-1 to D10-3) signs shall contain 150 mm (6 in) white numerals on a green background that is at least 250 mm (10 in) wide with a white border. The signs shall contain the abbreviation km (MILE) in 100 mm (4 in) white letters. The design details for reference location signs shall be as shown in the "Standard Highway Signs" book (see Section 1A.11). Reference location signs shall have a minimum mounting height of 1.2 m (4 ft) to the bottom of the sign in accordance with the mounting height requirements of delineators (see Section 3D.04), and shall not be governed by the mounting height requirements prescribed in Section 2A.18. The distance numbering shall be continuous for each route within a State, except where overlaps occur (see Section 2E.28). Where routes overlap, reference location sign continuity shall be established for only one of the routes. If one of the overlapping routes is an Interstate route, that route shall be selected for continuity of distance numbering. For divided highways, the distance measurement shall be made on the northbound and eastbound roadways. The reference location signs for southbound or westbound roadways shall be set at locations directly opposite the reference location signs for the northbound or eastbound roadways. Guidance: Zero distance should begin at the south and west State lines, or at the south and west terminus points where routes begin within a State. On a route without reference location sign continuity, the first reference location sign beyond the overlap should indicate the total distance traveled on the route so that road users will have a means of correlating their travel distance between reference location signs with that shown on their odometer. Standard: Except as provided in the option below, reference location signs shall be installed on the right side of the roadway. Option: Where conditions limit or restrict the use of reference location signs on the right side of the roadway, they may be installed in the median. On two-lane conventional roadways, reference location signs may be installed on one side of the roadway only and may be installed back-to-back. Reference location signs may be placed up to 9 m (30 ft) from the edge of the pavement. If a reference location sign cannot be installed in the correct location, it may be moved in either direction as much as 15 m (50 ft). Guidance: If a reference location sign cannot be placed within 15 m (50 ft) of the correct location, it should be omitted. Option: Enhanced reference location signs (see Section 2E.54) may also be used on conventional roads.
Page 2D-28
2003 Edition
Sect. 2D.48
2003 Edition
Page 2D-29
Page 2D-30
2003 Edition
Guidance: If used, the CROSSOVER sign should be installed immediately beyond the median opening, either on the right side of the roadway or in the median. Option: The Advance Crossover (D13-2) sign (see Figure 2D-12) may be installed in advance of the CROSSOVER sign to provide advance notice of the crossover. Standard: If used, the Advance Crossover sign shall be a horizontal rectangle of appropriate size to carry the word CROSSOVER and the distance to the median opening. The sign shall have white legend and border on a green background. Guidance: The distance shown on the Advance Crossover sign should be 2 km, 1 km, or 500 m (or should be 1 MILE, 1/2 MILE, or 1/4 MILE), unless unusual conditions require some other distance. If used, the sign should be installed either on the right side of the roadway or in the median at approximately the distance shown.
D6-4
D6-4a
2003 Edition
Page 2E-1
CHAPTER 2E. GUIDE SIGNSFREEWAYS AND EXPRESSWAYS Section 2E.01 Scope of Freeway and Expressway Guide Sign Standards
Support: These standards provide a uniform and effective system of highway signing for high-volume, high-speed motor vehicle traffic on freeways and expressways. The requirements and specifications for expressway signing exceed those for conventional roads (see Chapter 2D), but are less than those for freeway signing. Since there are many geometric design variables to be found in existing roads, a signing concept commensurate with prevailing conditions is the primary consideration. Section 2A.01 includes definitions of freeway and expressway. Guide signs for freeways and expressways are primarily identified by the name of the sign rather than by an assigned sign code. Guidelines for the design of guide signs for freeways and expressways are provided in Chapter 8 (Design Guidelines) of the "Standard Highway Signs" book (see Section 1A.11). Standard: The standards prescribed herein for freeway or expressway guide signing shall apply to any highway that meets the definition of such facilities.
Page 2E-2
2003 Edition
Support: Color requirements for route signs and trailblazers, signs with blank-out or changeable messages, signs for services, rest areas, park and recreational areas, and for certain miscellaneous signs are specified in the individual sections dealing with the particular sign or sign group.
2003 Edition
Page 2E-3
Guidance: Where there are long distances between interchanges and the alignment is relatively unchanging, signs should be positioned for their best effect on road users. The tendency to group all signing in the immediate vicinity of rural interchanges should be avoided by considering the entire route in the development of sign plans. Extra effort should be given to the placement of signs at natural target locations to command the attention of the road user, particularly when the message requires an action by the road user.
Page 2E-4
2003 Edition
A State Route 27
B A
E6-2
E6-2a
2003 Edition
Page 2E-5
Guidance: Control city legends should be used in the following situations along a freeway: A. At interchanges between freeways; B. At separation points of overlapping freeway routes; C. On directional signs on intersecting routes, to guide traffic entering the freeway; D. On Pull-Through signs; and E. On the bottom line of post-interchange distance signs. Support: Continuity of destination names is also useful on expressways serving long-distance or intrastate travel. The determination of major destinations or control cities is important to the quality of service provided by the freeway. Control cities on freeway guide signs are selected by the States and are contained in the List of Control Cities for Use in Guide Signs on Interstate Highways, published and available from American Association of State and Highway Transportation Officials (see Page i for AASHTOs address).
Page 2E-6
2003 Edition
Table 2E-1. Minimum Letter and Numeral Sizes for Expressway Guide Signs According to Interchange Classification (sizes shown in millimeters)
Type of Sign Type of Interchange (see Section 2E.29) Major Category a Category b Intermediate Minor Overhead
A. Advance Guide, Exit Direction, and Overhead Guide Signs Exit Plaque Word Numeral & Letter Interstate Route Sign Numeral 1or 2 Digit Shield 3 Digit Shield U.S. or State Route Sign Numeral 1 or 2 Digit Shield 3 Digit Shield Alternate (Example: U.S. Alt. 56) Letters Numeral Cardinal Direction First Letter Rest of Word Name of Destination Upper-Case Letters Lower-Case Letters Distance Number Distance Fraction Distance Word Action Message Word B. Gore Signs Word Numeral & Letter 250 300 250 300 250 300 200 250 500 375 450 300 300 250 400 300 375 250 250 250 330 250 300 250 250 250 265 200 250 200 200 200 400 300 375 250 250 250 450 375 375 300 300 250 250 200 375 300 375 450 300 375 300 375 250 300 300 375 450 900 x 900 450 900 x 900 450 900 x 900 1125 x 900 300 600 x 600 750 x 600 450 900 x 900 1125 x 900 450 900 x 900 1125 x 900 450 900 x 900 1125 x 900 250 375 250 375 250 375 200 300 250 375
2003 Edition
Page 2E-7
Table 2E-1. Minimum Letter and Numeral Sizes for Expressway Guide Signs According to Interchange Classification (sizes shown in inches)
Type of Sign Type of Interchange (see Section 2E.29) Major Category a Category b Intermediate Minor Overhead
A. Advance Guide, Exit Direction, and Overhead Guide Signs Exit Plaque Word Numeral & Letter Interstate Route Sign Numeral 1or 2 Digit Shield 3 Digit Shield U.S. or State Route Sign Numeral 1 or 2 Digit Shield 3 Digit Shield Alternate (Example: U.S. Alt. 56) Letters Numeral Cardinal Direction First Letter Rest of Word Name of Destination Upper-Case Letters Lower-Case Letters Distance Number Distance Fraction Distance Word Action Message Word B. Gore Signs Word Numeral & Letter 10 12 10 12 10 12 8 10 20 15 18 12 12 10 16 12 15 10 10 10 13.3 10 12 10 10 10 10.6 8 10 8 8 8 16 12 15 10 10 10 18 15 15 12 12 10 10 8 15 12 15 18 12 15 12 15 10 12 12 15 18 36 x 36 45 x 36 18 36 x 36 45 x 36 18 36 x 36 45 x 36 12 24 x 24 30 x 24 18 36 x 36 45 x 36 18 36 x 36 45 x 36 18 36 x 36 45 x 36 10 15 10 15 10 15 8 12 10 15
Page 2E-8
2003 Edition
Table 2E-2. Minimum Letter and Numeral Sizes for Expressway Guide Signs According to Sign Type (Sheet 1 of 2)
Type of Sign A. Pull-Through Signs Destination Upper-Case Letters Destination Lower-Case Letters Route Sign as Message Cardinal Direction 1- or 2-Digit Shield 3-Digit Shield B. Supplemental Guide Signs Exit Number Word Exit Number Numeral and Letter Place Name Upper-Case Letters Place Name Lower-Case Letters Action Message C. Changeable Message Signs Characters D. Interchange Sequence Signs Word Upper-Case Letters Word Lower-Case Letters Numeral Fraction E. Next X Exits Sign Place Name Upper-Case Letters Place Name Lower-Case Letters NEXT X EXITS F. Distance Signs Word Upper-Case Letters Word Lower-Case Letters Numeral G. General Services Signs Exit Number Word Exit Number Numeral and Letter Services H. Rest Area and Scenic Area Signs Word Distance Numeral Distance Fraction Distance Word Action Message Word 250 300 200 250 250 10 12 8 10 10 200 300 200 8 12 8 200 150 200 8 6 8 265 200 200 10.6 8 8 265 200 250 200 10.6 8 10 8 265* 10.6* 200 300 265 200 200 8 12 10.6 8 8 250 900 x 900 1125 x 900 10 36 x 36 45 x 36 330 250 13.3 10 Minimum Size (mm) Minimum Size (inches)
Sect. 2E.17
2003 Edition
Page 2E-9
Table 2E-2. Minimum Letter and Numeral Sizes for Expressway Guide Signs According to Sign Type (Sheet 2 of 2)
Type of Sign I. Reference Location Signs Word Numeral J. Boundary and Orientation Signs Word Upper-Case Letters Word Lower-Case Letters K. Next Exit and Next Services Signs Word and Numeral L. Exit Only Signs Word 200 300 8 12 200 150 8 6 100 250 4 10 Minimum Size (mm) Minimum Size (inches)
*Changeable Message Signs may often require larger sizes than the minimum. A size of 450 mm (18 in)
should be used where traffic speeds are greater than 90 km/h (55 mph), in areas of persistent inclement weather, or where complex driving tasks are involved.
Guidance: A special effort should be made to balance legend components for maximum legibility of the symbol with the rest of the sign. Option: Educational plaques may be used below symbol signs where needed.
Page 2E-10
2003 Edition
Table 2E-3. Minimum Letter and Numeral Sizes for Freeway Guide Signs According to Interchange Classification (sizes shown in millimeters)
Type of Interchange (see Section 2E.29) Major Category a Category b Intermediate Minor Overhead
Type of Sign
A. Advance Guide, Exit Direction, and Overhead Guide Signs Exit Plaque Word Numeral & Letter Interstate Route Sign Numeral 1- or 2-Digit Shield 3-Digit Shield U.S. or State Route Sign Numeral 1- or 2-Digit Shield 3-Digit Shield Alternate (Example: U.S. Alt. 56) Letters Numeral Cardinal Direction First Letter Rest of Word Name of Destination Upper-Case Letters Lower-Case Letters Distance Number Distance Fraction Distance Word Action Message Word B. Gore Signs Word Numeral & Letter 300 375 300 375 300 375 200 250 500 375 450 300 300 300 500 375 450/375 300/250 300/250 300/250 400 300 375 250 250 250 330 250 300 200 200 200 400 300 375 250 250 250 450 375 375 300 375 300 250 200 300 300 375 450 375/300 450/375 300 375 250 300 300 375 600/450 1200 x 1200/ 900 x 900 450 900 x 900 450 900 x 900 1125 x 900 300 600 x 600 750 x 600 450 900 x 900 1125 x 900 600/450 1200 x 1200/ 900 x 900 1500 x 1200/ 1125 x 900 450 900 x 900 1125 x 900 250 375 250 375 250 375 250 375 250 375
Note: (/) Slanted bar signifies separation of desirable and minimum sizes.
Sect. 2E.19
2003 Edition
Page 2E-11
Table 2E-3. Minimum Letter and Numeral Sizes for Freeway Guide Signs According to Interchange Classification (sizes shown in inches)
Type of Interchange (see Section 2E.29) Major Category a Category b Intermediate Minor Overhead
Type of Sign
A. Advance Guide, Exit Direction, and Overhead Guide Signs Exit Plaque Word Numeral & Letter Interstate Route Sign Numeral 1- or 2-Digit Shield 3-Digit Shield U.S. or State Route Sign Numeral 1- or 2-Digit Shield 3-Digit Shield Alternate (Example: U.S. Alt. 56) Letters Numeral Cardinal Direction First Letter Rest of Word Name of Destination Upper-Case Letters Lower-Case Letters Distance Number Distance Fraction Distance Word Action Message Word B. Gore Signs Word Numeral & Letter 12 15 12 15 12 15 8 10 20 15 18 12 12 12 20 15 18/15 12/10 12/10 12/10 16 12 15 10 10 10 13.3 10 12 8 8 8 16 12 15 10 10 10 18 15 15 12 15 12 10 8 15 12 15 18 15/12 18/15 12 15 10 12 12 15 24/18 48 x 48/ 36 x 36 60 x 48/ 45 x 36 18 36 x 36 45 x 36 18 36 x 36 45 x 36 12 24 x 24 30 x 24 18 36 x 36 45 x 36 24/18 48 x 48/ 36 x 36 60 x 48/ 45 x 36 18 36 x 36 45 x 36 10 15 10 15 10 15 10 15 10 15
Note: (/) Slanted bar signifies separation of desirable and minimum sizes.
Sect. 2E.19
Page 2E-12
2003 Edition
Table 2E-4. Minimum Letter and Numeral Sizes for Freeway Guide Signs According to Sign Type (Sheet 1 of 2)
Type of Sign A. Pull-Through Signs Destination Upper-Case Letters Destination Lower-Case Letters Route Sign as Message Cardinal Direction 1- or 2-Digit Shield 3-Digit Shield B. Supplemental Guide Signs Exit Number Word Exit Number Numeral and Letter Place Name Upper-Case Letters Place Name Lower-Case Letters Action Message C. Changeable Message Signs Characters D. Interchange Sequence Signs Word Upper-Case Letters Word Lower-Case Letters Numeral Fraction E. Next X Exits Sign Place Name Upper-Case Letters Place Name Lower-Case Letters NEXT X EXITS F. Distance Signs Word Upper-Case Letters Word Lower-Case Letters Numeral G. General Service Signs Exit Number Word Exit Number Numeral and Letter Services H. Rest Area and Scenic Area Signs Word Distance Numeral Distance Fraction Distance Word Action Message Word 300 375 250 300 300 12 15 10 12 12 250 375 250 10 15 10 200 150 200 8 6 8 330 250 250 13.3 10 10 330 250 330 250 13.3 10 13.3 10 265* 10.6* 250 375 330 250 250 10 15 13.3 10 10 300 900 x 900 1125 x 900 12 36 x 36 45 x 36 Minimum Size (mm) Minimum Size (inches)
400 300
16 12
Sect. 2E.19
2003 Edition
Page 2E-13
Table 2E-4. Minimum Letter and Numeral Sizes for Freeway Guide Signs According to Sign Type (Sheet 2 of 2)
Type of Sign I. Reference Location Signs Word Numeral J. Boundary and Orientation Signs Word Upper-Case Letters Word Lower-Case Letters K. Next Exit and Next Services Signs Word and Numeral L. Exit Only Signs Word M. Diagrammatic Signs Lane Widths Lane Line Segments Gap Between Lane Lines Stem Height (up to upper point of departure) Arrowhead (standard up arrow) Space Between Arrowhead and Route Shield 125 25 x 150 150 750 200 300 5 1x6 6 30 8 12 200 300 8 12 200 150 8 6 100 250 4 10 Minimum Size (mm) Minimum Size (inches)
*Changeable Message Signs may often require larger sizes than the minimum. A size of 450 mm (18 in)
should be used where traffic speeds are greater than 90 km/h (55 mph), in areas of persistent inclement weather, or where complex driving tasks are involved.
Guidance: Diagrammatic signs should be designed in accordance with the following additional criteria: A. The graphic should not depict deceleration lanes. B. No more than one destination should be shown for each arrowhead, and no more than two destinations should be shown per sign. C. A black on yellow EXIT ONLY panel should be used to supplement a lane drop graphic. D. The shaft for the exit ramp movement should be shorter than, but not separated from, the through movement graphic. Where the movements are freeway splits rather than exits, the shafts should be equal in length. E. Arrow shafts should contain lane lines where appropriate. F. Route shields, cardinal directions, and destinations should be clearly related to the arrowhead, and the arrowhead should point toward the route shield for the off movement. G. The cardinal direction should be placed adjacent to the route shield, and the destination should be placed below and justified with the route shield. Diagrammatic signs should be used at the Advance Guide sign location(s) for the following: A. Left exits (see Figure 2E-3). B. Splits where the off-route movement is to the left (see Figure 2E-4). C. Optional lane splits for non-overlapping routes (see Figure 2E-5). D. Where a two-lane exit has an optional lane that carries the through route (see Figures 2E-6 and 2E-7). These interchanges create serious expectancy problems for drivers who are unfamiliar with the interchange. E. Left exit interchange lane drop situations. In this situation, an EXIT ONLY (E11-1c) panel should be used without a down arrow for Advance Guide signs (see Figure 2E-8).
Sect. 2E.19
Page 2E-14
2003 Edition
The upper half of a Left Exit plaque, which contains the word LEFT, may have a black legend and border on a yellow background.
Standard: Diagrammatic signs have been shown to be inferior to conventional signs at cloverleaf interchanges and shall not be used at these locations. Support: Specific guidelines for more detailed design of diagrammatic signs are contained in the Standard Highway Signs book (see Section 1A.11).
2003 Edition
Page 2E-15
I-270
I-495
Sect. 2E.20
Page 2E-16
2003 Edition
I-50
I-79
I-50
Sect. 2E.20
2003 Edition
Page 2E-17
Figure 2E-6. Diagrammatic Signs for Two-Lane Exit with Optional Lane
U.S. 40 I-12
Sect. 2E.20
Page 2E-18
2003 Edition
Figure 2E-7. Diagrammatic Signs for Two-Lane Exit with Optional Lane
SR 24 I-47
I-47 & SR 24
Sect. 2E.20
2003 Edition
Page 2E-19
Figure 2E-8. EXIT ONLY on Left with Diagrammatic Sign for Left Lane Dropped at an Interchange
U.S. 56 I-61
I-61 & U.S. 56 The upper half of a Left Exit plaque, which contains the word LEFT, may have a black legend and border on a yellow background.
Sect. 2E.20
Page 2E-20
2003 Edition
E11-1
E11-1a
E11-1b
E11-1c
2003 Edition
Page 2E-21
Figure 2E-10. EXIT ONLY Panels for Right Lane Dropped at an Interchange
U.S. 40 SR 7
U.S. 40 & SR 7
Sect. 2E.22
Page 2E-22
2003 Edition
2003 Edition
Page 2E-23
OR
M1-1
M1-2
M1-4
Option: The standard Trailblazer Assembly (see Section 2D.32) may be used on roads leading to the freeway or expressway. Component parts of the Trailblazer Assembly may be included on a single sign panel. Independently mounted Route signs may be used instead of Pull-Through signs as confirmation information (see Section 2E.11). The commonly used name or trailblazer symbol for a toll facility may be displayed on nontoll sections of the Interstate Highway System at: A. The last exit before entering a toll section of the Interstate Highway System; B. The interchange or connection with a toll facility, whether or not the toll facility is a part of the Interstate Highway System; and C. Other locations within a reasonable approach distance of toll facilities when the name or trailblazer symbol for the toll facility would provide better guidance to road users unfamiliar with the area than would place names and route numbers. The toll facility name or symbol may be included as a part of the guide sign installations on intersecting highways and approach roads to indicate the interchange with a toll section of an Interstate route. Where needed for the proper direction of traffic, a trailblazer for a toll facility that is part of the Interstate Highway System may be displayed with the Interstate Trailblazer Assembly.
Page 2E-24
2003 Edition
Reference should be made to Section 2E.10 and Sections 2E.30 through 2E.39 for a detailed description of the signs in the order that they should appear at the approach to and beyond each interchange. Guide signs placed in advance of an interchange deceleration lane should be spaced at least 245 m (800 ft) apart. Supplemental guide signing should be used sparingly as provided in Section 2E.32.
2003 Edition
Page 2E-25
Figure 2E-12. Example of Interchange Numbering for Mainline and Circumferential Routes
20
73
18
10 7
14
22
17 12
107
15
17
73 473 CIRCUMFERENTIAL
10
10 15 14 19
FUTURE
109 9
11
111 14
20
116
113 12 115
22
117
22
118
11
5 23
473
10 2 26 28
25
6
73
5 15 A 115
119
22
113
21
Sect. 2E.28
Page 2E-26
2003 Edition
Figure 2E-13. Example of Interchange Numbering for Mainline, Loop, and Spur Routes
3
4A
3 14 13 1A 13 13
4B
103 SPUR
15
1B SPUR 103 1
14 4A 2
2
4 4B
1 13
11
12
15
14
LOOP
11 15A
15B
LOOP
203
9 9B 9A 9B
12
15 11 11
10
9
11
203
9A
6B
6B
7 2
6A 6
203
LOOP
6A
5 4
5 1B 1
203
Legend
1
4
1A 4
3
LOOP
3 9A 1 115
STATE LINE
Sect. 2E.28
2003 Edition
Page 2E-27
Where numbered routes overlap, continuity of interchange numbering shall be established for only one of the routes (see Figure 2E-14). If one of the routes is an Interstate, the Interstate route shall maintain continuity of interchange numbering. Guidance: The route chosen for continuity of interchange numbering should also have reference location sign continuity (see Figure 2E-14).
Page 2E-28
2003 Edition
39
218
217
36
75
76
215 214 B
214 B
212
211
210
85 88
36
84
86
207
205
39
Sect. 2E.31
2003 Edition
Page 2E-29
E1-1
E1-2
E1-2a
Sect. 2E.31
Page 2E-30
2003 Edition
E2-1
E2-1A
Standard: The Next Exit supplemental sign shall carry the legend NEXT EXIT X km (X MILES). If the Next Exit supplemental sign is used, it shall be placed below the Advance Guide sign nearest the interchange. It shall be mounted so as to not adversely affect the breakaway feature of the sign support structure. Option: The legend for the Next Exit supplemental sign may be displayed in either one or two lines. The one-line message is the more desirable choice unless the message causes the sign to have a horizontal dimension greater than that of the Advance Guide sign.
2003 Edition
Page 2E-31
Figure 2E-18. Supplemental Guide Sign for a Park and Ride Facility (Route without Exit Numbering)
Sect. 2E.32
Page 2E-32
2003 Edition
Figure 2E-19. Supplemental Guide Sign for a Park and Ride Facility (Route with Exit Numbering)
Sect. 2E.32
2003 Edition
Page 2E-33
Page 2E-34
2003 Edition
E5-2
E5-1a
E5-1
E13-1 (optional)
Guidance: The arrow should be aligned to approximate the angle of departure. Each gore should be treated similarly, whether the interchange has one exit roadway or multiple exits. Option: Where extra emphasis of an especially low advisory ramp speed is needed, an E13-1 panel indicating the advisory speed may be mounted below the Exit Gore sign (see Figure 2E-21) to supplement, but not to replace, the exit or ramp advisory speed warning signs.
2003 Edition
Page 2E-35
Option: The text identification of a route may be shown instead of a route shield, such as "US XX", "State Route XX", or "County Route X. Guidance: If a second line is used, it should be reserved for communities of general interest that are located on or immediately adjacent to the route or for major traffic generators along the route. Option: The choice of names for the second line, if it is used, may be varied on successive Distance signs to give road users maximum information concerning communities served by the route. Standard: The third, or bottom line, shall contain the name and distance to a control city (if any) that has national significance for travelers using the route. Guidance: Distances to the same destinations should not be shown more frequently than at 8 km (5 mi) intervals. The distances displayed on these signs should be the actual distance to the destination points and not to the exit from the freeway or expressway.
Page 2E-36
2003 Edition
Figure 2E-23. Signing of Closely Spaced Interchanges Using Interchange Sequence Signs
RLS 23
Tolenas St.
Kenston Ave.
RLS 22
Fitch Way
RLS 21
Park St.
Sect. 2E.37
2003 Edition
Page 2E-37
Sect. 2E.37
Page 2E-38
2003 Edition
Interchange Sequence signs shall not be substituted for Exit Direction signs. Guidance: Interchange Sequence signs should be located in the median. After the first of the series, Interchange Sequence signs should be placed approximately midway between interchanges. Standard: Interchange Sequence signs located in the median shall be installed at overhead sign height. Option: Interchange numbers may be shown to the left of the interchange name or route number.
2003 Edition
Page 2E-39
I-17
I-42
36 215
35
34
33
I-42
214
213
212
I-17
Sect. 2E.41
Page 2E-40
2003 Edition
U.S. 65
U.S. 65
OR
OR
I-52 Note: See Figure 2E-38 for examples of multi-lane crossroad signing for cloverleaf interchanges
Sect. 2E.41
2003 Edition
Page 2E-41
Figure 2E-29. Examples of Guide Signs for Full Cloverleaf Interchange With Collector-Distributor Roadways
I-52 104
103
U.S. 65
U.S. 65
102
OR
101
OR
100
OR
I-52 Note: See Figure 2E-38 for examples of multi-lane crossroad signing for cloverleaf interchanges
Sect. 2E.41
Page 2E-42
2003 Edition
303
302
SR 24 301
SR 24
300
299
I-47
Note: See Figure 2E-37 for examples of multi-lane crossroad signing for partial cloverleaf interchanges
Sect. 2E.41
2003 Edition
Page 2E-43
44
43 I-47
Note: See Figures 2E-34 and 2E-36 for examples of crossroad signing for one-lane approaches and examples of multi-lane crossroad signing for diamond interchanges
Sect. 2E.41
Page 2E-44
2003 Edition
Lincoln Ave
63
62 OR
I-74
Note: See Figures 2E-34 and 2E-36 for examples of crossroad signing for one-lane approaches and examples of multi-lane crossroad signing for diamond interchanges
Sect. 2E.41
2003 Edition
Page 2E-45
Guidance: The sign messages should contain only the route shield, cardinal direction, and the name of the next control city on the route. Arrows should point as indicated in Section 2D.08, unless a diagrammatic representation of the interchange layout requires otherwise. At splits where the off-route movement is to the left or where there is an optional lane split, expectancy problems usually result, and diagrammatic signs should be used at the Advance Guide sign location. Diagrammatic signs (see Section 2E.19) also should be used at the Advance Guide sign locations for interchanges where two-lane exits with an optional lane carry the through route on the exiting lanes. Standard: Overhead signs shall be used at a distance of 2 km or 1 mile and at the theoretical gore of each connecting ramp. When diagrammatic signs are used, they shall conform to the provisions of Section 2E.19. Option: Overhead signs may also be used at the 1 km or 0.5 mile and 4 km or 2 mile points. The arrow and/or the name of the control city may be omitted on signs that indicate the straight-ahead continuation of a route. An Exit Speed sign may be used where an engineering study shows that it is necessary to display a speed reduction message for ramp signing (see Section 2C.36).
Page 2E-46
2003 Edition
2003 Edition
Page 2E-47
Page 2E-48
2003 Edition
11
I-25 Note: See Figure 2E-35 for example of minor interchange crossroad signing
Sect. 2E.49
2003 Edition
Page 2E-49
OR
OR
OR
OR
OR
Sect. 2E.49
Page 2E-50
2003 Edition
I-25
Sect. 2E.49
2003 Edition
Page 2E-51
I-57
OVERHEAD
OR
OR
Sect. 2E.49
Page 2E-52
2003 Edition
Figure 2E-37. Examples of Multi-lane Crossroad Signing for Partial Cloverleaf Interchange
I-57
OVERHEAD
OR
OR
Sect. 2E.49
2003 Edition
Page 2E-53
I-57
OVERHEAD
OR
Sect. 2E.49
Page 2E-54
2003 Edition
2003 Edition
Page 2E-55
Figure 2E-39. Examples of Regulatory Signing and Pavement Markings at Exit Ramp Termination to Deter Wrong-Way Entry
Legend Direction of Travel Wrong-Way Arrows Lane Use Arrows Optional
Exi
tR
am
Entrance Ramp
symbols shall be permitted as alternatives to word messages, but symbols and word service messages shall not be intermixed. If the services are not visible from the ramp of a single-exit interchange, the service signing shall be repeated in smaller size at the intersection of the exit ramp and the crossroad. Such service signs shall use arrows to indicate the direction to the services. Guidance: Distance to services should be shown on General Service signs where distances are more than 2 km or 1 mile. General Service signing should only be provided at locations where the road user can return to the freeway or expressway and continue in the same direction of travel. Only services that fulfill the needs of the road user should be shown on General Service signs. If State or local agencies elect to provide General Service signing, there should be a statewide policy for such signing and criteria for the availability of the various types of services. The criteria should consider the following: A. Gas, Diesel, LP Gas, EV Charging, and/or other alternative fuels if all of the following are available: 1. Vehicle services such as gas, oil, and water; 2. Modern sanitary facilities and drinking water; 3. Continuous operations at least 16 hours per day, 7 days per week; and 4. Public telephone. B. Food if all of the following are available: 1. Licensing or approval, where required; 2. Continuous operation to serve at least two meals per day, at least 6 days per week; 3. Public telephone; and 4. Modern sanitary facilities. C. Lodging if all of the following are available: 1. Licensing or approval, where required; 2. Adequate sleeping accommodations; 3. Public telephone; and 4. Modern sanitary facilities.
Sect. 2E.51
Page 2E-56
Figure 2E-40. Examples of Regulatory Signing and Pavement Markings at Entrance Ramp Terminal Where Design Does Not Clearly Indicate the Direction of Flow
Rev. 1
Rev. 1
D. Public Telephone if continuous operation, 7 days per week is available. E. Hospital if continuous emergency care capability, with a physician on duty 24 hours per day, 7 days per week is available. A physician on duty would include the following criteria and should be signed in accordance with the priority as follows: 1. Physician on duty within the emergency department; 2. Registered nurse on duty within the emergency department, with a physician in the hospital on call; or 3. Registered nurse on duty within the emergency department, with a physician on call from office or home. F. 24-Hour Pharmacy if a pharmacy is open, with a State-licensed pharmacist present and on duty, 24 hours per day, 7 days per week and is located within 4.8 km (3 mi) of an interchange on the Federal-aid system. G. Camping if all of the following are available: 1. Licensing or approval, where required; 2. Adequate parking accommodations; and 3. Modern sanitary facilities and drinking water. Standard: For any service that is operated on a seasonal basis only, the General Service signs shall be removed or covered during periods when the service is not available. The General Service signs shall be mounted in an effective location, between the Advance Guide sign and the Exit Direction sign, in advance of the exit leading to the available services. Guidance: The General Service sign should contain the interchange number, if any, as illustrated in Figure 2E-42. Option: If the distance to the next point where services are available is greater than 16 km (10 miles), a NEXT SERVICES XX km (XX MILES) (D9-17) sign (see Figure 2E-43), may be used as a separate sign panel installed below the Exit Direction sign. Standard: Signs for services shall conform to the format for General Service signs (see Section 2D.45) and as specified herein. Letter and numeral sizes shall be as shown in Tables 2E-1 through 2E-4. No more than six general road user services shall be displayed on one sign, which includes any appended sign panels. General Service signs shall carry the legends for one or more of the following services: Food, Gas, Lodging, Camping, Phone, Hospital, 24-Hour Pharmacy, or Tourist Information. The qualified services available shall be shown at specific locations on the sign. To provide flexibility for the future when the service might become available, the sign space normally reserved for a given service symbol or word shall be left blank when that service is not present.
Sect. 2E.51
Page 2E-57
D9-18 D9-18e
E2-2
D9-18a
D9-18
E2-3 OR OR
Rev. 1
D9-18a
D9-18
E2-3
D9-17
Sect. 2E.51
Page 2E-58
Rev. 1
Rev. 1
Guidance: The standard display of word messages should be FOOD and PHONE in that order on the top line, and GAS and LODGING on the second line. If used, HOSPITAL and CAMPING should be on separate lines (see Figure 2E-42). Option: Signing for DIESEL, LP-Gas, or other alternative fuel services may be substituted for any of the general services or appended to such signs. The International Symbol of Accessibility for the Handicapped (D9-6) sign may be used for facilities that qualify. Guidance: When symbols are used for the road user services, they should be displayed as follows: A. Six services: 1. Top rowGAS, FOOD, and LODGING 2. Bottom rowPHONE, HOSPITAL, and CAMPING B. Four services: 1. Top rowGAS and FOOD 2. Bottom rowLODGING and PHONE C. Three services: 1. Top rowGAS, FOOD, and LODGING Option: Substitutions of other services for any of the services shown above may be made by placing the substitution in the lower right (four or six services) or extreme right (three services) portion of the sign panel. An action message or an interchange number may be used for symbol signs in the same manner as they are used for word message signs. The Diesel Fuel (D9-11) symbol or the LP-Gas (D9-15) symbol may be substituted for the symbol representing fuel or appended to such assemblies. The Tourist Information (D9-10) symbol or the 24-Hour Pharmacy (D9-20 and D9-20a) symbol may be substituted on any of the above configurations. Standard: If more than three services become available at rural interchange areas where limited road user services were anticipated, any appended sign panel shall be removed and replaced with an independently mounted General Service sign as described in this Section. Option: A separate Telephone Service (D9-1) sign may be installed if telephone facilities are located adjacent to the route at places where public telephones would not normally be expected. The Recreational Vehicle Sanitary Station (D9-12) sign may be used as needed to indicate the availability of facilities designed for dumping wastes from recreational vehicle holding tanks. In some locations, signs may be used to indicate that services are not available. A TRUCK PARKING (D9-16) sign may be used on a separate sign panel below the other general road user services to direct truck drivers to designated parking areas.
2003 Edition
Page 2E-59
Figure 2E-44. Examples of Rest Area, Scenic Overlook, and Welcome Center Signs
D5-1
D5-1a
D5-1b
D5-2
D5-2a
D5-3
D5-4
D5-7
D5-7a
D5-8
D5-9
D5-9a
D5-10
D5-11
Sect. 2E.52
Page 2E-60
2003 Edition
Standard: All signs for rest and scenic areas shall have white letters, symbols, and borders on a blue background. Letter and numeral sizes shall conform to the minimum requirements of Tables 2E-1 through 2E-4. On the approach to rest areas, a REST AREA advance guide sign shall be placed 2 km or 1 mile and/or 4 km or 2 miles in advance of the rest area. At the rest area exit gore, there shall be a sign with a message REST AREA together with an arrow indicating the appropriate turn as shown in Figure 2E-44. Option: If the rest area has facilities for the physically impaired (see Section 2D.45), the International Symbol of Accessibility for the Handicapped (D9-6) sign may be placed with or beneath the REST AREA advance guide sign. Between the REST AREA advance guide sign and the gore of the rest area exit, there may be a REST AREA (D5-1b) sign (see Figure 2E-44). The words NEXT RIGHT (E2-2) or an arrow may be included as part of the message. To provide the road user with information on the location of succeeding rest areas, a NEXT REST AREA XX km (XX MILES) (D5-6) sign (see Figure 2E-44) may be installed independently or as a supplemental sign panel mounted below one of the REST AREA advance guide signs.
2003 Edition
Page 2E-61
Guidance: For tourist information centers located off the freeway or expressway facility, additional signing criteria should be as follows: A. Each State should adopt a policy establishing the maximum distance that a tourist information center can be located from the interchange in order to be included on official signs. B. The location of signing should be in accordance with requirements pertaining to General Service signing (see Section 2E.51). C. Signing along the crossroad should be installed to guide the road user from the interchange to the tourist information center and back to the interchange. Option: As an alternative, the Information Symbol (D9-10) sign may be appended to the guide signs for the exit providing access to the tourist information center. As a second alternative, the Information Symbol sign may be combined with General Service signing.
Section 2E.54 Reference Location Signs and Enhanced Reference Location Signs (D10-4, D10-5)
Support: Reference Location (D10-1 through D10-3) signs and Intermediate Reference Location (D10-1a through D10-3a) signs and their applications are described in Section 2D.46. There are two types of enhanced reference location signs: A. Enhanced Reference Location signs (D10-4), and B. Intermediate Enhanced Reference Location signs (D10-5). Standard: Except as provided in the option below, Reference Location (D10-1 through D10-3) signs (see Section 2D.46) shall be placed on all expressway facilities that are located on a route where there is reference location sign continuity and on all freeway facilities to assist road users in estimating their progress, to provide a means for identifying the location of emergency incidents and traffic crashes, and to aid in highway maintenance and servicing. Option: Enhanced Reference Location (D10-4) signs (see Figure 2E-45), which enhance the reference location sign system by identifying the route, may be placed on freeways or expressways (instead of Reference Location signs) or on conventional roads. To augment an enhanced reference location sign system, Intermediate Enhanced Reference Location (D10-5) signs (see Figure 2E-45), which show the tenth of a kilometer (mile) with a decimal point, may be installed along any section of a highway route or ramp at one tenth of a kilometer (mile) intervals, or at some other regular spacing. Standard: If enhanced reference location signs are used, they shall be vertical panels having blue or green backgrounds with white numerals, letters, and borders, except for the route shield, which shall be the standard color and shape. The top line shall consist of the cardinal direction for the roadway. The second line shall consist of the applicable route shield for the roadway. The third line shall identify the kilometer (mile) reference for the location and the bottom line of the Intermediate Enhanced Reference Location sign shall give the tenth of a kilometer (mile) reference for the location. The bottom line of the Intermediate Enhanced Reference Location sign shall contain a decimal point. The height of the legend on enhanced reference location signs shall be a minimum of 150 mm (6 in). The height of the route shield on enhanced reference location signs shall be a minimum of 300 mm (12 in). The background color shall be the same for all enhanced reference location signs within a jurisdiction. The design details for enhanced reference location signs shall be as shown in the "Standard Highway Signs" book (see Section 1A.11). Enhanced reference location signs shall have a minimum mounting height of 1.2 m (4 ft) to the bottom of the sign in accordance with the mounting height requirements of delineators (see Section 3D.04), and shall not be governed by the mounting height requirements prescribed in Section 2A.18. The distance numbering shall be continuous for each route within any State, except where overlaps occur (see Section 2E.28). Where routes overlap, enhanced reference location sign continuity shall be established for only one of the routes. If one of the overlapping routes is an Interstate route, that route shall be selected for continuity of distance numbering.
Sect. 2E.53 to 2E.54
Page 2E-62
2003 Edition
OR OR
D10-4
D10-5
The distance measurement shall be made on the northbound and eastbound roadways. The enhanced reference location signs for southbound or westbound roadways shall be set at locations directly opposite the enhanced reference location signs for the northbound or eastbound roadways. Guidance: The route selected for continuity of distance numbering should also have continuity in interchange exit numbering (see Section 2E.28). On a route without enhanced reference location sign continuity, the first enhanced reference location sign beyond the overlap should indicate the total distance traveled on the route so that road users will have a means of correlating their travel distance between enhanced reference location signs with that shown on their odometer. Standard: Except as provided in the option below, enhanced reference location signs shall be installed on the right side of the roadway. Option: Where conditions limit or restrict the use of enhanced reference location signs on the right side of the roadway, they may be installed in the median. In urban areas, Intermediate Enhanced Reference Location signs may be installed on the right side of the roadway, in the median, or on ramps to replace or to supplement the reference location signs. Enhanced Reference Location signs may be installed back-to-back in median locations.
2003 Edition
Page 2E-63
Page 2E-64
2003 Edition
2003 Edition
Page 2E-65
should also include destinations. These signs should be located based on the priority of the message, the available space, the existing signs on adjoining general purpose traffic lanes, roadway and traffic characteristics, the proximity to existing overhead signs, the ability to install overhead signs, and other unique local factors. Option: Advance guide signs may be provided for preferential only lanes with unrestricted access, such as concurrent flow preferential only lanes. Guidance: The use of guide signs for preferential only lanes at freeway interchanges should conform to the regulatory and guide sign requirements established in this Manual. Option: Changeable message signs may be used to supplement static signs where travel conditions change or where multiple types of operational strategies (such as variable occupancy requirements, vehicle types, or pricing policies) are used and varied throughout the day or week to manage the use of, control of, or access to preferential only lanes. Standard: When changeable message signs (see Section 2A.07) are used as regulatory or guide signs for preferential only lanes, they shall be the required sign size and shall display the required letter height and legend format that corresponds to the type of roadway facility and design speed. Ground-mounted and overhead advance guide signs, guide signs, and exit signs applicable to HOV lanes and direct access ramps to HOV lanes shall contain the HOV diamond symbol in the upper left corner of the sign as shown in Figures 2E-46 through 2E-52. The diamond symbol shall not be used with lanes designated for bus or taxi traffic. Option: Agencies may select from either the HOV abbreviation or the diamond symbol to reference the HOV lane designation. Guidance: Where lateral clearance is limited, such as when a ground-mounted Preferential Only Lane sign is installed on a median barrier, the edges of the sign should not project beyond the outer edges of the barrier. Option: Where lateral clearance is limited, Preferential Only Lane (R3-10, R3-11, and R3-12 series) signs that are 1800 mm (72 in) or less in width may be skewed up to 45 degrees in order to fit within the barrier width or may be mounted at a height of 4.3 m (14 ft) or more above the roadway. Guidance: Where lateral clearance is limited, Preferential Only Lane signs that are wider than 1800 mm (72 in) should be mounted at a height of at least 4.3 m (14 ft) above the roadway. Standard: For barrier-separated preferential only lanes, overhead advance guide and overhead guide signs shall be provided in advance of and at the beginning or initial entry point to the preferential only lanes (see Figure 2E-46 for HOV lanes). Overhead guide signs shall also be used at all intermediate entry points to barrier-separated preferential only lanes (see Figure 2E-47 for HOV lanes). For barrier-separated preferential only lanes, ground-mounted advance exit and ground-mounted exit signs shall be installed prior to and at the intermediate exit points of the preferential only lanes (see Figure 2E-47 for HOV lanes). Ground-mounted guide signs shall be mounted in the median or on median barriers that separate two directions of traffic. Option: For barrier-separated preferential only lanes, an advance destination guide sign may be used in the vicinity of designated intermediate entry and exit points. Guidance: For barrier-separated preferential only lanes where conditions restrict the ability to provide more than one advance guide sign prior to the entrance to the preferential only lane, the sign should be placed approximately 800 m (0.5 mi) in advance of the exit. In these situations, the installation of the corresponding regulatory and next exit supplemental signs should be located based on the priority of the message and the available space.
Sect. 2E.59
Page 2E-66
2003 Edition
Figure 2E-46. Example of Signing for the Entrance to BarrierSeparated HOV Lanes
R3-14a
E5-1
NOTES:
1. For right-side exits to access HOV lane, the same signing scheme would be used with adjustments made to sign messaging. 2. Exit ramp is for illustrative purposes only. Use locally applied geometric criteria. 3. The word message HOV may be used instead of the diamond symbol. 4. The minimum vehicle occupancy requirement and hours of operation on the sign may vary for each facility. 5. Reference Sections 3B.22 and 3B.23 for additional pavement marking information. 6. Reference Sections 2B.26 through 2B.28 and 2E.59 for appropriate text information.
R3-13a Potential location of a Changeable Message Sign (CMS) for reversible or contraflow operations. 1.6 km (1 mi) and 3.2 km (2 mi) signs are optional For access restricted facilities. Destinations may be augmented to accompany routes on Interchange Sequence signs (see Figure 2E-24).
Sect. 2E.59
2003 Edition
Page 2E-67
Figure 2E-47. Example of Signing for the Intermediate Entry to and Exit from Barrier- or Buffer-Separated HOV Lanes
W4-2
R3-15a
NOTES: 1. Reference Sections 3B.22 and 3B.23 for additional pavement marking information. 2. Reference Sections 2B.26 through 2B.28 and 2E.59 for appropriate text information. 3. The word message HOV may be used instead of the diamond symbol. 4. The minimum vehicle occupancy requirement and hours of operation on the sign may vary for each facility.
R3-14
E5-1
HOV LANE
Sect. 2E.59
Page 2E-68
2003 Edition
Standard: For buffer-separated preferential only lanes (painted buffer of 0.6 m (2 ft) or more) where access is restricted to designated entry points, ground-mounted guide signs shall be mounted in the median or on median barriers separating two directions of traffic. Ground-mounted advance exit and ground-mounted exit signs shall be installed prior to and at the intermediate exit points of buffer-separated preferential only lanes (see Figure 2E-47 for HOV lanes). Option: For buffer-separated preferential only lanes, an advance destination guide sign may be used in the vicinity of designated intermediate entry and exit points. Guidance: For buffer-separated HOV lanes, guide and regulatory signs should be provided to alert HOV lane users and non-users of the minimum allowable vehicle occupancy requirement and the locations of the designated entry and exit points. Standard: For concurrent flow preferential only lanes, including those where a preferential only lane is added to the roadway (see Figure 2E-48 for HOV lanes) and those where a general purpose lane transitions into a preferential only lane on the roadway (see Figure 2E-49 for HOV lanes), an overhead regulatory (R3-14 or R3-14a) sign shall be used. For concurrent flow HOV lanes on the left side of the roadway with unrestricted access, advance guide and guide signs shall only be used on direct access ramps, such as HOV lane only ramps or ramps to park & ride lots (see Figures 2E-50 and 2E-51 for HOV lanes). For direct access ramps to HOV lanes, advance guide signs shall be provided along the adjoining surface streets to direct traffic into a transit facility (such as a park & ride lot or a transit station or terminal) that ultimately leads to HOV lanes (see Figure 2E-50 for HOV lanes). Because direct access ramps for preferential only lanes at interchanges connecting two freeways are typically left side exits and typically have design speeds similar to the preferential only lane, overhead advance guide signs and overhead guide signs shall be provided in advance of and at the entry point to each preferential only lane ramp (see Figure 2E-52 for HOV lanes). Support: Figures 2E-50 through 2E-52 provide examples of recommended uses and layouts of signs for HOV lanes for direct access ramps, park & ride lots, access from surface streets, and exclusive preferential only lane ramps at interchanges that directly connect two freeway facilities. Direct access ramps to preferential only lanes sometimes form a three or four-legged intersection that is controlled by either static signs or traffic control signals. The use of advance guide and guide signs for direct access ramps for preferential only lanes at interchanges connecting two freeways is similar to a connecting ramp between two freeway facilities.
Sect. 2E.59
2003 Edition
Page 2E-69
Figure 2E-48. Example of Signing for the Entrance to and Exit from an Added HOV Lane
W4-2
R3-12b
HOV LANE
R3-14
NOTES: 1. Reference Sections 3B.22 and 3B.23 for additional pavement marking information. 2. Reference Sections 2B.26 through 2B.28 and 2E.59 for appropriate text information. 3. The the word message HOV may be used instead of the diamond symbol. 4. The advance lane signing scheme will also work if installed on the right side of the roadway, but all others must appear adjacent or over the HOV lane. 5. The minimum vehicle occupancy requirement and hours of operation on the sign may vary for each facility. 6. Works for part-time or full time. 7. This roadway condition indicates the HOV lane will merge with the General Purpose Lanes upon termination.
R3-13a
Sect. 2E.59
Page 2E-70
2003 Edition
Figure 2E-49. Example of Signing for the Entrance to and Exit from a General Purpose Lane that Becomes an HOV Lane
R3-12b
HOV LANE
R3-14
NOTES:
1. Reference Sections 3B.22 and 3B.23 for additional pavement marking information. 2. Reference Sections 2B.26 through 2B.28 and 2E.59 for appropriate text information. 3. The word message HOV may be used instead of the diamond symbol. 4. This signing scheme will also work if installed on the right side of the roadway. 5. The minimum vehicle occupancy requirement and hours of operation on the sign may vary for each facility. 6. Works for part-time or full time. 7. This roadway condition indicates the HOV lane will become a general purpose lane upon termination.
R3-13a
Sect. 2E.59
2003 Edition
Page 2E-71
Figure 2E-50. Example of Signing for a Direct Access Ramp to an HOV Lane from a Park & Ride Facility
R3-13a
Varies
Varies
R3-14
HOV LANE
NOTES: 1. Reference Sections 3B.22 and 3B.23 for additional pavement marking information. 2. Reference Sections 2B.26 through 2B.28 and 2E.59 for appropriate text information. 3. Additional advisory and warning signs are required. 4. Direction of HOV traffic is inbound. 5. Sign locations are approximate. 6. The word message HOV may be used instead of the diamond symbol. 7. The minimum vehicle occupancy requirement on the sign may vary for each facility. 8. Overhead HOV signs should supplement ground-mounted HOV signs. 9. Additional signs may be required to direct drivers from the surrounding streets into the park & ride lot and HOV lane. 10. Additional signs are required on the adjoining surface streets to inform nonHOVs that they should not enter the HOV facility.
For access restricted facilities. Destinations may be augmented to accompany routes on Interchange Sequence signs (see Figure 2E-24).
Sect. 2E.59
Page 2E-72
2003 Edition
Figure 2E-51. Example of Signing for a Direct Access Ramp to an HOV Lane from a Local Street
Legend Direction of travel
R3-14
LANES
E5-1
NOTES: 1. Reference Sections 3B.22 and 3B.23 for additional pavement marking information. 2. Reference Sections 2B.26 through 2B.28 and 2E.59 for appropriate text information. 3. Additional advisory and warning signs are required. 4. Sign locations are approximate. 5. HOV facility could be barrier-separated, buffer-separated, or concurrent flow.
Sect. 2E.59
HOV LANE
HOV LANE
For access restricted facilities. Destinations may be augmented to accompany routes on Interchange Sequence signs (see Figure 2E-24).
2003 Edition
Page 2E-73
Figure 2E-52. Example of Signing for a Direct Access Ramp between HOV Lanes on Separate Freeways
E5-1
NOTES: 1. Reference Sections 3B.22 and 3B.23 for additional pavement marking information. 2. Reference Sections 2B.26 through 2B.28 and 2E.59 for appropriate text information. 3. Additional advisory and warning signs are required. 4. Sign locations are approximate. 5. If vehicle occupancy levels vary between HOV facilities, then the occupancy level can be added to guide signs. 6. HOV facility could be barrier-separated, buffer-separated, or concurrent flow.
1.6 km (1 mi)
Destinations may be augmented to accompany routes on guide signs similar to Figure 2E-3. For access restricted facilities. Destinations may be augmented to accompany routes on Interchange Sequence signs (see Figure 2E-24).
Sect. 2E.59
Page 2F-1
Rev. 1
Rev. 1
Rev. 1
Page 2F-2
Rev. 1
Standard: If State or local agencies elect to provide Specific Service signing for pharmacies, both of the following criteria shall be met for a pharmacy to qualify for signing: A. The pharmacy shall be continuously operated 24 hours per day, 7 days per week, and shall have a State-licensed pharmacist present and on duty at all times; and B. The pharmacy shall be located within 4.8 km (3 mi) of an interchange on the Federal-aid system.
Rev. 1
Rev. 1
Rev. 1
2003 Edition
Page 2F-3
* *
*
OR
LOGO PANEL INTERSECTION Note: Directional arrows and distance may be used when appropriate
OR
DOUBLE-EXIT INTERCHANGE
RAMP
Standard: Each logo panel attached to a Specific Service sign shall have a rectangular shape with a width longer than the height. A logo panel on signs for freeways and expressways shall not exceed 1500 mm (60 in) in width and 900 mm (36 in) in height. A logo panel on signs for conventional roads and ramps shall not exceed 750 mm (30 in) in width and 450 mm (18 in) in height. The vertical and horizontal spacing between logo panels shall not exceed 200 mm (8 in) and 300 mm (12 in), respectively. Support: Sections 2A.15, 2E.14, and 2E.15 contain information regarding borders, interline spacing, and edge spacing.
Page 2F-4
2003 Edition
The travel distance to be shown on signs should be measured from this point
Travel distance for sign priority should always be measured from this point
If a loop is to be signed, the travel distance to be shown on signs should be measured from here
OR
OR
OR
240 m (800 ft) MIN.
OR
240 m (800 ft) MIN.
Sect. 2F.05
2003 Edition
Page 2F-5
Page 2F-6
2003 Edition
The spacing between signs should be determined on the basis of an engineering study. Logo panels should not be displayed for a type of service for which a qualified facility is readily visible. Standard: If Specific Service signs are used on conventional roads or at intersections on expressways, the name of each type of service shall be displayed above its logo panel(s), together with an appropriate legend such as NEXT RIGHT (LEFT) or a directional arrow on the same line. Option: If Specific Service signs are used on conventional roads or at intersections on expressways, the NEXT RIGHT (LEFT) or other applicable directional legend or action message may be displayed below instead of above the logo panels. Signs similar to Specific Service ramp signs as described in Section 2F.07 may be provided on the crossroad.
2003 Edition
Page 2G-1
CHAPTER 2G. TOURIST-ORIENTED DIRECTIONAL SIGNS Section 2G.01 Purpose and Application
Support: Tourist-oriented directional signs are guide signs with one or more panels that display the business identification of and directional information for business, service, and activity facilities. Standard: A facility shall be eligible for tourist-oriented directional signs only if it derives its major portion of income or visitors during the normal business season from road users not residing in the area of the facility. Option: Tourist-oriented directional signs may include businesses involved with seasonal agricultural products. Standard: When used, tourist-oriented directional signs shall be used only on rural conventional roads and shall not be used on conventional roads in urban areas nor at interchanges on freeways or expressways. Where both tourist-oriented directional signs and Specific Service signs (see Chapter 2F) would be needed at the same intersection, the tourist-oriented directional signs shall incorporate the needed information from, and be used in place of, the Specific Service signs. Guidance: Each State that elects to use tourist-oriented directional signs should have a State policy for use as indicated in Section 2G.07. Option: Tourist-oriented directional signs may be used in conjunction with General Service signs (see Section 2D.45).
Page 2G-2
2003 Edition
Support: Examples of tourist-oriented directional signs are shown in Figures 2G-1 and 2G-2.
2003 Edition
Page 2G-3
Optional message
MAX. height = 1800 mm (72 in) 400 mm with 4 panels (16 in)
150 mm (6 in) 19 mm (3/4 in) 300 mm (12 in) 19 mm (3/4 in) 150 mm (6 in) Optional message
1500 mm (60 in) 19 mm (3/4 in) 300 mm (12 in) 38 mm (1-1/2 in) Radius 38 mm (1-1/2 in) Radius 19 mm (3/4 in) COMBINED SIGN 150 mm (6 in)
MAX. height = 1800 mm (72 in) 400 mm with 4 panels (16 in)
Note: Series of lettering depends upon length of legend. Maximum length of business name per line is 1600 mm (64 in). Reflectorized white legend on reflectorized blue background.
ADVANCE SIGN
Sect. 2G.05
Page 2G-4
2003 Edition
Figure 2G-2. Examples of Intersection Approach Signs and Advance Signs for Tourist-Oriented Directional Signs
(1)
(1)
(1)
(1) (2)
(1)
(1) (2)
OR
Sect. 2G.05
2003 Edition
Page 2G-5
2003 Edition
Page 2H-1
CHAPTER 2H. RECREATIONAL AND CULTURAL INTEREST AREA SIGNS Section 2H.01 Scope
Support: Recreational or cultural interest areas are attractions or traffic generators that are open to the general public for the purpose of play, amusement, or relaxation. Recreational attractions include such facilities as parks, campgrounds, gaming facilities, and ski areas, while examples of cultural attractions include museums, art galleries, and historical buildings or sites. The purpose of recreation and cultural interest area signs is to guide road users to a general area and then to specific facilities or activities within the area. Option: Recreational and cultural interest area signs that depict significant traffic generators may be used on freeways and expressways where there is direct access to these areas as discussed in Section 2H.09. Recreational and cultural interest area signs may be used off the road network, as appropriate.
Section 2H.04 General Design Requirements for Recreational and Cultural Interest Area Symbol Signs
Standard: Recreational and cultural interest area symbol signs shall be square or rectangular in shape and shall have a white symbol or message and white border on a brown background. The symbols shall be grouped into the following usage and series categories (see the Standard Highway Signs book for design details): A. General Information (RG Series) B. Motorist Services (RM Series) C. Accommodation Services (RA Series) D. Land Recreation (RL series) E. Water Recreation (RW Series), and F. Winter Recreation (RS Series) Support: Table 2H-1 contains a listing of the symbols within each series category. Drawings for these symbols are found in the Standard Highway Signs book (see Section 1A.11). Option: Mirror images of symbols may be used where the reverse image will better convey the message.
Page 2H-2
Trail (Interpretive, Auto) RL-120 Trail (Interpretive, Ped.) RL-130 Trail/Road (4 WD Veh.) Trail (Trail Bike) Tramway All-Terrain Vehicle Archer Hang Glider RL-140 RL-150 RL-160 RL-170 RL-190 RL-210
Sect. 2H.04
2003 Edition
Page 2H-3
Section 2H.08 Placement of Recreational and Cultural Interest Area Symbol Signs
Standard: If used, recreational and cultural interest area symbol signs shall be placed in accordance with the general requirements contained in Chapter 2A. The symbol(s) shall be placed in the uppermost part of the sign assembly and the directional information shall be placed below the symbol(s). Where the name of the recreational or cultural interest area facility or activity is shown on a general directional guide sign and a symbol is used, the symbol shall be placed below the name (see Figure 2H-2). Recreational and cultural interest area symbols installed for nonroad use shall be placed in accordance with the general sign position requirements of the authority having jurisdiction. Support: Figure 2H-3 illustrates typical height and lateral mounting positions. Figure 2H-4 illustrates some examples of the placement of symbol signs within a recreational or cultural interest area. Figure 2H-5 illustrates some of the symbols that can be used. Guidance: The number of symbols used in a single sign assembly should not exceed four. Option: Symbols for recreational or cultural interest areas may be used as legend components for a directional sign assembly. The symbols may be used singularly, or in groups of two, three, or four on a single sign assembly (see Figures 2H-1, 2H-3, and 2H-4). Smaller-size secondary symbols (see Figure 2H-1) may be placed beneath the primary symbols, where needed.
Page 2H-4
2003 Edition
Figure 2H-1. Examples of Use of Educational Plaques, Prohibitory Slashes, and Arrows
Sect. 2H.08
2003 Edition
Page 2H-5
Figure 2H-2. Examples of General Directional Guide Signs for Conventional Roads
*Optional shape
Sect. 2H.08
Page 2H-6
2003 Edition
Figure 2H-3. Height and Lateral Position of Signs Located Within Recreational and Cultural Interest Areas
ROADSIDE ASSEMBLY
BUSINESS OR RESIDENCE DISTRICT
Paved shoulder
ROADSIDE ASSEMBLY
RURAL DISTRICT
ROADSIDE ASSEMBLY
RURAL DISTRICT
Note: See Section 2A.19 for reduced lateral offset distances that may be used in areas where lateral offsets are limited, and in urban areas where sidewalk width is limited or where existing poles are close to the curb.
Sect. 2H.08
2003 Edition
Page 2H-7
LAUNCH RAMP PARKING CEDAR SPRINGS LAKE INFORMATION CENTER AMPHITHEATER PARKING BEACH PICNIC AREA
CAMPGROUND
Sect. 2H.08
Page 2H-8
2003 Edition
Figure 2H-5. Recreational and Cultural Interest Area Symbol Signs (Sheet 1 of 5)
RG-010 Automobile
RG-030 Dam
RG-080 Firearms
RG-100 Information
RG-120 Lighthouse
RG-180 Smoking
RG-190 Truck
RG-200 Tunnel
RG-240 Dog
Sect. 2H.08
RG-260 Seaplane
RM-030 Ferry
Page 2H-9
Figure 2H-5. Recreational and Cultural Interest Area Symbol Signs (Sheet 2 of 5)
RM-050 Food
RM-060 Gas
RM-080 Handicapped
RM-090 Lodging
RM-100 Mechanic
RM-150 Telephone
RA-010 Airport
RA-030 Campfire
RA-040 Elevator
RA-050 Kennel
RA-060 Laundry
RA-070 Locker
RA-080 Parking
Sect. 2H.08
Page 2H-10
2003 Edition
Figure 2H-5. Recreational and Cultural Interest Area Symbol Signs (Sheet 3 of 5)
RA-130 Showers
RA-160 Helicopter
RL-010 Amphitheater
RL-020 Climbing
RL-040 Hunting
RL-050 Playground
RL-070 Spelunking
RL-080 Stable
RL-160 Tramway
RL-190 Archer
2003 Edition
Page 2H-11
Figure 2H-5. Recreational and Cultural Interest Area Symbol Signs (Sheet 4 of 5)
RW-020 Canoeing
RW-030 Diving
RW-050 Fishing
RW-070 Motorboating
RW-090 Rowboating
RW-100 Sailboating
RW-120 Surfing
RW-130 Swimming
RW-140 Wading
RW-190 Kayak
RS-060 Sledding
Sect. 2H.08
Page 2H-12
2003 Edition
Figure 2H-5. Recreational and Cultural Interest Area Symbol Signs (Sheet 5 of 5)
RS-070 Snowmobiling
RS-080 Snowshoeing
RS-100 Chairlift
Sect. 2H.09
2003 Edition
Page 2I-1
Page 2I-2
2003 Edition
MUTCD Code
EM-1 EM-2 EM-3 EM-4 EM-5 EM-6a to EM-6d EM-7a to EM-7d
Section
2I.03 2I.04 2I.05 2I.06 2I.07 2I.08 2I.09
Freeway
Minimum
450 x 450 (18 x 18)
Oversized
Notes: 1. Larger sizes may be used when appropriate. 2. Dimensions are shown in millimeters followed by inches in parentheses and are shown as width x height.
Option: The legend on the EVACUATION ROUTE sign may be modified to describe the type of evacuation route, such as HURRICANE. In case of conflict with guide or warning signs, the Emergency Management sign may take precedence. Guidance: Placement of EVACUATION ROUTE signs should be made under the supervision of the officials having jurisdiction over the placement of other traffic signs. Coordination with Emergency Management authorities and agreement between contiguous political entities should occur to assure continuity of routes. Option: The arrow may be a separate panel attached to the face of the sign.
2003 Edition
Page 2I-3
R1-1
EM-1
EM-2
EM-3
EM-4
EM-5
EM-6a
EM-6b
EM-6c
EM-6d
EM-7a
EM-7b
EM-7c
EM-7d
The standard STOP (R1-1) sign shall be used in conjunction with the TRAFFIC CONTROL POINT sign. The TRAFFIC CONTROL POINT sign shall consist of a black legend and border on a retroreflectorized white background. Guidance: The TRAFFIC CONTROL POINT sign should be mounted directly below the STOP sign.
Page 2I-4
2003 Edition
Guidance: The sign should be installed as needed, in the same manner as other standard speed signs. Standard: If used in rural areas, the MAINTAIN TOP SAFE SPEED sign shall be mounted on the right side of the road with its lower edge not less than 1.5 m (5 ft) above the pavement, 1.8 to 3 m (6 to 10 ft) from the roadway edge. If used in urban areas, the height shall be not less than 2.1 m (7 ft), and the nearest edge of the sign shall be not less than 0.3 m (1 ft) back from the face of the curb.
Section 2I.07 ROAD (AREA) USE PERMIT REQUIRED FOR THRU TRAFFIC Sign (EM-5)
Support: The intent of the ROAD (AREA) USE PERMIT REQUIRED FOR THRU TRAFFIC (EM-5) sign (see Figure 2I-1) is to notify road users of the presence of the traffic control point so that those who do not have priority permits issued by designated authorities can take another route, or turn back, without making a needless trip and without adding to the screening load at the post. Local traffic, without permits, can proceed as far as the traffic control post. Standard: If used, the ROAD (AREA) USE PERMIT REQUIRED FOR THRU TRAFFIC (EM-5) sign shall be used at an intersection that is an entrance to a route on which a traffic control point is located. If used, the sign shall be installed in a manner similar to that of the MAINTAIN TOP SAFE SPEED sign (see Section 2I.06).
2003 Edition
Page 2I-5
C. FALLOUT (EM-7c) D. CHEMICAL (EM-7d) If appropriate, the name of the facility may be used. The Shelter Directional signs may be installed on the Interstate Highway System or any other major highway system when it has been determined that a need exists for such signs as part of a State or local shelter plan. The Shelter Directional signs may be used to identify different routes to a shelter to provide for rapid movement of large numbers of persons. Guidance: The Shelter Directional sign should be used sparingly and only in conjunction with approved plans of State and local authorities. As a general rule, the Shelter Directional sign should not be posted more than 8 km (5 mi) from a shelter.
Sect. 2I.09
Part 3
Markings
2003 Edition
Page TC3-1
CHAPTER 3B. PAVEMENT AND CURB MARKINGS Section 3B.01 Section 3B.02 Section 3B.03 Section 3B.04 Section 3B.05 Section 3B.06 Section 3B.07 Section 3B.08 Section 3B.09 Section 3B.10 Section 3B.11 Section 3B.12 Section 3B.13 Section 3B.14 Section 3B.15 Section 3B.16 Section 3B.17 Section 3B.18 Section 3B.19 Section 3B.20 Section 3B.21 Section 3B.22 Section 3B.23 Section 3B.24 Section 3B.25 Section 3B.26 Section 3B.27 Yellow Centerline Pavement Markings and Warrants .............................................................3B-1 No-Passing Zone Pavement Markings and Warrants ..............................................................3B-1 Other Yellow Longitudinal Pavement Markings .....................................................................3B-5 White Lane Line Pavement Markings and Warrants...............................................................3B-7 Other White Longitudinal Pavement Markings.....................................................................3B-11 Edge Line Pavement Markings..............................................................................................3B-16 Warrants for Use of Edge Lines ............................................................................................3B-16 Extensions Through Intersections or Interchanges ...............................................................3B-16 Lane Reduction Transition Markings ....................................................................................3B-19 Approach Markings for Obstructions....................................................................................3B-19 Raised Pavement Markers .....................................................................................................3B-23 Raised Pavement Markers as Vehicle Positioning Guides with Other Longitudinal Markings ...3B-24 Raised Pavement Markers Supplementing Other Markings .................................................3B-24 Raised Pavement Markers Substituting for Pavement Markings ..........................................3B-24 Transverse Markings..............................................................................................................3B-25 Stop and Yield Lines..............................................................................................................3B-25 Crosswalk Markings ..............................................................................................................3B-27 Parking Space Markings........................................................................................................3B-28 Pavement Word and Symbol Markings .................................................................................3B-28 Speed Measurement Markings ..............................................................................................3B-38 Curb Markings.......................................................................................................................3B-38 Preferential Lane Word and Symbol Markings .....................................................................3B-39 Preferential Lane Longitudinal Markings for Motor Vehicles ..............................................3B-40 Markings for Roundabout Intersections ................................................................................3B-44 Markings for Other Circular Intersections ............................................................................3B-44 Speed Hump Markings ..........................................................................................................3B-44 Advance Speed Hump Markings...........................................................................................3B-44
CHAPTER 3C. OBJECT MARKERS Section 3C.01 Section 3C.02 Section 3C.03 Section 3C.04 Object Marker Design and Placement Height.........................................................................3C-1 Markings for Objects in the Roadway.....................................................................................3C-1 Markings for Objects Adjacent to the Roadway .....................................................................3C-3 End-of-Roadway Markers .......................................................................................................3C-3
CHAPTER 3D. DELINEATORS Section 3D.01 Section 3D.02 Section 3D.03 Section 3D.04 Delineators...............................................................................................................................3D-1 Delineator Design....................................................................................................................3D-1 Delineator Application ............................................................................................................3D-1 Delineator Placement and Spacing..........................................................................................3D-2
Page TC3-2
2003 Edition
CHAPTER 3E. COLORED PAVEMENTS Section 3E.01 Section 3F.01 Section 3F.02 Section 3G.01 Section 3G.02 Section 3G.03 Section 3G.04 Section 3G.05 Section 3G.06 FIGURES CHAPTER 3B. PAVEMENT AND CURB MARKINGS Figure 3B-1 Figure 3B-2 Figure 3B-3 Figure 3B-4 Figure 3B-5 Figure 3B-6 Figure 3B-7 Figure 3B-8 Figure 3B-9 Figure 3B-10 Figure 3B-11 Figure 3B-12 Figure 3B-13 Figure 3B-14 Figure 3B-15 Figure 3B-16 Figure 3B-17 Figure 3B-18 Figure 3B-19 Figure 3B-20 Figure 3B-21 Figure 3B-22 Figure 3B-23 Figure 3B-24 Figure 3B-25 Figure 3B-26 Figure 3B-27 Figure 3B-28 Figure 3B-29 Figure 3B-30 Figure 3B-31 Examples of Two-Lane, Two-Way Marking Applications ......................................................3B-2 Examples of Four-or-More Lane, Two-Way Marking Applications .......................................3B-3 Examples of Three-Lane, Two-Way Marking Applications....................................................3B-4 Example of Three-Lane, Two-Way Marking for Changing Direction of the Center Lane.....3B-6 Method of Locating and Determining the Limits of No-Passing Zones at Curves ................3B-8 Example of Reversible Lane Marking Application.................................................................3B-9 Example of Two-Way Left-Turn Lane Marking Applications ..............................................3B-10 Examples of Channelizing Line Applications for Exit Ramp Markings ..............................3B-12 Examples of Channelizing Line Applications for Entrance Ramp Markings.......................3B-14 Example of Lane Drop Markings at Exit Ramps..................................................................3B-15 Examples of Extensions through Intersections .....................................................................3B-17 Examples of Lane Reduction Markings ................................................................................3B-20 Examples of Markings for Obstructions in the Roadway .....................................................3B-21 Examples of Yield Line Layouts ...........................................................................................3B-26 Examples of Yield Lines at Unsignalized Midblock Crosswalks .........................................3B-27 Examples of Crosswalk Markings.........................................................................................3B-29 Example of Crosswalk Markings for Exclusive Pedestrian Phase That Permits Diagonal Crossing .................................................................................................................3B-29 Examples of Parking Space Markings...................................................................................3B-30 International Symbol of Accessibility Parking Space Marking with Blue Background and White Border Options.....................................................................................................3B-31 Example of Elongated Letters for Word Pavement Markings...............................................3B-31 Examples of Standard Arrows for Pavement Markings ........................................................3B-32 Examples of Lane Use Control Word and Symbol Markings...............................................3B-34 Examples of Arrow Markings at Exit Ramp Terminals ........................................................3B-35 Examples of Arrow Markings at Entrance Ramp Terminals.................................................3B-36 Yield Ahead Triangle Symbols..............................................................................................3B-37 Examples of Markings for Preferential Lanes.......................................................................3B-42 Examples of Markings for Roundabout Intersections with One-Lane Approaches .............3B-45 Examples of Markings for Roundabout Intersections with Two-Lane Approaches .............3B-46 Examples of Pavement Markings for Speed Humps Without Crosswalks ...........................3B-47 Examples of Pavement Markings for Speed Tables or Speed Humps with Crosswalks ......3B-48 Examples of Advance Warning Markings for Speed Humps................................................3B-49 General.....................................................................................................................................3E-1 Barricades.................................................................................................................................3F-1 Channelizing Devices...............................................................................................................3F-1 General ....................................................................................................................................3G-1 Approach-End Treatment ........................................................................................................3G-1 Island Marking Application.....................................................................................................3G-1 Island Marking Colors.............................................................................................................3G-1 Island Object Markers .............................................................................................................3G-2 Island Delineators....................................................................................................................3G-2 CHAPTER 3F. BARRICADES AND CHANNELIZING DEVICES
2003 Edition
Page TC3-3
CHAPTER 3C OBJECT MARKERS Figure 3C-1 Figure 3D-1 TABLES CHAPTER 3B. PAVEMENT AND CURB MARKINGS Table 3B-1 Table 3B-2 Table 3D-1 Minimum Passing Sight Distances..........................................................................................3B-7 Standard Edge Line Lane Markings for Preferential Lanes..................................................3B-41 Approximate Spacing for Delineators on Horizontal Curves .................................................3D-4 Object Markers and End-of-Roadway Markers ......................................................................3C-2 Example of Delineator Installation .........................................................................................3D-3 CHAPTER 3D. DELINEATORS
2003 Edition
Page 3A-1
Page 3A-2
2003 Edition
When used, white markings for longitudinal lines shall delineate: A. The separation of traffic flows in the same direction. B. The right edge of the roadway. When used, yellow markings for longitudinal lines shall delineate: A. The separation of traffic traveling in opposite directions. B. The left edge of the roadways of divided and one-way highways and ramps. C. The separation of two-way left turn lanes and reversible lanes from other lanes. When used, red raised pavement markers shall delineate roadways that shall not be entered or used. When used, blue markings shall supplement white markings for parking spaces for persons with disabilities. When used, blue raised pavement markers shall indicate locations of fire hydrants along a roadway. Option: Black may be used in combination with the above colors where a light-colored pavement does not provide sufficient contrast with the markings. Support: When used in combination with other colors, black is not considered a marking color, but only a contrastenhancing system for the markings.
2003 Edition
Page 3B-1
CHAPTER 3B. PAVEMENT AND CURB MARKINGS Section 3B.01 Yellow Centerline Pavement Markings and Warrants
Standard: Centerline pavement markings, when used, shall be the pavement markings used to delineate the separation of traffic lanes that have opposite directions of travel on a roadway and shall be yellow. Option: Centerline pavement markings may be placed at a location that is not the geometric center of the roadway. On roadways without continuous centerline pavement markings, short sections may be marked with centerline pavement markings to control the position of traffic at specific locations, such as around curves, over hills, on approaches to highway-railroad grade crossings, at highway-railroad grade crossings, and at bridges. Standard: The centerline markings on two-lane, two-way roadways shall be one of the following as shown in Figure 3B-1: A. Two-direction passing zone markings consisting of a normal broken yellow line where crossing the centerline markings for passing with care is permitted for traffic traveling in either direction; B. One-direction no-passing zone markings consisting of a normal broken yellow line and a normal solid yellow line where crossing the centerline markings for passing with care is permitted for the traffic traveling adjacent to the broken line, but is prohibited for traffic traveling adjacent to the solid line; and C. Two-direction no-passing zone markings consisting of two normal solid yellow lines where crossing the centerline markings for passing is prohibited for traffic traveling in either direction. The centerline markings on undivided two-way roadways with four or more lanes for moving motor vehicle traffic always available shall be the two-direction no-passing zone markings consisting of two normal solid yellow lines as shown in Figure 3B-2. Guidance: On two-way roadways with three through lanes for moving motor vehicle traffic, two lanes should be designated for traffic in one direction by using one- or two-direction no-passing zone markings as shown in Figure 3B-3. Standard: Centerline markings shall be placed on all paved urban arterials and collectors that have a traveled way of 6.1 m (20 ft) or more in width and an ADT of 6,000 vehicles per day or greater. Centerline markings shall also be placed on all paved two-way streets or highways that have three or more lanes for moving motor vehicle traffic. Guidance: Centerline markings should be placed on paved urban arterials and collectors that have a traveled way of 6.1 m (20 ft) or more in width and an ADT of 4,000 vehicles per day or greater. Centerline markings should also be placed on all rural arterials and collectors that have a traveled way of 5.5 m (18 ft) or more in width and an ADT of 3,000 vehicles per day or greater. Centerline markings should also be placed on other traveled ways where an engineering study indicates such a need. Engineering judgment should be used in determining whether to place centerline markings on traveled ways that are less than 4.9 m (16 ft) wide because of the potential for traffic encroaching on the pavement edges, traffic being affected by parked vehicles, and traffic encroaching into the opposing traffic lane. Option: Centerline markings may be placed on other paved two-way traveled ways that are 4.9 m (16 ft) or more in width. If a traffic count is not available, the ADTs described in this Section may be estimates that are based on engineering judgment.
Page 3B-2
2003 Edition
Nopassing zone
Nopassing zone
Sect. 3B.02
2003 Edition
Page 3B-3
Sect. 3B.02
Page 3B-4
2003 Edition
Sect. 3B.02
2003 Edition
Page 3B-5
When centerline markings are used, no-passing zone markings shall be used on two-way roadways at lane reduction transitions (see Section 3B.09) and on approaches to obstructions that must be passed on the right (see Section 3B.10). Guidance: Where the distance between successive no-passing zones is less than 120 m (400 ft), no-passing markings should connect the zones. Standard: Where centerline markings are used, no-passing zone markings shall be used on approaches to highway-rail grade crossings in conformance with Section 8B.20. Option: In addition to pavement markings, no-passing zone signs (see Sections 2B.29, 2B.30, and 2C.35) may be used to emphasize the existence and extent of a no-passing zone. Support: Section 11-307 of the Uniform Vehicle Code (UVC) Revised contains further information regarding nopassing zones. The UVC can be obtained from the National Committee on Uniform Traffic Laws and Ordinances at the address shown on Page i. Standard: On two-way, two- or three-lane roadways where centerline markings are installed, no-passing zones shall be established at vertical and horizontal curves and other locations where an engineering study indicates that passing must be prohibited because of inadequate sight distances or other special conditions. On three-lane roadways where the direction of travel in the center lane transitions from one direction to the other, a no-passing buffer zone shall be provided in the center lane as shown in Figure 3B-4. A lane transition shall be provided at each end of the buffer zone. The buffer zone shall be a median island that is at least 15 m (50 ft) in length. Guidance: For three-lane roadways having a posted or statutory speed limit of 70 km/h (45 mph) or greater, the lane transition taper length should be computed by the formula L = 0.62 WS for speeds in km/h (L = WS for speeds in mph). For roadways where the posted or statutory speed limit is less than 70 km/h (45 mph), the formula L = WS2/155 for speeds in km/h (L = WS2/60 for speeds in mph) should be used to compute taper length. Under both formulas, L equals the taper length in meters (feet), W equals the width of the center lane or offset distance in meters (feet), and S equals the 85th-percentile speed or the posted or statutory speed limit, whichever is higher. Standard: The minimum lane transition taper length shall be 30 m (100 ft) in urban areas and 60 m (200 ft) in rural areas. On roadways with centerline markings, no-passing zone markings shall be used at horizontal or vertical curves where the passing sight distance is less than the minimum necessary for reasonably safe passing at the 85th-percentile speed or the posted or statutory speed limit as shown in Table 3B-1. The passing sight distance on a vertical curve is the distance at which an object 1.07 m (3.5 ft) above the pavement surface can be seen from a point 1.07 m (3.5 ft) above the pavement (see Figure 3B-5). Similarly, the passing sight distance on a horizontal curve is the distance measured along the centerline (or right-hand lane line of a three-lane roadway) between two points 1.07 m (3.5 ft) above the pavement on a line tangent to the embankment or other obstruction that cuts off the view on the inside of the curve (see Figure 3B-5). Support: The beginning of a no-passing zone at point a in Figure 3B-5 is that point where the sight distance first becomes less than that specified in Table 3B-1. The end of the no-passing zone at point b in Figure 3B-5 is that point at which the sight distance again becomes greater than the minimum specified.
Page 3B-6
2003 Edition
Figure 3B-4. Example of Three-Lane, Two-Way Marking for Changing Direction of the Center Lane
Legend Direction of travel 3/4 d
Note: See Section 3B.02 for determining the minimum length of the buffer zone.
Buffer zone
Car "X"
Sect. 3B.03
2003 Edition
Page 3B-7
(meters) 140 160 180 210 245 280 320 355 395
(feet) 450 500 550 600 700 800 900 1,000 1,100 1,200
Signs (see Section 2B.25), lane-use control signals (see Chapter 4J), or both shall be used to supplement reversible lane pavement markings. If a two-way left-turn lane that is never operated as a reversible lane is used, the lane line pavement markings on each side of the two-way left-turn lane shall consist of a normal broken yellow line and a normal solid yellow line to delineate the edges of a lane that can be used by traffic in either direction as part of a left-turn maneuver. These markings shall be placed with the broken line toward the two-way left-turn lane and the solid line toward the adjacent traffic lane as shown in Figure 3B-7. Option: Pavement marking arrows may be used in conjunction with the two-way left-turn lane markings as shown in Figure 3B-7. Guidance: Signs should be used in conjunction with the two-way left turn markings (see Section 2B.24). Standard: If a continuous median island formed by pavement markings separating travel in opposite directions is used, two sets of double solid yellow lines shall be used to form the island as shown in Figures 3B-2 and 3B-4. Other markings in the median island area shall also be yellow, except crosswalk markings which shall be white (see Section 3B.17).
Page 3B-8
2003 Edition
Figure 3B-5. Method of Locating and Determining the Limits of No-Passing Zones at Curves
Legend a- No-passing zone at VERTICAL CURVE. Direction of travel
t igh ile, t gs sin ercen ed s p e pa m 5th- ry sp u 8 o inime for tatut M c s tan , or dis sted le t po rofi igh nt p of s me e e Lin Pav
1.07 m (3.5 ft)
to b ,a ) one icated gz sin on ind s ti -pa No direc (in
b'
M dis inim ta u pos nce m pa ted for 8 ssin , or g 5 sta th-pe sight tuto rce ry s ntile pee , Pav Lin d em eo ent fs pro igh file t No -pa (in ssin dire g z ctio one n in , a' dic to b ate d) '
a, a' Begin no-passing zone Sight distance becomes less than minimum measured between points 1.07 m (3.5 ft) above pavement
Profile View
Note: No-passing zones in opposite directions may or may not overlap, depending on alignment
Lines of sight
b' b
Nop (in assing dire ctio zone, n in a dica ' to b' ted )
a'
a, a' Begin no-passing zone Sight distance becomes less than minimum measured between points 1.07 m (3.5 ft) above pavement
Plan View
Note: No-passing zones in opposite directions may or may not overlap, depending on alignment
Not to scale
Sect. 3B.04
2003 Edition
Page 3B-9
or
Sect. 3B.04
Page 3B-10
2003 Edition
Sect. 3B.04
2003 Edition
Page 3B-11
Where crossing the lane line markings is discouraged, the lane line markings shall consist of a normal solid white line. Option: Solid white lane line markings may be used to separate through traffic lanes from auxiliary lanes, such as uphill truck lanes, left- or right-turn lanes, and preferential lanes. They may also be used to separate traffic lanes approaching an intersection. Wide solid lane line markings may be used for greater emphasis. Standard: Where crossing the lane line markings is prohibited, the lane line markings shall consist of two normal solid white lines. Lane line markings shall be used on all freeways and Interstate highways. Guidance: Lane line markings should be used on all roadways with two or more adjacent traffic lanes that have the same direction of travel. Lane line markings should also be used at congested locations where the roadway will accommodate more traffic lanes with lane line markings than without the markings.
Page 3B-12
2003 Edition
Figure 3B-8. Examples of Channelizing Line Applications for Exit Ramp Markings (Sheet 1 of 2)
a - Parallel deceleration lane b - Tapered deceleration lane
Channelizing lines
Broken lane line markings for one-half length of full-width deceleration lane
Sect. 3B.05
2003 Edition
Page 3B-13
Figure 3B-8. Examples of Channelizing Line Applications for Exit Ramp Markings (Sheet 2 of 2)
c - Auxiliary lane, such as at cloverleaf interchange
Legend Direction of travel
Channelizing lines
Sect. 3B.05
Page 3B-14
2003 Edition
Figure 3B-9. Examples of Channelizing Line Applications for Entrance Ramp Markings
a - Parallel acceleration lane b - Tapered acceleration lane
Legend Direction of travel
Broken lane line markings for one-half length of full-width acceleration lane
Channelizing lines
Channelizing line
Sect. 3B.05
2003 Edition
Page 3B-15
Varies
2.7 m (9 ft) 0.9 m (3 ft) 2.7 m (9 ft) 0.9 m (3 ft) 2.7 m (9 ft) 0.9 m (3 ft) 200 mm (8 in)
800 m (1/2 mile) 200 mm (8 in) Lane Drop Marking (see detail at right)
Sect. 3B.05
Page 3B-16
2003 Edition
Guidance: If used, lane drop markings should begin 800 m (0.5 mi) in advance of the theoretical gore point. Option: Where lane changes might cause conflicts, a wide solid white channelizing line may extend upstream from the theoretical gore point.
2003 Edition
Page 3B-17
b - Typical pavement markings with optional double-turn lane lines, lane-use turn arrows, crosswalk lines, and stop lines
Sect. 3B.08
Page 3B-18
2003 Edition
Sect. 3B.08
2003 Edition
Page 3B-19
Guidance: Where highway design or reduced visibility conditions make it desirable to provide control or to guide vehicles through an intersection or interchange, such as at offset, skewed, complex, or multilegged intersections, on curved roadways, or where multiple turn lanes are used, dotted line markings should be used to extend longitudinal line markings through an intersection or interchange area. Option: Dotted edge line extensions may be placed through intersections or major driveways. Guidance: Where greater restriction is required, solid lane lines or channelizing lines should be extended into or continued through intersections or major driveways. However, edge lines should not be extended into or continued through intersections or major driveways as solid lines. A single line of equal width to one of the lines of the double line should be used to extend a double line through an intersection. To the extent possible, pavement marking extensions through intersections should be designed in a manner that minimizes potential confusion for drivers in adjacent or opposing lanes.
Page 3B-20
2003 Edition
rs Delineato
rs Delineato
d/4
s eator Delin
L = Length in meters (feet) S = Posted, 85th-percentile, or statutory speed in km/h (mph) W = Offset in meters (feet) d = Advance warning distance (see Section 2C.05) See Section 3D.04 for delineator spacing.
Sect. 3B.10
For speeds 70 km/h (45 mph) or more: L = 0.62 WS (L=WS) For speeds less than 70 km/h (45 mph): L = WS2 L = WS2 155 60
2003 Edition
Page 3B-21
2L MIN.
L L
L L
2L MIN.
For speeds 70 km/h (45 mph) or more L=0.62 WS (L=WS) For speeds less than 70 km/h (45 mph) L = WS2/155 (L=WS2/60) S = Posted, 85th-percentile, or statutory speed in km/h (mph) W = Offset distance in meters (ft) Legend Direction of travel Obstruction Length L should be extended as required by sight distance conditions Minimum length of : L = 30 m (100 ft) in urban areas L = 60 m (200 ft) in rural areas
Sect. 3B.10
Page 3B-22
2003 Edition
For speeds 70 km/h (45 mph) or more L=0.62 WS (L=WS) For speeds less than 70 km/h (45 mph) L = WS2/155 (L=WS2/60) S = Posted, 85th-percentile, or statutory speed in km/h (mph) W = Offset distance in meters (ft)
Minimum length of : L = 30 m (100 ft) in urban areas L = 60 m (200 ft) in rural areas Length L should be extended as required by sight distance conditions
Sect. 3B.10
2003 Edition
Page 3B-23
Under both formulas, L equals the taper length in meters (feet), W equals the width of the offset distance in meters (feet), and S equals the 85th-percentile speed or the posted or statutory speed limit, whichever is higher. Standard: The minimum taper length shall be 30 m (100 ft) in urban areas and 60 m (200 ft) in rural areas. Support: Examples of approach markings for obstructions in the roadway are shown in Figure 3B-13. Option: Where observed speeds exceed posted or statutory speed limits, longer tapers may be used. Standard: If traffic is required to pass only to the right of the obstruction, the markings shall consist of a twodirection no-passing zone marking at least twice the length of the diagonal portion as determined by the appropriate taper formula (see Figure 3B-13). Option: If traffic is required to pass only to the right of the obstruction, yellow diagonal approach markings may be placed in the neutral area between the no-passing zone markings as shown in Figure 3B-13. Other markings, such as yellow delineators, raised pavement markers, and white crosswalk pavement markings, may also be placed in the neutral area. Standard: If traffic can pass either to the right or left of the obstruction, the markings shall consist of two channelizing lines diverging from the lane line, one to each side of the obstruction. In advance of the point of divergence, a solid wide white line or solid double normal white line shall be extended in place of the broken lane line for a distance equal to the length of the diverging lines (see Figure 3B-13). Option: If traffic can pass either to the right or left of the obstruction, additional white markings may be placed in the neutral area between the channelizing lines as shown in Figure 3B-13.
Page 3B-24
2003 Edition
Support: Figures 9-20 through 9-22 in the Traffic Control Devices Handbook (see Section 1A.11) contain additional information regarding the spacing of raised pavement markers on longitudinal markings.
Section 3B.12 Raised Pavement Markers as Vehicle Positioning Guides with Other Longitudinal Markings
Option: Raised pavement markers may be used as positioning guides with longitudinal line markings without necessarily conveying information to the road user about passing or lane-use restrictions. In such applications, markers may be positioned between the two lines of a one-way or two-way no-passing zone marking or positioned in line with or immediately adjacent to single solid or broken centerline or lane line markings. Support: A typical spacing for such applications is 2N, where N equals the length of one line segment plus one gap (see Section 3B.11). Option: Where it is desired to alert the road user to changes in the travel path, such as on sharp curves or on transitions that reduce the number of lanes or that shift traffic laterally, the spacing may be reduced to N or less. On freeways and expressways, a spacing of 3N may be used for relatively straight and level roadway segments where engineering judgment indicates that such spacing will provide adequate delineation under wet night conditions.
2003 Edition
Page 3B-25
Option: The side of a raised pavement marker that is visible to traffic proceeding in the wrong direction may be red. Standard: If raised pavement markers are used to substitute for broken line markings, a group of three to five markers equally spaced at a distance no greater than N/8 (see Section 3B.11) shall be used. If N is other than 12 m (40 ft), the markers shall be equally spaced over the line segment length (at 1/2 points for 3 markers, at 1/3 points for 4 markers, and at 1/4 points for 5 markers). At least one retroreflective or internally illuminated marker per group shall be used or a retroreflective or internally illuminated marker shall be installed midway in each gap between successive groups of nonretroreflective markers. When raised pavement markers substitute for solid lane line markings, the markers shall be equally spaced at no greater than N/4, with retroreflective or internally illuminated units at a spacing no greater than N/2. Guidance: Raised pavement markers should not substitute for right edge line markings. Standard: When raised pavement markers substitute for dotted lines, they shall be spaced at no greater than N/4, with not less than one raised pavement marker per dotted line. At least one raised marker every N shall be retroreflective or internally illuminated. Option: When substituting for wide lines, raised pavement markers may be placed laterally adjacent to each other to simulate the width of the line.
Page 3B-26
2003 Edition
75 to 300 mm (3 to 12 in)
Notes: Triangle height is equal to 1.5 times the base dimension. Yield lines may be smaller than suggested when installed on much narrower, slow-speed facilities such as shared-use paths.
Direction of travel
Guidance: If used, stop and yield lines should be placed a minimum of 1.2 m (4 ft) in advance of the nearest crosswalk line at controlled intersections, except for yield lines at roundabout intersections as provided for in Section 3B.24 and at midblock crosswalks. In the absence of a marked crosswalk, the stop line or yield line should be placed at the desired stopping or yielding point, but should be placed no more than 9 m (30 ft) nor less than 1.2 m (4 ft) from the nearest edge of the intersecting traveled way. Stop lines should be placed to allow sufficient sight distance to all other approaches to an intersection. If used at an unsignalized midblock crosswalk, yield lines should be placed adjacent to the Yield Here to Pedestrians sign located 6.1 to 15 m (20 to 50 ft) in advance of the nearest crosswalk line, and parking should be prohibited in the area between the yield line and the crosswalk (see Figure 3B-15). Stop lines at midblock signalized locations should be placed at least 12 m (40 ft) in advance of the nearest signal indication (see Section 4D.15). Support: Drivers who yield too close to crosswalks on multi-lane approaches place pedestrians at risk by blocking other drivers views of pedestrians.
Sect. 3B.16
2003 Edition
Page 3B-27
a) Two-way roadway
b) One-way roadway
Page 3B-28
2003 Edition
Crosswalk lines, if used on both sides of the crosswalk, should extend across the full width of pavement or to the edge of the intersecting crosswalk to discourage diagonal walking between crosswalks (see Figures 3B-15 and 3B-16). Crosswalks should be marked at all intersections where there is substantial conflict between vehicular and pedestrian movements. Marked crosswalks also should be provided at other appropriate points of pedestrian concentration, such as at loading islands, midblock pedestrian crossings, or where pedestrians could not otherwise recognize the proper place to cross. Crosswalk lines should not be used indiscriminately. An engineering study should be performed before they are installed at locations away from highway traffic signals or STOP signs. Because nonintersection pedestrian crossings are generally unexpected by the road user, warning signs (see Section 2C.41) should be installed and adequate visibility should be provided by parking prohibitions. Support: Section 3B.16 contains information regarding placement of stop line markings near crosswalk markings. Option: For added visibility, the area of the crosswalk may be marked with white diagonal lines at a 45-degree angle to the line of the crosswalk or with white longitudinal lines parallel to traffic flow as shown in Figure 3B-16. When diagonal or longitudinal lines are used to mark a crosswalk, the transverse crosswalk lines may be omitted. This type of marking may be used at locations where substantial numbers of pedestrians cross without any other traffic control device, at locations where physical conditions are such that added visibility of the crosswalk is desired, or at places where a pedestrian crosswalk might not be expected. Guidance: If used, the diagonal or longitudinal lines should be 300 to 600 mm (12 to 24 in) wide and spaced 300 to 1500 mm (12 to 60 in) apart. The marking design should avoid the wheel paths, and the spacing should not exceed 2.5 times the line width. Option: When an exclusive pedestrian phase that permits diagonal crossing is provided at a traffic control signal, a marking as shown in Figure 3B-17 may be used for the crosswalk.
2003 Edition
Page 3B-29
Figure 3B-17. Example of Crosswalk Markings for Exclusive Pedestrian Phase That Permits Diagonal Crossing
Sect. 3B.19
Page 3B-30
2003 Edition
NO PARKING ZONE 6.1 m (20 ft) MIN. 6.7 to 7.9 m (22 to 26 ft)
NO PARKING ZONE
2.4 m (8 ft)
2.4 m (8 ft)
NO PARKING ZONE
Sect. 3B.19
2003 Edition
Page 3B-31
Figure 3B-19. International Symbol of Accessibility Parking Space Marking with Blue Background and White Border Options
**
Height of symbol: Minimum = 700 mm (28 in) Special = 1025 mm (41 in)
**
Width of symbol: Minimum = 600 mm (24 in) Special = 900 mm (36 in)
** Stroke width:
2.4 m (8 ft)
Sect. 3B.19
Page 3B-32
2003 Edition
f - Lane-Reduction Arrow
m 1.7 ft) 7 (5.6
Typical sizes for normal installation; sizes may be reduced approximately one-third for low-speed urban conditions; larger sizes may be needed for freeways, above average speeds, and other critical locations. A narrow elongated arrow design is optional. For proper proportion, see the Pavement Markings chapter of the Standard Highway Signs book (see Section 1A.11).
Sect. 3B.19
2003 Edition
Page 3B-33
Word and symbol markings should not exceed three lines of information. If a pavement marking word message consists of more than one line of information, it should read in the direction of travel. The first word of the message should be nearest to the road user. Except for the two opposing arrows of a two-way left-turn lane marking (see Figure 3B-7), the longitudinal space between word or symbol message markings, including arrow markings, should be at least four times the height of the characters for low-speed roads, but not more than ten times the height of the characters under any conditions. The number of different word and symbol markings used should be minimized to provide effective guidance and avoid misunderstanding. Except as noted in the Option, pavement word and symbol markings should be no more than one lane in width. Option: The SCHOOL word marking may extend to the width of two approach lanes (see Section 7C.06). Guidance: When the SCHOOL word marking is extended to the width of two approach lanes, the characters should be 3 m (10 ft) or more in height (see Section 7C.06). Pavement word and symbol markings should be proportionally scaled to fit within the width of the facility upon which they are applied. Option: On narrow, low-speed shared-use paths, the pavement words and symbols may be smaller than suggested, but to the relative scale. The International Symbol of Accessibility parking space markings may be placed in each parking space designated for use by persons with disabilities. A blue background with white border may supplement the wheelchair symbol as shown in Figure 3B-19. Standard: Where through traffic lanes approaching an intersection become mandatory turn lanes, lane-use arrow markings (see Figure 3B-21) shall be used and shall be accompanied by standard signs. Lane use, lane reduction, and wrong-way arrow markings shall be designed as shown in Figure 3B-21. Guidance: Where through lanes become mandatory turn lanes, signs or markings should be repeated as necessary to prevent entrapment and to help the road user select the appropriate lane in advance of reaching a queue of waiting vehicles. Option: Lane-use arrow markings (see Figure 3B-21) may be used to convey either guidance or mandatory messages. The ONLY word marking (see Figure 3B-20) may be used to supplement lane-use arrow markings (see Figure 3B-22). In situations where a lane reduction transition occurs, the lane reduction arrow markings shown in Figure 3B-21 may be used. Guidance: Where crossroad channelization or ramp geometrics do not make wrong-way movements difficult, a lane-use arrow should be placed in each lane of an exit ramp near the crossroad terminal where it will be clearly visible to a potential wrong-way road user (see Figure 3B-23). Option: The wrong-way arrow markings shown in Figure 3B-21 may be placed near the downstream terminus of a ramp as shown in Figures 3B-23 and 3B-24 to indicate the correct direction of traffic flow and to discourage drivers from traveling in the wrong direction. A yield-ahead triangle symbol or YIELD AHEAD word pavement marking may be used on approaches to intersections where the approaching traffic will encounter a YIELD sign at the intersection (see Figure 3B-25). Support: Lane-use arrow markings are often used to provide guidance in turn bays (see Figure 3B-22), where turns may or may not be mandatory, and in two-way left-turn lanes (see Figure 3B-7).
Sect. 3B.19
Page 3B-34
2003 Edition
Figure 3B-22. Examples of Lane Use Control Word and Symbol Markings
Legend Direction of travel Optional Line extensions may be solid or dotted lines Required where through lane becomes mandatory turn lane
Sect. 3B.19
2003 Edition
Page 3B-35
Entrance Ramp
Exi tR
am p
Sect. 3B.19
Page 3B-36
2003 Edition
Sect. 3B.19
2003 Edition
Page 3B-37
Direction of travel
Direction of travel
4m (13 ft)
mm 200 ) (8 in
mm 200 8 in) (
Sect. 3B.19
Page 3B-38
2003 Edition
Option: Word and symbol markings may include, but are not limited to, the following. Other words or symbols may also be used under certain conditions. A. Regulatory: 1. STOP 2. RIGHT (LEFT) TURN ONLY 3. 40 km/h (25 MPH) 4. Arrow Symbols B. Warning: 1. STOP AHEAD 2. YIELD AHEAD 3. YIELD AHEAD Triangle Symbol 4. SCHOOL XING 5. SIGNAL AHEAD 6. PED XING 7. SCHOOL 8. R X R 9. BUMP 10. HUMP C. Guide: 1. US 40 2. STATE 135 3. ROUTE 40 Standard: Except at the ends of aisles in parking lots, the word STOP shall not be used on the pavement unless accompanied by a stop line (see Section 3B.16) and STOP sign (see Section 2B.04). At the ends of aisles in parking lots, the word STOP shall not be used on the pavement unless accompanied by a stop line. The word STOP shall not be placed on the pavement in advance of a stop line, unless every vehicle is required to stop at all times. The yield-ahead triangle symbol or YIELD AHEAD word pavement marking shall not be used unless a YIELD sign (see Section 2B.08) is in place at the intersection. The yield-ahead symbol marking shall be as shown in Figure 3B-25.
2003 Edition
Page 3B-39
Guidance: Except as noted in the Option, when curb markings are used without signs to convey parking regulations, a legible word marking regarding the regulation (such as No Parking or No Standing) should be placed on the curb. Option: Curb markings without word markings or signs may be used to convey a general prohibition by statute of parking within a specified distance of a STOP sign, driveway, fire hydrant, or crosswalk. Guidance: Retroreflective solid yellow markings should be placed on the noses of raised medians and curbs of islands that are located in the line of traffic flow where the curb serves to channel traffic to the right of the obstruction. Retroreflective solid white markings should be used when traffic may pass on either side of the island. Option: Local highway agencies may prescribe special colors for curb markings to supplement standard signs for parking regulation. Support: Since yellow and white curb markings are frequently used for curb delineation and visibility, it is advisable to establish parking regulations through the installation of standard signs (see Sections 2B.39 through 2B.41). Where the curbs of the islands become parallel to the direction of traffic flow, it is not necessary to mark the curbs unless an engineering study indicates the need for this type of delineation. Curbs at openings in a continuous median island need not be marked unless an engineering study indicates the need for this type of marking.
Page 3B-40
2003 Edition
Support: The spacing of the markings is an engineering judgment that is based on the prevailing speed, block lengths, distance from intersections, and other factors that affect clear communication to the road user. Markings spaced as close as 24 m (80 ft) apart might be appropriate on City streets, while markings spaced 300 m (1,000 ft) might be appropriate for freeways. Option: The vehicle occupancy requirements established for a high-occupancy vehicle lane may be included in sequence after the diamond symbol or HOV word message.
2003 Edition
Page 3B-41
Table 3B-2. Standard Edge Line Lane Markings for Preferential Lanes
A double solid wide white line where crossing is prohibited (see Figure 3B-26e) A single solid wide white line where crossing is discouraged (see Figure 3B-26e) A single broken wide white line where crossing is permitted (see Figure 3B-26e) A single dotted normal white line where crossing is permitted for any vehicle to perform a right-turn maneuver (see Figure 3B-26e)
Notes: If there are two or more preferential lanes, they shall be separated with a normal broken white line. The standard lane markings listed in this table are provided in a tabular format for reference. This information is also described in the second Standard in Section 3B.23.
Sect. 3B.23
Page 3B-42
2003 Edition
Barrier or Median
Sect. 3B.23
2003 Edition
Page 3B-43
SINGLE BROKEN WIDE WHITE or SINGLE DOTTED NORMAL WHITE (Crossing Permitted)
Sect. 3B.23
Page 3B-44
2003 Edition
Guidance: When concurrent flow preferential lanes and other travel lanes are separated by more than 1.2 m (4 ft), chevron markings should be placed in the neutral area. The chevron spacing should be 30 m (100 ft) or greater. Option: For full-time or part-time concurrent flow preferential lanes, the spacing or skip pattern of the single broken wide white line may be reduced. The width of the single broken wide white line may be increased.
2003 Edition
Page 3B-45
Figure 3B-27. Examples of Markings for Roundabout Intersections with One-Lane Approaches
CENTRAL ISLAND
SPLITTER ISLAND
Sect. 3B.27
Page 3B-46
2003 Edition
Figure 3B-28. Examples of Markings for Roundabout Intersections with Two-Lane Approaches
CENTRAL ISLAND
SPLITTER ISLAND
Sect. 3B.27
2003 Edition
Page 3B-47
Figure 3B-29. Examples of Pavement Markings for Speed Humps Without Crosswalks
OPTION A
C of Roadway L 3.7 m (12 ft) 1.8 m (6 ft) 3.7 m (12 ft) Center of Travel Lane Typical Typical 1.8 m (6 ft)
OPTION B
3.7 m (12 ft) 0.3 m (1 ft) Center of Travel Lane 300 mm (12 in) White Markings 0.3 m (1 ft) 3.7 m (12 ft) Typical
0.3 m (1 ft)
OPTION C
C of Roadway L 3.7 m (12 ft) Typical
Typical
Sect. 3B.27
Page 3B-48
2003 Edition
Figure 3B-30. Examples of Pavement Markings for Speed Tables or Speed Humps with Crosswalks
Legend
OPTION A
C of Roadway L 3.7 m (12 ft) Typical Center of Travel Lane 1.8 m (6 ft) Typ.
OPTION B
Direction of travel
1.8 m (6 ft)
1.8 m (6 ft)
0.3 m (1 ft)
0.3 m (1 ft)
Option: Advance speed hump markings may be used in advance of an engineered vertical roadway deflection where added visibility is desired or where such deflection is not expected (see Figure 3B-31). Advance pavement wording such as BUMP or HUMP (see Section 3B.19) may be used on the approach to a speed hump either alone or in conjunction with advance speed hump markings. Appropriate advance warning signs may be used in conformance with Section 2C.24. Guidance: If used, advance speed hump markings should be installed in each approach lane.
Sect. 3B.27
2003 Edition
Page 3B-49
30 m (100 ft)
Center of Speed Hump Speed Hump Design Width 300 mm (12 in) White Pavement Markings 1.2 m (4 ft) 4.2 m (14 ft)
Edge of Roadway
300 mm (12 in) White Pavement Markings (see detail on this sheet) Width Varies (see detail on this sheet)
1.5 m (5 ft)
3m (10 ft)
2.4 m (8 ft)
Sect. 3B.27
2003 Edition
Page 3C-1
CHAPTER 3C. OBJECT MARKERS Section 3C.01 Object Marker Design and Placement Height
Support: Object markers are used to mark obstructions within or adjacent to the roadway. Standard: When used, object markers (see Figure 3C-1) shall consist of an arrangement of one or more of the following types: Type 1either a marker consisting of nine yellow retroreflectors, each with a minimum diameter of 75 mm (3 in), mounted symmetrically on a yellow (OM1-1) or black (OM1-2) diamond panel 450 mm (18 in) or more on a side; or on an all-yellow retroreflective diamond panel (OM1-3) of the same size. Type 2either a marker (OM2-1V or OM2-1H) consisting of three yellow retroreflectors, each with a minimum diameter of 75 mm (3 in), arranged either horizontally or vertically on a white panel measuring at least 150 x 300 mm (6 x 12 in); or on an all-yellow horizontal or vertical retroreflective panel (OM2-2V or OM2-2H), measuring at least 150 x 300 mm (6 x 12 in). Type 3a striped marker, 300 x 900 mm (12 x 36 in), consisting of a vertical rectangle with alternating black and retroreflective yellow stripes sloping downward at an angle of 45 degrees toward the side of the obstruction on which traffic is to pass. The minimum width of the yellow and black stripes shall be 75 mm (3 in). Support: A better appearance can be achieved if the black stripes are wider than the yellow stripes. Type 3 object markers with stripes that begin at the upper right side and slope downward to the lower left side are designated as right object markers (OM-3R). Object markers with stripes that begin at the upper left side and slope downward to the lower right side are designated as left object markers (OM-3L). Guidance: When used for marking objects in the roadway or objects that are 2.4 m (8 ft) or less from the shoulder or curb, the mounting height to the bottom of the object marker should be at least 1.2 m (4 ft) above the surface of the nearest traffic lane. When used to mark objects more than 2.4 m (8 ft) from the shoulder or curb, the mounting height to the bottom of the object marker should be at least 1.2 m (4 ft) above the ground. Option: When object markers or markings are applied to an object that by its nature requires a lower or higher mounting, the vertical mounting height may vary according to need.
Page 3C-2
2003 Edition
Figure 3C-1. Object Markers and End-of-Roadway Markers Type 1 Object Markers
OM1-1
OM1-2
OM1-3
OM2-1V
OM2-2V
OM2-1H
OM2-2H
OM-3L
OM-3C
OM-3R
End-of-Roadway Markers
OM4-1
OM4-2
OM4-3
Sect.3C.02
2003 Edition
Page 3C-3
2003 Edition
Page 3D-1
Page 3D-2
2003 Edition
Support: Delineators are not necessary for traffic moving in the direction of a wider pavement or on the side of the roadway where the alignment is not affected by the lane reduction transition. Guidance: On a highway with continuous delineation on either or both sides, delineators should be carried through transitions. Option: On a highway with continuous delineation on either or both sides, the spacing between a series of delineators may be closer. Standard: When used on a truck escape ramp, delineators shall be red. Guidance: Red delineators should be placed on both sides of truck escape ramps. The delineators should be spaced at 15 m (50 ft) intervals for a distance sufficient to identify the ramp entrance. Delineator spacing beyond the ramp entrance should be adequate for guidance according to the length and design of the escape ramp.
2003 Edition
Page 3D-3
NOTE: Delineators should be placed at a constant distance from the roadway edge, except that when an obstruction exists near the pavement edge, the line of delineators should make a smooth transition to the inside of the obstruction.
Edge of Roadway
Delineators mounted directly above or immediately behind guardrail or on the innermost edge of the guardrail. These delineators are not at a constant distance from roadway edge because of the bridge rail.
Guardrail
Edge of Shoulder
Sect. 3D.04
Page 3D-4
2003 Edition
Radius (R) Approximate Spacing (S) of Curve on Curve (feet) 50 115 180 250 300 400 500 600 700 800 900 1,000 (feet) 20 25 35 40 50 55 65 70 75 80 85 90
(meters) 6 8 11 13 15 18 20 22 24 26 27 29
Sect. 3D.04
2003 Edition
Page 3E-1
Sect. 3E.01
2003 Edition
Page 3F-1
2003 Edition
Page 3G-1
Page 3G-2
2003 Edition
Option: On long islands, curb retroreflection may be discontinued such that it does not extend for the entire length of the curb, especially if the island is illuminated or marked with delineators or edge lines.
Part 4
2003 Edition
Page TC4-1
Page TC4-2
2003 Edition
CHAPTER 4E. PEDESTRIAN CONTROL FEATURES Section 4E.01 Section 4E.02 Section 4E.03 Section 4E.04 Section 4E.05 Section 4E.06 Section 4E.07 Section 4E.08 Section 4E.09 Section 4E.10 Section 4F.01 Section 4F.02 Section 4F.03 Section 4G.01 Section 4G.02 Section 4G.03 Section 4H.01 Section 4H.02 CHAPTER 4I. Section 4I.01 Section 4I.02 Section 4I.03 Section 4J.01 Section 4J.02 Section 4J.03 Section 4J.04 Section 4K.01 Section 4K.02 Section 4K.03 Section 4K.04 Section 4K.05 Section 4L.01 Section 4L.02 Pedestrian Signal Heads ..........................................................................................................4E-1 Meaning of Pedestrian Signal Head Indications .....................................................................4E-1 Application of Pedestrian Signal Heads ..................................................................................4E-1 Size, Design, and Illumination of Pedestrian Signal Head Indications...................................4E-1 Location and Height of Pedestrian Signal Heads....................................................................4E-3 Accessible Pedestrian Signals..................................................................................................4E-3 Countdown Pedestrian Signals ................................................................................................4E-5 Pedestrian Detectors ................................................................................................................4E-6 Accessible Pedestrian Signal Detectors...................................................................................4E-6 Pedestrian Intervals and Signal Phases....................................................................................4E-7 Applications of Emergency-Vehicle Traffic Control Signals ..................................................4F-1 Design of Emergency-Vehicle Traffic Control Signals ...........................................................4F-1 Operation of Emergency-Vehicle Traffic Control Signals.......................................................4F-1 Application of Traffic Control Signals for One-Lane, Two-Way Facilities............................4G-1 Design of Traffic Control Signals for One-Lane, Two-Way Facilities ...................................4G-1 Operation of Traffic Control Signals for One-Lane, Two-Way Facilities...............................4G-1 Application of Freeway Entrance Ramp Control Signals.......................................................4H-1 Design of Freeway Entrance Ramp Control Signals ..............................................................4H-1 TRAFFIC CONTROL FOR MOVABLE BRIDGES Application of Traffic Control for Movable Bridges................................................................4I-1 Design and Location of Movable Bridge Signals and Gates....................................................4I-1 Operation of Movable Bridge Signals and Gates .....................................................................4I-2 Application of Lane-Use Control Signals ................................................................................4J-1 Meaning of Lane-Use Control Signal Indications....................................................................4J-1 Design of Lane-Use Control Signals........................................................................................4J-2 Operation of Lane-Use Control Signals ...................................................................................4J-3 General Design and Operation of Flashing Beacons ..............................................................4K-1 Intersection Control Beacon....................................................................................................4K-1 Warning Beacon ......................................................................................................................4K-1 Speed Limit Sign Beacon........................................................................................................4K-2 Stop Beacon.............................................................................................................................4K-2 Application of In-Roadway Lights ..........................................................................................4L-1 In-Roadway Warning Lights at Crosswalks ............................................................................4L-1
2003 Edition
Page TC4-3
FIGURES CHAPTER 4C. TRAFFIC CONTROL SIGNAL NEEDS STUDIES Figure 4C-1 Figure 4C-2 Figure 4C-3 Figure 4C-4 Figure 4D-1 Figure 4D-2 Figure 4D-3 Figure 4E-1 Figure 4E-2 Figure 4J-1 TABLES CHAPTER 4C. TRAFFIC CONTROL SIGNAL NEEDS STUDIES Table 4C-1 Table 4D-1 Warrant 1, Eight-Hour Vehicular Volume................................................................................4C-3 Minimum Sight Distance ......................................................................................................4D-13 CHAPTER 4D. TRAFFIC CONTROL SIGNAL FEATURES Warrant 2, Four-Hour Vehicular Volume.................................................................................4C-5 Warrant 2, Four-Hour Vehicular Volume (70% Factor)...........................................................4C-5 Warrant 3, Peak Hour ..............................................................................................................4C-7 Warrant 3, Peak Hour (70% Factor)........................................................................................4C-7 Maximum Mounting Height of Signal Faces Located Between 12 Meters (4 Feet) and 16 Meters (53 Feet) from Stop Line .....................................................................................4D-14 Horizontal Location of Signal Faces.....................................................................................4D-15 Typical Arrangements of Signal Lenses in Signal Faces ......................................................4D-18 Typical Pedestrian Signal Indications......................................................................................4E-2 Recommended Pushbutton Locations for Accessible Pedestrian Signals ...............................4E-8 Left-Turn Lane-Use Control Signals ........................................................................................4J-2
2003 Edition
Page 4A-1
Page 4A-2
2003 Edition
22. Highway Traffic Signala power-operated traffic control device by which traffic is warned or directed to take some specific action. These devices do not include signals at toll plazas, poweroperated signs, illuminated pavement markers, warning lights (see Section 6F.78), or steadyburning electric lamps. 23. In-Roadway Lightsa special type of highway traffic signal installed in the roadway surface to warn road users that they are approaching a condition on or adjacent to the roadway that might not be readily apparent and might require the road users to slow down and/or come to a stop. 24. Intersection(a) the area embraced within the prolongation or connection of the lateral curb lines, or if none, the lateral boundary lines of the roadways of two highways that join one another at, or approximately at, right angles, or the area within which vehicles traveling on different highways that join at any other angle might come into conflict; (b) the junction of an alley or driveway with a roadway or highway shall not constitute an intersection. 25. Intersection Control Beacona beacon used only at an intersection to control two or more directions of travel. 26. Intervalthe part of a signal cycle during which signal indications do not change. 27. Interval Sequencethe order of appearance of signal indications during successive intervals of a signal cycle. 28. Lane-Use Control Signala signal face displaying signal indications to permit or prohibit the use of specific lanes of a roadway or to indicate the impending prohibition of such use. 29. Lenssee Signal Lens. 30. Louversee Signal Louver. 31. Major Streetthe street normally carrying the higher volume of vehicular traffic. 32. Malfunction Management Unitsame as Conflict Monitor. 33. Minor Streetthe street normally carrying the lower volume of vehicular traffic. 34. Movable Bridge Resistance Gatea type of traffic gate, which is located downstream of the movable bridge warning gate, that provides a physical deterrent to vehicle and/or pedestrian traffic when placed in the appropriate position. 35. Movable Bridge Signala highway traffic signal installed at a movable bridge to notify traffic to stop during periods when the roadway is closed to allow the bridge to open. 36. Movable Bridge Warning Gatea type of traffic gate designed to warn, but not primarily to block, vehicle and/or pedestrian traffic when placed in the appropriate position. 37. Pedestrian Change Intervalan interval during which the flashing UPRAISED HAND (symbolizing DONT WALK) signal indication is displayed. When a verbal message is provided at an accessible pedestrian signal, the verbal message is wait. 38. Pedestrian Clearance Timethe time provided for a pedestrian crossing in a crosswalk, after leaving the curb or shoulder, to travel to the far side of the traveled way or to a median. 39. Pedestrian Signal Heada signal head, which contains the symbols WALKING PERSON (symbolizing WALK) and UPRAISED HAND (symbolizing DONT WALK), that is installed to direct pedestrian traffic at a traffic control signal. 40. Permissive Modea mode of traffic control signal operation in which, when a CIRCULAR GREEN signal indication is displayed, left or right turns are permitted to be made after yielding to pedestrians and/or oncoming traffic. 41. Platoona group of vehicles or pedestrians traveling together as a group, either voluntarily or involuntarily, because of traffic signal controls, geometrics, or other factors. 42. Preemption Controlthe transfer of normal operation of a traffic control signal to a special control mode of operation. 43. Pretimed Operationa type of traffic control signal operation in which none of the signal phases function on the basis of actuation. 44. Priority Controla means by which the assignment of right-of-way is obtained or modified. 45. Protected Modea mode of traffic control signal operation in which left or right turns are permitted to be made when a left or right GREEN ARROW signal indication is displayed. 46. Pushbuttona button to activate pedestrian timing. 47. Pushbutton Locator Tonea repeating sound that informs approaching pedestrians that they are required to push a button to actuate pedestrian timing and that enables pedestrians who have visual disabilities to locate the pushbutton. 48. Ramp Control Signala highway traffic signal installed to control the flow of traffic onto a freeway at an entrance ramp or at a freeway-to-freeway ramp connection. 49. Ramp Metersee Ramp Control Signal. 50. Red Clearance Intervalan optional interval that follows a yellow change interval and precedes the next conflicting green interval.
Sect. 4A.02
2003 Edition
Page 4A-3
51. Right-of-Way (Assignment)the permitting of vehicles and/or pedestrians to proceed in a lawful manner in preference to other vehicles or pedestrians by the display of signal indications. 52. Roadway Networka geographical arrangement of intersecting roadways. 53. Semiactuated Operationa type of traffic control signal operation in which at least one, but not all, signal phases function on the basis of actuation. 54. Separate Left-Turn Signal Facea signal face for controlling a left-turn movement that sometimes displays a different color of circular signal indication than the adjacent through signal faces display. 55. Shared Left-Turn Signal Facea signal face, for controlling both a left turn movement and the adjacent through movement, that always displays the same color of circular signal indication that the adjacent through signal face or faces display. 56. Signal Backplatea thin strip of material that extends outward from and parallel to a signal face on all sides of a signal housing to provide a background for improved visibility of the signal indications. 57. Signal Coordinationthe establishment of timed relationships between adjacent traffic control signals. 58. Signal Facethat part of a traffic control signal provided for controlling one or more traffic movements on a single approach. 59. Signal Headan assembly of one or more signal sections. 60. Signal Housingthat part of a signal section that protects the light source and other required components. 61. Signal Indicationthe illumination of a signal lens or equivalent device. 62. Signal Lensthat part of the signal section that redirects the light coming directly from the light source and its reflector, if any. 63. Signal Louvera device that can be mounted inside a signal visor to restrict visibility of a signal indication from the side or to limit the visibility of the signal indication to a certain lane or lanes, or to a certain distance from the stop line. 64. Signal Phasethe right-of-way, yellow change, and red clearance intervals in a cycle that are assigned to an independent traffic movement or combination of movements. 65. Signal Sectionthe assembly of a signal housing, signal lens, and light source with necessary components to be used for providing one signal indication. 66. Signal Systemtwo or more traffic control signals operating in signal coordination. 67. Signal Timingthe amount of time allocated for the display of a signal indication. 68. Signal Visorthat part of a signal section that directs the signal indication specifically to approaching traffic and reduces the effect of direct external light entering the signal lens. 69. Signal Warranta threshold condition that, if found to be satisfied as part of an engineering study, shall result in analysis of other traffic conditions or factors to determine whether a traffic control signal or other improvement is justified. 70. Speed Limit Sign Beacona beacon used to supplement a SPEED LIMIT sign. 71. Steady (Steady Mode)the continuous illumination of a signal indication for the duration of an interval, signal phase, or consecutive signal phases. 72. Stop Beacona beacon used to supplement a STOP sign, a DO NOT ENTER sign, or a WRONG WAY sign. 73. Traffic Control Signal (Traffic Signal)any highway traffic signal by which traffic is alternately directed to stop and permitted to proceed. 74. Vibrotactile Pedestrian Devicea device that communicates, by touch, information about pedestrian timing using a vibrating surface. 75. Visibility-Limited Signal Face or Signal Sectiona type of signal face or signal section designed (or shielded, hooded, or louvered) to restrict the visibility of a signal indication from the side, to a certain lane or lanes, or to a certain distance from the stop line. 76. Walk Intervalan interval during which the WALKING PERSON (symbolizing WALK) signal indication is displayed. When a verbal message is provided at an accessible pedestrian signal, the verbal message is walk sign. 77. Warning Beacona beacon used only to supplement an appropriate warning or regulatory sign or marker. 78. Yellow Change Intervalthe first interval following the green interval during which the yellow signal indication is displayed.
Sect. 4A.02
2003 Edition
Page 4B-1
Page 4B-2
2003 Edition
to maximize the ability of the traffic control signal to satisfy current traffic demands. C. They reduce the frequency and severity of certain types of crashes, especially right-angle collisions. D. They are coordinated to provide for continuous or nearly continuous movement of traffic at a definite speed along a given route under favorable conditions. E. They are used to interrupt heavy traffic at intervals to permit other traffic, vehicular or pedestrian, to cross. Traffic control signals are often considered a panacea for all traffic problems at intersections. This belief has led to traffic control signals being installed at many locations where they are not needed, adversely affecting the safety and efficiency of vehicular, bicycle, and pedestrian traffic. Traffic control signals, even when justified by traffic and roadway conditions, can be ill-designed, ineffectively placed, improperly operated, or poorly maintained. Improper or unjustified traffic control signals can result in one or more of the following disadvantages: A. Excessive delay; B. Excessive disobedience of the signal indications; C. Increased use of less adequate routes as road users attempt to avoid the traffic control signals; and D. Significant increases in the frequency of collisions (especially rear-end collisions).
2003 Edition
Page 4C-1
CHAPTER 4C. TRAFFIC CONTROL SIGNAL NEEDS STUDIES Section 4C.01 Studies and Factors for Justifying Traffic Control Signals
Standard: An engineering study of traffic conditions, pedestrian characteristics, and physical characteristics of the location shall be performed to determine whether installation of a traffic control signal is justified at a particular location. The investigation of the need for a traffic control signal shall include an analysis of the applicable factors contained in the following traffic signal warrants and other factors related to existing operation and safety at the study location: Warrant 1, Eight-Hour Vehicular Volume. Warrant 2, Four-Hour Vehicular Volume. Warrant 3, Peak Hour. Warrant 4, Pedestrian Volume. Warrant 5, School Crossing. Warrant 6, Coordinated Signal System. Warrant 7, Crash Experience. Warrant 8, Roadway Network. The satisfaction of a traffic signal warrant or warrants shall not in itself require the installation of a traffic control signal. Support: Sections 8D.07 and 10D.05 contain information regarding the use of traffic control signals instead of gates and/or flashing light signals at highway-railroad grade crossings and highway-light rail transit grade crossings, respectively. Guidance: A traffic control signal should not be installed unless one or more of the factors described in this Chapter are met. A traffic control signal should not be installed unless an engineering study indicates that installing a traffic control signal will improve the overall safety and/or operation of the intersection. A traffic control signal should not be installed if it will seriously disrupt progressive traffic flow. The study should consider the effects of the right-turn vehicles from the minor-street approaches. Engineering judgment should be used to determine what, if any, portion of the right-turn traffic is subtracted from the minor-street traffic count when evaluating the count against the above signal warrants. Engineering judgment should also be used in applying various traffic signal warrants to cases where approaches consist of one lane plus one left-turn or right-turn lane. The site-specific traffic characteristics dictate whether an approach should be considered as one lane or two lanes. For example, for an approach with one lane for through and right-turning traffic plus a left-turn lane, engineering judgment could indicate that it should be considered a one-lane approach if the traffic using the left-turn lane is minor. In such a case, the total traffic volume approaching the intersection should be applied against the signal warrants as a one-lane approach. The approach should be considered two lanes if approximately half of the traffic on the approach turns left and the left-turn lane is of sufficient length to accommodate all left-turn vehicles. Similar engineering judgment and rationale should be applied to a street approach with one lane plus a rightturn lane. In this case, the degree of conflict of minor-street right-turn traffic with traffic on the major street should be considered. Thus, right-turn traffic should not be included in the minor-street volume if the movement enters the major street with minimal conflict. The approach should be evaluated as a one-lane approach with only the traffic volume in the through/left-turn lane considered. At a location that is under development or construction and where it is not possible to obtain a traffic count that would represent future traffic conditions, hourly volumes should be estimated as part of an engineering study for comparison with traffic signal warrants. Except for locations where the engineering study uses the satisfaction of Warrant 8 to justify a signal, a traffic control signal installed under projected conditions should have an engineering study done within 1 year of putting the signal into stop-and-go operation to determine if the signal is justified. If not justified, the signal should be taken out of stop-and-go operation or removed. For signal warrant analysis, a location with a wide median, even if the median width is greater than 9 m (30 ft), should be considered as one intersection.
Sect. 4C.01
Page 4C-2
2003 Edition
Option: At an intersection with a high volume of left-turn traffic from the major street, the signal warrant analysis may be performed in a manner that considers the higher of the major-street left-turn volumes as the minorstreet volume and the corresponding single direction of opposing traffic on the major street as the major-street volume. For signal warrant analysis, bicyclists may be counted as either vehicles or pedestrians. Support: When performing a signal warrant analysis, bicyclists riding in the street with other vehicular traffic are usually counted as vehicles and bicyclists who are clearly using pedestrian facilities are usually counted as pedestrians. Option: Engineering study data may include the following: A. The number of vehicles entering the intersection in each hour from each approach during 12 hours of an average day. It is desirable that the hours selected contain the greatest percentage of the 24-hour traffic volume. B. Vehicular volumes for each traffic movement from each approach, classified by vehicle type (heavy trucks, passenger cars and light trucks, public-transit vehicles, and, in some locations, bicycles), during each 15-minute period of the 2 hours in the morning and 2 hours in the afternoon during which total traffic entering the intersection is greatest. C. Pedestrian volume counts on each crosswalk during the same periods as the vehicular counts in Item B above and during hours of highest pedestrian volume. Where young, elderly, and/or persons with physical or visual disabilities need special consideration, the pedestrians and their crossing times may be classified by general observation. D. Information about nearby facilities and activity centers that serve the young, elderly, and/or persons with disabilities, including requests from persons with disabilities for accessible crossing improvements at the location under study. These persons might not be adequately reflected in the pedestrian volume count if the absence of a signal restrains their mobility. E. The posted or statutory speed limit or the 85th-percentile speed on the uncontrolled approaches to the location. F. A condition diagram showing details of the physical layout, including such features as intersection geometrics, channelization, grades, sight-distance restrictions, transit stops and routes, parking conditions, pavement markings, roadway lighting, driveways, nearby railroad crossings, distance to nearest traffic control signals, utility poles and fixtures, and adjacent land use. G. A collision diagram showing crash experience by type, location, direction of movement, severity, weather, time of day, date, and day of week for at least 1 year. The following data, which are desirable for a more precise understanding of the operation of the intersection, may be obtained during the periods specified in Item B of the preceding paragraph: A. Vehicle-hours of stopped time delay determined separately for each approach. B. The number and distribution of acceptable gaps in vehicular traffic on the major street for entrance from the minor street. C. The posted or statutory speed limit or the 85th-percentile speed on controlled approaches at a point near to the intersection but unaffected by the control. D. Pedestrian delay time for at least two 30-minute peak pedestrian delay periods of an average weekday or like periods of a Saturday or Sunday. E. Queue length on stop-controlled approaches.
2003 Edition
Page 4C-3
Number of lanes for moving traffic on each approach Major Street 1................. 2 or more... 2 or more... 1................. Minor Street 1................. 1................. 2 or more ... 2 or more ....
Vehicles per hour on major street (total of both approaches) 100%a 500 600 600 500 80%b 400 480 480 400 70%c 350 420 420 350 56%d 280 336 336 280
Condition BInterruption of Continuous Traffic Vehicles per hour on higher-volume minor-street approach (one direction only) 100%a 80%b 70%c 56%d 75 75 100 100 60 60 80 80 53 53 70 70 42 42 56 56
Number of lanes for moving traffic on each approach Major Street 1................. 2 or more... 2 or more... 1.................
a b
Vehicles per hour on major street (total of both approaches) 100%a 750 900 900 750 80%b 600 720 720 600 70%c 525 630 630 525 56%d 420 504 504 420
Basic minimum hourly volume. Used for combination of Conditions A and B after adequate trial of other remedial measures. c May be used when the major-street speed exceeds 70 km/h or exceeds 40 mph or in an isolated community with a population of less than 10,000. d May be used for combination of Conditions A and B after adequate trial of other remedial measures when the majorstreet speed exceeds 70 km/h or exceeds 40 mph or in an isolated community with a population of less than 10,000.
Standard: The need for a traffic control signal shall be considered if an engineering study finds that one of the following conditions exist for each of any 8 hours of an average day: A. The vehicles per hour given in both of the 100 percent columns of Condition A in Table 4C-1 exist on the major-street and the higher-volume minor-street approaches, respectively, to the intersection; or B. The vehicles per hour given in both of the 100 percent columns of Condition B in Table 4C-1 exist on the major-street and the higher-volume minor-street approaches, respectively, to the intersection. In applying each condition the major-street and minor-street volumes shall be for the same 8 hours. On the minor street, the higher volume shall not be required to be on the same approach during each of these 8 hours. Option: If the posted or statutory speed limit or the 85th-percentile speed on the major street exceeds 70 km/h or exceeds 40 mph, or if the intersection lies within the built-up area of an isolated community having a population of less than 10,000, the traffic volumes in the 70 percent columns in Table 4C-1 may be used in place of the 100 percent columns.
Sect. 4C.02
Page 4C-4
2003 Edition
Guidance: The combination of Conditions A and B is intended for application at locations where Condition A is not satisfied and Condition B is not satisfied and should be applied only after an adequate trial of other alternatives that could cause less delay and inconvenience to traffic has failed to solve the traffic problems. Standard: The need for a traffic control signal shall be considered if an engineering study finds that both of the following conditions exist for each of any 8 hours of an average day: A. The vehicles per hour given in both of the 80 percent columns of Condition A in Table 4C-1 exist on the major-street and the higher-volume minor-street approaches, respectively, to the intersection; and B. The vehicles per hour given in both of the 80 percent columns of Condition B in Table 4C-1 exist on the major-street and the higher-volume minor-street approaches, respectively, to the intersection. These major-street and minor-street volumes shall be for the same 8 hours for each condition; however, the 8 hours satisfied in Condition A shall not be required to be the same 8 hours satisfied in Condition B. On the minor street, the higher volume shall not be required to be on the same approach during each of the 8 hours. Option: If the posted or statutory speed limit or the 85th-percentile speed on the major street exceeds 70 km/h or exceeds 40 mph, or if the intersection lies within the built-up area of an isolated community having a population of less than 10,000, the traffic volumes in the 56 percent columns in Table 4C-1 may be used in place of the 80 percent columns.
2003 Edition
Page 4C-5
500
300
100
300
400
500
600
700
800
900
1000
1100
1200
1300
1400
200
300
400
500
600
700
800
900
1000
Sect. 4C.04
Page 4C-6
2003 Edition
2. The volume on the same minor-street approach (one direction only) equals or exceeds 100 vehicles per hour for one moving lane of traffic or 150 vehicles per hour for two moving lanes, and 3. The total entering volume serviced during the hour equals or exceeds 650 vehicles per hour for intersections with three approaches or 800 vehicles per hour for intersections with four or more approaches. B. The plotted point representing the vehicles per hour on the major street (total of both approaches) and the corresponding vehicles per hour on the higher-volume minor-street approach (one direction only) for 1 hour (any four consecutive 15-minute periods) of an average day falls above the applicable curve in Figure 4C-3 for the existing combination of approach lanes. Option: If the posted or statutory speed limit or the 85th-percentile speed on the major street exceeds 70 km/h or exceeds 40 mph, or if the intersection lies within the built-up area of an isolated community having a population of less than 10,000, Figure 4C-4 may be used in place of Figure 4C-3 to satisfy the criteria in the second category of the Standard.
2003 Edition
Page 4C-7
2 OR MORE LANES & 2 OR MORE LANES 2 OR MORE LANES & 1 LANE 1 LANE & 1 LANE
400
500
600
700
800
900
400
300
100
300
400
500
600
700
800
900
1000
1100
1200
1300
Sect. 4C.06
Page 4C-8
2003 Edition
Standard: The need for a traffic control signal shall be considered when an engineering study of the frequency and adequacy of gaps in the vehicular traffic stream as related to the number and size of groups of school children at an established school crossing across the major street shows that the number of adequate gaps in the traffic stream during the period when the children are using the crossing is less than the number of minutes in the same period (see Section 7A.03) and there are a minimum of 20 students during the highest crossing hour. Before a decision is made to install a traffic control signal, consideration shall be given to the implementation of other remedial measures, such as warning signs and flashers, school speed zones, school crossing guards, or a grade-separated crossing. The School Crossing signal warrant shall not be applied at locations where the distance to the nearest traffic control signal along the major street is less than 90 m (300 ft), unless the proposed traffic control signal will not restrict the progressive movement of traffic. Guidance: If this warrant is met and a traffic control signal is justified by an engineering study, then: A. If at an intersection, the traffic control signal should be traffic-actuated and should include pedestrian detectors. B. If at a nonintersection crossing, the traffic control signal should be pedestrian-actuated, parking and other sight obstructions should be prohibited for at least 30 m (100 ft) in advance of and at least 6.1 m (20 ft) beyond the crosswalk, and the installation should include suitable standard signs and pavement markings. C. Furthermore, if installed within a signal system, the traffic control signal should be coordinated.
2003 Edition
Page 4C-9
less than 80 percent of the requirements specified in the Pedestrian Volume warrant. These majorstreet and minor-street volumes shall be for the same 8 hours. On the minor street, the higher volume shall not be required to be on the same approach during each of the 8 hours. Option: If the posted or statutory speed limit or the 85th-percentile speed on the major street exceeds 70 km/h or exceeds 40 mph, or if the intersection lies within the built-up area of an isolated community having a population of less than 10,000, the traffic volumes in the 56 percent columns in Table 4C-1 may be used in place of the 80 percent columns.
2003 Edition
Page 4D-1
Page 4D-2
2003 Edition
F. Provide spare equipment to minimize the interruption of traffic control signal operation as a result of equipment failure; G. Provide for the availability of properly skilled maintenance personnel for the repair of all components; and H. Maintain the appearance of the signal displays and equipment.
2003 Edition
Page 4D-3
2. Pedestrians facing a steady CIRCULAR YELLOW or YELLOW ARROW signal indication, unless otherwise directed by a pedestrian signal head, are thereby advised that there is insufficient time to cross the roadway before a red signal indication is shown, and no pedestrian shall then start to cross the roadway. C. Steady red signal indications shall have the following meanings: 1. Vehicular traffic facing a steady CIRCULAR RED signal indication alone shall stop at a clearly marked stop line, but if there is no stop line, traffic shall stop before entering the crosswalk on the near side of the intersection; or if there is no crosswalk, then before entering the intersection, and shall remain stopped until a signal indication to proceed is shown, or as provided below. Except when a sign is in place prohibiting a turn on red or a RED ARROW signal indication is displayed, vehicular traffic facing a CIRCULAR RED signal indication is permitted to enter the intersection to turn right, or to turn left from a one-way street into a one-way street, after stopping. Such vehicular traffic shall yield the right-of-way to pedestrians lawfully within an adjacent crosswalk and to other traffic lawfully using the intersection. 2. Vehicular traffic facing a steady RED ARROW signal indication shall not enter the intersection to make the movement indicated by the arrow and, unless entering the intersection to make another movement permitted by another signal indication, shall stop at a clearly marked stop line; but if there is no stop line, before entering the crosswalk on the near side of the intersection, or if there is no crosswalk, then before entering the intersection, and shall remain stopped until a signal indication permitting the movement indicated by such RED ARROW is shown. When an R10-17a sign (see Section 2B.45) is in place permitting a turn on a RED ARROW signal indication, vehicular traffic facing a RED ARROW signal indication is permitted to enter the intersection to turn right, or to turn left from a one-way street into a one-way street, after stopping. Such vehicular traffic shall yield the right-of-way to pedestrians lawfully within an adjacent crosswalk and to other traffic lawfully using the intersection. 3. Unless otherwise directed by a pedestrian signal head, pedestrians facing a steady CIRCULAR RED or RED ARROW signal indication alone shall not enter the roadway. D. Flashing signal indications shall have the following meanings: 1. Flashing yellowWhen a yellow lens is illuminated with rapid intermittent flashes, vehicular traffic is permitted to proceed through the intersection or past such signal indication only with caution. 2. Flashing redWhen a red lens is illuminated with rapid intermittent flashes, vehicular traffic shall stop at a clearly marked stop line; but if there is no stop line, traffic shall stop before entering the crosswalk on the near side of the intersection; or if there is no crosswalk, at the point nearest the intersecting roadway where the driver has a view of approaching traffic on the intersecting roadway before entering the intersection. The right to proceed shall be subject to the rules applicable after making a stop at a STOP sign. 3. Flashing RED ARROW and flashing YELLOW ARROW signal indications have the same meaning as the corresponding flashing circular signal indication, except that they apply only to vehicular traffic intending to make the movement indicated by the arrow.
Page 4D-4
2003 Edition
B. A steady CIRCULAR YELLOW signal indication: 1. Shall be displayed following a CIRCULAR GREEN or straight-through GREEN ARROW signal indication in the same signal face. 2. Shall not be displayed in conjunction with the change from the CIRCULAR RED signal indication to the CIRCULAR GREEN signal indication. 3. Shall be followed by a CIRCULAR RED signal indication except that, when entering preemption operation, the return to the previous CIRCULAR GREEN signal indication shall be permitted following a CIRCULAR YELLOW signal indication (see Section 4D.13). 4. Shall not be displayed to an approach from which drivers are turning left permissively unless one of the following conditions exists: (a) A steady CIRCULAR YELLOW signal indication is also being shown simultaneously to the opposing approach; (b) A separate left-turn signal face is provided and operated as described in Section 4D.06; (c) An engineering study has determined that, because of unique intersection conditions, the conditions described in items (a) and (b) above cannot reasonably be implemented without causing significant operational or safety problems and that the volume of impacted leftturning traffic is relatively low, and those left-turning drivers are advised that the opposing traffic is not simultaneously being shown a CIRCULAR YELLOW signal indication if this operation occurs continuously by the installation near the left-most signal head of a W25-1 sign (see Section 2C.39) with the legend ONCOMING TRAFFIC HAS EXTENDED GREEN; or (d) Drivers are advised of the operation if it occurs only occasionally, such as during a preemption sequence or because of the skipping of actuated phases, by the installation near the left-most signal head of a W25-2 sign (see Section 2C.39) with the legend ONCOMING TRAFFIC MAY HAVE EXTENDED GREEN. C. A steady CIRCULAR GREEN signal indication shall be displayed only when it is intended to permit traffic to proceed in any direction that is lawful and practical. D. A steady RED ARROW signal indication shall be displayed when it is intended to prohibit traffic, except pedestrians directed by a pedestrian signal head, from entering the intersection or other controlled area to make the indicated turn. Except as described in Item C.2 of Section 4D.04, turning on a steady RED ARROW signal indication shall not be permitted. E. A steady YELLOW ARROW signal indication: 1. Shall be displayed in the same direction as a GREEN ARROW signal indication following a GREEN ARROW signal indication in the same signal face, unless: (a) The GREEN ARROW signal indication and a CIRCULAR GREEN (or straight-through GREEN ARROW) signal indication terminate simultaneously in the same signal face, or (b) The green arrow is a straight-through GREEN ARROW. 2. Shall not be displayed in conjunction with the change from a RED ARROW signal indication to a GREEN ARROW signal indication. 3. Shall not be displayed when any conflicting vehicular movement has a green or yellow signal indication or any conflicting pedestrian movement has a WALKING PERSON (symbolizing WALK) or flashing UPRAISED HAND (symbolizing DONT WALK) signal indication (see Section 4D.09). 4. Shall be terminated by a RED ARROW signal indication for the same direction or a CIRCULAR RED signal indication except: (a) When entering preemption operation, the return to the previous GREEN ARROW signal indication shall be permitted following a YELLOW ARROW signal indication. (b) When the movement controlled by the arrow is to continue on a permissive mode basis during an immediately following CIRCULAR GREEN signal indication. F. A steady GREEN ARROW signal indication: 1. Shall be displayed only to allow vehicular movements, in the direction indicated, that are not in conflict with other vehicles moving on a green or yellow signal indication or with pedestrians crossing in conformance with a WALKING PERSON (symbolizing WALK) or flashing UPRAISED HAND (symbolizing DONT WALK) signal indication (see Section 4D.09). 2. Shall be displayed on a signal face that controls a left-turn movement when said movement is not in conflict with other vehicles moving on a green or yellow signal indication or with pedestrians crossing in conformance with a WALKING PERSON (symbolizing WALK) or flashing UPRAISED HAND (symbolizing DONT WALK) signal indication (see Section 4D.09). 3. Shall not be required on the stem of T-intersections or for turns from one-way streets.
Sect. 4D.05
2003 Edition
Page 4D-5
Option: Steady RED ARROW, YELLOW ARROW, and GREEN ARROW signal indications, if not otherwise prohibited, may be used instead of the corresponding circular signal indications at the following locations: A. On an approach intersecting a one-way street; B. Where certain movements are prohibited; and C. Where certain movements are physically impossible. If U-turns are permitted from the approach and if drivers making a right turn from the conflicting approach to the left are simultaneously being shown a right-turn GREEN ARROW signal indication, drivers making a U-turn may be advised of the operation by the installation near the left-turn signal face of a U-TURN YIELD TO RIGHT TURN (R10-16) sign (see Section 2B.45).
Page 4D-6
2003 Edition
required in Section 4D.15 for the major movement. Only one of the three colors shall be illuminated at any given time. A signal instruction sign shall not be required with this set of signal indications. If used, it shall be a LEFT ON GREEN ARROW ONLY sign (R10-5). 2. CIRCULAR RED, left-turn YELLOW ARROW, and left-turn GREEN ARROW signal indications. At least one left-turn signal face shall be provided in addition to the two approach signal faces required in Section 4D.15 for the major movement. Only one of the three colors shall be illuminated at any given time. Unless the CIRCULAR RED signal indication is shielded, hooded, louvered, positioned, or designed such that it is not readily visible to drivers in the through lane(s), a LEFT TURN SIGNAL sign (R10-10) shall be used. 3. CIRCULAR RED, CIRCULAR YELLOW, CIRCULAR GREEN, and left-turn GREEN ARROW signal indications. This four-section signal face shall be used only when the CIRCULAR GREEN and left-turn GREEN ARROW signal indications begin and terminate together. During each interval, the circular signal indication shall be the same color as the signal indication on the signal face(s) for the adjacent through traffic. C. Protected/Permissive ModeThe signal indications for protected/permissive mode left turns shall be provided in either a shared signal face or a separate signal face. Any protected/permissive leftturn signal face that always simultaneously displays the same color of circular signal indication that the adjacent through signal faces display shall be considered to be a shared signal face, regardless of where the left-turn signal face is positioned and regardless of how many adjacent through signal faces are provided. Any protected/permissive left-turn signal face that sometimes displays a different color of circular signal indication than the adjacent through signal faces display shall be considered to be a separate signal face. The requirements for each type of signal face are as follows: 1. If a shared signal face is provided, it shall be considered an approach signal face, and shall meet the following requirements: (a) During the protected left-turn movement, the signal face shall simultaneously display a leftturn GREEN ARROW signal indication and a circular signal indication that is the same color as the signal indication for the adjacent through lane on the same approach as the protected left turn. During the protected left-turn movement, the signal faces for through traffic on the opposing approach shall simultaneously display CIRCULAR RED signal indications. (b) During the permissive left-turn movement, all signal faces on the approach shall display CIRCULAR GREEN signal indications. (c) All signal faces on the approach shall simultaneously display the same color of circular signal indications to both through and left-turn road users. (d) A supplementary sign shall not be required. If used, it shall be a LEFT TURN YIELD ON GREEN (symbolic green ball) (R10-12) sign (see Figure 2B-19). 2. If a separate signal face is provided, it shall be considered a left-turn signal face, and shall meet the following requirements: (a) During the protected left-turn movement, the left-turn signal face shall display a left-turn GREEN ARROW signal indication. During the protected left-turn movement, the signal faces for through traffic on the opposing approach shall simultaneously display CIRCULAR RED signal indications. (b) During the permissive left-turn movement, the left-turn signal face shall display a CIRCULAR GREEN signal indication. (c) If the CIRCULAR GREEN and CIRCULAR YELLOW signal indications in the left-turn signal face are visibility-limited from the adjacent through movement, the left-turn signal face shall not be required to simultaneously display the same color of circular signal indication as the signal faces for the adjacent through movement. (d) If the CIRCULAR GREEN and CIRCULAR YELLOW signal indications in the left-turn signal face are visibility-limited from the adjacent through movement, the display of a CIRCULAR GREEN signal indication for a permissive left-turn movement while the signal faces for the adjacent through movement display CIRCULAR RED signal indications and the opposing left-turn signal face displays a left-turn GREEN ARROW for a protected leftturn movement shall be permitted. (e) If the left-turn signal face does not simultaneously display the same color of circular signal indication as the signal faces for the adjacent through movement, a LEFT TURN SIGNALYIELD ON GREEN (symbolic green ball) (R10-21) sign (see Figure 2B-19) shall be used.
Sect. 4D.06
2003 Edition
Page 4D-7
D. Variable Left-Turn ModeIf the protected only mode occurs during one or more periods of the day, and the permissive only mode or the combined protected/permissive mode occurs during other periods of the day, the requirements of Items A, B, and C in this Standard that are appropriate to that mode of operation shall be met, subject to the following: 1. The CIRCULAR GREEN and CIRCULAR YELLOW signal indications shall not be displayed when operating in the protected only mode. 2. The left-turn GREEN ARROW and left-turn YELLOW ARROW signal indications shall not be displayed when operating in the permissive only mode. Option: Additional appropriate signal indications or changeable message signs may be used to meet the requirements for the variable left-turn mode.
Page 4D-8
2003 Edition
3. All signal faces on the approach shall simultaneously display the same color of circular signal indications to both through and right-turn road users. D. Variable Right-Turn ModeIf the protected only mode occurs during one or more periods of the day, and the permissive only mode or the combined protected/permissive mode occurs during other periods of the day, the requirements of Items A, B, and C in this Standard that are appropriate to that mode of operation shall be met subject to the following: 1. The CIRCULAR GREEN and CIRCULAR YELLOW signal indications shall not be displayed when operating in the protected only mode. 2. The right-turn GREEN ARROW and right-turn YELLOW ARROW signal indications shall not be displayed when operating in the permissive only mode. Option: Additional appropriate signal indications or changeable message signs may be used to meet the requirements for the variable right-turn mode.
2003 Edition
Page 4D-9
The duration of a yellow change interval shall be predetermined. Guidance: A yellow change interval should have a duration of approximately 3 to 6 seconds. The longer intervals should be reserved for use on approaches with higher speeds. Option: The yellow change interval may be followed by a red clearance interval to provide additional time before conflicting traffic movements, including pedestrians, are released. Standard: The duration of a red clearance interval shall be predetermined. Guidance: A red clearance interval should have a duration not exceeding 6 seconds.
Page 4D-10
2003 Edition
The transition from steady (stop-and-go) mode to flashing mode, if initiated by a conflict monitor (malfunction management unit) or by a manual switch, shall be permitted to be made at any time. Programmed changes from steady (stop-and-go) mode to flashing mode shall be made under either of the following circumstances: A. At the end of the common major-street red interval (such as just prior to the start of the green in both directions on the major street), or B. Directly from a steady CIRCULAR GREEN or GREEN ARROW signal indication to a flashing CIRCULAR YELLOW or YELLOW ARROW signal indication, respectively. During programmed changes, no steady green signal indication or flashing yellow signal indication shall be terminated and immediately followed by a steady red or flashing red signal indication without first displaying the steady yellow signal indication. Changes from flashing mode to steady (stop-and-go) mode shall be made under one of the following procedures: A. Yellow-red flashing mode: Changes from flashing mode to steady (stop-and-go) mode shall be made at the beginning of the major-street green interval (when a green signal indication is shown to through traffic in both directions on the major street), or if there is no common major-street green interval, at the beginning of the green interval for the major traffic movement on the major street. B. Red-red flashing mode: Changes from flashing mode to steady (stop-and-go) mode shall be made by changing the flashing red indications to steady red indications followed by appropriate green indications to begin the steady mode cycle. These green indications shall be the beginning of the major-street green interval (when a green signal indication is shown to through traffic in both directions on the major street) or if there is no common major-street green interval, at the beginning of the green interval for the major traffic movement on the major street. Guidance: When changing from the yellow-red flashing mode to steady (stop-and-go) mode, if there is no common major-street green interval, the provision of a steady red clearance interval for the other approaches before changing from a flashing yellow or a flashing red signal indication to a green signal indication on the major approach should be considered. The steady red clearance interval provided during the change from red-red flashing mode to steady (stopand-go) mode should have a duration of 6 seconds. Support: Section 4E.09 contains information regarding the operation of accessible pedestrian signal detector pushbutton locator tones during flashing operation.
2003 Edition
Page 4D-11
B. Special phasing to assist public transit vehicles in entering the travel stream ahead of the platoon of traffic. Some types or classes of vehicles supersede others when a traffic control signal responds to more than one type or class. In general, a vehicle that is more difficult to control supersedes a vehicle that is easier to control. Typically, the order of priority is: train, boat, heavy vehicle (fire vehicle, emergency medical service), light vehicle (law enforcement), light rail transit, rubber-tired transit. Standard: During the transition into preemption control: A. The yellow change interval, and any red clearance interval that follows, shall not be shortened or omitted. B. The shortening or omission of any pedestrian walk interval and/or pedestrian change interval shall be permitted. C. The return to the previous steady green signal indication shall be permitted following a steady yellow signal indication in the same signal face, omitting the red clearance interval, if any. During preemption control and during the transition out of preemption control: A. The shortening or omission of any yellow change interval, and of any red clearance interval that follows, shall not be permitted. B. A signal indication sequence from a steady yellow signal indication to a steady green signal indication shall not be permitted. During priority control and during the transition into or out of priority control: A. The shortening or omission of any yellow change interval, and of any red clearance interval that follows, shall not be permitted. B. The shortening of any pedestrian walk interval below that time described in Section 4E.10 shall not be permitted. C. The omission of a pedestrian walk interval and its associated change interval shall not be permitted unless the associated vehicular phase is also omitted or the pedestrian phase is exclusive. D. The shortening or omission of any pedestrian change interval shall not be permitted. E. A signal indication sequence from a steady yellow signal indication to a steady green signal indication shall not be permitted. Guidance: When a traffic control signal that is returning to a steady mode from a dark mode (typically upon restoration from a power failure) receives a preemption or priority request, care should be exercised to minimize the possibility of vehicles or pedestrians being misdirected into a conflict with the vehicle making the request. If a traffic control signal is installed near or within a highway-railroad grade crossing or if a highwayrailroad grade crossing with active traffic control devices is within or near a signalized highway intersection, Chapter 8D should be consulted. Traffic control signals operating under preemption control or under priority control should be operated in a manner designed to keep traffic moving. Traffic control signals that are designed to respond under preemption or priority control to more than one type or class of vehicle should be designed to respond in the relative order of importance or difficulty in stopping the type or class of vehicle. Option: During the change from a dark mode to a steady mode under a preemption or priority request, the display of signal indications that could misdirect road users may be prevented by the following: A. Having the traffic control signal remain in the dark mode; B. Having the traffic control signal remain in the flashing mode; C. Altering the flashing mode; D. Executing the normal start-up routine before responding; and E. Responding directly to initial or dwell period. A distinctive indication may be provided at the intersection to show that an emergency vehicle has been given control of the traffic control signal (see Section 11-106 of the Uniform Vehicle Code). Preemption or priority control of traffic control signals may also be a means of assigning priority right-of-way to specified classes of vehicles at certain nonintersection locations such as on approaches to one-lane bridges and tunnels, movable bridges, highway maintenance and construction activities, metered freeway entrance ramps, and transit operations.
Sect. 4D.13
Page 4D-12
2003 Edition
2003 Edition
Page 4D-13
30 40 50 60 70 80 90 100
20 25 30 35 40 45 50 55 60
E. F. G. H.
2. Where the nearest signal face is located between 45 and 55 m (150 and 180 ft) beyond the stop line, engineering judgment of the conditions, including the worst-case visibility conditions, shall be used to determine if the provision of a supplemental near side signal face would be beneficial. 3. A signal face installed to satisfy the requirements for left-turn signal faces (see Section 4D.06) and right-turn signal faces (see Section 4D.07), and at least one and preferably both of the two signal faces required for the major movement on the approach shall be located no higher than at a maximum height to the top of the signal housing mounted over a roadway of 7.8 m (25.6 ft) above the pavement (see Section 4D.17). For viewing distances between 12 m (40 ft) and 16 m (53 ft) from the stop line, the maximum mounting height to the top of the signal housing shall be as shown on Figure 4D-1. (See Section 4D.17 for additional information regarding mounting heights.) 4. At least one and preferably both of the signal faces required by Item A in this Standard shall be located between two lines intersecting with the center of the approach at a point 3 m (10 ft) behind the stop line, one making an angle of approximately 20 degrees to the right of the center of the approach extended, and the other making an angle of approximately 20 degrees to the left of the center of the approach extended (see Figure 4D-2) 5. If both of the signal faces required by Item A in this Standard are post-mounted, they shall both be on the far side of the intersection, one on the right and one on the left of the approach lane(s). If the minimum sight distance in Table 4D-1 cannot be met, a sign shall be installed to warn approaching traffic of the traffic control signal. Required signal faces for through traffic on any one approach shall be located not less than 2.4 m (8 ft) apart measured horizontally perpendicular to the approach between the centers of the signal faces. If more than one turn signal face is provided for a protected-mode turn and if one or both of the signal faces are located over the roadway, the signal faces shall be located not less than 2.4 m (8 ft) apart measured horizontally perpendicular to the approach between the centers of the signal faces. If supplemental signal faces are used, the following limitations shall apply: 1. Left-turn arrows shall not be used in near-right signal faces. 2. Right-turn arrows shall not be used in far-left signal faces. A far-side median-mounted signal face shall be considered a far-left signal for this application.
Sect. 4D.15
Page 4D-14
2003 Edition
Figure 4D-1. Maximum Mounting Height of Signal Faces Located Between 12 Meters (40 Feet) and 16 Meters (53 Feet) from Stop Line
12.0
12.5
13.0
13.5
14.0
14.5
15.0
15.5
16.0
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
48
49
50
51
52
53
Sect. 4D.15
2003 Edition
Page 4D-15
Location of signal heads within these areas: 200 mm (8 in) or 300 mm (12 in) signal lenses 300 mm (12 in) signal lenses, unless a near-side signal face is used 300 mm (12 in) signal lenses
3 m (10 ft) * Minimum distance of signal faces from stop line. ** Maximum distance from stop line for 200 mm (8 in) signal faces, unless a near-side signal face is used. *** Maximum distance from stop line for 200 mm (8 in) signal faces when near-side supplemental signal face is used. **** Maximum distance from stop line for 300 mm (12 in) signal faces, unless a near-side supplemental signal face is used.
X/2 X
Sect. 4D.15
Page 4D-16
2003 Edition
Guidance: The two signal faces required for each approach should be continuously visible to traffic approaching the traffic control signal, from a point at least the minimum sight distance indicated in Table 4D-1 in advance of and measured to the stop line. This range of continuous visibility should be provided unless precluded by a physical obstruction or unless another signalized location is within this range. If two or more left-turn lanes are provided for a separately controlled protected only mode left-turn movement, or if a left-turn movement represents the major movement from an approach, two left-turn signal faces should be provided. If two or more right-turn lanes are provided for a separately controlled right-turn movement, or if a right-turn movement represents the major movement from an approach, two right-turn signal faces should be provided. Near-side signal faces should be located as near as practical to the stop line. If a signal face controls a specific lane or lanes of an approach, its position should make it readily visible to road users making that movement. Supplemental signal faces should be used if engineering judgment has shown that they are needed to achieve intersection visibility both in advance and immediately before the signalized location. If supplemental signal faces are used, they should be located to provide optimum visibility for the movement to be controlled. At signalized midblock crosswalks, at least one of the signal faces should be over the traveled way for each approach. Option: If a sign is installed to warn approaching road users of the traffic control signal, the sign may be supplemented by a Warning Beacon (see Section 4K.03). A Warning Beacon used in this manner may be interconnected with the traffic signal controller assembly in such a manner as to flash yellow during the period when road users passing this beacon at the legal speed for the roadway might encounter a red signal indication (or a queue resulting from the display of the red signal indication) upon arrival at the signalized location.
Section 4D.16 Number and Arrangement of Signal Sections in Vehicular Traffic Control Signal Faces
Standard: Each signal face at a signalized location shall have three, four, or five signal sections. A single-section signal face shall be permitted at a traffic control signal if it consists of a continuously illuminated GREEN ARROW signal lens that is being used to indicate a continuous movement. Arrows shall be pointed: A. Vertically upward to indicate a straight-through movement; B. Horizontally in the direction of the turn to indicate a turn at approximately or greater than a right angle; and C. Upward with a slope at an angle approximately equal to that of the turn if the angle of the turn is substantially less than a right angle. The signal lenses in a signal face shall be arranged in a vertical or horizontal straight line, except that in a vertical array, signal lenses of the same color may be arranged horizontally adjacent to each other at right angles to the basic straight line arrangement. Such clusters shall be limited to two identical signal lenses or to two or three different signal lenses of the same color. In each signal face, all red signal lenses in vertically arranged signal faces shall be located above, and in horizontally arranged signal faces shall be located to the left, of all yellow and green signal lenses. If a CIRCULAR YELLOW signal lens is used, it shall be located between the red signal lens or lenses and all other signal lenses. In vertically arranged signal faces, each YELLOW ARROW signal lens shall be located immediately above the GREEN ARROW signal lens to which it applies. If a dual-arrow signal section (capable of alternating between the display of a GREEN ARROW and a YELLOW ARROW signal indication) is used, the lenses shall be in the same position relative to other lenses as are the GREEN ARROW signal lenses in a vertically arranged signal face. In horizontally arranged signal faces, the YELLOW ARROW signal lens shall be located immediately to the left of the GREEN ARROW signal lens. If a dual-arrow signal section (capable of alternating between the display of a GREEN ARROW and a YELLOW ARROW signal indication) is used, the dual left-turn arrow signal lens shall be located immediately to the right of the CIRCULAR YELLOW signal
Sect. 4D.15 to 4D.16
2003 Edition
Page 4D-17
lens, the straight-through GREEN ARROW signal lens shall be located immediately to the right of the CIRCULAR GREEN signal lens, and the dual right-turn arrow signal lens shall be located to the right of all other signal lenses. The relative positions of signal lenses within the signal face shall be as follows: A. In a vertically arranged signal face from top to bottom: CIRCULAR RED Left-turn RED ARROW Right-turn RED ARROW CIRCULAR YELLOW CIRCULAR GREEN Straight-through GREEN ARROW Left-turn YELLOW ARROW Left-turn GREEN ARROW Right-turn YELLOW ARROW Right-turn GREEN ARROW B. In a horizontally arranged signal face from left to right: CIRCULAR RED Left-turn RED ARROW Right-turn RED ARROW CIRCULAR YELLOW Left-turn YELLOW ARROW Left-turn GREEN ARROW CIRCULAR GREEN Straight-through GREEN ARROW Right-turn YELLOW ARROW Right-turn GREEN ARROW C. If adjacent signal indications in a signal face are not identical, their arrangement shall follow Items A or B above, as applicable. Option: In a vertically arranged signal face, identical signal indications may be repeated in adjacent horizontal locations within the same signal face. Horizontally arranged and vertically arranged signal faces may be used on the same approach provided they are separated to meet the lateral separation spacing required in Section 4D.15. Support: Figure 4D-3 illustrates some of the possible arrangements of signal lenses in signal faces.
Page 4D-18
2003 Edition
a.
R Y G
b.
c.
R R Y G Y G
d.
e.
R Y G R
f.
g.
R R R Y G Y G G
h.
Y G
i.
R Y
j.
k.
R Y R Y G G G G G
l.
G G
Y G G G
m.
R Y G Y G
n.
o.
R R Y Y G G Y G Y G
p.
Y Y G G
q.
R Y G Y G
r.
s.
R Y
t.
u.
R R
R Y G Y G
G Y G
G Y G Y G
Sect. 4D.17
2003 Edition
Page 4D-19
A. Shall be at least 2.4 m (8 ft) but not more than 5.8 m (19 ft) above the sidewalk or, if there is no sidewalk, above the pavement grade at the center of the roadway. B. Shall be at least 1.4 m (4.5 ft) but not more than 5.8 m (19 ft) above the median island grade of a center median island if located on the near side of the intersection. The bottom of the signal housing (including brackets) of a vehicular signal face that is horizontally arranged and not located over a roadway: A. Shall be at least 2.4 m (8 ft) but not more than 6.7 m (22 ft) above the sidewalk or, if there is no sidewalk, above the pavement grade at the center of the roadway. B. Shall be at least 1.4 m (4.5 ft) but not more than 6.7 m (22 ft) above the median island grade of a center median island if located on the near side of the intersection. Signal heads mounted at less than 4.6 meters (15 feet) from the bottom of the housing and any related attachments at the side of a roadway with curbs shall have a horizontal clearance of not less than 0.6 m (2 ft) from the face of a vertical curb. If there is no curb, signal heads shall have a horizontal clearance of not less than 0.6 m (2 ft) from the edge of a shoulder. Guidance: There should be legal authority to prohibit the display of any unauthorized sign, signal, marking, or device that interferes with the effectiveness of any official traffic control device (see Section 11-205 of the Uniform Vehicle Code). Signal visors should be used on signal faces to aid in directing the signal indication specifically to approaching traffic, as well as to reduce sun phantom, which can result when external light enters the lens. The use of signal visors, or the use of signal faces or devices that direct the light without a reduction in intensity, should be considered as an alternative to signal louvers because of the reduction in light output caused by signal louvers. The use of a signal backplate for target value enhancement should be considered on signal faces viewed against a bright sky or bright or confusing backgrounds. Support: The use of backplates enhances the contrast between the traffic signal indications and their surroundings for both day and night conditions, which is also helpful to elderly drivers. Option: Special signal faces, such as visibility-limited signal faces, may be used such that the road user does not see signal indications intended for other approaches before seeing the signal indications for their own approach, if simultaneous viewing of both signal indications could cause the road user to be misdirected. If the sight distance to the signal heads facing the approach is limited by horizontal or vertical alignment, supplemental signal faces aimed at a point on the approach at which the signal indications first become visible may be used.
Page 4D-20
2003 Edition
Support: Research has resulted in signal optical units that are not lenses, such as, but not limited to, light-emitting diode (LED) traffic signal modules. Some units are practical for all signal indications, and some are practical for specific types such as visibility-limited signal indications. Guidance: The intensity and distribution of light from each illuminated signal lens should conform to the current Standards for Vehicle Traffic Control Signal Heads and Traffic Signal Lamps (see Section 1A.11). If a signal indication is operated in the flashing mode for nighttime operation and the signal indication is so bright as to cause excessive glare, some form of automatic dimming should be used to reduce the brilliance of the signal indication. Standard: The inside of signal visors (hoods), the entire surface of louvers and fins, and the front surface of backplates shall have a dull black finish to minimize light reflection and to increase contrast between the signal indication and its background.
2003 Edition
Page 4D-21
Guidance: A temporary traffic control signal should be used only if engineering judgment indicates that installing the signal will improve the overall safety and/or operation of the location. The use of temporary traffic control signals by a work crew on a regular basis in their work area should be subject to the approval of the jurisdiction having authority over the roadway. A temporary traffic control signal should not operate longer than 30 days unless associated with a longerterm temporary traffic control zone project. For use of temporary traffic control signals in temporary traffic control zones, reference should be made to Section 6F.80.
2003 Edition
Page 4E-1
CHAPTER 4E. PEDESTRIAN CONTROL FEATURES Section 4E.01 Pedestrian Signal Heads
Support: Pedestrian signal heads provide special types of traffic signal indications exclusively intended for controlling pedestrian traffic. These signal indications consist of the illuminated symbols of a WALKING PERSON (symbolizing WALK) and an UPRAISED HAND (symbolizing DONT WALK). Guidance: Engineering judgment should determine the need for separate pedestrian signal heads (see Section 4D.03) and accessible pedestrian signals (see Section 4E.06).
Section 4E.04 Size, Design, and Illumination of Pedestrian Signal Head Indications
Standard: All new pedestrian signal head indications shall be displayed within a rectangular background and shall consist of symbolized messages (see Figure 4E-1), except that existing pedestrian signal head indications with lettered or outline style symbol messages may be retained for the remainder of their useful
Sect. 4E.01 to 4E.04
Page 4E-2
2003 Edition
One Section
Two Section
Sect. 4E.04
2003 Edition
Page 4E-3
service life. The symbol designs that are set forth in the Standard Highway Signs book shall be used. Each pedestrian signal head indication shall be independently illuminated and emit a single color. The UPRAISED HAND (symbolizing DONT WALK) signal section shall be mounted directly above or integral with the WALKING PERSON (symbolizing WALK) signal section. The WALKING PERSON (symbolizing WALK) signal indication shall be white, conforming to the publication entitled Pedestrian Traffic Control Signal Indications (see Section 1A.11), with all except the symbol obscured by an opaque material. The UPRAISED HAND (symbolizing DONT WALK) signal indication shall be Portland orange, conforming to the publication entitled Pedestrian Traffic Control Signal Indications (see Section 1A.11), with all except the symbol obscured by an opaque material. When not illuminated, the WALKING PERSON (symbolizing WALK) and UPRAISED HAND (symbolizing DONT WALK) symbols shall not be readily visible to pedestrians at the far end of the crosswalk that the pedestrian signal head indications control. For pedestrian signal head indications, the symbols shall be at least 150 mm (6 in) high. The light source of a flashing UPRAISED HAND (symbolizing DONT WALK) signal indication shall be flashed continuously at a rate of not less than 50 nor more than 60 times per minute. The illuminated period of each flash shall be not less than half and not more than two-thirds of the total flash cycle. Guidance: Pedestrian signal head indications should be conspicuous and recognizable to pedestrians at all distances from the beginning of the controlled crosswalk to a point 3 m (10 ft) from the end of the controlled crosswalk during both day and night. For crosswalks where the pedestrian enters the crosswalk more than 30 m (100 ft) from the pedestrian signal head indications, the symbols should be at least 225 mm (9 in) high. Option: An animated eyes symbol may be added to a pedestrian signal head in order to prompt pedestrians to look for vehicles in the intersection during the time that the WALK signal indication is displayed. Standard: If used, the animated eyes symbol shall consist of an outline of a pair of white steadily-illuminated eyes with white eyeballs that scan from side to side at a rate of approximately once per second. The animated eyes symbol shall be at least 300 mm (12 in) wide with each eye having a width of at least 125 mm (5 in) and a height of at least 62 mm (2.5 in). The animated eyes symbol shall be illuminated at the start of the walk interval and shall terminate at the end of the walk interval.
Page 4E-4
2003 Edition
Support: The factors that might make crossing at a signalized location difficult for pedestrians who have visual disabilities include: increasingly quiet cars, right turn on red (which masks the beginning of the through phase), continuous right-turn movements, complex signal operations, traffic circles, and wide streets. Further, low traffic volumes might make it difficult for pedestrians who have visual disabilities to discern signal phase changes. Local organizations, providing support services to pedestrians who have visual and/or hearing disabilities, can often act as important advisors to the traffic engineer when consideration is being given to the installation of devices to assist such pedestrians. Additionally, orientation and mobility specialists or similar staff also might be able to provide a wide range of advice. The U.S. Access Boards Document A-37, Accessible Pedestrian Signals, provides various techniques for making pedestrian signal information available to persons with visual disabilities (see Page i for the address for the U.S. Access Board). Accessible pedestrian signals provide information in nonvisual format (such as audible tones, verbal messages, and/or vibrating surfaces). Information regarding detectors for accessible pedestrian signals is found in Section 4E.09. Standard: When used, accessible pedestrian signals shall be used in combination with pedestrian signal timing. The information provided by an accessible pedestrian signal shall clearly indicate which pedestrian crossing is served by each device. Under stop-and-go operation, accessible pedestrian signals shall not be limited in operation by the time of day or day of week. Guidance: The installation of accessible pedestrian signals at signalized locations should be based on an engineering study, which should consider the following factors: A. Potential demand for accessible pedestrian signals; B. A request for accessible pedestrian signals; C. Traffic volumes during times when pedestrians might be present, including periods of low traffic volumes or high turn-on-red volumes; D. The complexity of traffic signal phasing; and E. The complexity of intersection geometry. Support: Technology that provides different sounds for each nonconcurrent signal phase has frequently been found to provide ambiguous information. Standard: When choosing audible tones, possible extraneous sources of sounds (such as wind, rain, vehicle backup warnings, or birds) shall be considered in order to eliminate potential confusion to pedestrians who have visual disabilities. Guidance: Audible pedestrian tones should be carefully selected to avoid misleading pedestrians who have visual disabilities when the following conditions exist: A. Where there is an island that allows unsignalized right turns across a crosswalk between the island and the sidewalk. B. Where multileg approaches or complex signal phasing require more than two pedestrian phases, such that it might be unclear which crosswalk is served by each audible tone. C. At intersections where a diagonal pedestrian crossing is allowed, or where one street receives a WALKING PERSON (symbolizing WALK) signal indication simultaneously with another street. Standard: When accessible pedestrian signals have an audible tone(s), they shall have a tone for the walk interval. The audible tone(s) shall be audible from the beginning of the associated crosswalk. If the tone for the walk interval is similar to the pushbutton locator tone, the walk interval tone shall have a faster repetition rate than the associated pushbutton locator tone. Support: A pushbutton locator tone is a repeating sound that informs approaching pedestrians that they are required to push a button to actuate pedestrian timing, and that enables visually impaired pedestrians to locate the pushbutton (see Section 4E.09).
Sect. 4E.06
2003 Edition
Page 4E-5
Guidance: The accessible walk signal tone should be no louder than the locator tone, except when there is optional activation to provide a louder signal tone for a single pedestrian phase. Automatic volume adjustment in response to ambient traffic sound level should be provided up to a maximum volume of 89 dBA. Where automatic volume adjustment is used, tones should be no more than 5 dBA louder than ambient sound. The A-weighted sound pressure level should conform to the requirements of ISO 1996-1:1982 and ISO 1996-2:1987 (see Page i for the address for the International Organization for Standards). Standard: When verbal messages are used to communicate the pedestrian interval, they shall provide a clear message that the walk interval is in effect, as well as to which crossing it applies. The verbal message that is provided at regular intervals throughout the timing of the walk interval shall be the term walk sign, which may be followed by the name of the street to be crossed. A verbal message is not required at times when the walk interval is not timing, but, if provided: A. It shall be the term wait. B. It need not be repeated for the entire time that the walk interval is not timing. Option: Accessible pedestrian signals that provide verbal messages may provide similar messages in languages other than English, if needed, except for the terms walk sign and wait. Support: A vibrotactile pedestrian device communicates information about pedestrian timing through a vibrating surface by touch. Standard: Vibrotactile pedestrian devices, where used, shall indicate that the walk interval is in effect, and for which direction it applies, through the use of a vibrating directional arrow or some other means. Guidance: When provided, vibrotactile pedestrian devices should be located next to, and on the same pole as, the pedestrian pushbutton, if any, and adjacent to the intended crosswalk.
Page 4E-6
2003 Edition
For crosswalks where the pedestrian enters the crosswalk more than 30 m (100 ft) from the countdown pedestrian signal display, the numbers should be at least 225 mm (9 in) in height. Because some technology includes the countdown pedestrian signal logic in a separate timing device that is independent of the timing in the traffic signal controller, care should be exercised by the engineer when timing changes are made to pedestrian change intervals. If the pedestrian change interval is interrupted or shortened as a part of a transition into a preemption sequence (see Section 4E.10), the countdown pedestrian signal display should be discontinued and go dark immediately upon activation of the preemption transition.
2003 Edition
Page 4E-7
Americans with Disabilities Act Accessibility Guidelines for Buildings and Facilities (ADAAG) (see Section 1A.11). Tactile arrows should point in the same direction as the associated crosswalk. At corners of signalized locations with accessible pedestrian signals where two pedestrian pushbuttons are provided, the pushbuttons should be separated by a distance of at least 3 m (10 ft). This enables pedestrians who have visual disabilities to distinguish and locate the appropriate pushbutton. Pushbuttons for accessible pedestrian signals should be located (see Figure 4E-2) as follows: A. Adjacent to a level all-weather surface to provide access from a wheelchair, and where there is an all-weather surface, wheelchair accessible route to the ramp; B. Within 1.5 m (5 ft) of the crosswalk extended; C. Within 3 m (10 ft) of the edge of the curb, shoulder, or pavement; and D. Parallel to the crosswalk to be used. If the pedestrian clearance time is sufficient only to cross from the curb or shoulder to a median of sufficient width for pedestrians to wait and accessible pedestrian detectors are used, an additional accessible pedestrian detector should be provided in the median. Standard: When used, pushbutton locator tones shall be easily locatable, shall have a duration of 0.15 seconds or less, and shall repeat at 1-second intervals. Guidance: Pushbuttons should be audibly locatable. Pushbutton locator tones should be intensity responsive to ambient sound, and be audible 1.8 to 3.7 m (6 to 12 ft) from the pushbutton, or to the building line, whichever is less. Pushbutton locator tones should be no more than 5 dBA louder than ambient sound. Pushbutton locator tones should be deactivated during flashing operation of the traffic control signal. Option: At locations with pretimed traffic control signals or nonactuated approaches, pedestrian pushbuttons may be used to activate the accessible pedestrian signals. The audible tone(s) may be made louder (up to a maximum of 89 dBA) by holding down the pushbutton for a minimum of 3 seconds. The louder audible tone(s) may also alternate back and forth across the crosswalk, thus providing optimal directional information. The name of the street to be crossed may also be provided in accessible format, such as Braille or raised print.
Page 4E-8
2003 Edition
(1
ft)
IN
(1
ft)
IN
Legend
Pedestrian Pushbutton
Sect. 4E.10
2003 Edition
Page 4E-9
Support: The walk interval itself need not equal or exceed the pedestrian clearance time calculated for the roadway width, because many pedestrians will complete their crossing during the pedestrian clearance time. Guidance: The pedestrian clearance time should be sufficient to allow a pedestrian crossing in the crosswalk who left the curb or shoulder during the WALKING PERSON (symbolizing WALK) signal indication to travel at a walking speed of 1.2 m (4 ft) per second, to at least the far side of the traveled way or to a median of sufficient width for pedestrians to wait. Where pedestrians who walk slower than 1.2 m (4 ft) per second, or pedestrians who use wheelchairs, routinely use the crosswalk, a walking speed of less than 1.2 m (4 ft) per second should be considered in determining the pedestrian clearance time. Option: Passive pedestrian detection equipment, which can detect pedestrians who need more time to complete their crossing and can extend the length of the pedestrian clearance time for that particular cycle, may be used in order to avoid using a lower walking speed to determine the pedestrian clearance time. Guidance: Where the pedestrian clearance time is sufficient only for crossing from the curb or shoulder to a median of sufficient width for pedestrians to wait, additional measures should be considered, such as median-mounted pedestrian signals or additional signing. Option: The pedestrian clearance time may be entirely contained within the vehicular green interval, or may be entirely contained within the vehicular green and yellow change intervals. On a street with a median of sufficient width for pedestrians to wait, a pedestrian clearance time that allows the pedestrian to cross only from the curb or shoulder to the median may be provided. During the transition into preemption, the walk interval and the pedestrian change interval may be shortened or omitted as described in Section 4D.13.
Sect. 4E.10
2003 Edition
Page 4F-1
CHAPTER 4F. TRAFFIC CONTROL SIGNALS FOR EMERGENCY VEHICLE ACCESS Section 4F.01 Applications of Emergency-Vehicle Traffic Control Signals
Support: An emergency-vehicle traffic control signal is a special traffic control signal that assigns the right-of-way to an authorized emergency vehicle. Option: An emergency-vehicle traffic control signal may be installed at a location that does not meet other traffic signal warrants such as at an intersection or other location to permit direct access from a building housing the emergency vehicle. Guidance: If a traffic control signal is not justified under the signal warrants of Chapter 4C and if gaps in traffic are not adequate to permit reasonably safe entrance of emergency vehicles, or the stopping sight distance for vehicles approaching on the major street is insufficient to permit reasonably safe entrance of emergency vehicles, installing an emergency-vehicle traffic control signal should be considered. If one of the signal warrants of Chapter 4C is met and a traffic control signal is justified by an engineering study, and if a decision is made to install a traffic control signal, it should be installed based upon the provisions of Chapter 4D. The sight distance determination should be based on the location of the visibility obstruction for the critical approach lane for each street or drive and the posted or statutory speed limit or 85th-percentile speed on the major street, whichever is higher.
Page 4F-2
2003 Edition
A. The signal indication, between emergency-vehicle actuations, shall be either steady green or flashing yellow. If the flashing yellow signal indication is used instead of the steady green signal indication, it shall be displayed in the normal position of the steady green signal indication, while the red and steady yellow signal indications shall be displayed in their normal positions. B. When an emergency vehicle actuation occurs, a steady yellow change interval followed by a steady red interval shall be displayed to traffic on the major street. C. A yellow change interval is not required following the green interval for the emergency-vehicle driveway. Emergency-vehicle traffic control signals located at intersections shall either be operated in the flashing mode between emergency-vehicle actuations (see Section 4D.12) or be fully or semi-trafficactuated, to accommodate normal vehicular and pedestrian traffic on the streets. Warning beacons, if used with an emergency-vehicle traffic control signal, shall be flashed only: A. For an appropriate time in advance of and during the steady yellow change interval for the major street; and B. During the steady red interval for the major street. Guidance: The duration of the red interval for traffic on the major street should be determined by on-site test-run time studies, but should not exceed 1.5 times the time required for the emergency vehicle to clear the path of conflicting vehicles. Option: An emergency-vehicle traffic control signal sequence may be initiated manually from a local control point such as a fire station or law enforcement headquarters or from an emergency vehicle equipped for remote operation of the signal.
Sect. 4F.03
2003 Edition
Page 4G-1
CHAPTER 4G. TRAFFIC CONTROL SIGNALS FOR ONE-LANE, TWO-WAY FACILITIES Section 4G.01 Application of Traffic Control Signals for One-Lane, Two-Way Facilities
Support: A traffic control signal at a narrow bridge, tunnel, or roadway section is a special signal that assigns the right-of-way for vehicles passing over a bridge or through a tunnel or roadway section that is not of sufficient width for two opposing vehicles to pass reasonably safely. Temporary traffic control signals (see Sections 4D.20 and 6F.80) are the most frequent application of onelane, two-way facilities. Guidance: Sight distance across or through the one-lane, two-way facility should be considered as well as the approach speed and sight distance approaching the facility when determining whether traffic control signals should be installed. Option: At a narrow bridge, tunnel, or roadway section where a traffic control signal is not justified under the conditions of Chapter 4C, a traffic control signal may be used if gaps in opposing traffic do not permit the reasonably safe flow of traffic through the one-lane section of roadway.
Section 4G.02 Design of Traffic Control Signals for One-Lane, Two-Way Facilities
Standard: The provisions of Chapter 4D shall apply to traffic control signals for one-lane, two-way facilities, except that: A. Durations of red clearance intervals shall be adequate to clear the one-lane section of conflicting vehicles. B. Adequate means, such as interconnection, shall be provided to prevent conflicting signal indications, such as green and green, at opposite ends of the section.
Section 4G.03 Operation of Traffic Control Signals for One-Lane, Two-Way Facilities
Standard: Traffic control signals at one-lane, two-way facilities shall operate in a manner consistent with traffic requirements. When in the flashing mode, the signal indications shall flash red. Guidance: Adequate time should be provided to allow traffic to clear the narrow facility before opposing traffic is allowed to move. Engineering judgment should be used to determine the proper timing for the signal.
2003 Edition
Page 4H-1
CHAPTER 4H. TRAFFIC CONTROL SIGNALS FOR FREEWAY ENTRANCE RAMPS Section 4H.01 Application of Freeway Entrance Ramp Control Signals
Support: Ramp control signals are traffic control signals that control the flow of traffic entering the freeway facility. Freeway entrance ramp control signals are sometimes used if controlling traffic entering the freeway could reduce the total expected delay to traffic in the freeway corridor, including freeway ramps and local streets, and if at least one of the following conditions is present: A. Congestion recurs on the freeway because traffic demand is in excess of the capacity, or congestion recurs or a high frequency of crashes exist at the freeway entrance because of inadequate ramp merging area. A good indicator of recurring freeway congestion is freeway operating speeds less than 80 km/h (50 mph) occurring regularly for at least a half-hour period. Freeway operating speeds less than 50 km/h (30 mph) for a half-hour period or more would indicate severe congestion. B. Controlling traffic entering a freeway assists in meeting local transportation system management objectives identified for freeway traffic flow, such as the following: 1. Maintenance of a specific freeway level of service. 2. Priority treatments with higher levels of service for mass transit and carpools. 3. Redistribution of freeway access demand to other on-ramps. C. Predictable, sporadic congestion occurs on isolated sections of freeway because of short-period peak traffic loads from special events or from severe peak loads of recreational traffic. Guidance: The installation of ramp control signals should be preceded by an engineering study of the physical and traffic conditions on the highway facilities likely to be affected. The study should include the ramps and ramp connections and the surface streets that would be affected by the ramp control, as well as the freeway section concerned. Types of traffic data that should be obtained include, but are not limited to, traffic volumes, traffic crashes, freeway operating speeds, and travel time and delay on the freeway, approaches, ramps, and alternate surface routes. Capacities and demand/capacity relationships should be determined for each freeway section. The locations and causes of capacity restrictions and those sections where demand exceeds capacity should be identified. From these and other data, estimates should be made of desirable metering rates, probable reductions in the delay of freeway traffic, likely increases in delay to ramp traffic, and the potential impact on surface streets. The study should include an evaluation of the ramps storage capacities for vehicles delayed at the signal, the impact of queued traffic on the local street intersection, and the availability of suitable alternate surface routes having adequate capacity to accommodate any additional traffic volume. Before installing ramp control signals, consideration should be given to their potential acceptance by the public and the requirements for enforcing ramp control, as well as alternate means of increasing the capacity, reducing the demand, or improving the characteristics of the freeway.
2003 Edition
Page 4I-1
CHAPTER 4I. TRAFFIC CONTROL FOR MOVABLE BRIDGES Section 4I.01 Application of Traffic Control for Movable Bridges
Support: Traffic control signals for movable bridges are a special type of highway traffic signal installed at movable bridges to notify road users to stop because of a road closure rather than alternately giving the right-of-way to conflicting traffic movements. The signals are operated in coordination with the opening and closing of the movable bridge, and with the operation of movable bridge warning and resistance gates, or other devices and features used to warn, control, and stop traffic. Movable bridge warning gates installed at movable bridges decrease the likelihood of vehicles and pedestrians passing the stop line and entering an area where potential hazards exist because of bridge operations. A movable bridge resistance gate is sometimes used at movable bridges and located downstream of the movable bridge warning gate. A movable bridge resistance gate provides a physical deterrent to road users when placed in the appropriate position. The movable bridge resistance gates are considered a design feature and not a traffic control device; requirements for them are contained in AASHTOs Standard Specifications for Movable Highway Bridges (see Page i for AASHTOs address). Standard: Traffic control at movable bridges shall include both signals and gates, except in the following cases: A. Neither is required if other traffic control devices or measures considered appropriate are used under either of the following conditions: 1. On low-volume roads (roads of less than 400 vehicles average daily traffic); or 2. At manually operated bridges if electric power is not available. B. Only signals are required in urban areas if intersecting streets or driveways make gates ineffective. C. Only movable bridge warning gates are required if a traffic control signal that is controlled as part of the bridge operations exists within 150 m (500 ft) of the movable bridge resistance gates and no intervening traffic entrances exist.
Section 4I.02 Design and Location of Movable Bridge Signals and Gates
Standard: The signal heads and mountings of movable bridge signals shall follow the provisions of Chapter 4D except as noted in this Section. Since movable bridge operations cover a variable range of time periods between openings, the signal faces shall be one of the following types: A. Three-section signal faces with red, yellow, and green signal lenses; or B. Two one-section signal faces with red signal lenses in a vertical array separated by a STOP HERE ON RED (R10-6) sign (see Section 2B.45). Regardless of which signal type is selected, two signal faces shall be provided for each approach to the movable span. Guidance: If movable bridge operation is frequent, the use of three-section signal faces should be considered. Standard: If physical conditions prevent a road user from having a continuous view of at least two signal indications for the distance specified in Table 4D-1, an auxiliary device (either a supplemental signal face or the mandatory DRAWBRIDGE AHEAD warning sign to which has been added a warning beacon that is interconnected with the movable bridge controller unit) shall be provided in advance of movable bridge signals and gates. A DRAWBRIDGE AHEAD warning sign shall be used in advance of movable bridge signals and gates to give warning to road users, except in urban conditions where such signing would not be practical. Movable bridge warning gates, if used, shall extend at least across the full width of the approach lanes if movable bridge resistance gates are used. On divided highways in which the roadways are separated by a barrier median, movable bridge warning gates, if used, shall extend across all roadway lanes approaching the span openings. Except where physical conditions make it impractical, movable bridge warning gates shall be located 30 m (100 ft) or more from the movable bridge resistance gates or, if movable bridge resistance gates are not used, 30 m (100 ft) or more from the movable span.
Sect. 4I.01 to 4I.02
Page 4I-2
2003 Edition
Movable bridge warning gates shall be at least standard railroad size, striped with 400 mm (16 in) alternate diagonal, fully reflectorized red and white stripes. Flashing red lights in accordance with the Standards for those on railroad gates (see Section 8D.04) shall be included on the gate arm and they shall only be operated if the gate is closed or in the process of being opened or closed. In the horizontal position, the top of the gate shall be approximately 1.2 m (4 ft) above the pavement. If two sets of gates (both a warning and a resistance gate) are used for a single direction, highway traffic signals need not accompany the resistance gate nearest the span opening, but there shall be flashing red lights on the movable bridge warning gate. Guidance: Signal faces with 300 mm (12 in) diameter signal lenses should be used for movable bridge signals. Insofar as practical, the height and lateral placement of signal faces should conform to the requirements for other traffic control signals in accordance with Section 4D.15. They should be located not more than 15 m (50 ft) in advance of the movable bridge warning gate. Movable bridge warning gates should be of lightweight construction. In its normal upright position, the gate arm should provide adequate lateral clearance. If the movable bridge is close to a highway-rail grade crossing and traffic might possibly be stopped on the crossing as a result of the bridge opening, a traffic control device should notify the road users to not stop on the railroad tracks. If movable bridge resistance gates are not used on undivided highways, movable bridge warning gates, if used, should extend across the full width of the roadway. On bridges or causeways that cross a long reach of water and that might be hit by large marine vessels, within the limits of practicality, traffic should not be halted on a section of the bridge or causeway that is subject to impact. In cases where it is not practical to halt traffic on a span that is not subject to impact, traffic should be halted at least one span from the opening. If traffic is halted by signals and gates more than 100 m (330 ft) from the movable bridge warning gates (or from the span opening if movable bridge warning gates are not used), a second set of gates should be installed approximately 30 m (100 ft) from the gate or span opening. Option: Movable bridge signals may be supplemented with audible warning devices to provide additional warning to drivers and pedestrians. If prevailing approach speeds are 40 km/h (25 mph) or less, signal heads with 200 mm (8 in) diameter lenses may be used. The movable bridge resistance gates may be delineated, if practical, in a manner similar to the movable bridge warning gate. The DRAWBRIDGE AHEAD sign may be supplemented by a Warning Beacon (see Section 4K.03). A single full-width gate or two half-width gates may be used. Support: Highway traffic signals need not accompany the gates nearest the span opening. The locations of movable bridge signals and gates are determined by the location of the movable bridge resistance gate (if used) rather than by the location of the movable spans. The movable bridge resistance gates for high-speed highways are preferably located 15 m (50 ft) or more from the span opening except for bascule and lift bridges, where they are often attached to, or are a part of, the structure.
2003 Edition
Page 4I-3
Guidance: The duration of the yellow change interval should have a range from 3 to 6 seconds. Signals on adjacent streets and highways should be interconnected with the drawbridge control if indicated by engineering judgment.
Sect. 4I.03
2003 Edition
Page 4J-1
CHAPTER 4J. LANE-USE CONTROL SIGNALS Section 4J.01 Application of Lane-Use Control Signals
Support: Lane-use control signals are special overhead signals that permit or prohibit the use of specific lanes of a street or highway or that indicate the impending prohibition of their use. Lane-use control signals are distinguished by placement of special signal faces over a certain lane or lanes of the roadway and by their distinctive shapes and symbols. Supplementary signs are sometimes used to explain their meaning and intent. Lane-use control signals are most commonly used for reversible-lane control, but are also used in nonreversible freeway lane applications. Guidance: An engineering study should be conducted to determine whether a reversible-lane operation can be controlled satisfactorily by static signs (see Section 2B.25) or whether lane-use control signals are necessary. Lane-use control signals should be used to control reversible-lane operations if any of the following conditions are present: A. More than one lane is reversed in direction; B. Two-way or one-way left turns are allowed during peak-period reversible operations, but those turns are from a different lane than used during off-peak periods; C. Other unusual or complex operations are included in the reversible-lane pattern; D. Demonstrated crash experience occurring with reversible-lane operation controlled by static signs that can be corrected by using lane-use control signals at the times of transition between peak and off-peak patterns; and/or E. An engineering study indicates that safer and more efficient operation of a reversible-lane system would be provided by lane-use control signals. Option: Lane-use control signals also may be used for reversible-lane operations at toll booths. They may also be used if there is no intent or need to reverse lanes, including: A. On a freeway, if it is desired to keep traffic out of certain lanes at certain hours to facilitate the merging of traffic from a ramp or other freeway; B. On a freeway, near its terminus, to indicate a lane that ends; and C. On a freeway or long bridge, to indicate that a lane may be temporarily blocked by a crash, breakdown, construction or maintenance activities, and so forth.
Page 4J-2
2003 Edition
2003 Edition
Page 4J-3
The bottom of the signal housing of any lane-use control signal face shall be at least 4.6 m (15 ft) but not more than 5.8 m (19 ft) above the pavement grade. On roadways having intersections controlled by traffic control signals, the lane-use control signal face shall be located sufficiently far in advance of or beyond such traffic control signals to prevent them from being misconstrued as traffic control signals. Option: In areas with minimal visual clutter and with speeds of less than 70 km/h or less than 40 mph, lane-use control signal faces with nominal height and width of 300 mm (12 in) may be used for the DOWNWARD GREEN ARROW, YELLOW X, and RED X signal faces, and lane-use control signal faces with nominal height and width of 450 mm (18 in) may be used for the WHITE TWO-WAY LEFT-TURN ARROW and WHITE ONE-WAY LEFT-TURN ARROW signal faces. Other sizes of lane-use control signal faces larger than 450 mm (18 in) with message recognition distances appropriate to signal spacing may be used for the DOWNWARD GREEN ARROW, YELLOW X, and RED X signal faces. Nonreversible lanes not immediately adjacent to a reversible lane on any street so controlled may also be provided with signal indications that display a DOWNWARD GREEN ARROW to traffic traveling in the permitted direction and a RED X to traffic traveling in the opposite direction. The signal indications provided for each lane may be in separate signal sections or may be superimposed in the same signal section.
Page 4J-4
2003 Edition
Standard: If used, lane-use control signals shall be operated continuously, except that lane-use control signals that are used only for special events or other infrequent occurrences and lane-use control signals on nonreversible freeway lanes may be darkened when not in operation. The change from normal operation to nonoperation shall occur only when the lane-use control signals display signal indications that are appropriate for the lane use that applies when the signals are not operated. The lane-use control signals shall display signal indications that are appropriate for the existing lane use when changed from nonoperation to normal operations. Also, traffic control devices shall clearly indicate the proper lane use when the lane control signals are not in operation. Support: Section 2B.25 contains additional information concerning considerations involving left-turn prohibitions in conjunction with reversible-lane operations.
Sect. 4J.04
2003 Edition
Page 4K-1
CHAPTER 4K. FLASHING BEACONS Section 4K.01 General Design and Operation of Flashing Beacons
Support: A Flashing Beacon is a highway traffic signal with one or more signal sections that operates in a flashing mode. It can provide traffic control when used as an intersection control beacon or warning in alternative uses. Standard: Flashing Beacon units and their mountings shall follow the provisions of Chapter 4D, except as specified herein. Beacons shall be flashed at a rate of not less than 50 nor more than 60 times per minute. The illuminated period of each flash shall not be less than one-half and not more than two-thirds of the total cycle. Guidance: If used to supplement a warning or regulatory sign, the edge of the beacon signal housing should normally be located no closer than 300 mm (12 in) outside of the nearest edge of the sign. Option: An automatic dimming device may be used to reduce the brilliance of flashing yellow signal indications during night operation.
Page 4K-2
2003 Edition
Standard: A Warning Beacon shall consist of one or more signal sections of a standard traffic signal face with a flashing CIRCULAR YELLOW signal indication in each signal section. A Warning Beacon shall be used only to supplement an appropriate warning or regulatory sign or marker. The beacon shall not be included within the border of the sign except for SCHOOL SPEED LIMIT sign beacons. Warning Beacons, if used at intersections, shall not face conflicting vehicular approaches. If a Warning Beacon is suspended over the roadway, the clearance above the pavement shall be at least 4.6 m (15 ft) but not more than 5.8 m (19 ft). Guidance: The condition or regulation justifying Warning Beacons should largely govern their location with respect to the roadway. If an obstruction is in or adjacent to the roadway, illumination of the lower portion or the beginning of the obstruction or a sign on or in front of the obstruction, in addition to the beacon, should be considered. Warning Beacons should be operated only during those hours when the condition or regulation exists. Option: If Warning Beacons have more than one signal section, they may be flashed either alternately or simultaneously. A flashing yellow beacon interconnected with a traffic signal controller assembly may be used with a traffic signal warning sign (see Section 2C.29).
2003 Edition
Page 4L-1
Page 4L-2
2003 Edition
Option: In-Roadway Warning Lights at crosswalks may use pedestrian detectors to determine the duration of the operation instead of ceasing operation after a predetermined time. On one-way streets, In-Roadway Warning Lights may be omitted on the departure side of the crosswalk. Based on engineering judgment, the In-Roadway Warning Lights on the departure side of the crosswalk on the left side of a median may be omitted. Unidirectional In-Roadway Warning Lights installed at crosswalk locations may have an optional, additional yellow light indication in each unit that is visible to pedestrians in the crosswalk to indicate to pedestrians in the crosswalk that the In-Roadway Warning Lights are in fact flashing as they cross the street. These lights may flash with and at the same flash rate as the light module in which each is installed.
Sect. 4L.02
Part 5
2003 Edition
Page TC5-1
Page TC5-2
2003 Edition
CHAPTER 5G. TEMPORARY TRAFFIC CONTROL ZONES Section 5G.01 Section 5G.02 Section 5G.03 Section 5G.04 Section 5G.05 FIGURES CHAPTER 5B. REGULATORY SIGNS Figure 5B-1 Figure 5B-2 Figure 5C-1 Figure 5C-2 Figure 5F-1 Figure 5G-1 TABLES CHAPTER 5A. GENERAL Table 5A-1 Minimum Sign Sizes on Low-Volume Roads.........................................................................5A-2 Regulatory Signs on Low-Volume Roads ...............................................................................5B-2 Parking Signs on Low-Volume Roads.....................................................................................5B-2 Horizontal Alignment and Intersection Warning Signs on Low-Volume Roads ....................5C-2 Other Warning Signs on Low-Volume Roads .........................................................................5C-3 Highway-Rail Grade Crossing Signs for Low-Volume Roads ................................................5F-2 Temporary Traffic Control Signs on Low-Volume Roads ......................................................5G-2 Introduction .............................................................................................................................5G-1 Applications.............................................................................................................................5G-1 Channelization Devices ...........................................................................................................5G-1 Markings..................................................................................................................................5G-1 Other Traffic Control Devices .................................................................................................5G-2
CHAPTER 5F. TRAFFIC CONTROL FOR HIGHWAY-RAIL GRADE CROSSINGS CHAPTER 5G. TEMPORARY TRAFFIC CONTROL ZONES
2003 Edition
Page 5A-1
Page 5A-2
2003 Edition
MUTCD Code
R1-1 R1-2 R2-1 R2-1 R4-1 R4-2 R4-7 R5-1 R5-2 R6-2 R8-3 R8-3a R8-3c,3d R11-2 R11-3a R11-3b R12-1 R15-1 R15-2 W1-1,2,3,4,5 W1-6 W1-7 W1-8 W2-1,4,5 W3-1 W3-2 W3-4 W5-2 W5-3 W7-1,1a W7-3
Section Typical
5B.02 5B.02 5B.03 5B.03 5B.04 5B.04 5B.04 5B.04 5B.04 5B.04 5B.05 5B.05 5B.05 5B.04 5B.04 5B.04 5B.04 5F.02 5F.02 5C.02 5C.02 5C.02 5C.02 5C.03 5C.04 5C.04 5G.05 5C.05 5C.06 5C.07 5C.07 750 x 750 (30 x 30) 750 x 750 x 750 (30 x 30 x 30) 600 x 750 (24 x 30) 600 x 900 (24 x 36) 600 x 750 (24 x 30) 600 x 750 (24 x 30) 600 x 750 (24 x 30) 750 x 750 (30 x 30) 600 x 600 (24 x 24) 450 x 600 (18 x 24) 450 x 600 (18 x 24) 600 x 600 (24 x 24) 600 x 450 (24 x 18) 1200 x 750 (48 x 30) 1500 x 750 (60 x 30) 1500 x 750 (60 x 30) 600 x 750 (24 x 30) 1200 x 225 (48 x 9) 675 x 450 (27 x 18) 600 x 600 (24 x 24) 900 x 450 (36 x 18) 900 x 450 (36 x 18) 300 x 450 (12 x 18) 600 x 600 (24 x 24) 750 x 750 (30 x 30) 750 x 750 (30 x 30) 900 x 900 (36 x 36) 750 x 750 (30 x 30) 750 x 750 (30 x 30) 600 x 600 (24 x 24) 600 x 450 (24 x 18)
Oversized
900 x 900 (36 x 36) 900 x 900 x 900 (36 x 36 x 36) 900 x 1200 (36 x 48) 900 x 1350 (36 x 54) 900 x 1200 (36 x 48) 900 x 1200 (36 x 48) 900 x 1200 (36 x 48) 900 x 900 (36 x 36) 750 x 750 (30 x 30) 600 x 750 (24 x 30) 600 x 750 (24 x 30) 750 x 750 (30 x 30) 750 x 600 (30 x 24) 900 x 1200 (36 x 48) 750 x 750 (30 x 30) 1200 x 600 (48 x 24) 1200 x 600 (48 x 24) 450 x 600 (18 x 24) 750 x 750 (30 x 30) 900 x 900 (36 x 36) 900 x 900 (36 x 36) 1200 x 1200 (48 x 48) 900 x 900 (36 x 36) 900 x 900 (36 x 36) 750 x 750 (30 x 30) 750 x 600 (30 x 24)
Sect. 5A.03
2003 Edition
Page 5A-3
MUTCD Code
W7-3a W8-3 W8-7 W10-1 W10-2,3,4 W11 Series W13-1 W14-1,2 W14-1a,2a W14-3 W16-2 W16-9p W18-1 W20-1 W20-7a W21-1a W21-2 W21-3 W21-5 W21-6
Section Typical
5C.09 5C.08 5G.05 5F.03 5F.03 5C.09 5C.10 5C.11 5C.11 5G.05 5C.09 5C.09 5C.12 5G.05 5G.05 5G.05 5G.05 5G.05 5G.05 5G.05 600 x 450 (24 x 18) 750 x 750 (30 x 30) 750 x 750 (30 x 30) 600 Dia. (24 Dia.) 750 x 750 (30 x 30) 600 x 600 (24 x 24) 450 x 450 (18 x 18) 750 x 750 (30 x 30) 900 x 225 (36 x 9) (750 x 1000 x 1000) (30 x 40 x 40) 600 x 450 (24 x 18) 600 x 300 (24 x 12) 750 x 750 (30 x 30) 900 x 900 (36 x 36) 900 x 900 (36 x 36) 900 x 900 (36 x 36) 600 x 600 (24 x 24) 600 x 600 (24 x 24) 600 x 600 (24 x 24) 750 x 750 (30 x 30)
Oversized
750 x 600 (30 x 24) 900 x 900 (36 x 36) 900 x 900 (36 x 36) 750 Dia. (30 Dia.) 900 x 900 (36 x 36) 750 x 750 (30 x 30) 600 x 600 (24 x 24) 900 x 900 (36 x 36) (900 x 1200 x 1200) (36 x 48 x 48) 750 x 600 (30 x 24) 750 x 450 (30 x 18) 900 x 900 (36 x 36) 1200 x 1200 (48 x 48) 1200 x 1200 (48 x 48) 1200 x 1200 (48 x 48) 750 x 750 (30 x 30) 750 x 750 (30 x 30) 750 x 750 (30 x 30) 900 x 900 (36 x 36)
Notes: 1. Larger signs may be used when appropriate 2. Dimensions are shown in millimeters followed by inches in parentheses and are shown as width x height
Sect. 5A.03
Page 5A-4
2003 Edition
Sect. 5A.04
2003 Edition
Page 5B-1
Section 5B.04 Traffic Movement and Prohibition Signs (R3, R4, R5, R6, R9, R10, R11, R12, R13, and R14 Series)
Support: The regulatory signs (see Figure 5B-1) in these series inform road users of required, permitted, or prohibited traffic movements involving turn, alignment, exclusion, and pedestrians. Standard: If used, signs for traffic prohibitions or restrictions shall be placed in advance of the prohibition or restriction so that traffic can use an alternate route or turn around. Guidance: Signs should be used on low-volume roads to indicate traffic prohibitions and restrictions such as road closures and weight restrictions. Option: These signs may be useful on a low-volume road near and at the intersections or the connections with a higher class of road, and where the regulatory message is essential for reasonably safe transition from the lowvolume road to the higher-class facility and vice versa.
Page 5B-2
2003 Edition
OR
R1-1
R1-2
R2-1
R4-1
R4-2
R4-7
R5-1
R5-2
R6-2
OR
R11-2
R11-3a
R12-6
OR
R11-3b
R12-1
R8-3
R8-3a
Sect. 5B.06
2003 Edition
Page 5C-1
Section 5C.04 Stop Ahead and Yield Ahead Signs (W3-1, W3-2)
Standard: A Stop Ahead (W3-1) sign (see Figure 5C-2) shall be used where a STOP sign is not visible for a sufficient distance to permit the road user to bring the vehicle to a stop at the STOP sign. A Yield Ahead (W3-2) sign (see Figure 5C-2) shall be used where a YIELD sign is not visible for a sufficient distance to permit the road user to bring the vehicle to a stop, if necessary, at the YIELD sign. Option: Word message (W3-1a and W3-2a) signs may be used as alternates to symbol signs.
Page 5C-2
2003 Edition
Figure 5C-1. Horizontal Alignment and Intersection Warning Signs on Low-Volume Roads
W1-1
W1-2
W1-3
W1-4
W1-5
W1-6
W1-7
W1-8
OR
W2-1
W2-4
W2-5
The use of the Hill (W7-1) sign (see Figure 5C-2) on low-volume roads may be confined to roads where commercial or recreational vehicles are anticipated. Word messages (W7-1a) may be used as alternates to symbols.
Section 5C.09 Vehicular Traffic and Nonvehicular Signs (W11 Series and W8-6)
Guidance: Vehicular Traffic signs (see Figure 5C-2) should be used to alert road users to frequent unexpected entries into the roadway by trucks, bicyclists, farm vehicles, fire trucks, and other vehicles. Such signs should be used only at locations where the road users sight distance is restricted or the activity would be unexpected. Option: Nonvehicular signs (see Figure 5C-2) may be used to alert the road user to frequent unexpected entries into the roadway by pedestrian, animal, and other crossing activities that may cause potential conflicts. A W7-3a, W16-2, or W16-9p supplemental plaque (see Figure 5C-2), with the legend NEXT XX km (NEXT XX MILES), XX METERS (XX FEET), or AHEAD may be installed below a Vehicular Traffic or Nonvehicular sign (see Sections 2C.40 and 2C.41). Guidance: If the activity is seasonal or temporary, the sign should be removed or covered when the crossing activity does not exist.
Sect. 5C.07 to 5C.09
2003 Edition
Page 5C-3
W3-1
W3-2
W5-2
W5-3
W7-1
OR
W7-3
W7-3a
W8-3
W8-6
W11-1
W11-2
W11-3
W11-4
W11-5
W11-8
W11-10
W14-1
W14-2
W16-2
W16-9p
W18-1
Sect. 5C.09
Page 5C-4
2003 Edition
Section 5C.11 DEAD END or NO OUTLET Signs (W14-1, W14-1a, W14-2, W14-2a)
Option: The DEAD END (W14-1) and NO OUTLET (W14-2) signs (see Figure 5C-2) and the DEAD END (W14-1a) and NO OUTLET (W14-2a) signs (see Figure 2C-3) may be used to warn road users of a road that has no outlet or that terminates in a dead end or cul-de-sac. Guidance: If used, these signs should be placed at a location that gives drivers of large commercial or recreational vehicles an opportunity to select a different route or turn around.
2003 Edition
Page 5D-1
Sect. 5D.01
2003 Edition
Page 5E-1
2003 Edition
Page 5F-1
CHAPTER 5F. TRAFFIC CONTROL FOR HIGHWAY-RAIL GRADE CROSSINGS Section 5F.01 Introduction
Support: The criteria for highway-rail grade crossing traffic control devices are contained in Part 8 and in other Sections of this Manual. Traffic control for highway-rail grade crossings includes all signs, signals, markings, illumination, and other warning devices and their supports along roadways either approaching or at highway-rail grade crossings. The function of this traffic control is to permit reasonably safe and efficient operation of both rail and road traffic at highway-rail grade crossings.
Section 5F.03 Highway-Rail Grade Crossing Advance Warning Signs (W10 Series)
Standard: Except as noted in the Option, a Highway-Rail Grade Crossing Advance Warning (W10-1) sign (see Figure 5F-1) shall be used on all low-volume roads in advance of every highway-rail grade crossing. Option: The Highway-Rail Grade Crossing Advance Warning sign may be omitted for highway-rail grade crossings that are flagged by train crews. The W10-2, W10-3, and W10-4 signs (see Figure 5F-1) may be used on low-volume roads that run parallel to railroad tracks to warn road users making a turn that they will encounter a highway-rail grade crossing soon after making the turn.
Page 5F-2
2003 Edition
R15-1
R15-2
W10-1
W10-2
W10-3
W10-4
Sect. 5F.06
2003 Edition
Page 5G-1
Page 5G-2
2003 Edition
OR OR
W20-1
W20-7a
W21-1a
W21-2
W21-3
W21-5
W21-6
Sect. 5G.05
Part 6
2003 Edition
Page TC6-1
Page TC6-2
2003 Edition
Section 6F.12 Section 6F.13 Section 6F.14 Section 6F.15 Section 6F.16 Section 6F.17 Section 6F.18 Section 6F.19 Section 6F.20 Section 6F.21 Section 6F.22 Section 6F.23 Section 6F.24 Section 6F.25 Section 6F.26 Section 6F.27 Section 6F.28 Section 6F.29 Section 6F.30 Section 6F.31 Section 6F.32 Section 6F.33 Section 6F.34 Section 6F.35 Section 6F.36 Section 6F.37 Section 6F.38 Section 6F.39 Section 6F.40 Section 6F.41 Section 6F.42 Section 6F.43 Section 6F.44 Section 6F.45 Section 6F.46 Section 6F.47 Section 6F.48 Section 6F.49 Section 6F.50 Section 6F.51 Section 6F.52 Section 6F.53 Section 6F.54 Section 6F.55 Section 6F.56 Section 6F.57 Section 6F.58 Section 6F.59 Section 6F.60 Section 6F.61 Section 6F.62 Section 6F.63 Section 6F.64
PEDESTRIAN CROSSWALK Sign (R9-8) ..........................................................................6F-12 SIDEWALK CLOSED Signs (R9-9, R9-10, R9-11, R9-11a)...............................................6F-12 Special Regulatory Signs .......................................................................................................6F-12 Warning Sign Function, Design, and Application .................................................................6F-13 Position of Advance Warning Signs.......................................................................................6F-14 ROAD (STREET) WORK Sign (W20-1)..............................................................................6F-14 DETOUR Sign (W20-2) ........................................................................................................6F-14 ROAD (STREET) CLOSED Sign (W20-3) ..........................................................................6F-14 ONE LANE ROAD Sign (W20-4) ........................................................................................6F-14 Lane(s) Closed Signs (W20-5, W20-5a)................................................................................6F-18 CENTER LANE CLOSED AHEAD Signs (W9-3, W9-3a) .................................................6F-18 THRU TRAFFIC MERGE LEFT (RIGHT) Sign (W4-7).....................................................6F-18 Lane Ends Sign (W4-2) .........................................................................................................6F-19 ON RAMP Plaque (W13-4)...................................................................................................6F-19 RAMP NARROWS Sign (W5-4) ..........................................................................................6F-19 SLOW TRAFFIC AHEAD Sign (W23-1) .............................................................................6F-19 EXIT OPEN, EXIT CLOSED, EXIT ONLY Signs (E5-2, E5-2a, E5-3) .............................6F-19 Flagger Sign (W20-7a, W20-7) .............................................................................................6F-19 Two-Way Traffic Sign (W6-3) ...............................................................................................6F-20 Workers Sign (W21-1, W21-1a) ............................................................................................6F-20 FRESH OIL (TAR) Sign (W21-2).........................................................................................6F-20 ROAD MACHINERY AHEAD Sign (W21-3)......................................................................6F-20 Motorized Traffic Signs (W8-6, W11-10) .............................................................................6F-20 Shoulder Work Signs (W21-5, W21-5a, W21-5b).................................................................6F-20 SURVEY CREW Sign (W21-6) ............................................................................................6F-21 UTILITY WORK Sign (W21-7)............................................................................................6F-21 Signs for Blasting Areas ........................................................................................................6F-21 BLASTING ZONE AHEAD Sign (W22-1) ..........................................................................6F-21 TURN OFF 2-WAY RADIO AND CELL PHONE Sign (W22-2) .......................................6F-21 END BLASTING ZONE Sign (W22-3)................................................................................6F-21 SHOULDER Signs (W8-4, W8-9, W8-9a)............................................................................6F-22 UNEVEN LANES Sign (W8-11) ..........................................................................................6F-22 NO CENTER STRIPE Sign (W8-12)....................................................................................6F-22 Double Reverse Curve Signs (W24 Series) ...........................................................................6F-22 Other Warning Signs ..............................................................................................................6F-22 Special Warning Signs ...........................................................................................................6F-22 Advisory Speed Plaque (W13-1) ...........................................................................................6F-22 Supplementary Distance Plaque (W7-3a)..............................................................................6F-23 Guide Signs ............................................................................................................................6F-23 ROAD WORK NEXT XX km (MILES) Sign (G20-1).........................................................6F-23 END ROAD WORK Sign (G20-2)........................................................................................6F-24 Detour Signs (M4-8, M4-8a, M4-8b, M4-9, M4-9a, M4-9b, M4-9c, and M4-10) .......................6F-24 PILOT CAR FOLLOW ME Sign (G20-4) ............................................................................6F-24 Portable Changeable Message Signs .....................................................................................6F-25 Arrow Panels ..........................................................................................................................6F-26 High-Level Warning Devices (Flag Trees) ............................................................................6F-29 Channelizing Devices.............................................................................................................6F-29 Cones......................................................................................................................................6F-30 Tubular Markers .....................................................................................................................6F-31 Vertical Panels........................................................................................................................6F-32 Drums.....................................................................................................................................6F-33 Type I, II, or III Barricades ....................................................................................................6F-33 Direction Indicator Barricades ...............................................................................................6F-35
2003 Edition
Page TC6-3
Section 6F.65 Section 6F.66 Section 6F.67 Section 6F.68 Section 6F.69 Section 6F.70 Section 6F.71 Section 6F.72 Section 6F.73 Section 6F.74 Section 6F.75 Section 6F.76 Section 6F.77 Section 6F.78 Section 6F.79 Section 6F.80 Section 6F.81 Section 6F.82 Section 6F.83 Section 6F.84 Section 6F.85 Section 6F.86
Temporary Traffic Barriers as Channelizing Devices............................................................6F-35 Longitudinal Channelizing Barricades ..................................................................................6F-35 Other Channelizing Devices ..................................................................................................6F-36 Detectable Edging for Pedestrians .........................................................................................6F-36 Temporary Raised Islands......................................................................................................6F-37 Opposing Traffic Lane Divider ..............................................................................................6F-37 Pavement Markings................................................................................................................6F-37 Temporary Pavement Markings .............................................................................................6F-38 Raised Pavement Markers......................................................................................................6F-38 Delineators .............................................................................................................................6F-39 Lighting Devices ....................................................................................................................6F-39 Floodlights..............................................................................................................................6F-39 Flashing Warning Beacons.....................................................................................................6F-40 Warning Lights.......................................................................................................................6F-40 Steady-Burn Electric Lamps ..................................................................................................6F-41 Temporary Traffic Control Signals ........................................................................................6F-41 Temporary Traffic Barriers ....................................................................................................6F-42 Crash Cushions ......................................................................................................................6F-43 Vehicle-Arresting Systems .....................................................................................................6F-43 Rumble Strips.........................................................................................................................6F-44 Screens ...................................................................................................................................6F-44 Future and Experimental Devices ..........................................................................................6F-44
CHAPTER 6G. TYPE OF TEMPORARY TRAFFIC CONTROL ZONE ACTIVITIES Section 6G.01 Section 6G.02 Section 6G.03 Section 6G.04 Section 6G.05 Section 6G.06 Section 6G.07 Section 6G.08 Section 6G.09 Section 6G.10 Section 6G.11 Section 6G.12 Section 6G.13 Section 6G.14 Section 6G.15 Section 6G.16 Section 6G.17 Section 6G.18 Section 6G.19 Section 6G.20 Typical Applications................................................................................................................6G-1 Work Duration .........................................................................................................................6G-1 Location of Work.....................................................................................................................6G-3 Modifications To Fulfill Special Needs...................................................................................6G-3 Work Affecting Pedestrian and Bicycle Facilities ...................................................................6F-4 Work Outside of Shoulder.......................................................................................................6G-5 Work on the Shoulder with No Encroachment .......................................................................6G-5 Work on the Shoulder with Minor Encroachment ..................................................................6G-6 Work Within the Median .........................................................................................................6G-6 Work Within the Traveled Way of Two-Lane Highways ........................................................6G-6 Work Within the Traveled Way of Urban Streets....................................................................6G-7 Work Within the Traveled Way of Multi-lane, Nonaccess Controlled Highways ..................6G-7 Work Within the Traveled Way at an Intersection ..................................................................6G-9 Work Within the Traveled Way of Freeways and Expressways............................................6G-10 Two-Lane, Two-Way Traffic on One Roadway of a Normally Divided Highway ...............6G-10 Crossovers .............................................................................................................................6G-11 Interchanges...........................................................................................................................6G-11 Movable Barriers ...................................................................................................................6G-11 Work in the Vicinity of Highway-Rail Grade Crossings ......................................................6G-11 Temporary Traffic Control During Nighttime Hours............................................................6G-11
CHAPTER 6H. TYPICAL APPLICATIONS Section 6H.01 CHAPTER 6I. Section 6I.01 Section 6I.02 Section 6I.03 Section 6I.04 Section 6I.05 Typical Applications................................................................................................................6H-1 CONTROL OF TRAFFIC THROUGH TRAFFIC INCIDENT MANAGEMENT AREAS General ......................................................................................................................................6I-1 Major Traffic Incidents .............................................................................................................6I-2 Intermediate Traffic Incidents...................................................................................................6I-3 Minor Traffic Incidents .............................................................................................................6I-3 Use of Emergency-Vehicle Lighting.........................................................................................6I-4
Page TC6-4
2003 Edition
FIGURES CHAPTER 6C. TEMPORARY TRAFFIC CONTROL ELEMENTS Figure 6C-1 Figure 6C-2 Figure 6C-3 Figure 6E-1 Figure 6F-1 Figure 6F-2 Figure 6F-3 Figure 6F-4 Figure 6F-5 Figure 6F-6 Figure 6F-7 Figure 6H-1 Figure 6H-2 Figure 6H-3 Figure 6H-4 Figure 6H-5 Figure 6H-6 Figure 6H-7 Figure 6H-8 Figure 6H-9 Figure 6H-10 Figure 6H-11 Figure 6H-12 Figure 6H-13 Figure 6H-14 Figure 6H-15 Figure 6H-16 Figure 6H-17 Figure 6H-18 Figure 6H-19 Figure 6H-20 Figure 6H-21 Figure 6H-22 Figure 6H-23 Figure 6H-24 Figure 6H-25 Figure 6H-26 Figure 6H-27 Figure 6H-28 Figure 6H-29 Figure 6H-30 Figure 6H-31 Figure 6H-32 Figure 6H-33 Component Parts of a Temporary Traffic Control Zone .........................................................6C-3 Types of Tapers and Buffer Spaces .........................................................................................6C-6 Example of a One-Lane, Two-Way Traffic Taper ...................................................................6C-9 Use of Hand-Signaling Devices by Flaggers...........................................................................6E-3 Height and Lateral Location of SignsTypical Installations .................................................6F-7 Methods of Mounting Signs Other Than on Posts ..................................................................6F-8 Regulatory Signs in Temporary Traffic Control Zones ...........................................................6F-9 Warning Signs in Temporary Traffic Control Zones .............................................................6F-15 Exit Open and Closed and Detour Signs ...............................................................................6F-19 Advance Warning Arrow Display Specifications...................................................................6F-27 Channelizing Devices.............................................................................................................6F-31 Work Beyond the Shoulder (TA-1) .........................................................................................6H-7 Blasting Zone (TA-2) ..............................................................................................................6H-9 Work on Shoulders (TA-3) ....................................................................................................6H-11 Short-Duration or Mobile Operation on Shoulder (TA-4) ....................................................6H-13 Shoulder Closure on Freeway (TA-5) ...................................................................................6H-15 Shoulder Work with Minor Encroachment (TA-6) ...............................................................6H-17 Road Closure with Diversion (TA-7) ....................................................................................6H-19 Road Closure with Off-Site Detour (TA-8)...........................................................................6H-21 Overlapping Routes with Detour (TA-9) ..............................................................................6H-23 Lane Closure on Two-Lane Road Using Flaggers (TA-10) ..................................................6H-25 Lane Closure on Two-Lane Road with Low Traffic Volumes (TA-11) ................................6H-27 Lane Closure on Two-Lane Road Using Traffic Control Signals (TA-12)...........................6H-29 Temporary Road Closure (TA-13) ........................................................................................6H-31 Haul Road Crossing (TA-14) ................................................................................................6H-33 Work in Center of Road with Low Traffic Volumes (TA-15) ...............................................6H-35 Surveying Along Centerline of Road with Low Traffic Volumes (TA-16) ...........................6H-37 Mobile Operations on Two-Lane Road (TA-17)...................................................................6H-39 Lane Closure on Minor Street (TA-18).................................................................................6H-41 Detour for One Travel Direction (TA-19) .............................................................................6H-43 Detour for Closed Street (TA-20)..........................................................................................6H-45 Lane Closure on Near Side of Intersection (TA-21) .............................................................6H-47 Right Lane Closure on Far Side of Intersection (TA-22) .....................................................6H-49 Left Lane Closure on Far Side of Intersection (TA-23)........................................................6H-51 Half Road Closure on Far Side of Intersection (TA-24).......................................................6H-53 Multiple Lane Closures at Intersection (TA-25) ...................................................................6H-55 Closure in Center of Intersection (TA-26) ............................................................................6H-57 Closure at Side of Intersection (TA-27) ................................................................................6H-59 Sidewalk Detour or Diversion (TA-28) .................................................................................6H-61 Crosswalk Closures and Pedestrian Detours (TA-29)...........................................................6H-63 Interior Lane Closure on Multi-lane Street (TA-30) .............................................................6H-65 Lane Closures on Street with Uneven Directional Volumes (TA-31) ...................................6H-67 Half Road Closure on Multi-lane, High-Speed Highway (TA-32).......................................6H-69 Stationary Lane Closure on Divided Highway (TA-33) .......................................................6H-71
CHAPTER 6E. FLAGGER CONTROL CHAPTER 6F. TEMPORARY TRAFFIC CONTROL ZONE DEVICES
2003 Edition
Page TC6-5
Figure 6H-34 Figure 6H-35 Figure 6H-36 Figure 6H-37 Figure 6H-38 Figure 6H-39 Figure 6H-40 Figure 6H-41 Figure 6H-42 Figure 6H-43 Figure 6H-44 Figure 6H-45 Figure 6H-46 CHAPTER 6I. Figure 6I-1 TABLES
Lane Closure with Temporary Traffic Barrier (TA-34).........................................................6H-73 Mobile Operation on Multi-lane Road (TA-35)....................................................................6H-75 Lane Shift on Freeway (TA-36) ............................................................................................6H-77 Double Lane Closure on Freeway (TA-37)...........................................................................6H-79 Interior Lane Closure on Freeway (TA-38)...........................................................................6H-81 Median Crossover on Freeway (TA-39)................................................................................6H-83 Median Crossover for Entrance Ramp (TA-40) ....................................................................6H-85 Median Crossover for Exit Ramp (TA-41) ...........................................................................6H-87 Work in Vicinity of Exit Ramp (TA-42) ...............................................................................6H-89 Partial Exit Ramp Closure (TA-43).......................................................................................6H-91 Work in Vicinity of Entrance Ramp (TA-44)........................................................................6H-93 Movable Barriers (TA-45) .....................................................................................................6H-95 Work in Vicinity of Highway-Rail Grade Crossing (TA-46) ................................................6H-97 CONTROL OF TRAFFIC THROUGH TRAFFIC INCIDENT MANAGEMENT AREAS Examples of Traffic Incident Management Area Signs............................................................6I-2
CHAPTER 6C. TEMPORARY TRAFFIC CONTROL ELEMENTS Table 6C-1 Table 6C-2 Table 6C-3 Table 6C-4 Table 6E-1 Table 6F-1 Table 6H-1 Table 6H-2 Table 6H-3 Table 6H-4 Suggested Advance Warning Sign Spacing.............................................................................6C-4 Stopping Sight Distance as a Function of Speed ....................................................................6C-7 Taper Length Criteria for Temporary Traffic Control Zones ..................................................6C-8 Formulas for Determining Taper Lengths ...............................................................................6C-8 Stopping Sight Distance as a Function of Speed.....................................................................6E-4 Sizes of Temporary Traffic Control Signs ...............................................................................6F-3 Index to Typical Applications..................................................................................................6H-3 Meaning of Symbols on Typical Application Diagrams .........................................................6H-2 Meaning of Letter Codes on Typical Application Diagrams ..................................................6H-5 Formulas for Determining Taper Lengths ...............................................................................6H-5
CHAPTER 6E. FLAGGER CONTROL CHAPTER 6F. TEMPORARY TRAFFIC CONTROL ZONE DEVICES CHAPTER 6H. TYPICAL APPLICATIONS
2003 Edition
Page 6A-1
2003 Edition
Page 6B-1
CHAPTER 6B. FUNDAMENTAL PRINCIPLES Section 6B.01 Fundamental Principles of Temporary Traffic Control
Support: Whenever the acronym TTC is used in this Chapter, it refers to temporary traffic control. Standard: The needs and control of all road users (motorists, bicyclists, and pedestrians within the highway, including persons with disabilities in accordance with the Americans with Disabilities Act of 1990 (ADA), Title II, Paragraph 35.130) through a TTC zone shall be an essential part of highway construction, utility work, maintenance operations, and the management of traffic incidents. Support: Construction, maintenance, utility, and incident zones can all benefit from TTC to compensate for the unexpected or unusual situations faced by road users. When planning for TTC in these zones, it can be assumed that it is appropriate for road users to exercise caution. Even though road users are assumed to be using caution, special care is still needed in applying TTC techniques. Special plans preparation and coordination with transit, other highway agencies, law enforcement and other emergency units, utilities, schools, and railroad companies might be needed to reduce unexpected and unusual road user operation situations. During TTC activities, commercial vehicles might need to follow a different route from passenger vehicles because of bridge, weight, clearance, or geometric restrictions. Also, vehicles carrying hazardous materials might need to follow a different route from other vehicles. The Hazardous Materials and National Network signs are included in Sections 2B.52 and 2B.53, respectively. Experience has shown that following the fundamental principles of Part 6 will assist road users and help protect workers in the vicinity of TTC zones. Guidance: Road user and worker safety and accessibility in TTC zones should be an integral and high-priority element of every project from planning through design and construction. Similarly, maintenance and utility work should be planned and conducted with the safety and accessibility of all motorists, bicyclists, pedestrians (including those with disabilities), and workers being considered at all times. If the TTC zone includes a highway-rail grade crossing, early coordination with the railroad company should take place. Support: Formulating specific plans for TTC at traffic incidents is difficult because of the variety of situations that can arise. Guidance: General plans or guidelines should be developed to provide safety for motorists, bicyclists, pedestrians, workers, enforcement/emergency officials, and equipment, with the following factors being considered: A. The basic safety principles governing the design of permanent roadways and roadsides should also govern the design of TTC zones. The goal should be to route road users through such zones using roadway geometrics, roadside features, and TTC devices as nearly as possible comparable to those for normal highway situations. B. A TTC plan, in detail appropriate to the complexity of the work project or incident, should be prepared and understood by all responsible parties before the site is occupied. Any changes in the TTC plan should be approved by an official knowledgeable (for example, trained and/or certified) in proper TTC practices. Road user movement should be inhibited as little as practical, based on the following considerations: A. TTC at work and incident sites should be designed on the assumption that drivers will only reduce their speeds if they clearly perceive a need to do so (see Section 6C.01). B. Frequent and abrupt changes in geometrics such as lane narrowing, dropped lanes, or main roadway transitions that require rapid maneuvers, should be avoided. C. Provisions should be made for the reasonably safe operation of work, particularly on high-speed, highvolume roadways. D. Road users should be encouraged to use alternative routes that do not include TTC zones. E. Bicyclists and pedestrians, including those with disabilities, should be provided with access and reasonably safe passage through the TTC zone. F. Roadway occupancy should be scheduled during off-peak hours and, if necessary, night work should be considered. G. Early coordination with officials having jurisdiction over the affected cross streets and providing emergency services should occur before roadway or ramp closings.
Sect. 6B.01
Page 6B-2
2003 Edition
Motorists, bicyclists, and pedestrians should be guided in a clear and positive manner while approaching and traversing TTC zones and incident sites. The following principles should be applied: A. Adequate warning, delineation, and channelization should be provided to assist in guiding road users in advance of and through the TTC zone or incident site by using proper pavement marking, signing, or other devices that are effective under varying conditions. Providing information that is in usable formats by pedestrians with visual disabilities should also be considered. B. TTC devices inconsistent with intended travel paths through TTC zones should be removed or covered. However, in intermediate-term stationary, short-term, and mobile operations, where visible permanent devices are inconsistent with intended travel paths, devices that highlight or emphasize the appropriate path should be used. Providing traffic control devices that are accessible to and usable by pedestrians with disabilities should be considered. C. Flagging procedures, when used, should provide positive guidance to road users traversing the TTC zone. To provide acceptable levels of operations, routine day and night inspections of TTC elements should be performed as follows: A. Individuals who are knowledgeable (for example, trained and/or certified) in the principles of proper TTC should be assigned responsibility for safety in TTC zones. The most important duty of these individuals should be to check that all TTC devices of the project are reasonably consistent with the TTC plan and are effective in providing reasonably safe conditions for motorists, bicyclists, pedestrians, and workers. B. As the work progresses, temporary traffic controls and/or working conditions should be modified in order to provide reasonably safe and efficient road user movement and to provide worker safety. The individual responsible for TTC should have the authority to halt work until applicable or remedial safety measures are taken. C. TTC zones should be carefully monitored under varying conditions of road user volumes, light, and weather to check that applicable TTC devices are effective, clearly visible, clean, and in compliance with the TTC plan. D. When warranted, an engineering study should be made (in cooperation with law enforcement officials) of reported crashes occurring within the TTC zone. Crash records in TTC zones should be monitored to identify the need for changes in the TTC zone. Attention should be given to the maintenance of roadside safety during the life of the TTC zone by applying the following principles: A. To accommodate run-off-the-road incidents, disabled vehicles, or emergency situations, unencumbered roadside recovery areas or clear zones should be provided where practical. B. Channelization of road users should be accomplished by the use of pavement markings, signing, and crashworthy, detectable channelizing devices. C. Work equipment, workers' private vehicles, materials, and debris should be stored in such a manner to reduce the probability of being impacted by run-off-the-road vehicles. Each person whose actions affect TTC zone safety, from the upper-level management through the field workers, should receive training appropriate to the job decisions each individual is required to make. Only those individuals who are trained in proper TTC practices and have a basic understanding of the principles (established by applicable standards and guidelines, including those of this Manual) should supervise the selection, placement, and maintenance of TTC devices used for TTC zones and for incident management. Good public relations should be maintained by applying the following principles: A. The needs of all road users should be assessed such that appropriate advance notice is given and clearly defined alternative paths are provided. B. The cooperation of the various news media should be sought in publicizing the existence of and reasons for TTC zones because news releases can assist in keeping the road users well informed. C. The needs of abutting property owners, residents, and businesses should be assessed and appropriate accommodations made. D. The needs of emergency service providers (law enforcement, fire, and medical) should be assessed and appropriate coordination and accommodations made. E. The needs of railroads and transit should be assessed and appropriate coordination and accommodations made. F. The needs of operators of commercial vehicles such as buses and large trucks should be assessed and appropriate accommodations made. Standard: Before any new detour or temporary route is opened to traffic, all necessary signs shall be in place. All TTC devices shall be removed as soon as practical when they are no longer needed. When work is suspended for short periods of time, TTC devices that are no longer appropriate shall be removed or covered.
Sect. 6B.01
2003 Edition
Page 6C-1
CHAPTER 6C. TEMPORARY TRAFFIC CONTROL ELEMENTS Section 6C.01 Temporary Traffic Control Plans
Support: Whenever the acronym TTC is used in this Chapter, it refers to temporary traffic control. Standard: The needs and control of all road users (motorists, bicyclists, and pedestrians within the highway, including persons with disabilities in accordance with the Americans with Disabilities Act of 1990 (ADA), Title II, Paragraph 35.130) through a TTC zone shall be an essential part of highway construction, utility work, maintenance operations, and the management of traffic incidents. Support: A TTC plan describes TTC measures to be used for facilitating road users through a work zone or an incident area. TTC plans play a vital role in providing continuity of reasonably safe and efficient road user flow when a work zone, incident, or other event temporarily disrupts normal road user flow. Important auxiliary provisions that cannot conveniently be specified on project plans can easily be incorporated into Special Provisions within the TTC plan. TTC plans range in scope from being very detailed to simply referencing typical drawings contained in this Manual, standard approved highway agency drawings and manuals, or specific drawings contained in the contract documents. The degree of detail in the TTC plan depends entirely on the nature and complexity of the situation. Guidance: TTC plans should be prepared by persons knowledgeable (for example, trained and/or certified) about the fundamental principles of TTC and work activities to be performed. The design, selection and placement of TTC devices for a TTC plan should be based on engineering judgment. Coordination should be made between adjacent or overlapping projects to check that duplicate signing is not used and to check compatibility of traffic control between adjacent or overlapping projects. Traffic control planning should be completed for all highway construction, utility work, maintenance operations, and incident management including minor maintenance and utility projects prior to occupying the TTC zone. Planning for all road users should be included in the process. Provisions for effective continuity of accessible circulation paths for pedestrians should be incorporated into the TTC process. Where existing pedestrian routes are blocked or detoured, information should be provided about alternative routes that are usable by pedestrians with disabilities, particularly those who have visual disabilities. Access to temporary bus stops, reasonably safe travel across intersections with accessible pedestrian signals (see Section 4E.06), and other routing issues should be considered where temporary pedestrian routes are channelized. Barriers and channelizing devices that are detectable by people with visual disabilities should be provided. Option: Provisions may be incorporated into the project bid documents that enable contractors to develop an alternate TTC plan. Modifications of TTC plans may be necessary because of changed conditions or a determination of better methods of safely and efficiently handling road users. Guidance: This alternate or modified plan should have the approval of the responsible highway agency prior to implementation. Provisions for effective continuity of transit service should be incorporated into the TTC planning process because often public transit buses cannot efficiently be detoured in the same manner as other vehicles (particularly for short-term maintenance projects). Where applicable, the TTC plan should provide for features such as accessible temporary bus stops, pull-outs, and satisfactory waiting areas for transit patrons, including persons with disabilities, if applicable (see Section 10A.05 for additional light rail transit issues to consider for TTC). Provisions for effective continuity of railroad service and acceptable access to abutting property owners and businesses should also be incorporated into the TTC planning process. Reduced speed limits should be used only in the specific portion of the TTC zone where conditions or restrictive features are present. However, frequent changes in the speed limit should be avoided. A TTC plan should be designed so that vehicles can reasonably safely travel through the TTC zone with a speed limit reduction of no more than 16 km/h (10 mph).
Sect. 6C.01
Page 6C-2
2003 Edition
A reduction of more than 16 km/h (10 mph) in the speed limit should be used only when required by restrictive features in the TTC zone. Where restrictive features justify a speed reduction of more than 16 km/h (10 mph), additional driver notification should be provided. The speed limit should be stepped down in advance of the location requiring the lowest speed, and additional TTC warning devices should be used. Reduced speed zoning (lowering the regulatory speed limit) should be avoided as much as practical because drivers will reduce their speeds only if they clearly perceive a need to do so. Support: Research has demonstrated that large reductions in the speed limit, such as a 50 km/h (30 mph) reduction, increase speed variance and the potential for crashes. Smaller reductions in the speed limit of up to 16 km/h (10 mph) cause smaller changes in speed variance and lessen the potential for increased crashes. A reduction in the regulatory speed limit of only up to 16 km/h (10 mph) from the normal speed limit has been shown to be more effective.
2003 Edition
Page 6C-3
Downstream Taper
Work Space is set aside for workers, equipment, and material storage Activity Area is where work takes place Buffer Space (longitudinal) provides protection for traffic and workers
Shoulder Taper
Sect. 6C.04
Page 6C-4
2003 Edition
Road Type A
Urban (low speed)* Urban (high speed)* Rural Expressway / Freeway
C
30 (100) 100 (350) 150 (500) 800 (2,640)
* Speed category to be determined by highway agency ** Distances are shown in meters (feet). The column headings A, B, and C are the dimensions shown in Figures 6H-1 through 6H-46. The A dimension is the distance from the transition or point of restriction to the first sign. The B dimension is the distance between the first and second signs. The C dimension is the distance between the second and third signs. (The third sign is the first one in a three-sign series encountered by a driver approaching a TTC zone.)
Option: Advance warning may be eliminated when the activity area is sufficiently removed from the road users path so that it does not interfere with the normal flow.
2003 Edition
Page 6C-5
Guidance: Neither work activity nor storage of equipment, vehicles, or material should occur within a buffer space. Option: Buffer spaces may be positioned either longitudinally or laterally with respect to the direction of road user flow. The activity area may contain one or more lateral or longitudinal buffer spaces. A longitudinal buffer space may be placed in advance of a work space. The longitudinal buffer space may also be used to separate opposing road user flows that use portions of the same traffic lane, as shown in Figure 6C-2. If a longitudinal buffer space is used, the values shown in Table 6C-2 may be used to determine the length of the longitudinal buffer space. Support: Typically, the buffer space is formed as a traffic island and defined by channelizing devices. When a shadow vehicle, arrow panel, or changeable message sign is placed in a closed lane in advance of a work space, only the area upstream of the vehicle, arrow panel, or changeable message sign constitutes the buffer space. Option: The lateral buffer space may be used to separate the traffic space from the work space, as shown in Figures 6C-1 and 6C-2, or such areas as excavations or pavement-edge drop-offs. A lateral buffer space also may be used between two travel lanes, especially those carrying opposing flows. Guidance: The width of a lateral buffer space should be determined by engineering judgment. Option: When work occurs on a high-volume, highly congested facility, a vehicle storage or staging space may be provided for incident response and emergency vehicles (for example, tow trucks and fire apparatus) so that these vehicles can respond quickly to road user incidents. Guidance: If used, an incident response and emergency-vehicle storage area should not extend into any portion of the buffer space.
Page 6C-6
2003 Edition
Merging Taper
Shifting Taper
1/2 L
Shifting Taper
1/2 L
1/2 L
Shifting Taper
2003 Edition
Page 6C-7
Speed* (km/h)
Distance
Speed* (mph)
Distance (ft)
(m)
20 25 30 35 40 45 50 55 60 65 70 75
115 155 200 250 305 360 425 495 570 645 730 820
* Posted speed, off-peak 85th-percentile speed prior to work starting, or the anticipated operating speed
Guidance: The appropriate taper length (L) should be determined using the criteria shown in Tables 6C-3 and 6C-4. The maximum distance in meters (feet) between devices in a taper should not exceed 0.2 times the speed limit in km/h (1.0 times the speed limit in mph). Support: A merging taper requires the longest distance because drivers are required to merge into common road space. Guidance: A merging taper should be long enough to enable merging drivers to have adequate advance warning and sufficient length to adjust their speeds and merge into a single lane before the end of the transition. Support: A shifting taper is used when a lateral shift is needed. When more space is available, a longer than minimum taper distance can be beneficial. Changes in alignment can also be accomplished by using horizontal curves designed for normal highway speeds. Guidance: A shifting taper should have a length of approximately 0.5 L (see Tables 6C-3 and 6C-4). Support: A shoulder taper may be beneficial on a high-speed roadway where shoulders are part of the activity area and are closed, or when improved shoulders might be mistaken as a driving lane. In these instances, the same type, but abbreviated, closure procedures used on a normal portion of the roadway can be used. Guidance: If used, shoulder tapers should have a length of approximately 0.33 L (see Tables 6C-3 and 6C-4). If a shoulder is used as a travel lane, either through practice or during a TTC activity, a normal merging or shifting taper should be used.
Sect. 6C.08
Page 6C-8
2003 Edition
Table 6C-3. Taper Length Criteria for Temporary Traffic Control Zones
Type of Taper
Merging Taper Shifting Taper Shoulder Taper One-Lane, Two-Way Traffic Taper Downstream Taper
L = WS
Where: L = taper length in meters (feet) W = width of offset in meters (feet) S = posted speed limit, or off-peak 85th-percentile speed prior to work starting, or the anticipated operating speed in km/h (mph)
Option: A downstream taper may be useful in termination areas to provide a visual cue to the driver that access is available back into the original lane or path that was closed. Guidance: When used, a downstream taper should have a length of approximately 30 m (100 ft) per lane with devices placed at a spacing of approximately 6.1 m (20 ft). Support: The one-lane, two-way taper is used in advance of an activity area that occupies part of a two-way roadway in such a way that a portion of the road is used alternately by traffic in each direction. Guidance: Traffic should be controlled by a flagger or temporary traffic control signal (if sight distance is limited), or a STOP or YIELD sign. A short taper having a maximum length of 30 m (100 ft) with channelizing devices at approximately 6.1 m (20 ft) spacings should be used to guide traffic into the one-way section. Support: An example of a one-lane, two-way traffic taper is shown in Figure 6C-3.
2003 Edition
Page 6C-9
Flagger
Work Space
Buffer Space (longitudinal) is used to position the taper in advance of the curve One-Lane, Two-Way Traffic Taper 15 to 30 m (50 to 100 ft)
Flagger
Sect. 6C.09
Page 6C-10
2003 Edition
Support: A diversion is a temporary rerouting of road users onto a temporary highway or alignment placed around the work area.
2003 Edition
Page 6C-11
Section 6C.14 Temporary Traffic Control Signal Method of One-Lane, Two-Way Traffic Control
Option: Traffic control signals may be used to control vehicular traffic movements in one-lane, two-way TTC zones (see Figure 6H-12 and Chapter 4G).
Section 6C.15 Stop or Yield Control Method of One-Lane, Two-Way Traffic Control
Option: STOP or YIELD signs may be used to control traffic on low-volume roads at a one-lane, two-way TTC zone when drivers are able to see the other end of the one-lane, two-way operation and have sufficient visibility of approaching vehicles. Guidance: If the STOP or YIELD sign is installed for only one direction, then the STOP or YIELD sign should face road users who are driving on the side of the roadway that is closed for the work activity area.
2003 Edition
Page 6D-1
CHAPTER 6D. PEDESTRIAN AND WORKER SAFETY Section 6D.01 Pedestrian Considerations
Support: Whenever the acronym TTC is used in this Chapter, it refers to temporary traffic control. Standard: The needs and control of all road users (motorists, bicyclists, and pedestrians within the highway, including persons with disabilities in accordance with the Americans with Disabilities Act of 1990 (ADA), Title II, Paragraph 35.130) through a TTC zone shall be an essential part of highway construction, utility work, maintenance operations, and the management of traffic incidents. Support: A wide range of pedestrians might be affected by TTC zones, including the young, elderly, and people with disabilities such as hearing, visual, or mobility. These pedestrians need a clearly delineated and usable travel path. Considerations for pedestrians with disabilities are addressed in Section 6D.02. The most desirable way to provide information to pedestrians with visual disabilities that is equivalent to visual signage for notification of sidewalk closures is a speech message provided by an audible information device. Devices that provide speech messages in response to passive pedestrian actuation are the most desirable. Other devices that continuously emit a message, or that emit a message in response to use of a pushbutton, are also acceptable. Signage information can also be transmitted to personal receivers, but currently such receivers are not likely to be carried or used by pedestrians with visual disabilities in TTC zones. Audible information devices might not be needed if detectable channelizing devices make an alternate route of travel evident to pedestrians with visual disabilities. Guidance: If a pushbutton is used to provide equivalent TTC information to pedestrians with visual disabilities, the pushbutton should be equipped with a locator tone to notify pedestrians with visual disabilities that a special accommodation is available, and to help them locate the pushbutton. Standard: The various TTC provisions for pedestrian and worker safety set forth in Part 6 shall be applied by knowledgeable (for example, trained and/or certified) persons after appropriate evaluation and engineering judgment. Advance notification of sidewalk closures shall be provided to the maintaining agency. Where pedestrians with visual disabilities normally use the closed sidewalk, a barrier that is detectable by a person with a visual disability traveling with the aid of a long cane shall be placed across the full width of the closed sidewalk. Support: It must be recognized that pedestrians are reluctant to retrace their steps to a prior intersection for a crossing or to add distance or out-of-the-way travel to a destination. Guidance: Adequate provisions should be made for persons with disabilities as determined by an engineering study or by engineering judgment. Because printed signs and surface delineation are not usable by pedestrians with visual disabilities, blocked routes, alternate crossings, and sign and signal information should be communicated to pedestrians with visual disabilities by providing audible information devices, accessible pedestrian signals, and barriers and channelizing devices that are detectable to pedestrians traveling with the aid of a long cane or who have low vision. The following three items should be considered when planning for pedestrians in TTC zones: A. Pedestrians should not be led into conflicts with work site vehicles, equipment, and operations. B. Pedestrians should not be led into conflicts with vehicles moving through or around the work site. C. Pedestrians should be provided with a reasonably safe, convenient, and accessible path that replicates as nearly as practical the most desirable characteristics of the existing sidewalk(s) or footpath(s). Where pedestrians who have visual disabilities encounter work sites that require them to cross the roadway to find an accessible route, instructions should be provided using an audible information device. Accessible pedestrian signals (see Section 4E.06) with accessible pedestrian detectors (see Section 4E.09) might be needed to enable pedestrians with visual disabilities to cross wide or heavily traveled roadways. A pedestrian route should not be severed and/or moved for nonconstruction activities such as parking for vehicles and equipment.
Sect. 6D.01
Page 6D-2
2003 Edition
Consideration should be made to separate pedestrian movements from both work site activity and vehicular traffic. Unless a reasonably safe route that does not involve crossing the roadway can be provided, pedestrians should be appropriately directed with advance signing that encourages them to cross to the opposite side of the roadway. In urban and suburban areas with high vehicular traffic volumes, these signs should be placed at intersections (rather than midblock locations) so that pedestrians are not confronted with midblock work sites that will induce them to attempt skirting the work site or making a midblock crossing. Support: Figures 6H-28 and 6H-29 show typical TTC device usage and techniques for pedestrian movement through work zones. Guidance: When pedestrian movement through or around a work site is necessary, a separate usable footpath should be provided. If the previous pedestrian facility was accessible to pedestrians with disabilities, the footpath provided during temporary traffic control should also be accessible. There should not be any abrupt changes in grade or terrain that could cause a tripping hazard or could be a barrier to wheelchair use. Barriers and channelizing devices should be detectable to pedestrians who have visual disabilities (see Section 6F.68). Option: Whenever it is feasible, closing off the work site from pedestrian intrusion may be preferable to channelizing pedestrian traffic along the site with TTC devices. Support: Maintaining a detectable, channelized pedestrian route is much more useful to pedestrians who have visual disabilities than closing a walkway and providing audible directions to an alternate route involving additional crossings and a return to the original route. Braille is not useful in conveying such information because it is difficult to find. Audible instructions might be provided, but the extra distance and additional street crossings might add complexity to a trip. Guidance: Fencing should not create sight distance restrictions for road users. Fences should not be constructed of materials that would be hazardous if impacted by vehicles. Wooden railing, fencing, and similar systems placed immediately adjacent to motor vehicle traffic should not be used as substitutes for crashworthy temporary traffic barriers. Standard: TTC devices used to delineate a TTC zone pedestrian walkway shall be crashworthy and, when struck by vehicles, present a minimum threat to pedestrians, workers, and occupants of impacting vehicles. Guidance: Ballast for TTC devices should be kept to the minimum amount needed and should be mounted low to prevent penetration of the vehicle windshield. Movement by work vehicles and equipment across designated pedestrian paths should be minimized and, when necessary, should be controlled by flaggers or TTC. Staging or stopping of work vehicles or equipment along the side of pedestrian paths should be avoided, since it encourages movement of workers, equipment, and materials across the pedestrian path. Access to the work space by workers and equipment across pedestrian walkways should be minimized because the access often creates unacceptable changes in grade, and rough or muddy terrain, and pedestrians will tend to avoid these areas by attempting nonintersection crossings where no curb ramps are available. Option: A canopied walkway may be used to protect pedestrians from falling debris, and to provide a covered passage for pedestrians. Guidance: Covered walkways should be sturdily constructed and adequately lighted for nighttime use. When pedestrian and vehicle paths are rerouted to a closer proximity to each other, consideration should be given to separating them by a temporary traffic barrier. If a temporary traffic barrier is used to shield pedestrians, it should be designed to accommodate site conditions.
Sect. 6D.01
2003 Edition
Page 6D-3
Support: Depending on the possible vehicular speed and angle of impact, temporary traffic barriers might deflect upon impact by an errant vehicle. Guidance for locating and designing temporary traffic barriers can be found in Chapter 9 of AASHTOs Roadside Design Guide (see Section 1A.11). Standard: Short intermittent segments of temporary traffic barrier shall not be used because they nullify the containment and redirective capabilities of the temporary traffic barrier, increase the potential for serious injury both to vehicle occupants and pedestrians, and encourage the presence of blunt, leading ends. All upstream leading ends that are present shall be appropriately flared or protected with properly installed and maintained crashworthy cushions. Adjacent temporary traffic barrier segments shall be properly connected in order to provide the overall strength required for the temporary traffic barrier to perform properly. Normal vertical curbing shall not be used as a substitute for temporary traffic barriers when temporary traffic barriers are clearly needed. Option Temporary traffic barriers or longitudinal channelizing devices may be used to discourage pedestrians from unauthorized movements into the work space. They may also be used to inhibit conflicts with vehicular traffic by minimizing the possibility of midblock crossings. Support: A major concern for pedestrians is urban and suburban building construction encroaching onto the contiguous sidewalks, which forces pedestrians off the curb into direct conflict with moving vehicles. Guidance: If a significant potential exists for vehicle incursions into the pedestrian path, pedestrians should be rerouted or temporary traffic barriers should be installed. Support: TTC devices, jersey barriers, and wood or chainlink fencing with a continuous detectable edging can satisfactorily delineate a pedestrian path. Guidance: Tape, rope, or plastic chain strung between devices are not detectable, do not comply with the design standards in the Americans with Disabilities Act Accessibility Guidelines for Buildings and Facilities (ADAAG) (see Section 1A.11), and should not be used as a control for pedestrian movements. The extent of pedestrian needs should be determined through engineering judgment for each TTC zone situation. In general, pedestrian routes should be preserved in urban and commercial suburban areas. Alternative routing should be discouraged. The highway agency in charge of the TTC zone should regularly inspect the activity area so that effective pedestrian TTC is maintained.
Page 6D-4
2003 Edition
A. Provisions for continuity of accessible paths for pedestrians should be incorporated into the TTC process. Pedestrians should be provided with a reasonably safe, convenient, and accessible path that replicates as much as practical the desirable characteristics of the existing pedestrian facilities. B. Access to temporary transit stops should be provided. C. Blocked routes, alternate crossings, and sign and signal information should be communicated to pedestrians with visual disabilities by providing devices such as audible information devices, accessible pedestrian signals, or barriers and channelizing devices that are detectable to the pedestrians traveling with the aid of a long cane or who have low vision. Where pedestrian traffic is detoured to a TTC signal, engineering judgment should be used to determine if pedestrian signals or accessible pedestrian signals should be considered for crossings along an alternate route. D. When channelization is used to delineate a pedestrian pathway, a continuous detectable edging should be provided throughout the length of the facility such that pedestrians using a long cane can follow it. These detectable edgings should adhere to the provisions of Section 6F.68. E. A smooth, continuous hard surface should be provided throughout the entire length of the temporary pedestrian facility. There should be no curbs or abrupt changes in grade or terrain that could cause tripping or be a barrier to wheelchair use. The geometry and alignment of the facility should meet the applicable requirements of the Americans with Disabilities Act Accessibility Guidelines for Buildings and Facilities (ADAAG) (see Section 1A.11). F. The width of the existing pedestrian facility should be provided for the temporary facility if practical. Traffic control devices and other construction materials and features should not intrude into the usable width of the sidewalk, temporary pathway, or other pedestrian facility. When it is not possible to maintain a minimum width of 1500 mm (60 in) throughout the entire length of the pedestrian pathway, a 1500 x 1500 mm (60 x 60 in) passing space should be provided at least every 60 m (200 ft), to allow individuals in wheelchairs to pass. G. Signs and other devices mounted lower than 2.1 m (7 ft) above the temporary pedestrian pathway should not project more than 100 mm (4 in) into accessible pedestrian facilities.
2003 Edition
Page 6D-5
F. Worker Safety Planninga competent person designated by the employer should conduct a basic hazard assessment for the work site and job classifications required in the activity area. This safety professional should determine whether engineering, administrative, or personal protection measures should be implemented. This plan should be in accordance with the Occupational Safety and Health Act of 1970, as amended, General Duty Clause Section 5(a)(1) - Public Law 91-596, 84 Stat. 1590, December 29, 1970, as amended, and with the requirement to assess worker risk exposures for each job site and job classification, as per 29 CFR 1926.20 (b)(2) of Occupational Safety and Health Administration Regulations, General Safety and Health Provisions (see Section 1A.11). Option: The following are additional elements of TTC management that may be considered to improve worker safety: A. Shadow Vehiclein the case of mobile and constantly moving operations, such as pothole patching and striping operations, a shadow vehicle, equipped with appropriate lights and warning signs, may be used to protect the workers from impacts by errant vehicles. The shadow vehicle may be equipped with a rear-mounted impact attenuator. B. Road Closureif alternate routes are available to handle road users, the road may be closed temporarily. This may also facilitate project completion and thus further reduce worker vulnerability. C. Law Enforcement Usein highly vulnerable work situations, particularly those of relatively short duration, law enforcement units may be stationed to heighten the awareness of passing vehicular traffic and to improve safety through the TTC zone. D. Lightingfor nighttime work, the TTC zone and approaches may be lighted. E. Special Devicesthese include rumble strips, changeable message signs, hazard identification beacons, flags, and warning lights. Intrusion warning devices may be used to alert workers to the approach of errant vehicles. Support: Judicious use of the special devices described in Item E above might be helpful for certain difficult TTC situations, but misuse or overuse of special devices or techniques might lessen their effectiveness.
Sect. 6D.03
2003 Edition
Page 6E-1
Page 6E-2
2003 Edition
A. Two white or red lights, one centered vertically above and one centered vertically below the STOP legend; and/or two white or yellow lights, one centered vertically above and one centered vertically below the SLOW legend; or B. Two white or red lights, one centered horizontally on each side of the STOP legend; and/or two white or yellow lights, one centered horizontally on each side of the SLOW legend; or C. One white or red light centered below the STOP legend; and/or one white or yellow light centered below the SLOW legend; or D. A series of eight or more small white or red lights no larger than 6 mm (0.25 in) in diameter along the outer edge of the paddle, arranged in an octagonal pattern at the eight corners of the border of the STOP face; and/or a series of eight or more small white or yellow lights no larger than 6 mm (0.25 in) in diameter along the outer edge of the paddle, arranged in a diamond pattern along the border of the SLOW face. E. A series of white lights forming the shapes of the letters in the legend. Standard: If flashing lights are used on the STOP face of the paddle, their colors shall be all white or all red. If flashing lights are used on the SLOW face of the paddle, their colors shall be all white or all yellow. If more than eight flashing lights are used, the lights shall be arranged such that they clearly convey the octagonal shape of the STOP face of the paddle and/or the diamond shape of the SLOW face of the paddle. If flashing lights are used on the STOP/SLOW paddle, the flash rate shall be at least 50, but not more than 60, flashes per minute. Flags, when used, shall be a minimum of 600 mm (24 in) square, made of a good grade of red material, and securely fastened to a staff that is approximately 900 mm (36 in) in length. Guidance: The free edge of a flag should be weighted so the flag will hang vertically, even in heavy winds. Standard: When used at nighttime, flags shall be retroreflectorized red.
2003 Edition
Page 6E-3
TO STOP TRAFFIC
Sect. 6E.04
Page 6E-4
2003 Edition
Speed* (mph) 20 25 30 35 40 45 50 55 60 65 70 75
Distance (ft) 115 155 200 250 305 360 425 495 570 645 730 820
* Posted speed, off-peak 85th-percentile speed prior to work starting, or the anticipated operating speed
Sect. 6E.05
2003 Edition
Page 6F-1
CHAPTER 6F. TEMPORARY TRAFFIC CONTROL ZONE DEVICES Section 6F.01 Types of Devices
Support: Whenever the acronym TTC is used in this Chapter, it refers to temporary traffic control. Standard: The needs and control of all road users (motorists, bicyclists, and pedestrians within the highway, including persons with disabilities in accordance with the Americans with Disabilities Act of 1990 (ADA), Title II, Paragraph 35.130) through a TTC zone shall be an essential part of highway construction, utility work, maintenance operations, and the management of traffic incidents. Guidance: The design and application of TTC devices used in TTC zones should consider the needs of all road users (motorists, bicyclists, and pedestrians), including those with disabilities. Support: FHWA policy requires that all roadside appurtenances such as traffic barriers, barrier terminals and crash cushions, bridge railings, sign and light pole supports, and work zone hardware used on the National Highway System meet the crashworthy performance criteria contained in the National Cooperative Highway Research Program (NCHRP) Report 350, Recommended Procedures for the Safety Performance Evaluation of Highway Features. The FHWA website at http://safety.fhwa.dot.gov/programs/roadside_hardware.htm identifies all such hardware and includes copies of FHWA acceptance letters for each of them. In the case of proprietary items, links are provided to manufacturers' websites as a source of detailed information on specific devices. The website also contains an Ask the Experts section where questions on roadside design issues can be addressed. State Departments of Transportation and local agencies might also have expanded the NCHRP Report 350 crashworthy criteria to apply to other highways in addition to the National Highway System. Crashworthiness and crash testing information on devices described in Part 6 are found in AASHTOs Roadside Design Guide (see Section 1A.11). As stated in Definition 17 in Section 1A.13, crashworthy is a characteristic of a roadside appurtenance that has been successfully crash tested in accordance with a national standard such as the National Cooperative Highway Research Program Report 350, Recommended Procedures for the Safety Performance Evaluation of Highway Features. Standard: Traffic control devices shall be defined as all signs, signals, markings, and other devices used to regulate, warn, or guide road users, placed on, over, or adjacent to a street, highway, pedestrian facility, or bikeway by authority of a public body or official having jurisdiction. All traffic control devices used on street and highway construction, maintenance, utility, or incident management operations shall conform to the applicable provisions of this Manual.
Page 6F-2
2003 Edition
Option: Warning and guide signs used for TCC incident management situations (see Chapter 6I) may have a black legend and border on a fluorescent pink background. Existing warning signs that are still applicable may remain in place. In order to maintain the systematic use of yellow or fluorescent yellow-green background for pedestrian, bicycle, and school warning signs in a jurisdiction, the yellow or fluorescent yellow-green background for pedestrian, bicycle, and school warning signs may be used in TTC zones. Standard orange flags or flashing warning lights may be used in conjunction with signs. Standard: When standard orange flags or flashing warning lights are used in conjunction with signs, they shall not block the sign face. The sizes for TTC signs shall be as shown in Table 6F-1. Option: The dimensions of signs shown in Table 6F-1 may be increased wherever necessary for greater legibility or emphasis, such as on freeways and expressways. Standard: Deviations from standard sizes as prescribed herein shall be in 150 mm (6 in) increments. Support: Sign design details are contained in the Standard Highway Signs book (see Section 1A.11). Standard: All signs used at night shall be either retroreflective with a material that has a smooth, sealed outer surface or illuminated to show the same shape and similar color both day and night. The requirement for sign illumination shall not be considered to be satisfied by street, highway, or strobe lighting. Option: Sign illumination may be either internal or external. Signs may be made of rigid or flexible material.
2003 Edition
Page 6F-3
MUTCD Code
R1-1 R1-2 R1-2a R2-1 R2-1 R2-6 R3-1,2,3, 4,18 R3-5 R3-6 R3-7 R3-8 R4-1 R4-2 R4-7 R4-9 R5-1 R5-1a R6-1 R6-2 R8-3a R9-8 R9-9 R9-10 R9-11 R9-11a R11-2 R11-3a,4 R12-1,2 R12-5 W1-1,2,3,4 W1-4b,4c
Conventional Road
750 x 750 (30 x 30) 900 x 900 x 900 (36 x 36 x 36) 1200 x 600 (48 x 24) 600 x 750 (24 x 30) 600 x 900 (24 x 36) 600 x 600 (24 x 24) 600 x 600 (24 x 24) 750 x 900 (30 x 36) 750 x 900 (30 x 36) 750 x 750 (30 x 30) 750 x 750 (30 x 30) 600 x 750 (24 x 30) 600 x 750 (24 x 30) 600 x 750 (24 x 30) 600 x 750 (24 x 30) 750 x 750 (30 x 30) 900 x 600 (36 x 24) 900 x 300 (36 x 12) 450 x 600 (18 x 24) 600 x 600 (24 x 24) 900 x 450 (36 x 18) 600 x 300 (24 x 12) 600 x 300 (24 x 12) 600 x 300 (24 x 12) 600 x 300 (24 x 12) 1200 x 750 (48 x 30) 1500 x 750 (60 X 30) 600 x 750 (24 x 30) 750 x 900 (30 x 36) 750 x 750 (30 x 30) 900 x 900 (36 x 36)
Expressway
Freeway
Minimum
Oversized
Sect. 6F.03
Page 6F-4
2003 Edition
MUTCD Code
W1-6 W1-8 W3-1 W3-2 W3-3 W3-4 W3-5 W3-5a W4-1,5 W4-2 W4-3,6 W4-7 W5-1 W5-2 W5-3 W5-4 W6-1 W6-2 W6-3 W6-4 W7-1 W8-1 W8-2 W8-3 W8-4 W8-5 W8-6 W8-7 W8-8 W8-9 W8-9a
Conventional Road
1200 x 600 (48 x 24) 900 x 1200 (36 x 48) 900 x 900 (36 x 36) 900 x 900 (36 x 36) 900 x 900 (36 x 36) 900 x 900 (36 x 36) 900 x 900 (36 x 36) 900 x 900 (36 x 36) 900 x 900 (36 x 36) 900 x 900 (36 x 36) 900 x 900 (36 x 36) 900 x 900 (36 x 36) 900 x 900 (36 x 36) 900 x 900 (36 x 36) 900 x 900 (36 x 36) 900 x 900 (36 x 36) 900 x 900 (36 x 36) 900 x 900 (36 x 36) 750 x 750 (30 x 30) 300 x 450 (12 x 18) 750 x 750 (30 x 30) 750 x 750 (30 x 30) 750 x 750 (30 x 30) 750 x 750 (30 x 30) 750 x 750 (30 x 30) 750 x 750 (30 x 30) 750 x 750 (30 x 30) 750 x 750 (30 x 30) 750 x 750 (30 x 30) 750 x 750 (30 x 30) 750 x 750 (30 x 30)
Expressway
Freeway
Minimum
Oversized
Sect. 6F.03
2003 Edition
Page 6F-5
MUTCD Code
W8-11 W8-12 W9-1,2 W9-3 W9-3a W10-1 W11-10 W12-1 W12-2 W13-1 W13-4 W14-3 W16-2 W20-1 W20-2 W20-3 W20-4 W20-5,5a W20-7a W21-1 W21-1a W21-2 W21-3 W21-5 W21-5a W21-5b W21-6 W21-7 W22-1 W22-2 W22-3
Conventional Road
900 x 900 (36 x 36) 900 x 900 (36 x 36) 900 x 900 (36 x 36) 900 x 900 (36 x 36) 900 x 900 (36 x 36) 900 dia. (36 dia.) 750 x 750 30 x 30 600 x 600 (24 x 24) 900 x 900 (36 x 36) 450 x 450 or 600 x 600 (18 x 18 or 24 x 24) 900 x 900 (36 x 36) 900 x 1200 x 1200 (36 x 48 x 48) 600 x 450 (24 x 18) 900 x 900 (36 x 36) 900 x 900 (36 x 36) 900 x 900 (36 x 36) 900 x 900 (36 x 36) 900 x 900 (36 x 36) 900 x 900 (36 x 36) 900 x 900 (36 x 36) 900 x 900 (36 x 36) 750 x 750 (30 x 30) 900 x 900 (36 x 36) 750 x 750 (30 x 30) 750 x 750 (30 x 30) 900 x 900 (36 x 36) 750 x 750 (30 x 30) 900 x 900 (36 x 36) 1200 x 1200 (48 x 48) 1050 x 900 (42 x 36) 1050 x 900 (42 x 36)
Expressway
Freeway
Minimum
Oversized
Sect. 6F.03
Page 6F-6
2003 Edition
MUTCD Code
W23-1 W24-1 W24-1a W24-1b G20-1 G20-2 G20-4 E5-2 E5-2a E5-3 M4-8 M4-8a M4-8b M4-9 M4-9a M4-9b M4-9c M4-10
Conventional Road
1200 x 600 (48 x 24) 900 x 900 (36 x 36) 900 x 900 (36 x 36) 900 x 900 (36 x 36) 900 x 450 (36 x 18) 900 x 450 (36 x 18) 900 x 450 (36 x 18) 1200 x 900 (48 x 36) 1200 x 900 (48 x 36) 1200 x 900 (48 x 36) 600 x 300 (24 x 12) 600 x 450 (24 x 18) 600 x 300 (24 x 12) 750 x 600 (30 x 24) 750 x 600 (30 x 24) 750 x 600 (30 x 24) 750 x 600 (30 x 24) 1200 x 450 (48 x 18)
Expressway
Freeway
Minimum
Oversized
Notes: 1. Larger signs may be used wherever necessary for greater legibility or emphasis. 2. Dimensions are shown in millimeters followed by inches in parentheses and are shown as width x height. 3. For freeways and expressways, the size of diamond shaped TTC warning signs shall be a minimum of 1200 x 1200 mm (48 x 48 in).
Sect. 6F.03
2003 Edition
Page 6F-7
OR 1.8 to 3.7 m (6 to 12 ft) Not less than 1.5 m (5 ft) 1.8 to 3.7 m (6 to 12 ft) OR Not less than 1.8 m (6 ft) Not less than 1.2 m (4 ft)
Paved Shoulder RURAL DISTRICT RURAL DISTRICT WITH ADVISORY SPEED PLATE
OR
OR
Option: A 2.1 m (7 ft) mounting height may be used in rural areas for increased visibility. The height to the bottom of a secondary sign mounted below another sign may be 0.3 m (1 ft) less than the appropriate height specified above. Guidance: Except as noted in the Option, signs mounted on portable supports should not be used for a duration of more than 3 days. Option: The R9-8 through R9-11a series, R11 series, W1-6 through W1-8 series, M4-10, E5-1, or other similar type signs (see Figures 6F-3, 6F-4, and 6F-5) may be used on portable supports for longer than 3 days. Support: Methods of mounting signs other than on posts are illustrated in Figure 6F-2. Guidance: Signs mounted on Type III barricades should not cover more than 50 percent of the top two rails or 33 percent of the total area of the three rails.
Sect. 6F.03
Page 6F-8
2003 Edition
0.3 m (1 ft) MIN. above the traveled way PORTABLE AND TEMPORARY MOUNTINGS
Flasher (optional)
BARRICADES
Sect. 6F.03
2003 Edition
Page 6F-9
R1-1
R1-2
R1-2a
R2-1
R2-6
R3-1
R3-2
R3-3
R3-4
R3-5
R3-6
R3-7
R3-8
R3-18
R4-1
R4-2
R4-7
R4-9
R5-1
R5-1a
R6-1
R6-2
R8-3a
R9-8
Sect. 6F.03
Page 6F-10
2003 Edition
R9-9
R9-10
R9-11
R9-11a
R11-2
OR
R11-3a
R11-4
OR
OR
OR
R12-1
R12-2
R12-5
Standard: Sign supports shall be crashworthy. Large signs having an area exceeding 5 square meters (50 square feet) that are installed on multiple breakaway posts shall be mounted a minimum of 2.1 m (7 ft) above the ground. Signs mounted on barricades, or other portable supports, shall be no less than 0.3 m (1 ft) above the traveled way. Option: For mobile operations, a sign may be mounted on a work vehicle, a shadow vehicle, or a trailer stationed in advance of the TTC zone or moving along with it. The work vehicle, the shadow vehicle, or the trailer may or may not have an impact attenuator. Guidance: Unshielded sign posts placed in the clear zone should yield or breakaway upon impact to minimize obstructions to road users. Support: If alterations are made to specific traffic control device supports that have been successfully crash tested in accordance with NCHRP Report 350 (see Section 1A.11), the altered supports might not be considered to be crashworthy.
Sect. 6F.03
2003 Edition
Page 6F-11
Page 6F-12
2003 Edition
Option: In urban areas, the legend ROAD (STREET) CLOSED TO THRU TRAFFIC (R11-4) or ROAD CLOSED, LOCAL TRAFFIC ONLY may be used. The words BRIDGE OUT (or BRIDGE CLOSED) may be substituted for the words ROAD (STREET) CLOSED on the R11-3a or R11-4 sign where applicable.
2003 Edition
Page 6F-13
Guidance: Special regulatory signs should conform to the general requirements of color, shape, and alphabet size and series. The sign message should be brief, legible, and clear. Support: Section 2B.17 contains information regarding the use of FINES HIGHER signs (see Figure 6F-3, Sheet 1 of 2).
Page 6F-14
2003 Edition
2003 Edition
Page 6F-15
W1-1
W1-2
W1-3
W1-4
W1-4b
W1-4c
W1-6
W1-8
W3-1
W3-2
OR
W3-3
W3-4
W3-5
W3-5a
W4-1
W4-2
W4-3
W4-7
W5-1
W5-2
W5-3
W5-4
W6-1
W6-2
Sect. 6F.20
Page 6F-16
2003 Edition
W6-3
W6-4
W7-1
W8-1
W8-2
W8-3
W8-4
W8-5
W8-6
W8-7
W8-8
W8-9
W8-9a
W8-11
W8-12
W9-1
W9-2
W9-3
W9-3a
W10-1
W11-10
OR OR
W12-1
Sect. 6F.20
W12-2
W13-1
2003 Edition
Page 6F-17
OR
W13-4
W14-3
W20-1
OR
OR
W20-2
W20-3*
OR
OR
W20-4
W20-5
OR
W20-5a
W20-7a W16-2
W21-1a
W21-2
W21-3
W21-5
W21-5a
* An optional STREET CLOSED word message sign is shown in the Standard Highway Signs book.
Sect. 6F.20
Page 6F-18
2003 Edition
OR
W21-5b
W21-6
W21-7
W22-1
W22-2
W22-3
W23-1
W24-1
W24-1a
2003 Edition
Page 6F-19
Section 6F.28 EXIT OPEN, EXIT CLOSED, EXIT ONLY Signs (E5-2, E5-2a, E5-3)
Option: An EXIT OPEN (E5-2), EXIT CLOSED (E5-2a), or EXIT ONLY (E5-3) sign (see Figure 6F-5) may be used to supplement other warning signs where work is being conducted in the vicinity of an exit ramp and where the exit maneuver for motor vehicle traffic using the ramp is different from the normal condition. Guidance: When an exit ramp is closed, an EXIT CLOSED panel with a black legend and border on an orange background should be placed diagonally across the interchange/intersection guide signs.
E5-2
E5-2a
E5-3
M4-8
M4-8a
M4-8b
M4-9
M4-9a
M4-9b
M4-9c
M4-10
Sect. 6F.24 to 6F.29
Page 6F-20
2003 Edition
Option: A distance legend may be displayed on a supplemental plaque below the Flagger sign. The sign may be used with appropriate legends or in conjunction with other warning signs, such as the BE PREPARED TO STOP (W3-4) sign (see Figure 6F-4, Sheet 1 of 4). The FLAGGER (W20-7) word message sign with distance legends may be substituted for the Flagger (W20-7a) symbol sign. Standard: The Flagger sign shall be removed, covered, or turned away from road users when the flagging operations are not occurring.
2003 Edition
Page 6F-21
Option: The Shoulder Work sign may be used in advance of the point on a nonlimited access highway where there is shoulder work. It may be used singly or in combination with a ROAD WORK NEXT X km (MILES) or ROAD WORK AHEAD sign. Guidance: On freeways and expressways, the RIGHT (LEFT) SHOULDER CLOSED XXX m (FT) or AHEAD (W21-5b) sign followed by RIGHT (LEFT) SHOULDER CLOSED (W21-5a) sign should be used in advance of the point where the shoulder work occurs and should be preceded by a ROAD WORK AHEAD sign.
Section 6F.40 TURN OFF 2-WAY RADIO AND CELL PHONE Sign (W22-2)
Standard: The TURN OFF 2-WAY RADIO AND CELL PHONE (W22-2) sign (see Figure 6F-4, Sheet 4 of 4) shall follow the BLASTING ZONE AHEAD sign and shall be placed at least 300 m (1,000 ft) before the beginning of the blasting zone.
Page 6F-22
2003 Edition
2003 Edition
Page 6F-23
and border on an orange background. The sign shall be at least 600 x 600 mm (24 x 24 in) in size when used with a sign that is 900 x 900 mm (36 x 36 in) or larger. Except in emergencies, an Advisory Speed plaque shall not be mounted until the recommended speed is determined by the highway agency.
Page 6F-24
2003 Edition
Section 6F.53 Detour Signs (M4-8, M4-8a, M4-8b, M4-9, M4-9a, M4-9b, M4-9c, and M4-10)
Standard: Each detour shall be adequately marked with standard temporary route signs and destination signs. Option: Detour signs in TTC incident management situations may have a black legend and border on a fluorescent pink background. The Detour Arrow (M4-10) sign (see Figure 6F-5) may be used where a detour route has been established. The DETOUR (M4-8) sign (see Figure 6F-5) may be mounted at the top of a route sign assembly to mark a temporary route that detours from a highway, bypasses a section closed by a TTC zone, and rejoins the highway beyond the TTC zone. Guidance: The Detour Arrow (M4-10) sign should normally be mounted just below the ROAD CLOSED (R11-2, R11-3a, or R11-4) sign. The Detour Arrow sign should include a horizontal arrow pointed to the right or left as required. The DETOUR (M4-9) sign (see Figure 6F-5) should be used for unnumbered highways, for emergency situations, for periods of short durations, or where, over relatively short distances, road users are guided along the detour and back to the desired highway without route signs. A Street Name sign should be placed above, or the street name should be incorporated into, a DETOUR (M4-9) sign to indicate the name of the street being detoured. Option: The END DETOUR (M4-8a) or END (M4-8b) sign (see Figure 6F-5) may be used to indicate that the detour has ended. Guidance: When the END DETOUR sign is used on a numbered highway, the sign should be mounted above a sign after the end of the detour. The Pedestrian/Bicycle Detour (M4-9a) sign (see Figure 6F-5) should be used where a pedestrian/bicycle detour route has been established because of the closing of a pedestrian/bicycle facility to through traffic. Standard: If used, the Pedestrian/Bicycle Detour sign shall have an arrow pointing in the appropriate direction. Option: The arrow on a Pedestrian/Bicycle Detour sign may be on the sign face or on a supplemental plaque. The Pedestrian Detour (M4-9b) sign or Bicycle Detour (M4-9c) sign (see Figure 6F-5) may be used where a pedestrian or bicycle detour route (not both) has been established because of the closing of the pedestrian or bicycle facility to through traffic.
2003 Edition
Page 6F-25
Page 6F-26
2003 Edition
Standard: Portable Changeable Message signs shall automatically adjust their brightness under varying light conditions, to maintain legibility. The control system shall include a display screen upon which messages can be reviewed before being displayed on the message sign. The control system shall be capable of maintaining memory when power is unavailable. Portable Changeable Message signs shall be equipped with a power source and a battery back-up to provide continuous operation when failure of the primary power source occurs. The mounting of Portable Changeable Message signs on a trailer, a large truck, or a service patrol truck shall be such that the bottom of the message sign panel shall be a minimum of 2.1 m (7 ft) above the roadway in urban areas and 1.5 m (5 ft) above the roadway in rural areas when it is in the operating mode. The text of the messages shall not scroll or travel horizontally or vertically across the face of the sign. Guidance: Portable Changeable Message signs should be used as a supplement to and not as a substitute for conventional signs and pavement markings. When Portable Changeable Message signs are used for route diversion, they should be placed far enough in advance of the diversion to allow road users ample opportunity to perform necessary lane changes, to adjust their speed, or to exit the affected highway. The Portable Changeable Message signs should be sited and aligned to provide maximum legibility. Multiple Portable Changeable Message signs should be placed on the same side of the roadway, separated from each other at distances based on Table 6C-1. Portable Changeable Message signs should be placed on the shoulder of the roadway or, if practical, further from the traveled lane. They should be delineated with retroreflective TTC devices. When Portable Changeable Message signs are not being used, they should be removed; if not removed, they should be shielded; or if the previous two options are not feasible, they should be delineated with retroreflective TTC devices. Portable Changeable Message sign trailers should be delineated on a permanent basis by affixing retroreflective material, known as conspicuity material, in a continuous line on the face of the trailer as seen by oncoming road users.
2003 Edition
Page 6F-27
II.
The following mode shall be provided: Flashing Double Arrow Move/Merge Right or Left
III.
or Caution
Panel Type A B C D
Minimum Size
Minimum Legibility Distance 0.8 km (1/2 mi) 1.2 km (3/4 mi) 1.6 km (1 mi) 0.8 km (1/2 mi)
1200 x 600 mm (48 x 24 in) 1500 x 750 mm (60 x 30 in) 2400 x 1200 mm (96 x 48 in) None*
*Length of arrow equals 1200 mm (48 in), width of arrowhead equals 600 mm (24 in)
Sect. 6F.56
Page 6F-28
2003 Edition
Standard: Type A, B, and C arrow panels shall have solid rectangular appearances. A Type D arrow panel shall conform to the shape of the arrow. All arrow panels shall be finished in nonreflective black. The arrow panel shall be mounted on a vehicle, a trailer, or other suitable support. Guidance: The minimum mounting height of an arrow panel should be 2.1 m (7 ft) from the roadway to the bottom of the panel, except on vehicle-mounted panels, which should be as high as practical. A vehicle-mounted arrow panel should be provided with remote controls. Standard: Arrow panel elements shall be capable of at least a 50 percent dimming from full brilliance. The dimmed mode shall be used for nighttime operation of arrow panels. Guidance: Full brilliance should be used for daytime operation of arrow panels. Standard: The arrow panel shall have suitable elements capable of the various operating modes. The color presented by the elements shall be yellow. Guidance: If an arrow panel consisting of a bulb matrix is used, the elements should be recess-mounted or equipped with an upper hood of not less than 180 degrees. Standard: The minimum element on-time shall be 50 percent for the flashing mode, with equal intervals of 25 percent for each sequential phase. The flashing rate shall be not less than 25 nor more than 40 flashes per minute. An arrow panel shall have the following three mode selections: A. A Flashing Arrow, Sequential Arrow, or Sequential Chevron mode; and B. A flashing Double Arrow mode; and C. A flashing Caution mode. An arrow panel in the arrow or chevron mode shall be used only for stationary or moving lane closures on multi-lane roadways. For shoulder work, blocking the shoulder, for roadside work near the shoulder, or for temporarily closing one lane on a two-lane, two-way roadway, an arrow panel shall be used only in the caution mode. Guidance: For a stationary lane closure, the arrow panel should be located on the shoulder at the beginning of the merging taper. Where the shoulder is narrow, the arrow panel should be located in the closed lane. Standard: When arrow panels are used to close multiple lanes, a separate arrow panel shall be used for each closed lane. Guidance: When arrow panels are used to close multiple lanes, if the first arrow panel is placed on the shoulder, the second arrow panel should be placed in the first closed lane at the beginning of the second merging taper (see Figure 6H-37). When the first arrow panel is placed in the first closed lane, the second arrow panel should be placed in the second closed lane at the downstream end of the second merging taper. For mobile operations where a lane is closed, the arrow panel should be located to provide adequate separation from the work operation to allow for appropriate reaction by approaching drivers. Standard: A vehicle displaying an arrow panel shall be equipped with high-intensity rotating, flashing, oscillating, or strobe lights. Arrow panel(s) shall not be used to laterally shift traffic. Option: A portable changeable message sign may be used to simulate an arrow panel display.
Sect. 6F.56
2003 Edition
Page 6F-29
Page 6F-30
2003 Edition
Option: Warning lights may be added to channelizing devices in areas with frequent fog, snow, or severe roadway curvature, or where visual distractions are present. Standard: Warning lights shall flash when placed on channelizing devices used alone or in a cluster to warn of a condition. Warning lights placed on channelizing devices used in a series to channelize road users shall be steady-burn. The retroreflective material used on channelizing devices shall have a smooth, sealed outer surface that will display a similar color day or night. Option: The name and telephone number of the highway agency, contractor, or supplier may be shown on the nonretroreflective surface of all types of channelizing devices. Standard: The letters and numbers of the name and telephone number shall be nonretroreflective and not over 50 mm (2 in) in height. Guidance: Particular attention should be given to maintaining the channelizing devices to keep them clean, visible, and properly positioned at all times. Standard: Devices that are damaged or have lost a significant amount of their retroreflectivity and effectiveness shall be replaced.
2003 Edition
Page 6F-31
75 mm (3 in)
DRUM
in )
TUBULAR MARKERS
100 to 150 mm (4 to 6 in) More than 900 mm (36 in)
1 in 00 m ) m
Retroreflective Band
(4
600 mm (24 in) MIN. 900 mm (36 in) MIN. 300 mm (12 in) MAX.
10 0
75 to 100 mm (3 to 4 in) 150 mm (6 in) 50 mm (2 in) 450 mm 100 mm (18 in) (4 in) MIN. Day and Low-Speed Roadway ( 60 km/h) ( 40 mph)
m m
(4
CONES
Note: If drums, cones, or tubular markers are used to channelize pedestrians, they shall be located such that there are no gaps between the bases of the devices, in order to create a continuous bottom, and the height of each individual drum, cone, or tubular marker shall be no less than 900 mm (36 in) to be detectable to users of long canes.
Page 6F-32
2003 Edition
45
45
TYPE I BARRICADE
TYPE II BARRICADE
600 mm (24 in)
45
* Warning lights (optional) ** Rail stripe widths shall be 150 mm (6 in), except that 100 mm (4 in) wide stripes may be used if rail lengths are less than 900 mm (36 in). The sides of barricades facing traffic shall have retroreflective rail faces.
Note: If barricades are used to channelize pedestrians, there shall be continuous detectable bottom and top rails with no gaps between individual barricades to be detectable to users of long canes. The bottom of the bottom rail shall be no higher than 150 mm (6 in) above the ground surface. The top of the top rail shall be no lower than 900 mm (36 in) above the ground surface.
Option: Tubular markers may be used effectively to divide opposing lanes of road users, divide vehicular traffic lanes when two or more lanes of moving motor vehicle traffic are kept open in the same direction, and to delineate the edge of a pavement drop off where space limitations do not allow the use of larger devices. Standard: When a noncylindrical tubular marker is used, it shall be attached to the pavement in a manner such that the width facing road users meets the minimum requirements. A tubular marker shall be attached to the pavement to display the minimum 50 mm (2 in) width to the approaching road users.
2003 Edition
Page 6F-33
Where the height of the vertical panel itself is 900 mm (36 in) or greater, a panel stripe width of 150 (6 in) shall be used. Option: Where the height of the vertical panel itself is less than 900 mm (36 in), a panel stripe width of 100 mm (4 in) may be used. Standard: Markings for vertical panels shall be alternating orange and white retroreflective stripes, sloping downward at an angle of 45 degrees in the direction vehicular traffic is to pass. Vertical panels used on freeways, expressways, and other high-speed roadways shall have a minimum of 169,000 mm2 (270 in2) retroreflective area facing vehicular traffic. Option: Where space is limited, vertical panels may be used to channelize vehicular traffic, divide opposing lanes, or replace barricades.
Page 6F-34
2003 Edition
Standard: The minimum length for Type I and Type II Barricades shall be 600 mm (24 in), and the minimum length for Type III Barricades shall be 1200 mm (48 in). Each barricade rail shall be 200 to 300 mm (8 to 12 in) wide. Barricades used on freeways, expressways, and other high-speed roadways shall have a minimum of 169,000 mm2 (270 in2) of retroreflective area facing road users. Guidance: Where barricades extend entirely across a roadway, the stripes should slope downward in the direction toward which road users must turn. Where both right and left turns are provided, the barricade stripes should slope downward in both directions from the center of the barricade or barricades. Where no turns are intended, the stripes should be positioned to slope downward toward the center of the barricade or barricades. Barricade rails should be supported in a manner that will allow them to be seen by the road user, and in a manner that provides a stable support that is not easily blown over or displaced. The width of the existing pedestrian facility should be provided for the temporary facility if practical. Traffic control devices and other construction materials and features should not intrude into the usable width of the sidewalk, temporary pathway, or other pedestrian facility. When it is not possible to maintain a minimum width of 1500 mm (60 in) throughout the entire length of the pedestrian pathway, a 1500 x 1500 mm (60 x 60 in) passing space should be provided at least every 60 m (200 ft) to allow individuals in wheelchairs to pass. Barricade rail supports should not project into pedestrian circulation routes more than 100 mm (4 in) from the support between 675 mm (27 in) and 2000 mm (80 in) from the surface as described in Section 4.4.1 of the Americans with Disabilities Act Accessibility Guidelines for Buildings and Facilities (ADAAG) (see Section 1A.11). Option: For Type I Barricades, the support may include other unstriped horizontal panels necessary to provide stability. Guidance: Barricades should be crashworthy as they are located adjacent to vehicular traffic flow and are subject to impact by errant vehicles. On high-speed expressways or in other situations where barricades may be susceptible to overturning in the wind, ballasting should be used. Option: Sandbags may be placed on the lower parts of the frame or the stays of barricades to provide the required ballast. Standard: Ballast shall not be placed on top of any striped rail. Barricades shall not be ballasted by nondeformable objects such as rocks or chunks of concrete. Ballast shall not extend into the accessible passage width of 1500 mm (60 in). Support: Type I or Type II Barricades are intended for use in situations where road user flow is maintained through the TTC zone. Option: Barricades may be used alone or in groups to mark a specific condition or they may be used in a series for channelizing road users. Type I Barricades may be used on conventional roads or urban streets. Guidance: Type II or Type III Barricades should be used on freeways and expressways or other high-speed roadways. Type III Barricades should be used to close or partially close a road. Option: Type III Barricades used at a road closure may be placed completely across a roadway or from curb to curb. Guidance: Where provision is made for access of authorized equipment and vehicles, the responsibility for Type III Barricades should be assigned to a person who will provide proper closure at the end of each work day.
Sect. 6F.63
2003 Edition
Page 6F-35
Support: When a highway is legally closed but access must still be allowed for local road users, barricades usually are not extended completely across the roadway. Standard: A sign (see Section 6F.09) shall be installed with the appropriate legend concerning permissible use by local road users. Adequate visibility of the barricades from both directions shall be provided. Option: Signs may be installed on barricades (see Section 6F.03).
Page 6F-36
2003 Edition
Option: Longitudinal channelizing barricades may be used instead of a line of cones, drums, or barricades. Longitudinal channelizing barricades may be hollow and filled with water as a ballast. Guidance: If used, longitudinal channelizing barricades should be interlocked to delineate or channelize flow including pedestrian traffic control. The interlocking barricade wall should not have gaps that allow pedestrians or vehicles to stray from the channelizing path. Support: Longitudinal channelizing barricades are often located adjacent to traffic and therefore are subject to impact by errant vehicles. Guidance: Because of their vulnerable position, longitudinal channelizing barricades should be constructed of lightweight materials and be crashworthy. Although longitudinal channelizing barricades might give the appearance of being formidable obstacles, they have not met the crashworthy requirements for temporary traffic barriers and, therefore, should not be used to shield pedestrians, including workers, from vehicle impacts or obstacles. Option: Longitudinal channelizing barricades may be used to channelize pedestrians.
2003 Edition
Page 6F-37
Guidance: Detectable pedestrian edging should be orange, white, or yellow and should match the color of the adjacent channelizing devices or traffic control devices, if any are present.
Page 6F-38
2003 Edition
Guidance: Road users should be provided pavement markings within a TTC zone comparable to the pavement markings normally maintained along such roadways, particularly at either end of the TTC zone. The intended vehicle path should be defined in day, night, and twilight periods under both wet and dry pavement conditions. The work should be planned and staged to provide for the placement and removal of the pavement markings. Markings should be provided in intermediate-term stationary work zones. Option: Removable, nonreflective, preformed tape may be used where markings need to be covered temporarily.
2003 Edition
Page 6F-39
Page 6F-40
2003 Edition
2003 Edition
Page 6F-41
Type C Steady-Burn warning lights and Type D 360-degree Steady-Burn warning lights may be used during nighttime hours to delineate the edge of the traveled way. Guidance: When used to delineate a curve, Type C and Type D 360-degree warning lights should only be used on devices on the outside of the curve, and not on the inside of the curve.
Page 6F-42
2003 Edition
I. The placement of other TTC devices; J. Parking; K. Turning restrictions; L. Pedestrians; M. The nature of adjacent land uses (such as residential or commercial); N. Legal authority; O. Signal phasing and timing requirements; P. Full-time or part-time operation; Q. Actuated, fixed-time, or manual operation; R. Power failures or other emergencies; S. Inspection and maintenance needs; T. Need for detailed placement, timing, and operation records; and U. Operation by contractors or by others. Although temporary traffic control signals can be mounted on trailers or lightweight portable supports, fixed supports offer superior resistance to displacement or damage by severe weather, vehicle impact, and vandalism. Guidance: Other TTC devices should be used to supplement temporary traffic control signals, including warning and regulatory signs, pavement markings, and channelizing devices. The design and placement of temporary traffic control signals should include interconnection to other traffic control signals along the subject roadway. Temporary traffic control signals not in use should be covered or removed.
2003 Edition
Page 6F-43
B. Closing an additional lane during off-peak periods to provide extra space for work activities without adversely impacting vehicular traffic flow; and C. Creating a temporary reversible lane, thus providing unbalanced capacity favoring the major direction of vehicular traffic flow. More specific information on the use of temporary traffic barriers is contained in Chapters 8 and 9 of AASHTOs Roadside Design Guide (see Section 1A.11).
Page 6F-44
2003 Edition
2003 Edition
Page 6G-1
CHAPTER 6G. TYPE OF TEMPORARY TRAFFIC CONTROL ZONE ACTIVITIES Section 6G.01 Typical Applications
Support: Whenever the acronym TTC is used in this Chapter, it refers to temporary traffic control. Standard: The needs and control of all road users (motorists, bicyclists, and pedestrians within the highway, including persons with disabilities in accordance with the Americans with Disabilities Act of 1990 (ADA), Title II, Paragraph 35.130) through a TTC zone shall be an essential part of highway construction, utility work, maintenance operations, and the management of traffic incidents. Support: Each TTC zone is different. Many variables, such as location of work, highway type, geometrics, vertical and horizontal alignment, intersections, interchanges, road user volumes, road vehicle mix (buses, trucks, and cars), and road user speeds affect the needs of each zone. The goal of TTC in work zones is safety with minimum disruption to road users. The key factor in promoting TTC zone safety is proper judgment. Typical applications (TAs) of TTC zones are organized according to duration, location, type of work, and highway type. Table 6H-1 is an index of these typical applications. These typical applications include the use of various TTC methods, but do not include a layout for every conceivable work situation. Guidance: Typical applications should be altered, when necessary, to fit the conditions of a particular TTC zone. Option: Other devices may be added to supplement the devices shown in the typical applications, while others may be deleted. The sign spacings and taper lengths may be increased to provide additional time or space for driver response. Support: Decisions regarding the selection of the most appropriate typical application to use as a guide for a specific TTC zone require an understanding of each situation. Although there are many ways of categorizing TTC zone applications, the four factors mentioned earlier (work duration, work location, work type, and highway type) are used to characterize the typical applications illustrated in Chapter 6H.
Page 6G-2
2003 Edition
Guidance: Inappropriate markings in long-term stationary TTC zones should be removed and replaced with temporary markings. Support: In intermediate-term stationary TTC zones, it might not be feasible or practical to use procedures or devices that would be desirable for long-term stationary temporary traffic control zones, such as altered pavement markings, temporary traffic barriers, and temporary roadways. The increased time to place and remove these devices in some cases could significantly lengthen the project, thus increasing exposure time. In other instances, there might be insufficient pay-back time to economically justify more elaborate TTC measures. Standard: Since intermediate-term operations extend into nighttime, retroreflective and/or illuminated devices shall be used in intermediate-term stationary TTC zones. Support: Most maintenance and utility operations are short-term stationary work. As compared to stationary operations, mobile and short-duration operations are activities that might involve different treatments. Devices having greater mobility might be necessary such as signs mounted on trucks. Devices that are larger, more imposing, or more visible can be used effectively and economically. The mobility of the TTC zone is important. Maintaining reasonably safe work and road user conditions is a paramount goal in carrying out mobile operations. Guidance: Safety in short-duration or mobile operations should not be compromised by using fewer devices simply because the operation will frequently change its location. Option: Appropriately colored or marked vehicles with high-intensity rotating, flashing, oscillating, or strobe lights may be used in place of signs and channelizing devices for short-duration or mobile operations. These vehicles may be augmented with signs or arrow panels. Support: During short-duration work, it often takes longer to set up and remove the TTC zone than to perform the work. Workers face hazards in setting up and taking down the TTC zone. Also, since the work time is short, delays affecting road users are significantly increased when additional devices are installed and removed. Option: Considering these factors, simplified control procedures may be warranted for short-duration work. A reduction in the number of devices may be offset by the use of other more dominant devices such as highintensity rotating, flashing, oscillating, or strobe lights on work vehicles. Support: Mobile operations often involve frequent short stops for activities such as litter cleanup, pothole patching, or utility operations, and are similar to short-duration operations. Guidance: Warning signs, high-intensity rotating, flashing, oscillating, or strobe lights on a vehicle, flags, and/or channelizing devices should be used and moved periodically to keep them near the mobile work area. Option: Flaggers may be used for mobile operations that often involve frequent short stops. Support: Mobile operations also include work activities where workers and equipment move along the road without stopping, usually at slow speeds. The advance warning area moves with the work area. Guidance: When mobile operations are being performed, a shadow vehicle equipped with an arrow panel or a sign should follow the work vehicle, especially when vehicular traffic speeds or volumes are high. Where feasible, warning signs should be placed along the roadway and moved periodically as work progresses. Under high-volume conditions, consideration should be given to scheduling mobile operations work during off-peak hours.
Sect. 6G.02
2003 Edition
Page 6G-3
If there are mobile operations on a high-speed travel lane of a multi-lane divided highway, arrow panels should be used. Option: For mobile operations that move at speeds less than 5 km/h (3 mph), mobile signs or stationary signing that is periodically retrieved and repositioned in the advance warning area may be used. At higher speeds, vehicles may be used as components of the TTC zones for mobile operations. Appropriately colored and marked vehicles with signs, flags, high-intensity rotating, flashing, oscillating, or strobe lights, truck-mounted attenuators, and arrow panels or portable changeable message signs may follow a train of moving work vehicles. For some continuously moving operations, such as street sweeping and snow removal, a single work vehicle with appropriate warning devices on the vehicle may be used to provide warning to approaching road users. Standard: Mobile operations that move at speeds greater than 30 km/h (20 mph), such as pavement marking operations, shall have appropriate devices on the equipment (that is, high-intensity rotating, flashing, oscillating, or strobe lights, signs, or special lighting), or shall use a separate vehicle with appropriate warning devices.
Page 6G-4
2003 Edition
5. High-level warning devices 6. Portable changeable message signs 7. Temporary traffic control signals (including pedestrian signals and accessible pedestrian signals). 8. Temporary traffic barriers 9. Crash cushions 10. Screens 11. Rumble strips 12. More delineation B. Upgrading of devices: 1. A full complement of standard pavement markings 2. Brighter and/or wider pavement markings 3. Larger and/or brighter signs 4. Channelizing devices with greater conspicuity 5. Temporary traffic barriers in place of channelizing devices C. Improved geometrics at detours or crossovers D. Increased distances: 1. Longer advance warning area 2. Longer tapers E. Lighting: 1. Temporary roadway lighting 2. Steady-burn lights used with channelizing devices 3. Flashing lights for isolated hazards 4. Illuminated signs 5. Floodlights Where pedestrian or bicycle usage is high, typical applications should also be modified by giving particular attention to the provisions set forth in Chapter 6D, Section 6F.68, and other Sections of Part 6 related to accessibility and detectability provisions in TTC zones.
2003 Edition
Page 6G-5
When existing pedestrian facilities are disrupted, closed, or relocated in a TTC zone, the temporary facilities shall be detectable and shall include accessibility features consistent with the features present in the existing pedestrian facility.
Page 6G-6
2003 Edition
Option: In addition, a supplementary plaque bearing the message NEXT X km (MILES) may be used. Temporary traffic barriers may be needed to inhibit encroachment of errant vehicles into the work space and to protect workers. Standard: When used for shoulder work, arrow panels shall operate only in the caution mode. Support: A typical application for stationary work operations on shoulders is shown in Figure 6H-3. Short duration or mobile work on shoulders is shown in Figure 6H-4. Work on freeway shoulders is shown in Figure 6H-5.
2003 Edition
Page 6G-7
Detours should be signed so that road users will be able to traverse the entire detour route and back to the original roadway as shown in Figure 6H-9. Support: Techniques for controlling vehicular traffic under one-lane, two-way conditions are described in Section 6C.10. Option: Flaggers may be used as shown in Figure 6H-10. STOP/YIELD sign control may be used on roads with low traffic volumes as shown in Figure 6H-11. A temporary traffic control signal may be used as shown in Figure 6H-12.
Section 6G.12 Work Within the Traveled Way of Multi-lane, Nonaccess Controlled Highways
Support: Chapter 6D and Sections 6F.68 and 6G.05 contain additional information regarding the steps to follow when pedestrian or bicycle facilities are affected by the worksite. Work on multi-lane (two or more lanes of moving motor vehicle traffic in one direction) highways is divided into right-lane closures, left-lane closures, interior-lane closures, multiple-lane closures, and closures on five-lane roadways.
Sect. 6G.10 to 6G.12
Page 6G-8
2003 Edition
Standard: When a lane is closed on a multi-lane road for other than a mobile operation, a transition area containing a merging taper shall be used. Guidance: When justified by an engineering study, temporary traffic barriers should be used to prevent incursions of errant vehicles into hazardous areas or work space. Standard: When temporary traffic barriers are placed immediately adjacent to the traveled way, they shall be equipped with appropriate channelizing devices, delineation, and/or other TTC devices. For lane closures, the merging taper shall use channelizing devices and the temporary traffic barrier shall be placed beyond the transition area. Support: It must be recognized that although temporary traffic barriers are shown in several of the typical applications of Chapter 6H, they are not considered to be TTC devices in themselves. Figure 6H-34 illustrates a lane closure in which temporary traffic barriers are used. Option: When the right lane is closed, TTC similar to that shown in Figure 6H-33 may be used for undivided or divided four-lane roads. Guidance: If morning and evening peak hour vehicular traffic volumes in the two directions are uneven and the greater volume is on the side where the work is being done in the right lane, consideration should be given to closing the inside lane for opposing vehicular traffic and making the lane available to the side with heavier vehicular traffic, as shown in Figure 6H-31. If the larger vehicular traffic volume changes to the opposite direction at a different time of the day, the TTC should be changed to allow two lanes for opposing vehicular traffic by moving the devices from the opposing lane back to the centerline. When it is necessary to create a temporary centerline that is not consistent with the pavement markings, channelizing devices should be used and closely spaced. Option: When closing a left lane on a multi-lane undivided road, as vehicular traffic flow permits, the two interior lanes may be closed, as shown in Figure 6H-30, to provide drivers and workers additional lateral clearance and to provide access to the work space. Standard: When only the left lane is closed on undivided roads, channelizing devices shall be placed along the centerline as well as along the adjacent lane. Guidance: When an interior lane is closed, an adjacent lane should also be considered for closure to provide additional space for vehicles and materials and to facilitate the movement of equipment within the work space. When multiple lanes in one direction are closed, a capacity analysis should be made to determine the number of lanes needed to accommodate motor vehicle traffic needs. Vehicular traffic should be moved over one lane at a time. As shown in Figure 6H-37, the tapers should be separated by a distance of 2L, with L being determined by the formulas in Table 6C-3. Standard: When a directional roadway is closed, inapplicable WRONG WAY signs and markings, and other existing traffic control devices at intersections within the temporary two-lane, two-way operations section shall be covered, removed, or obliterated. Option: When half the road is closed on an undivided highway, both directions of vehicular traffic may be accommodated as shown in Figure 6H-32. When both interior lanes are closed, temporary traffic controls may be used as indicated in Figure 6H-30. When a roadway must be closed on a divided highway, a median crossover may be used (see Section 6G.15).
Sect. 6G.12
2003 Edition
Page 6G-9
Support: TTC for lane closures on five-lane roads is similar to other multi-lane undivided roads. Figure 6H-32 can be adapted for use on five-lane roads. Figure 6H-35 can be used on a five-lane road for short duration and mobile operations.
Page 6G-10
2003 Edition
Support: Figures 6H-26 and 6H-27 provide guidance on applicable procedures for work performed within the intersection. Option: If the work is within the intersection, any of the following strategies may be used: A. A small work space so that road users can move around it, as shown in Figure 6H-26; B. Flaggers or uniformed law enforcement officers to direct road users, as shown in Figure 6H-27; C. Work in stages so the work space is kept to a minimum; and D. Road closures or upstream diversions to reduce road user volumes. Guidance: Depending on road user conditions, a flagger(s) and/or a uniformed law enforcement officer(s) should be used to control road users.
Section 6G.14 Work Within the Traveled Way of Freeways and Expressways
Support: Problems of TTC might occur under the special conditions encountered where vehicular traffic must be moved through or around TTC zones on high-speed, high-volume roadways. Although the general principles outlined in the previous Sections of this Manual are applicable to all types of highways, high-speed, accesscontrolled highways need special attention in order to reasonably safely and efficiently accommodate vehicular traffic while also protecting work forces. The road user volumes, road vehicle mix (buses, trucks, cars, and bicycles, if permitted), and speed of vehicles on these facilities require that careful TTC procedures be implemented, for example, to induce critical merging maneuvers well in advance of work spaces and in a manner that creates minimum turbulence and delay in the vehicular traffic stream. These situations often require more conspicuous devices than specified for normal rural highway or urban street use. However, the same important basic considerations of uniformity and standardization of general principles apply for all roadways. Work under high-speed, high-volume vehicular traffic on a controlled access highway is complicated by the roadway design and operational features. The presence of a median that establishes separate roadways for directional vehicular traffic flow might prohibit the closing of one of the roadways or the diverting of vehicular traffic to the other roadway. Lack of access to and from adjacent roadways prohibits rerouting of vehicular traffic away from the work space in many cases. Other conditions exist where work must be limited to night hours, thereby necessitating increased use of warning lights, illumination of work spaces, and advance warning systems. TTC for a typical lane closure on a divided highway is shown in Figure 6H-33. Temporary traffic controls for short duration and mobile operations on freeways are shown in Figure 6H-35. A typical application for shifting vehicular traffic lanes around a work space is shown in Figure 6H-36. TTC for multiple and interior lane closures on a freeway is shown in Figures 6H-37 and 6H-38. Guidance: The method for closing an interior lane when the open lanes have the capacity to carry vehicular traffic should be as shown in Figure 6H-37. When the capacity of the other lanes is needed, the method shown in Figure 6H-38 should be used.
Section 6G.15 Two-Lane, Two-Way Traffic on One Roadway of a Normally Divided Highway
Support: Two-lane, two-way operation on one roadway of a normally divided highway is a typical procedure that requires special consideration in the planning, design, and work phases, because unique operational problems (for example, increasing the risk of head-on crashes) can arise with the two-lane, two-way operation. Standard: When two-lane, two-way traffic control must be maintained on one roadway of a normally divided highway, opposing vehicular traffic shall be separated with either temporary traffic barriers (concrete safety-shape or approved alternate) or with channelizing devices throughout the length of the two-way operation. The use of markings and complementary signing, by themselves, shall not be used. Support: Figure 6H-39 shows the procedure for two-lane, two-way operation. Treatments for entrance and exit ramps within the two-way roadway segment of this type of work are shown in Figures 6H-40 and 6H-41.
2003 Edition
Page 6G-11
Page 6G-12
2003 Edition
are reduced traffic congestion and less involvement with business activities. However, the two basic conditions that must normally be met for night work to offer any advantage are reduced traffic volumes and easy set up and removal of the traffic control patterns on a nightly basis. Shifting work activities to night hours, when traffic volumes are lower and normal business is less active, might offer an advantage in some cases, as long as the necessary work can be completed and the work site restored to essentially normal operating conditions to carry the higher traffic volume during non-construction hours. Although working at night might offer advantages, it also includes safety issues. Reduced visibility inherent in night work impacts the performance of both drivers and workers. Because traffic volumes are lower and congestion is minimized, speeds are often higher at night necessitating greater visibility at a time when visibility is reduced. Finally, the incidence of impaired (alcohol or drugs), fatigued, or drowsy drivers might be higher at night. Working at night also involves other factors, including construction productivity and quality, social impacts, economics, and environmental issues. A decision to perform construction or maintenance activities at night normally involves some consideration of the advantages to be gained compared to the safety and other issues that might be impacted. Guidance: Considering the safety issues inherent to night work, consideration should be given to enhancing traffic controls (see Section 6G.04) to provide added visibility and driver guidance, and increased protection for workers. In addition to the enhancements listed in Section 6G.04, consideration should be given to providing additional lights and retroreflective markings to workers, work vehicles, and equipment. Option: Where reduced traffic volumes at night make it feasible, the entire roadway may be closed by detouring traffic to alternate facilities, thus removing the traffic risk from the activity area. Guidance: Because typical street and highway lighting is rarely adequate to provide sufficient levels of illumination for work tasks, temporary lighting should be provided where workers are active to supply sufficient illumination to reasonably safely perform the work tasks. Temporary lighting for night work should be designed such that glare does not interfere with driver visibility, or create visibility problems for truck drivers, equipment operators, flaggers, or other workers. Consideration should also be given to stationing uniformed law enforcement officers and lighted patrol cars at night work locations where there is a concern that high speeds or impaired drivers might result in undue risks for workers or other drivers. Standard: Except in emergencies, temporary lighting shall be provided at all flagger stations. Support: Desired illumination levels vary depending upon the nature of the task involved. An average horizontal luminance of 50 lux (5 foot candles) can be adequate for general activities. An average horizontal luminance of 108 lux (10 foot candles) can be adequate for activities around equipment. Tasks requiring high levels of precision and extreme care can require an average horizontal luminance of 216 lux (20 foot candles).
Sect. 6G.20
2003 Edition
Page 6H-1
Sect. 6H.01
Page 6H-2
2003 Edition
TA-1 TA-2
Work Within the Traveled Way of Two-Lane Highways (see Section 6G.10) Road Closed with Diversion Roads Closed with Off-Site Detour Overlapping Routes with Detour Lane Closure on Two-Lane Road Using Flaggers Lane Closure on Two-Lane Road with Low Traffic Volumes Lane Closure on Two-Lane Road Using Traffic Control Signals Temporary Road Closure Haul Road Crossing Work in Center of Road with Low Traffic Volumes Surveying Along Centerline of Road with Low Traffic Volumes Mobile Operations on Two-Lane Road Work Within the Traveled Way of Urban Streets (see Section 6G.11) Lane Closure on Minor Street Detour for One Travel Direction Detour for Closed Street TA-18 TA-19 TA-20 TA-7 TA-8 TA-9 TA-10 TA-11 TA-12 TA-13 TA-14 TA-15 TA-16 TA-17
Work Within the Traveled Way at an Intersection and Sidewalks (see Section 6G.13) Lane Closure on Near Side of Intersection Right Lane Closure on Far Side of Intersection Left Lane Closure on Far Side of Intersection Half Road Closure on Far Side of Intersection Multiple Lane Closures at Intersection Closure in Center of Intersection Closure at Side of Intersection Sidewalk Closures and Bypass Sidewalks Crosswalk Closures and Pedestrian Detours TA-21 TA-22 TA-23 TA-24 TA-25 TA-26 TA-27 TA-28 TA-29
Sect. 6H.01
2003 Edition
Page 6H-3
Work Within the Traveled Way of Multi-lane, Nonaccess Controlled Highways (see Section 6G.12) Interior Lane Closure on Multi-lane Street Lane Closure on Street with Uneven Directional Volumes Half Road Closure on Multi-lane, High-Speed Highway Lane Closure on Divided Highway Lane Closure with Temporary Traffic Barrier Mobile Operation on Multi-lane Road Work Within the Traveled Way of Expressways and Freeways (see Section 6G.14) Lane Shift on Freeway Double Lane Closure on Freeway Interior Lane Closure on Freeway Median Crossover on Freeway Median Crossover for Entrance Ramp Median Crossover for Exit Ramp Work in Vicinity of Exit Ramp Partial Exit Ramp Closure Work in Vicinity of Entrance Ramp Temporary Reversible Lane Using Movable Barriers Work in the Vicinity of Highway-Rail Grade Crossings (see Section 6G.19) Work in Vicinity of Highway-Rail Grade Crossing TA-46 TA-36 TA-37 TA-38 TA-39 TA-40 TA-41 TA-42 TA-43 TA-44 TA-45 TA-30 TA-31 TA-32 TA-33 TA-34 TA-35
Sect. 6H.01
Page 6H-4
2003 Edition
Arrow panel
Arrow panel support or trailer (shown facing down) Changeable message sign or support trailer Channelizing device Crash Cushion Direction of temporary traffic detour Direction of traffic Flagger
Luminaire Pavement markings that should be removed for a long term project Sign (shown facing left) Surveyor Temporary barrier Temporary barrier with warning lights
Work space
Work vehicle
Sect. 6H.01
2003 Edition
Page 6H-5
Road Type
B
30 (100) 100 (350) 150 (500) 450 (1,500)
C
30 (100) 100 (350) 150 (500) 800 (2,640)
* Speed category to be determined by highway agency ** Distances are shown in meters (feet). The column headings A, B, and C are the dimensions shown in Figures 6H-1 through 6H-46. The A dimension is the distance from the transition or point of restriction to the first sign. The B dimension is the distance between the first and second signs. The C dimension is the distance between the second and third signs. (The third sign is the first one in a three-sign series encountered by a driver approaching a TTC zone.)
L = WS
Where: L = taper length in meters (feet) W = width of offset in meters (feet) S = posted speed limit, or off-peak 85th-percentile speed prior to work starting, or the anticipated operating speed in km/h (mph)
Sect. 6H.01
Page 6H-6
2003 Edition
2003 Edition
Page 6H-7
Note: See Tables 6H-2 and 6H-3 for the meaning of the symbols and/or letter codes used in this figure.
Typical Application 1
Page 6H-8
2003 Edition
2003 Edition
Page 6H-9
Blasting Zone
Note:
= Blasting Cap See Tables 6H-2 and 6H-3 for the meaning of the symbols and/or letter codes used in this figure.
Typical Application 2
Blasting Area
Page 6H-10
2003 Edition
2003 Edition
Page 6H-11
Note: See Tables 6H-2 and 6H-3 for the meaning of the symbols and/or letter codes used in this figure.
OR Shoulder Taper (see Note 7) 1/3 L A A 1/3 L Shoulder Taper (see Note 7) 1/3 L A B OR
Typical Application 3
Page 6H-12
2003 Edition
2003 Edition
Page 6H-13
Note: See Tables 6H-2 and 6H-3 for the meaning of the symbols and/or letter codes used in this figure.
(optional)
See Note 1
OR (optional) (optional)
Page 6H-14
2003 Edition
2003 Edition
Page 6H-15
Note: See Tables 6H-2 and 6H-3 for the meaning of the symbols and/or letter codes used in this figure.
OR A
OR
Typical Application 5
Page 6H-16
2003 Edition
Notes for Figure 6H-6Typical Application 6 Shoulder Work with Minor Encroachment
Guidance: 1. All lanes should be a minimum of 3 m (10 ft) in width as measured to the near face of the channelizing devices. 2. The treatment shown should be used on a minor road having low speeds. For higher-speed traffic conditions, a lane closure should be used. Option: 3. For short-term use on low-volume, low-speed roadways with vehicular traffic that does not include longer and wider heavy commercial vehicles, a minimum lane width of 2.7 m (9 ft) may be used. 4. Where the opposite shoulder is suitable for carrying vehicular traffic and of adequate width, lanes may be shifted by use of closely spaced channelizing devices, provided that the minimum lane width of 3 m (10 ft) is maintained. 5. Additional advance warning may be appropriate, such as a ROAD NARROWS sign. 6. Temporary traffic barriers may be used along the work space. 7. The shadow vehicle may be omitted if a taper and channelizing devices are used. 8. A truck-mounted attenuator may be used on the shadow vehicle. 9. For short-duration work, the taper and channelizing devices may be omitted if a shadow vehicle with activated high-intensity rotating, flashing, oscillating, or strobe lights is used. 10. Vehicle hazard warning signals may be used to supplement high-intensity rotating, flashing, oscillating, or strobe lights. Standard: 11. Vehicle hazard warning signals shall not be used instead of the vehicles high-intensity rotating, flashing, oscillating, or strobe lights.
2003 Edition
Page 6H-17
A Note: See Tables 6H-2 and 6H-3 for the meaning of the symbols and/or letter codes used in this figure.
1/3 L
Typical Application 6
Page 6H-18
2003 Edition
2003 Edition
Page 6H-19
Crash Cushion (optional) Temporary double yellow centerline Temporary pavement starts here
OR (optional)
Note: See Tables 6H-2 and 6H-3 for the meaning of the symbols and/or letter codes used in this figure.
B OR C
OR
Typical Application 7
Page 6H-20
2003 Edition
Notes for Figure 6H-8Typical Application 8 Road Closure with Off-Site Detour
Guidance: 1. Regulatory traffic control devices should be modified as needed for the duration of the detour. Option: 2. If the road is opened for some distance beyond the intersection and/or there are significant origin/destination points beyond the intersection, the ROAD CLOSED and DETOUR signs on Type III Barricades may be located at the edge of the traveled way. 3. A Route Sign Directional assembly may be placed on the far left corner of the intersection to augment or replace the one shown on the near right corner. 4. Flashing warning lights and/or flags may be used to call attention to the advance warning signs. 5. Cardinal direction plaques may be used with route signs.
2003 Edition
Page 6H-21
OR 60 m ( 200 ft)
Note: See Tables 6H-2 and 6H-3 for the meaning of the symbols and/or letter codes used in this figure.
OR
Typical Application 8
Page 6H-22
2003 Edition
2003 Edition
Page 6H-23
State Route 4
State Route 17
OR
Typical Application 9
Page 6H-24
2003 Edition
Notes for Figure 6H-10Typical Application 10 Lane Closure on Two-Lane Road Using Flaggers
Option: 1. For low-volume situations with short work zones on straight roadways where the flagger is visible to road users approaching from both directions, a single flagger, positioned to be visible to road users approaching from both directions, may be used (see Chapter 6E). 2. The ROAD WORK AHEAD and the END ROAD WORK signs may be omitted for short-duration operations. 3. Flashing warning lights and/or flags may be used to call attention to the advance warning signs. A BE PREPARED TO STOP sign may be added to the sign series. Guidance: 4. The buffer space should be extended so that the two-way traffic taper is placed before a horizontal (or crest vertical) curve to provide adequate sight distance for the flagger and a queue of stopped vehicles. Standard: 5. At night, flagger stations shall be illuminated, except in emergencies. Guidance: 6. When used, the BE PREPARED TO STOP sign should be located between the Flagger sign and the ONE LANE ROAD sign. 7. When a highway-rail grade crossing exists within or upstream of the transition area and it is anticipated that queues resulting from the lane closure might extend through the highway-rail grade crossing, the TTC zone should be extended so that the transition area precedes the highway-rail grade crossing. 8. When a highway-rail grade crossing equipped with active warning devices exists within the activity area, provisions should be made for keeping flaggers informed as to the activation status of these warning devices. 9. When a highway-rail grade crossing exists within the activity area, drivers operating on the left side of the normal centerline should be provided with comparable warning devices as for drivers operating on the right side of the normal centerline. 10. Early coordination with the railroad company should occur before work starts. Option: 11. A flagger or a uniformed law enforcement officer may be used at the highway-rail grade crossing to minimize the probability that vehicles are stopped within 4.6 m (15 ft) of the highway-rail grade crossing, measured from both sides of the outside rails.
2003 Edition
Page 6H-25
OR OR
OR
Note: See Tables 6H-2 and 6H-3 for the meaning of the symbols and/or letter codes used in this figure.
C (optional) B (optional) A
Note: The buffer space should be extended so that the two-way traffic taper is placed before a horizontal (or crest vertical) curve to provide adequate sight distance for the flagger and a queue of stopped vehicles.
OR (optional) B OR (optional)
C OR
Typical Application 10
Page 6H-26
2003 Edition
Notes for Figure 6H-11Typical Application 11 Lane Closure on Two-Lane Road with Low Traffic Volumes
Option: 1. This TTC zone application may be used as an alternate to the TTC application shown in Figure 6H-10 (using flaggers) when the following conditions exist: a. Vehicular traffic volume is such that sufficient gaps exist for vehicular traffic that must yield. b. Road users from both directions are able to see approaching vehicular traffic through and beyond the work site and have sufficient visibility of approaching vehicles. 2. The Type B flashing warning lights may be placed on the ROAD WORK AHEAD and the ONE LANE ROAD AHEAD signs whenever a night lane closure is necessary.
2003 Edition
Page 6H-27
Figure 6H-11. Lane Closure on Two-Lane Road with Low Traffic Volumes
(optional)
OR
Buffer Space (optional) 30 m (100 ft) MAX. Note: See Tables 6H-2 and 6H-3 for the meaning of the symbols and/or letter codes used in this figure. A (optional) (See Section 3B.16) B (optional) 4.6 m (15 ft)
(optional)
Typical Application 11
Page 6H-28
2003 Edition
Notes for Figure 6H-12Typical Application 12 Lane Closure on Two-Lane Road Using Traffic Control Signals
Standard: 1. TTC signals shall be installed and operated in accordance with the provisions of Part 4. TTC signals shall meet the physical display and operational requirements of conventional traffic control signals. 2. TTC signal timing shall be established by authorized officials. Durations of red clearance intervals shall be adequate to clear the one-lane section of conflicting vehicles. 3. When the TTC signal is changed to the flashing mode, either manually or automatically, red signal indications shall be flashed to both approaches. 4. Stop lines shall be installed with TTC signals for intermediate and long-term closures. Existing conflicting pavement markings and raised pavement marker reflectors between the activity area and the stop line shall be removed. After the TTC signal is removed, the stop lines and other temporary pavement markings shall be removed and the permanent pavement markings restored. 5. Safeguards shall be incorporated to avoid the possibility of conflicting signal indications at each end of the TTC zone. Guidance: 6. Where no-passing lines are not already in place, they should be added. 7. Adjustments in the location of the advance warning signs should be made as needed to accommodate the horizontal or vertical alignment of the roadway, recognizing that the distances shown for sign spacings are minimums. Adjustments in the height of the signal heads should be made as needed to conform to the vertical alignment. Option: 8. Flashing warning lights shown on the ROAD WORK AHEAD and the ONE LANE ROAD AHEAD signs may be used. 9. Removable pavement markings may be used. Support: 10. TTC signals are preferable to flaggers for long-term projects and other activities that would require flagging at night. 11. The maximum length of activity area for one-way operation under TTC signal control is determined by the capacity required to handle the peak demand.
2003 Edition
Page 6H-29
Figure 6H-12. Lane Closure on Two-Lane Road Using Traffic Control Signals (TA-12)
(optional)
(optional)
(optional)
(optional)
Lighting (optional) Temporary pavement marking 150 to 180 m (500 to 600 ft)
Note: See Tables 6H-2 and 6H-3 for the meaning of the symbols and/or letter codes used in this figure.
C 150 to 180 m (500 to 600 ft) B A A B C Temporary pavement marking 12 to 45 m (40 to 150 ft) 30 m (100 ft) MAX. Lighting (optional) 30 m (100 ft) MAX. 12 to 45 m (40 to 150 ft)
(optional) (optional) OR (optional) (optional)
Typical Application 12
Page 6H-30
2003 Edition
2003 Edition
Page 6H-31
C (optional)
Note: See Tables 6H-2 and 6H-3 for the meaning of the symbols and/or letter codes used in this figure.
(optional) C
Typical Application 13
Page 6H-32
2003 Edition
2003 Edition
Page 6H-33
Haul Road
See Note 7
See Note 7
C (optional)
Haul Road
See Note 4
See Note 4
9 m (30 ft)
C Note: See Tables 6H-2 and 6H-3 for the meaning of the symbols and/or letter codes used in this figure.
USING FLAGGERS
Typical Application 14
Page 6H-34
2003 Edition
Notes for Figure 6H-15Typical Application 15 Work in Center of Road with Low Traffic Volumes
Guidance: 1. The lanes on either side of the center work space should have a minimum width of 3 m (10 ft) as measured from the near edge of the channelizing devices to the edge of pavement or the outside edge of paved shoulder. 2. Workers in the roadway should wear high-visibility safety apparel as described in Section 6D.03. Option: 3. Flashing warning lights and/or flags may be used to call attention to the advance warning signs. 4. If the closure continues overnight, warning lights may be used on the channelizing devices. 5. A lane width of 2.7 m (9 ft) may be used for short-term stationary work on low-volume, low-speed roadways when motor vehicle traffic does not include longer and wider heavy commercial vehicles. 6. A work vehicle displaying high-intensity rotating, flashing, oscillating, or strobe lights may be used instead of the channelizing devices forming the tapers or the high-level warning devices. 7. Vehicle hazard warning signals may be used to supplement high-intensity rotating, flashing, oscillating, or strobe lights. Standard: 8. Vehicle hazard warning signals shall not be used instead of the vehicles high-intensity rotating, flashing, oscillating, or strobe lights.
2003 Edition
Page 6H-35
Figure 6H-15. Work in Center of Road with Low Traffic Volumes (TA-15)
Note: See Tables 6H-2 and 6H-3 for the meaning of the symbols and/or letter codes used in this figure.
1/2 L
(optional) (optional)
1/2 L
Typical Application 15
Page 6H-36
2003 Edition
Notes for Figure 6H-16Typical Application 16 Surveying Along Centerline of Road with Low Traffic Volumes
Guidance: 1. Cones should be placed 150 mm (6 in) to 300 mm (12 in) on either side of the centerline. 2. When using metric units, spacing of channelizing devices should not exceed a distance in meters equal to 1/5 of the speed limit (km/h) when used for taper channelization and a distance in meters equal to 2/5 of the speed limit (km/h) when used for tangent channelization. When using English units, spacing of channelizing devices should not exceed a distance in feet equal to the speed limit (mph) when used for the taper channelization and a distance in feet of 2 times the speed limit (mph) when used for tangent channelization. 3. A flagger should be used to warn workers who cannot watch road users. 4. Workers in the roadway should wear high-visibility safety apparel as described in Section 6D.03. Standard: 5. For surveying on the centerline of a high-volume road, one lane shall be closed using the information illustrated in Figure 6H-10. Option: 6. A high-level warning device may be used to protect a surveying device, such as a target on a tripod. 7. Cones may be omitted for a cross-section survey. 8. ROAD WORK AHEAD signs may be used in place of the SURVEY CREW AHEAD signs. 9. Flags may be used to call attention to the advance warning signs. 10. If the work is along the shoulder, the flagger may be omitted. 11. For a survey along the edge of the road or along the shoulder, cones may be placed along the edge line. 12. A BE PREPARED TO STOP sign may be added to the sign series. Guidance: 13. When used, the BE PREPARED TO STOP sign should be located before the Flagger symbol sign.
2003 Edition
Page 6H-37
Figure 6H-16. Surveying Along Centerline of Road with Low Traffic Volumes (TA-16)
Note: See Tables 6H-2 and 6H-3 for the meaning of the symbols and/or letter codes used in this figure.
Buffer space
Buffer space
Typical Application 16
Page 6H-38
2003 Edition
2003 Edition
Page 6H-39
Note: See Tables 6H-2 and 6H-3 for the meaning of the symbols and/or letter codes used in this figure.
Work Vehicle
Shadow Vehicle
(optional)
Typical Application 17
Page 6H-40
2003 Edition
2003 Edition
Page 6H-41
Note: See Tables 6H-2 and 6H-3 for the meaning of the symbols and/or letter codes used in this figure. A
Typical Application 18
Page 6H-42
2003 Edition
Notes for Figure 6H-19Typical Application 19 Detour for One Travel Direction
Guidance: 1. This plan should be used for streets without posted route numbers. 2. On multi-lane streets, Detour signs with an Advance Turn Arrow should be used in advance of a turn. Option: 3. The STREET CLOSED legend may be used in place of ROAD CLOSED. 4. Additional DO NOT ENTER signs may be used at intersections with intervening streets. 5. Warning lights may be used on Type III Barricades. 6. Detour signs may be located on the far side of intersections. 7. A Street Name sign may be mounted with the Detour sign. The Street Name sign may be either white on green or black on orange. Standard: 8. When used, the Street Name sign shall be placed above the Detour sign.
2003 Edition
Page 6H-43
30 m (100 ft)
Note: See Tables 6H-2 and 6H-3 for the meaning of the symbols and/or letter codes used in this figure.
Typical Application 19
Page 6H-44
2003 Edition
2003 Edition
Page 6H-45
B Note: See Tables 6H-2 and 6H-3 for the meaning of the symbols and/or letter codes used in this figure.
Typical Application 20
Page 6H-46
2003 Edition
Notes for Figure 6H-21Typical Application 21 Lane Closure on Near Side of Intersection
Standard: 1. The merging taper shall direct vehicular traffic into either the right or left lane, but not both. Guidance: 2. In this typical application, a left taper should be used so that right-turn movements will not impede through motor vehicle traffic. However, the reverse should be true for left-turn movements. 3. If the work space extends across a crosswalk, the crosswalk should be closed using the information and devices shown in Figure 6H-29. Option: 4. Flashing warning lights and/or flags may be used to call attention to the advance warning signs. 5. A shadow vehicle with a truck-mounted attenuator may be used. 6. A work vehicle with high-intensity rotating, flashing, oscillating, or strobe lights may be used with the high-level warning device. 7. Vehicle hazard warning signals may be used to supplement high-intensity rotating, flashing, oscillating, or strobe lights. Standard: 8. Vehicle hazard warning signals shall not be used instead of the vehicles high-intensity rotating, flashing, oscillating, or strobe lights.
2003 Edition
Page 6H-47
Note: See Tables 6H-2 and 6H-3 for the meaning of the symbols and/or letter codes used in this figure.
Typical Application 21
Page 6H-48
2003 Edition
Notes for Figure 6H-22Typical Application 22 Right Lane Closure on Far Side of Intersection
Guidance: 1. If the work space extends across a crosswalk, the crosswalk should be closed using the information and devices shown in Figure 6H-29. Option: 2. The normal procedure is to close on the near side of the intersection any lane that is not carried through the intersection. However, when this results in the closure of a right lane having significant right turning movements, then the right lane may be restricted to right turns only, as shown. This procedure increases the through capacity by eliminating right turns from the open through lane. 3. For intersection approaches reduced to a single lane, left-turning movements may be prohibited to maintain capacity for through vehicular traffic. 4. Flashing warning lights and/or flags may be used to call attention to the advance warning signs. 5. Where the turning radius is large, it may be possible to create a right-turn island using channelizing devices or pavement markings.
2003 Edition
Page 6H-49
(optional)
(optional)
A (optional)
(optional) A (optional)
Note: See Tables 6H-2 and 6H-3 for the meaning of the symbols and/or letter codes used in this figure.
Typical Application 22
Page 6H-50
2003 Edition
Notes for Figure 6H-23Typical Application 23 Left Lane Closure on Far Side of Intersection
Guidance: 1. If the work space extends across a crosswalk, the crosswalk should be closed using the information and devices shown in Figure 6H-29. Option: 2. Flashing warning lights and/or flags may be used to call attention to the advance warning signs. 3. The normal procedure is to close on the near side of the intersection any lane that is not carried through the intersection. However, when this results in the closure of a left lane having significant left-turning movements, then the left lane may be reopened as a turn bay for left turns only, as shown. Support: 4. By first closing off the left lane and then reopening it as a turn bay, an island is created with channelizing devices that allows the LEFT LANE MUST TURN LEFT sign to be repeated on the left adjacent to the lane that it controls.
2003 Edition
Page 6H-51
(optional) A
30 m (100 ft)
B Note: See Tables 6H-2 and 6H-3 for the meaning of the symbols and/or letter codes used in this figure.
Typical Application 23
Page 6H-52
2003 Edition
Notes for Figure 6H-24Typical Application 24 Half Road Closure on Far Side of Intersection
Guidance: 1. If the work space extends across a crosswalk, the crosswalk should be closed using the information and devices shown in Figure 6H-29. 2. When turn prohibitions are implemented, two turn prohibition signs should be used, one on the near side and, space permitting, one on the far side of the intersection. Option: 3. A buffer space may be used between opposing directions of vehicular traffic as shown in this application. 4. The normal procedure is to close on the near side of the intersection any lane that is not carried through the intersection. However, if there is a significant right-turning movement, then the right lane may be restricted to right turns only, as shown. 5. Where the turning radius is large, a right-turn island using channelizing devices or pavement markings may be used. 6. There may be insufficient space to place the back-to-back Keep Right sign and No Left Turn symbol signs at the end of the row of channelizing devices separating opposing vehicular traffic flows. In this situation, the No Left Turn symbol sign may be placed on the right and the Keep Right sign may be omitted. 7. For intersection approaches reduced to a single lane, left-turning movements may be prohibited to maintain capacity for through vehicular traffic. 8. Flashing warning lights and/or flags may be used to call attention to advance warning signs. 9. Temporary pavement markings may be used to delineate the travel path through the intersection. Support: 10. Keeping the right lane open increases the through capacity by eliminating right turns from the open through lane. 11. A temporary turn island reinforces the nature of the temporary exclusive right-turn lane and enables a second RIGHT LANE MUST TURN RIGHT sign to be placed in the island.
2003 Edition
Page 6H-53
(optional)
(optional)
(optional)
A A
(optional) B
C Note: See Tables 6H-2 and 6H-3 for the meaning of the symbols and/or letter codes used in this figure.
Typical Application 24
Page 6H-54
2003 Edition
2003 Edition
Page 6H-55
(optional)
A 1/2 L (optional)
C Note: See Tables 6H-2 and 6H-3 for the meaning of the symbols and/or letter codes used in this figure.
Typical Application 25
Page 6H-56
2003 Edition
2003 Edition
Page 6H-57
1/2 L
1/2 L
1/2 L
(optional) A
Note: See Tables 6H-2 and 6H-3 for the meaning of the symbols and/or letter codes used in this figure.
Typical Application 26
Page 6H-58
2003 Edition
2003 Edition
Page 6H-59
A (optional)
See Note 2 for flagger information Note: See Tables 6H-2 and 6H-3 for the meaning of the symbols and/or letter codes used in this figure.
Typical Application 27
Page 6H-60
2003 Edition
Notes for Figure 6H-28Typical Application 28 Sidewalk Closures and Bypass Sidewalks
Standard: 1. When crosswalks or other pedestrian facilities are closed or relocated, temporary facilities shall be detectable and shall include accessibility features consistent with the features present in the existing pedestrian facility. Guidance: 2. Where high speeds are anticipated, a temporary traffic barrier and, if necessary, a crash cushion should be used to separate the temporary sidewalks from vehicular traffic. 3. Audible information devices should be considered where midblock closings and changed crosswalk areas cause inadequate communication to be provided to pedestrians who have visual disabilities. Option: 4. Street lighting may be considered. 5. Only the TTC devices related to pedestrians are shown. Other devices, such as lane closure signing or ROAD NARROWS signs, may be used to control vehicular traffic. 6. For nighttime closures, Type A Flashing warning lights may be used on barricades that support signs and close sidewalks. 7. Type C Steady-Burn or Type D 360-degree Steady-Burn warning lights may be used on channelizing devices separating the temporary sidewalks from vehicular traffic flow. 8. Signs, such as KEEP RIGHT (LEFT), may be placed along a temporary sidewalk to guide or direct pedestrians.
2003 Edition
Page 6H-61
(optional)
SIDEWALK DETOUR
SIDEWALK DIVERSION
Typical Application 28
Note: See Tables 6H-2 and 6H-3 for the meaning of the symbols and/or letter codes used in this figure.
Page 6H-62
2003 Edition
Notes for Figure 6H-29Typical Application 29 Crosswalk Closures and Pedestrian Detours
Standard: 1. When crosswalks or other pedestrian facilities are closed or relocated, temporary facilities shall be detectable and shall include accessibility features consistent with the features present in the existing pedestrian facility. 2. Curb parking shall be prohibited for at least 15 m (50 ft) in advance of the midblock crosswalk. Guidance: 3. Audible information devices should be considered where midblock closings and changed crosswalk areas cause inadequate communication to be provided to pedestrians who have visual disabilities. 4. Pedestrian traffic signal displays controlling closed crosswalks should be covered or deactivated. Option: 5. Street lighting may be considered. 6. Only the TTC devices related to pedestrians are shown. Other devices, such as lane closure signing or ROAD NARROWS signs, may be used to control vehicular traffic. 7. For nighttime closures, Type A Flashing warning lights may be used on barricades supporting signs and closing sidewalks. 8. Type C Steady-Burn warning lights may be used on channelizing devices separating the work space from vehicular traffic. 9. In order to maintain the systematic use of the fluorescent yellow-green background for pedestrian, bicycle, and school warning signs in a jurisdiction, the fluorescent yellow-green background for pedestrian, bicycle, and school warning signs may be used in TTC zones.
2003 Edition
Page 6H-63
(optional)
Note: For long-term stationary work, the double yellow centerline and/or lane lines should be removed between the crosswalk lines. See Tables 6H-2 and 6H-3 for the meaning of the symbols and/or letter codes used in this figure.
(optional)
Typical Application 29
Page 6H-64
2003 Edition
Notes for Figure 6H-30Typical Application 30 Interior Lane Closure on Multi-lane Street
Guidance: 1. This information applies to low-speed, low-volume urban streets. Where speed or volume is higher, additional signing such as LEFT LANE CLOSED XX m (FT) should be used between the signs shown. Option: 2. The closure of the adjacent interior lane in the opposing direction may not be necessary, depending upon the activity being performed and the work space needed for the operation. 3. Shadow vehicles with a truck-mounted attenuator may be used. Guidance: 4. When a highway-rail grade crossing exists within or upstream of the transition area and it is anticipated that backups resulting from the lane closure might extend through the highway-rail grade crossing, the TTC zone should be extended so that the transition area precedes the highway-rail grade crossing. 5. Early coordination with the railroad company should occur before work starts.
2003 Edition
Page 6H-65
(optional)
(optional) L
Note: See Tables 6H-2 and 6H-3 for the meaning of the symbols and/or letter codes used in this figure.
Typical Application 30
Page 6H-66
2003 Edition
Notes for Figure 6H-31Typical Application 31 Lane Closure on Street with Uneven Directional Volumes
Standard: 1. The illustrated information shall be used only when the vehicular traffic volume indicates that two lanes of vehicular traffic shall be maintained in the direction of travel for which one lane is closed. Option: 2. The procedure may be used during a peak period of vehicular traffic and then changed to provide two lanes in the other direction for the other peak. Guidance: 3. For high speeds, a LEFT LANE CLOSED XX m (FT) sign should be added for vehicular traffic approaching the lane closure, as shown in Figure 6H-32. 4. Conflicting pavement markings should be removed for long-term projects. For short-term and intermediate-term projects where this is not practical, the channelizing devices in the area where the pavement markings conflict should be placed at a maximum spacing of 0.1 S m (0.5 S ft) where S is the speed in km /h (mph). Temporary markings should be installed where needed. 5. If the lane shift has curves with recommended speeds of 50 km/h (30 mph) or less, Reverse Turn signs should be used. 6. Where the shifted section is long, a Reverse Curve sign should be used to show the initial shift and a second sign should be used to show the return to the normal alignment. 7. If the tangent distance along the temporary diversion is less than 180 m (600 ft), the Double Reverse Curve sign should be used at the location of the first Two Lane Reverse Curve sign. The second Two Lane Reverse Curve sign should be omitted. Option: 8. A longitudinal buffer space may be used in the activity area to separate opposing vehicular traffic. 9. An ALL LANES THRU supplemental plaque may be used to emphasize the point that all lanes shift and no lanes are closed. 10. A work vehicle or a shadow vehicle may be equipped with a truck-mounted attenuator.
2003 Edition
Page 6H-67
Figure 6H-31. Lane Closures on Street with Uneven Directional Volumes (TA-31)
1/2 L
Note: See Tables 6H-2 and 6H-3 for the meaning of the symbols and/or letter codes used in this figure.
Typical Application 31
Page 6H-68
2003 Edition
Notes for Figure 6H-32Typical Application 32 Half Road Closure on Multi-lane, High-Speed Highway
Standard: 1. Pavement markings no longer applicable shall be removed or obliterated as soon as practical. Except for intermediate-term and short-term situations, temporary markings shall be provided to clearly delineate the temporary travel path. For short-term and intermediate-term situations where it is not feasible to remove and restore pavement markings, channelization shall be made dominant by using a very close device spacing. Guidance: 2. When paved shoulders having a width of 2.4 m (8 ft) or more are closed, channelizing devices should be used to close the shoulder in advance of the merging taper to direct vehicular traffic to remain within the traveled way. 3. Where channelizing devices are used instead of pavement markings, the maximum spacing should be 0.1 S meters where S is the speed in km/h (0.5 S feet where S is the speed in mph). 4. If the tangent distance along the temporary diversion is more than 180 m (600 ft), a Reverse Curve sign, left first, should be used instead of the Double Reverse Curve sign, and a second Reverse Curve sign, right first, should be placed in advance of the second reverse curve back to the original alignment. Option: 5. Warning lights may be used to supplement channelizing devices at night. Guidance: 6. When a highway-rail grade crossing exists within or upstream of the merging taper and it is anticipated that backups resulting from the lane closure might extend through the highway-rail grade crossing, the TTC zone should be extended so that the merging taper precedes the highway-rail grade crossing. 7. When a highway-rail grade crossing exists within the activity area, provisions should be made to provide road users operating on the left side of the normal centerline with comparable warning devices as supplied for road users operating on the right side of the normal centerline. 8. When a highway-rail grade crossing exists within the activity area, early coordination with the railroad company should occur before work starts. Option: 9. When a highway-rail grade crossing exists within the activity area, a flagger may be used at the highway-rail grade crossing to minimize the probability that vehicles are stopped within 4.6 m (15 ft) of the highway-rail grade crossing, measured from both sides of the outside rails. 10. A truck-mounted attenuator may be used on the work vehicle and/or the shadow vehicle.
2003 Edition
Page 6H-69
OR
OR
Note: See Tables 6H-2 and 6H-3 for the meaning of the symbols and/or letter codes used in this figure.
OR
Typical Application 32
Page 6H-70
2003 Edition
Notes for Figure 6H-33Typical Application 33 Stationary Lane Closure on Divided Highway
Standard: 1. This information also shall be used when work is being performed in the lane adjacent to the median on a divided highway. In this case, the LEFT LANE CLOSED signs and the corresponding Lane Ends signs shall be substituted. 2. When a side road intersects the highway within the TTC zone, additional TTC devices shall be placed as needed. Guidance: 3. When paved shoulders having a width of 2.4 m (8 ft) or more are closed, channelizing devices should be used to close the shoulder in advance of the merging taper to direct vehicular traffic to remain within the traveled way. Option: 4. A truck-mounted attenuator may be used on the work vehicle and/or shadow vehicle. Support: 5. Where conditions permit, restricting all vehicles, equipment, workers, and their activities to one side of the roadway might be advantageous.
2003 Edition
Page 6H-71
OR
OR C
OR OR Note: See Tables 6H-2 and 6H-3 for the meaning of the symbols and/or letter codes used in this figure.
SHORT-TERM
Typical Application 33
Page 6H-72
2003 Edition
Notes for Figure 6H-34Typical Application 34 Lane Closure with Temporary Traffic Barrier
Standard: 1. This information also shall be used when work is being performed in the lane adjacent to the median on a divided highway. In this case, the LEFT LANE CLOSED signs and the corresponding Lane Ends signs shall be substituted. Guidance: 2. For long-term lane closures on facilities with permanent edge lines, a temporary edge line should be installed from the start of the merging taper to the far end of the downstream taper, and conflicting pavement markings should be removed. 3. The use of a barrier should be based on engineering judgment. Standard: 4. Where temporary traffic barriers are installed, the ends of the barrier shall be treated in accordance with the provisions of Section 6F.81 5. The barrier shall not be placed along the merging taper. The lane shall first be closed using channelizing devices and pavement markings. Option: 6. The barrier shown in this typical application is an example of one method that may be used to close a lane for a long-term project. If the work activity permits, a movable barrier may be used and relocated to the shoulder during nonwork periods or peak-period vehicular traffic conditions, as appropriate. 7. Type C Steady-Burn warning lights may be placed on channelizing devices and the barrier parallel to the edge of pavement for nighttime lane closures. Standard: 8. If a movable barrier is used, the temporary white edge line shown in the typical application shall not be used. During the period when the right lane is opened, the sign legends and the channelization shall be changed to indicate that only the shoulder is closed, as illustrated in Figure 6H-5. The arrow panel, if used, shall be placed at the end of the shoulder taper and shall display the caution mode. Guidance: 9. If a movable barrier is used, the shift should be performed in the following manner. When closing the lane, the lane should be initially closed with channelizing devices placed along a merging taper using the same information employed for a stationary lane closure. The lane closure should then be extended with the movable-barrier transfer vehicle moving with vehicular traffic. When opening the lane, the movablebarrier transfer vehicle should travel against vehicular traffic from the termination area to the transition area. The merging taper should then be removed using the same information employed for a stationary lane closure.
2003 Edition
Page 6H-73
(optional)
Median
Crash cushion (see Section 6F.82) Buffer space (optional) Shoulder taper (optional) L
(optional)
Note: See Tables 6H-2 and 6H-3 for the meaning of the symbols and/or letter codes used in this figure.
Typical Application 34
Page 6H-74
2003 Edition
2003 Edition
Page 6H-75
Work Vehicle
Shadow Vehicle 2
Note: See Tables 6H-2 and 6H-3 for the meaning of the symbols and/or letter codes used in this figure.
Typical Application 35
Page 6H-76
2003 Edition
2003 Edition
Page 6H-77
1/2 L
(optional) OR OR (optional) Crash cushion (see Section 6F.82) 1/2 L Lighting Lighting (optional) 1/3 L A (optional) OR OR (optional) Temporary white edge line
OR (optional) B
Note: See Tables 6H-2 and 6H-3 for the meaning of the symbols and/or letter codes used in this figure.
(optional) C
Typical Application 36
Page 6H-78
2003 Edition
2003 Edition
Page 6H-79
Note: See Tables 6H-2 and 6H-3 for the meaning of the symbols and/or letter codes used in this figure.
2L
A Shoulder taper B OR OR C OR
Typical Application 37
Page 6H-80
2003 Edition
2003 Edition
Page 6H-81
(optional)
1/2 L
Note: See Tables 6H-2 and 6H-3 for the meaning of the symbols and/or letter codes used in this figure.
OR
Typical Application 38
Page 6H-82
2003 Edition
2003 Edition
Page 6H-83
Shoulder taper
Note: See Tables 6H-2 and 6H-3 for the meaning of the symbols and/or letter codes used in this figure.
Temporary yellow edge line 0.4S m if S is in km/h (2S ft if S is in mph) (see Note 6) Temporary white edge line Crash Cushion (optional) Shoulder taper
OR (optional) (optional)
1/2 L 1/2 L L A B B C OR OR OR
Typical Application 39
Page 6H-84
2003 Edition
Notes for Figure 6H-40Typical Application 40 Median Crossover for Entrance Ramp
Guidance: 1. The typical application illustrated should be used for carrying an entrance ramp across a closed directional roadway of a divided highway. 2. A temporary acceleration lane should be used to facilitate merging. 3. When used, the YIELD or STOP sign should be located far enough forward to provide adequate sight distance of oncoming mainline vehicular traffic to select a reasonably safe gap. If needed, YIELD or STOP lines should be installed across the ramp to indicate the point at which road users should YIELD or STOP. Also, a longer acceleration lane should be provided beyond the sign to reduce the gap size needed. Option: 4. If vehicular traffic conditions allow, the ramp may be closed. 5. A broken edge line may be carried across the temporary entrance ramp to assist in defining the through vehicular traffic lane. 6. When a temporary traffic barrier is used to separate opposing vehicular traffic, the Two-Way Traffic signs and the DO NOT ENTER signs may be eliminated.
2003 Edition
Page 6H-85
Temporary white edge line Lighting (optional) 7.6 m (25 ft) spacing Temporary yellow edge line
Note: See Tables 6H-2 and 6H-3 for the meaning of the symbols and/or letter codes used in this figure.
Typical Application 40
Page 6H-86
2003 Edition
Notes for Figure 6H-41Typical Application 41 Median Crossover for Exit Ramp
Guidance: 1. This typical application should be used for carrying an exit ramp across a closed directional roadway of a divided highway. The design criteria contained in the AASHTO Policy on the Geometric Design of Highways and Streets (see Section 1A.11) should be used for determining the curved alignment. 2. The guide signs should indicate that the ramp is open, and where the temporary ramp is located. Conversely, if the ramp is closed, guide signs should indicate that the ramp is closed. 3. When the exit is closed, a black on orange EXIT CLOSED panel should be placed diagonally across the interchange/intersection guide signs. 4. In the situation (not shown) where channelizing devices are placed along the mainline roadway, the devices spacing should be reduced in the vicinity of the off ramp to emphasize the opening at the ramp itself. Channelizing devices and/or temporary pavement markings should be placed on both sides of the temporary ramp where it crosses the median and the closed roadway. 5. Advance guide signs providing information related to the temporary exit should be relocated or duplicated adjacent to the temporary roadway. Standard: 6. A temporary EXIT sign shall be located in the temporary gore. For better visibility, it shall be mounted a minimum of 2.1 m (7 ft) from the pavement surface to the bottom of the sign. Option: 7. Guide signs referring to the exit may need to be relocated to the median. 8. The temporary EXIT sign placed in the temporary gore may be either black on orange or white on green. 9. In some instances, a temporary deceleration lane may be useful in facilitating the exiting maneuver. 10. When a temporary traffic barrier is used to separate opposing vehicular traffic, the Two-Way Traffic signs may be omitted.
2003 Edition
Page 6H-87
45 m (150 ft)
Lighting (optional)
Temporary yellow edge line Temporary white edge line 75 m (250 ft) Channelizing devices at a spacing of 7.6 m (25 ft) 7.6 m (25 ft) spacing
Note: See Tables 6H-2 and 6H-3 for the meaning of the symbols and/or letter codes used in this figure.
Typical Application 41
Page 6H-88
2003 Edition
2003 Edition
Page 6H-89
Temporary yellow edge line L L L 30 m (100 ft) Temporary white edge lines 300 m (1,000 ft) L
B OR
OR
OR OR Note: See Tables 6H-2 and 6H-3 for the meaning of the symbols and/or letter codes used in this figure.
Typical Application 42
Page 6H-90
2003 Edition
2003 Edition
Page 6H-91
OR
OR
Note: See Tables 6H-2 and 6H-3 for the meaning of the symbols and/or letter codes used in this figure.
Typical Application 43
Page 6H-92
2003 Edition
2003 Edition
Page 6H-93
Note: See Tables 6H-2 and 6H-3 for the meaning of the symbols and/or letter codes used in this figure. Temporary yellow edge line Temporary white edge line L
m 150 0 ft) 0 (5
0m ) 15 00 ft (5
B OR C
B OR C
OR
OR
Typical Application 44
Page 6H-94
2003 Edition
Notes for Figure 6H-45Typical Application 45 Temporary Reversible Lane Using Movable Barriers
Support: 1. This application addresses one of several uses for movable barriers in highway work zones. In this example, one side of a 6-lane divided highway is closed to perform the work operation, and vehicular traffic is carried in both directions on the remaining 3-lane roadway by means of a median crossover. To accommodate unbalanced peak-period vehicular traffic volumes, the direction of travel in the center lane is switched to the direction having the greater volume, with the transfer typically being made twice daily. Thus, there are four vehicular traffic phases described as follows: a. Phase Atwo travel lanes northbound and one lane southbound; b. Transition A to Bone travel lane in each direction; c. Phase Bone travel lane northbound and two lanes southbound; and d. Transition B to Aone travel lane in each direction. The typical application on the left illustrates the placement of devices during Phase A. The typical application on the right shows conditions during the transition (Transition A to B) from Phase A to Phase B. Guidance: 2. For the reversible-lane situation depicted, the ends of the movable barrier should terminate in a protected area or a crash cushion should be provided. During Phase A, the transfer vehicle should be parked behind the end of the movable barrier. During Phase B, the transfer vehicle should be parked behind the end of the movable barrier. The transition shift from Phase A to B should be as follows: a. Change the signs in the northbound advance warning area and transition area from a LEFT LANE CLOSED AHEAD to a LEFT TWO LANES CLOSED AHEAD. Change the mode of the second northbound arrow panel from Caution to Right Arrow. b. Place channelizing devices to close the northbound center lane. c. Move the transfer vehicle from south to north to shift the movable barrier from the west side to the east side of the reversible lane. d. Remove the channelizing devices closing the southbound center lane. e. Change the signs in the southbound transition area and advance warning area from a LEFT TWO LANES CLOSED AHEAD to LEFT LANE CLOSED AHEAD. Change the mode of the second southbound arrow panel from Right Arrow to Caution. 3. Where the lane to be opened and closed is an exterior lane (adjacent to the edge of the traveled way or the work space), the lane closure should begin by closing the lane with channelizing devices placed along a merging taper using the same information employed for a stationary lane closure. The lane closure should then be extended with the movable-barrier transfer vehicle moving with vehicular traffic. When opening the lane, the transfer vehicle should travel against vehicular traffic. The merging taper should be removed in a method similar to a stationary lane closure.
2003 Edition
Page 6H-95
Phase A C B A L 2L
Transition from A to B C B A L 2L
L Buffer space (optional) Movable Barrier A Parking location for transfer vehicle during Phase B
1/2 L
Transfer Vehicle
1/2 L
1/2L MINIMUM
L 2L L A B C L A B C
Typical Application 45
Note: See Tables 6H-2 and 6H-3 for the meaning of the symbols and/or letter codes used in this figure. Although leader lines point to signs on the right side of roadway, most signs should be installed on both sides of roadway.
Page 6H-96
2003 Edition
Notes for Figure 6H-46Typical Application 46 Work in Vicinity of Highway-Rail Grade Crossing
Guidance: 1. When highway-rail grade crossings exist either within or in the vicinity of roadway work activities, extra care should be taken to minimize the probability of conditions being created, either by lane restrictions, flagging or other operations, where vehicles might be stopped within the highway-rail grade crossing, considered as being 4.6 m (15 ft) on either side of the closest and farthest rail. Standard: 2. If the queuing of vehicles across active rail tracks cannot be avoided, a uniformed law enforcement officer or flagger shall be provided at the highway-rail grade crossing to prevent vehicles from stopping within the highway-rail grade crossing (as described in Note 1), even if automatic warning devices are in place. Guidance: 3. Early coordination with the railroad company should occur before work starts. 4. In the example depicted, the buffer space of the activity area should be extended upstream of the highway-rail grade crossing (as shown) so that a queue created by the flagging operation will not extend across the highway-rail grade crossing. 5. The DO NOT STOP ON TRACKS sign should be used on all approaches to a highway-rail grade crossing within the limits of a TTC zone. Option: 6. Flashing warning lights and/or flags may be used to call attention to the advance warning signs. 7. A BE PREPARED TO STOP sign may be added to the sign series. Guidance: 8. When used, the BE PREPARED TO STOP sign should be located before the Flagger symbol sign. Standard: 9. At night, flagger stations shall be illuminated, except in emergencies.
2003 Edition
Page 6H-97
Note: See Tables 6H-2 and 6H-3 for the meaning of the symbols and/or letter codes used in this figure.
(optional) (optional)
OR
OR C OR B A 30 m (100 ft) MAX. Extended buffer space Two-way traffic taper 15 to 30 m (50 to 100 ft) A B OR (optional) (optional) C OR OR
Typical Application 46
2003 Edition
Page 6I-1
CHAPTER 6I. CONTROL OF TRAFFIC THROUGH TRAFFIC INCIDENT MANAGEMENT AREAS Section 6I.01 General
Support: Whenever the acronym TTC is used in this Chapter, it refers to temporary traffic control. Standard: The needs and control of all road users (motorists, bicyclists, and pedestrians within the highway, including persons with disabilities in accordance with the Americans with Disabilities Act of 1990 (ADA), Title II, Paragraph 35.130) through a TTC zone shall be an essential part of highway construction, utility work, maintenance operations, and the management of traffic incidents. Support: A traffic incident is an emergency road user occurrence, a natural disaster, or other unplanned event that affects or impedes the normal flow of traffic. A traffic incident management area is an area of a highway where temporary traffic controls are imposed by authorized officials in response to a road user incident, natural disaster, hazardous material spill, or other unplanned incident. It is a type of TTC zone and extends from the first warning device (such as a sign, light, or cone) to the last TTC device or to a point where vehicles return to the original lane alignment and are clear of the incident. Traffic incidents can be divided into three general classes of duration, each of which has unique traffic control characteristics and needs. These classes are: A. Majorexpected duration of more than 2 hours; B. Intermediateexpected duration of 30 minutes to 2 hours; and C. Minorexpected duration under 30 minutes. The primary functions of TTC at a traffic incident management area are to move road users reasonably safely and expeditiously past or around the traffic incident, to reduce the likelihood of secondary traffic crashes, and to preclude unnecessary use of the surrounding local road system. Examples include a stalled vehicle blocking a lane, a traffic crash blocking the traveled way, a hazardous material spill along a highway, and natural disasters such as floods and severe storm damage. Guidance: In order to reduce response time for traffic incidents, highway agencies, appropriate public safety agencies (law enforcement, fire and rescue, emergency communications, emergency medical, and other emergency management), and private sector responders (towing and recovery and hazardous materials contractors) should mutually plan for occurrences of traffic incidents along the major and heavily traveled highway and street system. On-scene responders should be trained in safe practices for accomplishing their tasks in and near traffic. Responders should always be aware of their visibility to oncoming traffic and take measures to move the traffic incident as far off the traveled roadway as possible or to provide for appropriate warning. Responders arriving at a traffic incident should, within 15 minutes of arrival on-scene, estimate the magnitude of the traffic incident, the expected time duration of the traffic incident, and the expected vehicle queue length, and then should set up the appropriate temporary traffic controls for these estimates. Option: Warning and guide signs used for TTC traffic incident management situations may have a black legend and border on a fluorescent pink background (see Figure 6I-1). Support: While some traffic incidents might be anticipated and planned for, emergencies and disasters might pose more severe and unpredictable problems. The ability to quickly install proper temporary traffic controls might greatly reduce the effects of an incident, such as secondary crashes or excessive traffic delays. An essential part of fire, rescue, spill clean-up, highway agency, and enforcement activities is the proper control of road users through the traffic incident management area in order to protect responders, victims, and other personnel at the site while providing reasonably safe traffic flow. These operations might need corroborating legislative authority for the implementation and enforcement of appropriate road user regulations, parking controls, and speed zoning. It is desirable for these statutes to provide sufficient flexibility in the authority for, and implementation of, TTC to respond to the needs of changing conditions found in traffic incident management areas.
Sect. 6I.01
Page 6I-2
2003 Edition
W3-4
W4-2
W9-3
E5-2a
M4-8a
M4-9
M4-10
Option: For traffic incidents, particularly those of an emergency nature, TTC devices on hand may be used for the initial response as long as they do not themselves create unnecessary additional hazards.
2003 Edition
Page 6I-3
Attention should be paid to the end of the traffic queue such that warning is given to road users approaching the end of the queue. If manual traffic control is needed, it should be provided by qualified flaggers or uniformed law enforcement officers. Option: If flaggers are used to provide traffic control for an incident management situation, the flaggers may use appropriate traffic control devices that are readily available or that can be brought to the traffic incident scene on short notice. Guidance: When flares are used to initiate TTC at traffic incidents, more permanent traffic control devices should replace them as soon as practical. Both the flare and its supporting device should then be removed from the roadway. On-scene responders should be trained in safe practices for accomplishing their tasks in and near traffic. Responders should always be aware of their visibility to oncoming traffic and take measures to move the traffic incident as far off the traveled roadway as possible or to provide for appropriate warning.
Page 6I-4
2003 Edition
Sect. 6I.05
Part 7
2003 Edition
Page TC7-1
Page TC7-2
2003 Edition
Section 7E.08 Section 7E.09 Section 7F.01 Section 7F.02 Section 7F.03 FIGURES
Choice of Student Patrols ........................................................................................................7E-2 Operating Procedures for Student Patrols ...............................................................................7E-2 Function....................................................................................................................................7F-1 Types of Grade-Separated Crossings .......................................................................................7F-1 Criteria for Use of Grade-Separated Crossings .......................................................................7F-1
CHAPTER 7A. GENERAL Figure 7A-1 Figure 7B-1 Figure 7B-2 Figure 7B-3 Figure 7B-4 Figure 7C-1 TABLES CHAPTER 7B. SIGNS Table 7B-1 Size of School Area Signs and Plaques...................................................................................7B-2 Example of School Route Plan Map .......................................................................................7A-2 School Area Signs....................................................................................................................7B-4 Examples of Signing for School Crosswalk Warning Assembly ............................................7B-5 Examples of Signing for School Area Traffic Control with School Speed Limits .................7B-6 In-Street Signs in School Areas...............................................................................................7B-7 Two-Lane Pavement Marking of SCHOOL ........................................................................7C-3 CHAPTER 7B. SIGNS
2003 Edition
Page 7A-1
Page 7A-2
2003 Edition
MOO NLIG HT C T
KEYS TONE CT
CONNECTICUT
CONNE CTICU T
SHEAWOOD CT
NOTTINGHAM LN
BROCKTON DR
GATESHEAD DR
MAYLEAR LN
ELM
WINTER PARK DR
COLORADO CT
GATESHEAD DR COPPERFIELD CT
BRECKENRIDGE LN
GLEN EAGLE DR
WEND Y
MEAGHAN AVE
NEWPORT DR
GAT ES HE AD
CO PP ER FIE LD DR
C O U RT N EY
RD
ST
HAWLEY CT
ATHLEEN
CT
D
RD
EMI
LY S
DR
SPINNER CT WEDGEWOOD DR
SAN LUIS CT
AN
DA
DR
STACEY ST
Legend School Marked Crosswalk Crossing Guard Signalized Intersection STOP Sign Approach Pedestrian Route
Sect. 7A.03
GAI
L CT
AM
LINCOLN
DR
WE
YR ND
A
DE LASALLE AV
SIERRA CT
SIE
AV RRA CT
W NE
PO
RT
ES
2003 Edition
Page 7A-3
A recommended method for determining the frequency and adequacy of gaps in the traffic stream is given in the Institute of Transportation Engineers publication, School Trip Safety Program Guidelines (see Section 1A.11).
2003 Edition
Page 7B-1
Page 7B-2
2003 Edition
MUTCD Code
S1-1 S3-1 S4-5, S4-5a S5-1 S5-1 S5-2 R2-1 R2-1
Section
7B.08 7B.10 7B.12 7B.11 7B.11 7B.13 7B.11 7B.11
Conventional Road
900 x 900 mm (36 x 36 in) 750 x 750 mm (30 x 30 in) 900 x 900 mm (36 x 36 in) 600 x 1200 mm (24 x 48 in) 600 x 1350 mm (24 x 54 in) 600 x 750 mm (24 x 30 in) 600 x 750 mm (24 x 30 in) 600 x 900 mm (24 x 36 in)
Minimum
750 x 750 mm (30 x 30 in) 750 x 750 mm (30 x 30 in)
Oversized
1200 x 1200 mm (48 x 48 in) 900 x 900 mm (36 x 36 in) 1200 x 1200 mm (48 x 48 in) 900 x 1800 mm (36 x 72 in) 900 x 2100 mm (36 x 84 in) 900 x 1200 mm (36 x 48 in) 900 x 1200 mm (36 x 48 in) 900 x 1350 mm (36 x 54 in)
Plaque
X:XX to X:XX AM X:XX to X:XX PM When Children Are Present School When Flashing Mon-Fri XXX Feet or XXX Meters XXX Ft or XXX m Diagonal Arrow Diagonal Arrow (Optional Size) Ahead
MUTCD Code
S4-1 S4-2 S4-3 S4-4 S4-6 W16-2 W16-2a W16-7p W16-7p W16-9p
Section
7B.11 7B.11 7B.11 7B.11 7B.11 7B.08 7B.08 7B.09 7B.09 7B.08
Conventional Road
600 x 250 mm (24 x 10 in) 600 x 250 mm (24 x 10 in) 600 x 200 mm (24 x 8 in) 600 x 250 mm (24 x 10 in) 600 x 250 mm (24 x 10 in) 600 x 450 mm (24 x 18 in) 600 x 300 mm (24 x 12 in) 600 x 300 mm (24 x 12 in) 525 x 375 mm (21 x 15 in) 600 x 300 mm (24 x 12 in)
Minimum
Oversized
900 x 450 mm (36 x 18 in) 900 x 450 mm (36 x 18 in) 900 x 300 mm (36 x 12 in) 900 x 450 mm (36 x 18 in) 900 x 450 mm (36 x 18 in) 750 x 600 mm (30 x 24 in) 750 x 450 mm (30 x 18 in) 750 x 450 mm (30 x 18 in) 750 x 450 mm (30 x 18 in)
C. SCHOOL plaque (S4-3); D. The SCHOOL portion of the School Speed Limit sign (S5-1); E. XXX FEET plaque (W16-2 series); F. AHEAD plaque (W16-9p); G. Diagonal Arrow plaque (W16-7p); and H. Reduced Speed School Zone Ahead sign (S4-5, S4-5a). Guidance: When the fluorescent yellow-green background color is used, a systematic approach featuring one background color within a zone or area should be used. The mixing of standard yellow and fluorescent yellowgreen backgrounds within a zone or area should be avoided.
Section 7B.08 School Advance Warning Assembly (S1-1 with Supplemental Plaque)
Guidance: The School Advance Warning assembly (see Figure 7B-1) should be installed in advance of locations where school buildings or grounds are adjacent to the highway, except where a physical barrier such as fencing separates school children from the highway.
Sect. 7B.07 to 7B.08
2003 Edition
Page 7B-3
Standard: The School Advance Warning assembly shall be used in advance of any installation of the School Crosswalk Warning assembly (see Figure 7B-2), or in advance of the first installation of the School Speed Limit assembly (see Figure 7B-3). If used, the School Advance Warning assembly shall be installed not less than 45 m (150 ft) nor more than 210 m (700 ft) in advance of the school grounds or school crossings. If used, the School Advance Warning assembly shall consist of a School Advance Warning (S1-1) sign supplemented with a plaque with the legend AHEAD (W16-9p) or XXX METERS (XXX FEET) (W16-2 or W16-2a) to provide advance notice to road users of crossing activity. Option: A 300 mm (12 in) reduced size in-street School Advance Warning (S1-1) sign (see Figure 7B-4), installed in compliance with the mounting height and breakaway requirements for In-Street Pedestrian Crossing (R1-6 or R1-6a) signs (see Section 2B.12), may be used in advance of a school crossing to supplement the groundmounted school warning signs. A 300 x 150 mm (12 x 6 in) reduced size AHEAD (W16-9p) plaque may be mounted below the reduced size in-street School Advance Warning (S1-1) sign.
Section 7B.09 School Crosswalk Warning Assembly (S1-1 with Diagonal Arrow)
Standard: If used, the School Crosswalk Warning assembly (see Figure 7B-1) shall be installed at the marked crosswalk, or as close to it as possible, and shall consist of a School Advance Warning (S1-1) sign supplemented with a diagonal downward pointing arrow (W16-7p) plaque to show the location of the crossing. The School Crosswalk Warning assembly shall not be used at marked crosswalks other than those adjacent to schools and those on established school pedestrian routes. The School Crosswalk Warning assembly shall not be installed on approaches controlled by a STOP sign. Guidance: The School Crosswalk Warning assembly should be installed at marked crosswalk(s), including those at signalized locations, used by students going to and from school (see Figure 7B-2) as determined by an engineering study. Option: The In-Street Pedestrian Crossing (R1-6 or R1-6a) sign (see Section 2B.12) may be used at unsignalized school crossings. When used at a school crossing, a 300 x 100 mm (12 x 4 in) SCHOOL (S4-3) plaque (see Figure 7B-4) may be mounted above the sign. A 300 mm (12 in) reduced size School Advance Warning (S1-1) sign (see Figure 7B-4) may be used at an unsignalized school crossing instead of the In-Street Pedestrian Crossing (R1-6 or R1-6a) sign. A 300 x 150 mm (12 x 6 in) reduced size Diagonal Arrow (W16-7p) plaque may be mounted below the reduced size in-street School Advance Warning (S1-1) sign. Standard: If an In-Street Pedestrian Crossing sign or a reduced size in-street School Advance Warning (S1-1) sign is placed in the roadway, the sign support shall comply with the mounting height and breakaway requirements for In-Street Pedestrian Crossing (R1-6 or R1-6a) signs (see Section 2B.12). The In-Street Pedestrian Crossing sign and the reduced size in-street School Advance Warning (S1-1) sign shall not be used at signalized locations.
Page 7B-4
2003 Edition
S1-1
S1-1
R2-1
OR
R2-1
W16-7p OR
OR
S3-1
S4-5
S4-5a
OR
S5-1
S5-2
Sect. 7B.10
2003 Edition
Page 7B-5
210 m (700 ft) MAX (For distances in between see Section 2C.05)
*See note
*See note
OR OR OR
Sect. 7B.10
OR
Page 7B-6
2003 Edition
Figure 7B-3. Examples of Signing for School Area Traffic Control with School Speed Limits
OR
OR
* See note
*60 m (200 ft) from the crosswalk or 30 m (100 ft) from the school property line, whichever is encountered first (see Section 7B.11)
* See note
Sect. 7B.10
OR
OR
SCH
OO
LP
RO P
ERT
YL
INE
SCH
OO
LP
RO P
ERT
YL
INE
OR OR
2003 Edition
Page 7B-7
S1-1* * Reduced size signs: S1-1 300 x 300 mm (12 x 12 in) W16-7p 300 x 150 mm (12 x 6 in) W16-9p 300 x 150 mm (12 x 6 in)
W16-9p*
OR
OR
S1-1*
W16-7p*
R1-6
R1-6a
Section 7B.11 School Speed Limit Assembly (S4-1, S4-2, S4-3, S4-4, S4-6, S5-1)
Standard: A School Speed Limit assembly (see Figure 7B-1) or a School Speed Limit (S5-1) sign (see Figure 7B-1) shall be used to indicate the speed limit where a reduced speed zone for a school area has been established (in accordance with law based upon an engineering study) or where a speed limit is specified for such areas by statute. The School Speed Limit assembly or School Speed Limit sign shall be placed at or as near as practical to the point where the reduced speed zone begins. Guidance: The reduced speed zone should begin either at a point 60 m (200 ft) from the crosswalk, or at a point 30 m (100 ft) from the school property line, based on whichever is encountered first as traffic approaches the school. Standard: The School Speed Limit assembly shall be either a fixed-message sign assembly or a changeable message sign. The fixed-message School Speed Limit assembly shall consist of a top plaque (S4-3) with the legend SCHOOL, a Speed Limit (R2-1) sign, and a bottom plaque (S4-1, S4-2, S4-4, or S4-6) indicating the specific periods of the day and/or days of the week that the special school speed limit is in effect (see Figure 7B-1).
Sect. 7B.11
Page 7B-8
2003 Edition
Option: Changeable message signs (see Sections 2A.07 and 6F.55) may be used to inform drivers of the special school speed limit. If the sign is internally illuminated, it may have a white legend on a black background. Changeable message signs with flashing beacons may be used for the more critical situations, where greater emphasis of the special school speed limit is needed. Guidance: Even though it might not always be practical because of special features to make changeable message signs conform in all respects to the accepted standards, during the periods that the school speed limit is in effect, their basic shape, message, legend layout, and colors should conform to the standards for fixed-message signs. A confirmation beacon or device to indicate that the speed limit message is in operation should be considered for inclusion on the back of the changeable message sign. Option: Fluorescent yellow-green pixels may be used when school-related messages are shown on a changeable message sign. Changeable message signs may use blank-out messages or other methods in order to display the school speed limit only during the periods it applies. Changeable message signs that display the speed of approaching drivers (see Section 2B.13) may be used in a school speed limit zone. A Speed Limit Sign Beacon also may be used, with a WHEN FLASHING legend, to identify the periods that the school speed limit is in effect. The lenses of the Speed Limit Sign Beacon may be positioned within the face of the School Speed Limit (S5-1) sign (see Figure 7B-1). A FINES HIGHER (R2-6) sign (see Section 2B.17) may be used to advise road users when increased fines are imposed for traffic violations in school zones.
Section 7B.12 Reduced Speed School Zone Ahead Sign (S4-5, S4-5a)
Option: The Reduced Speed School Zone Ahead (S4-5, S4-5a) sign (see Figure 7B-1) may be used to inform road users of a reduced speed zone when engineering judgment indicates that advance notice would be appropriate. Standard: If used, the Reduced Speed School Zone Ahead sign shall be followed by a School Speed Limit sign or a School Speed Limit assembly. The speed limit displayed on the Reduced Speed School Zone Ahead sign shall be identical to the speed limit displayed on the subsequent School Speed Limit sign or School Speed Limit assembly.
2003 Edition
Page 7C-1
Page 7C-2
2003 Edition
If used, yield lines (see Figure 3B-14) shall consist of a row of solid white isosceles triangles pointing toward approaching vehicles extending across approach lanes to indicate the point at which the yield is intended or required to be made. Guidance: Stop lines should be 300 to 600 mm (12 to 24 in) wide. Stop lines should be used to indicate the point behind which vehicles are required to stop, in compliance with a STOP (R1-1) sign (see Figure 2B-1), traffic control signal, or some other traffic control device. The individual triangles comprising the yield line should have a base of 300 to 600 mm (12 to 24 in) wide and a height equal to 1.5 times the base. The space between the triangles should be 75 to 300 mm (3 to 12 in). Option: Yield lines may be used to indicate the point behind which vehicles are required to yield in compliance with a YIELD (R1-2) sign (see Figure 2B-1) or a Yield Here to Pedestrians (R1-5 or R1-5a) sign (see Figure 2B-2). Guidance: If used, stop and yield lines should be placed a minimum of 1.2 m (4 ft) in advance of and parallel to the nearest crosswalk line at controlled intersections, except for yield lines at roundabout intersections as provided for in Section 3B.24 and at midblock crosswalks. In the absence of a marked crosswalk, the stop line or yield line should be placed at the desired stopping or yielding point, but should be placed no more than 9 m (30 ft) nor less than 1.2 m (4 ft) from the nearest edge of the intersecting traveled way. Stop lines should be placed to allow sufficient sight distance to all other approaches to an intersection. If used at an unsignalized midblock crosswalk, yield lines should be placed adjacent to the Yield Here to Pedestrians sign located 6.1 to 15 m (20 to 50 ft) in advance of the nearest crosswalk line, and parking should be prohibited in the area between the yield line and the crosswalk (see Figure 3B-15). Stop lines at midblock signalized locations should be placed at least 12 m (40 ft) in advance of the nearest signal indication (see Section 4D.15). Support: Drivers who yield too close to crosswalks on multi-lane approaches place pedestrians at risk by blocking other drivers views of pedestrians, and pedestrians views of other vehicles.
2003 Edition
Page 7C-3
If a pavement marking word message consists of more than one line of information, it should read in the direction of travel. The first word of the message should be nearest to the road user. The longitudinal space between word or symbol message markings, including arrow markings, should be at least four times the height of the characters for low speed roads, but not more than ten times the height of the characters under any conditions. The number of different word and symbol markings used should be minimized to provide effective guidance and avoid misunderstanding. Except as noted in the Option below, pavement word and symbol markings should be no more than one lane in width. Option: The SCHOOL word marking may extend to the width of two approach lanes (see Figure 7C-1). Guidance: If the two-lane SCHOOL word marking is used, the letters should be 3 m (10 ft) or more in height.
3m (10 ft)
Sect. 7C.06
2003 Edition
Page 7D-1
Sect. 7D.01
2003 Edition
Page 7E-1
Page 7E-2
2003 Edition
Standard: The STOP paddle shall be an octagonal shape. The background of the STOP face shall be red with at least 150 mm (6 in) series capital white letters and border. The paddle shall be at least 450 mm (18 in) in size and have the word message STOP on both sides. The paddle shall be retroreflectorized or illuminated when used during hours of darkness. Option: The STOP paddle may be modified to improve conspicuity by incorporating red or white flashing lights on both sides of the paddle. The red or white flashing lights may be arranged in any of the following patterns: A. Two red or white lights centered vertically above and below the STOP legend; B. Two red or white lights centered horizontally on each side of the STOP legend; C. One red or white light centered below the STOP legend; or D. A series of eight or more small red or white lights no larger than 6 mm (0..25 in) in diameter along the outer edge of the paddle, arranged in an octagonal pattern at the eight corners of the STOP paddle. More than eight lights may be used only if the arrangement of the lights is such that it clearly conveys the octagonal shape of the STOP paddle. E. A series of white lights forming the shapes of the letters in the legend. Standard: If flashing lights are used on the STOP paddle, the flash rate shall be at least 50, but not more than 60, flash periods per minute.
2003 Edition
Page 7F-1
Part 8
2003 Edition
Page TC8-1
CHAPTER 8C. ILLUMINATION CHAPTER 8D. FLASHING-LIGHT SIGNALS, GATES, AND TRAFFIC CONTROL SIGNALS
Page TC8-2
2003 Edition
FIGURES CHAPTER 8A. GENERAL Figure 8A-1 Figure 8B-1 Figure 8B-2 Figure 8B-3 Figure 8B-4 Figure 8B-5 Figure 8B-6 Figure 8B-7 Figure 8B-8 Figure 8D-1 Figure 8D-2 TABLES CHAPTER 8B. SIGNS AND MARKINGS Table 8B-1 Sign Sizes for Grade Crossing Signs ......................................................................................8B-2 Train Dynamic Envelope.........................................................................................................8A-2 Highway-Rail Grade Crossing (Crossbuck) Regulatory Signs ...............................................8B-4 Advance Warning Signs...........................................................................................................8B-5 Regulatory Signs......................................................................................................................8B-6 Emergency Notification Signs.................................................................................................8B-8 Warning Signs..........................................................................................................................8B-9 Example of Placement of Warning Signs and Pavement Markings at Highway-Rail Grade Crossings.....................................................................................................................8B-11 Examples of Highway-Rail Grade Crossing Pavement Markings ........................................8B-12 Typical Train Dynamic Envelope Pavement Markings .........................................................8B-13 Composite Drawing of Active Traffic Control Devices for Highway-Rail Grade Crossings Showing Clearances ...............................................................................................8D-2 Example of Location Plan for Flashing-Light Signals and Four-Quadrant Gates..................8D-5 CHAPTER 8B. SIGNS AND MARKINGS
CHAPTER 8D. FLASHING LIGHT SIGNALS, GATES, AND TRAFFIC CONTROL SIGNALS
2003 Edition
Page 8A-1
Page 8A-2
2003 Edition
the centerline or edge line of the highway, as appropriate, to obtain the longer distance. For FourQuadrant Gate systems, the minimum track clearance distance is the length along a highway at one or more railroad tracks, measured either from the highway stop line or entrance warning device, to the point where the rear of the vehicle would be clear of the exit gate arm. In cases where the exit gate arm is parallel to the track(s) and is not perpendicular to the highway, the distance is measured either along the centerline or edge of the highway, as appropriate, to obtain the longer distance. 14. Minimum Warning TimeThrough Train Movementsthe least amount of time active warning devices shall operate prior to the arrival of a train at a highway-rail grade crossing. 15. Preemptionthe transfer of normal operation of highway traffic signals to a special control mode. 16. Pre-signalsupplemental highway traffic signal faces operated as part of the highway intersection traffic signals, located in a position that controls traffic approaching the highway-rail grade crossing in advance of the intersection. 17. Queue Clearance Timethe time required for the design vehicle of maximum length stopped just inside the minimum track clearance distance to start up and move through and clear the entire minimum track clearance distance. If presignals are present, this time shall be long enough to allow the vehicle to move through the intersection, or to clear the tracks if there is sufficient clear storage distance. If a Four-Quadrant Gate system is present, this time shall be long enough to permit the exit gate arm to lower after the design vehicle is clear of the minimum track clearance distance. 18. Right-of-Way Transfer Timethe maximum amount of time needed for the worst case condition, prior to display of the track clearance green interval. This includes any railroad or highway traffic signal control equipment time to react to a preemption call, and any traffic control signal green, pedestrian walk and clearance, yellow change, and red clearance intervals for conflicting traffic. 19. Separation Timethe component of maximum highway traffic signal preemption time during which the minimum track clearance distance is clear of vehicular traffic prior to the arrival of the train. 20. Simultaneous Preemptionnotification of an approaching train is forwarded to the highway traffic signal controller unit or assembly and railroad active warning devices at the same time. 21. Timed Exit Gate Operating Modea mode of operation where the exit gate descent is based on a predetermined time interval. 22. Vehicle Intrusion Detection Devicesa detector or detectors used as a part of a system incorporating processing logic to detect the presence of vehicles within the minimum track clearance distance and to control the operation of the exit gates. 23. Wayside Equipmentthe signals, switches, and/or control devices for railroad operations housed within one or more enclosures located along the railroad right-of-way and/or on railroad property.
Sect. 8A.01
2003 Edition
Page 8A-3
Page 8A-4
2003 Edition
Where a roadway is removed from a highway-rail grade crossing, the roadway approaches in the railroad right-of-way should also be removed and appropriate signs should be placed at the roadway end in accordance with Section 3C.04. Where a railroad is eliminated at a highway-rail grade crossing, the tracks should be removed or paved over. Option: Based on engineering judgment, the TRACKS OUT OF SERVICE (R8-9) sign (see Figure 8B-3) may be temporarily installed until the tracks are removed or paved over. The length of time before the tracks will be removed or paved over may be considered in making the decision as to whether to install the sign.
2003 Edition
Page 8B-1
Section 8B.03 Highway-Rail Grade Crossing (Crossbuck) Sign (R15-1) and Number of Tracks Sign (R15-2)
Standard: The Highway-Rail Grade Crossing (R15-1) sign, commonly identified as the Crossbuck sign, shall be retroreflectorized white with the words RAILROAD CROSSING in black lettering, mounted as shown in Figure 8B-1. As a minimum, one Crossbuck sign shall be used on each highway approach to every highway-rail grade crossing, alone or in combination with other traffic control devices. If automatic gates are not present and if there are two or more tracks at the highway-rail grade crossing, the number of tracks shall be indicated on a supplemental Number of Tracks (R15-2) sign of inverted T shape mounted below the Crossbuck sign in the manner and at the height indicated in Figure 8B-1. Option: The supplemental Number of Tracks sign may also be used at highway-rail grade crossings with automatic gates. Standard: The Crossbuck sign shall be installed on the right side of the highway on each approach to the highway-rail grade crossing. Where restricted sight distance or unfavorable highway geometry exists on an approach to a highway-rail grade crossing, an additional Crossbuck sign shall be installed on the left side of the highway, possibly placed back-to-back with the Crossbuck sign for the opposite approach, or otherwise located so that two Crossbuck signs are displayed for that approach. A strip of retroreflective white material not less than 50 mm (2 in) in width shall be used on the back of each blade of each Crossbuck sign for the length of each blade, at all highway-rail grade crossings, except those where Crossbuck signs have been installed back-to-back. A strip of retroreflective white material, not less than 50 mm (2 in) in width, shall be used on each support at passive highway-rail grade crossings for the full length of the front and back of the support from the Crossbuck sign or Number of Tracks sign to within 0.6 m (2 ft) above the edge of the roadway, except on the side of those supports where a STOP (R1-1) or YIELD (R1-2) sign or flashing lights have been installed or on the back side of supports for Crossbuck signs installed on one-way streets. Guidance: Crossbuck signs should be located with respect to the highway pavement or shoulder in accordance with the criteria in Chapter 2A and Figures 2A-1 and 2A-2, and should be located with respect to the nearest track in accordance with Figure 8D-2. The minimum lateral clearance for the nearest edge of the Crossbuck sign should be 1.8 m (6 ft) from the edge of the shoulder or 3.7 m (12 ft) from the edge of the traveled way in rural areas (whichever is greater), and 0.6 m (2 ft) from the face of the curb in urban areas. Where unusual conditions make variations in location and lateral clearance appropriate, engineering judgment should be used to provide the best practical combination of view and safety clearances.
Page 8B-2
2003 Edition
Minimum
Oversized
Sect. 8B.03
2003 Edition
Page 8B-3
Minimum
Oversized
Notes: 1. Larger signs may be used when appropriate. 2. Dimensions are shown in millimeters followed by inches in parentheses and are shown as width x height.
Page 8B-4
2003 Edition
m m ) 00 in 12 (48
22 5 m m
225 mm (9 in)
225 mm (9 in) 675 mm (27 in) R15-1 (drilled for 90-degree mounting) R15-2 2.8 m* (9 ft) *Height may be varied as required by local conditions 0.6 m (2 ft) MAX ROADWAY LEVEL 50 mm (2 in) white retroreflective strip
(9 in )
Section 8B.04 Highway-Rail Grade Crossing Advance Warning Signs (W10 Series)
Standard: A Highway-Rail Grade Crossing Advance Warning (W10-1) sign (see Figure 8B-2) shall be used on each highway in advance of every highway-rail grade crossing except in the following circumstances: A. On an approach to a highway-rail grade crossing from a T-intersection with a parallel highway, if the distance from the edge of the track to the edge of the parallel roadway is less than 30 m (100 ft), and W10-3 signs are used on both approaches of the parallel highway; or B. On low-volume, low-speed highways crossing minor spurs or other tracks that are infrequently used and are flagged by train crews; or C. In business districts where active highway-rail grade crossing traffic control devices are in use; or D. Where physical conditions do not permit even a partially effective display of the sign. Placement of the Highway-Rail Grade Crossing Advance Warning sign shall be in accordance with Chapter 2A and Table 2C-4. Option: On divided highways and one-way streets, an additional W10-1 sign may be installed on the left side of the roadway. Standard: If the distance between the railroad tracks and a parallel highway, from the edge of the tracks to the edge of the parallel roadway, is less than 30 m (100 ft), W10-2, W10-3, or W10-4 signs (see Figure 8B-2) shall be installed on each approach of the parallel highway to warn road users making a turn that they will encounter a highway-rail grade crossing soon after making a turn, and a W10-1 sign for the approach to the tracks shall not be required to be between the tracks and the parallel highway. If the W10-2, W10-3, or W10-4 signs are used, sign placement in accordance with the guidelines for Intersection Warning signs in Table 2C-4 using the speed of through traffic shall be measured from the highway intersection.
Sect. 8B.01 to 8B.01
2003 Edition
Page 8B-5
W10-1
W10-2
W10-3
W10-4
Guidance: If the distance between the railroad tracks and the parallel highway, from the edge of the tracks to the edge of the parallel roadway, is 30 m (100 ft) or more, a W10-1 sign should be installed in advance of the highwayrail grade crossing, and the W10-2, W10-3, or W10-4 signs should not be used on the parallel highway.
Page 8B-6
2003 Edition
R8-8
R8-9
R8-10
R10-6
R10-11a
R15-3
R15-8
Section 8B.08 STOP (R1-1) or YIELD (R1-2) Signs at Highway-Rail Grade Crossings
Option: At the discretion of the responsible State or local highway agency, STOP (R1-1) or YIELD (R1-2) signs (see Figure 2B-1) may be used at highway-rail grade crossings that have two or more trains per day and are without automatic traffic control devices. Support: Two or more trains per day means an average of two or more trains per day operating over the highway-rail grade crossing for a 12-month period prior to the installation of the STOP or YIELD control sign. Option: For other highway-rail grade crossings with passive warning devices, STOP or YIELD signs may be used based on an engineering study. Guidance: The engineering study should take into consideration such factors as highway and train traffic characteristics (including volume and speed), collision history, the need for active control devices, and sight distance to the approaching train. Option: If a STOP or YIELD sign is installed at a highway-rail grade crossing, it may be installed on the Crossbuck post or on a separate post at a point where the vehicle is to stop, or as near to that point as practical. Standard: For all highway-rail grade crossings where STOP or YIELD signs are installed, the placement shall conform to the requirements of Sections 2B.06 and 2B.10. Stop Ahead (W3-1) or Yield Ahead (W3-2) Advance Warning signs (see Figure 2C-4) shall also be installed if the criteria for their installation given in Section 2C.29 is met.
Sect. 8B.08
2003 Edition
Page 8B-7
Section 8B.13 TRAINS MAY EXCEED 130 km/h (80 MPH) Sign (W10-8)
Guidance: Where trains are permitted to travel at speeds exceeding 130 km/h (80 mph), a TRAINS MAY EXCEED 130 km/h (80 MPH) (W10-8) sign (see Figure 8B-5) should be installed facing road users approaching the highway-rail grade crossing. If used, the TRAINS MAY EXCEED 130 km/h (80 MPH) signs should be installed between the HighwayRail Grade Crossing Advance Warning (W10-1) sign (see Figure 8B-2) and the highway-rail grade crossing on all approaches to the highway-rail grade crossing. The locations should be determined based on specific site conditions.
Page 8B-8
2003 Edition
I-13
I-13a
Section 8B.17 Low Ground Clearance Highway-Rail Grade Crossing Sign (W10-5)
Guidance: If the highway profile conditions are sufficiently abrupt to create a hang-up situation for long wheelbase vehicles or for trailers with low ground clearance, the Low Ground Clearance Highway-Rail Grade Crossing (W10-5) sign (see Figure 8B-5) should be installed in advance of the highway-rail grade crossing. Standard: Because this symbol might not be readily recognizable by the public, the Low Ground Clearance Highway-Rail Grade Crossing (W10-5) warning sign shall be accompanied by an educational plaque, LOW GROUND CLEARANCE. The LOW GROUND CLEARANCE educational plaque shall remain in place for at least 3 years after the initial installation of the W10-5 sign (see Section 2A.13). Guidance: Auxiliary plaques such as AHEAD, NEXT CROSSING, or USE NEXT CROSSING (with appropriate arrows), or a supplemental distance plaque should be placed below the W10-5 sign at the nearest intersecting highway where a vehicle can detour or at a point on the highway wide enough to permit a U-turn. If engineering judgment of roadway geometric and operating conditions confirms that vehicle speeds across the railroad tracks should be below the posted speed limit, a W13-1 advisory speed plaque should be posted.
Sect. 8B.14 to 8B.17
2003 Edition
Page 8B-9
OR
W10-1a
W10-5
W10-8
W10-9
OR
OR
W10-10
W10-11
W10-11a
W10-11b
W10-12
W10-13
W10-14
W10-14a
W10-15
Note: The W10-11 sign is a W10-3 sign modified for gemetrics. Other signs can be oriented or revised as needed to satisfy the geometrics of the roadways and the railroad tracks.
Option: If the highway-rail grade crossing is rough, word message signs such as BUMP, DIP, or ROUGH CROSSING may be installed. A W13-1 advisory speed plaque may be installed below the word message sign in advance of rough crossings. Support: Information on railroad ground clearance requirements is also available in the American Railway Engineering and Maintenance-of-Way Associations Engineering Manual, or the American Association of State Highway and Transportation Officials Policy on Geometric Design of Highways and Streets (see Section 1A.11).
Page 8B-10
2003 Edition
Option: A Storage Space (W10-11b) sign (see Figure 8B-5) may be mounted beyond the highway-rail grade crossing at the highway intersection under the STOP or YIELD sign or just prior to the signalized intersection to remind drivers of the storage space between the tracks and the highway intersection.
2003 Edition
Page 8B-11
Figure 8B-7. Example of Placement of Warning Signs and Pavement 8B-6. Markings at Highway-Rail Grade Crossings Markings at Highway-Rail Grade Crossings
Stop line approximately 2.4 m (8 ft) from gate (if present) 1.8 m (6 ft) Train Dynamic Envelope A three-lane roadway should be marked with a centerline for two-lane approach operation on the approach to a crossing. Dynamic Envelope Pavement Marking (optional)
1.8 m (6 ft)
0.6 m (2 ft)
See Chapter 2C, Table 2C-4 0.6 m (2 ft) 7.5 m (25 ft) 15 m (50 ft)
On multi-lane roads, the transverse bands should extend across all approach lanes, and individual RXR symbols should be used in each approach lane.
Pavement Marking 7.5 m Symbol* (25 ft) See Figure 8B-7) 0.6 m (2 ft)
* When used, a portion of the pavement marking symbol should be directly opposite the Advance Warning Sign (W10-1). If needed, supplemental pavement marking symbol(s) may be placed between the Advance Warning Sign and the crossing, but should be at least 15 m (50 ft) from the stop line.
(optional)
Note: In an effort to simplify the figure to show warning sign and pavement marking placement, not all required traffic control devices are shown.
Page 8B-12
2003 Edition
mm 400 in) 6 (1
2003 Edition
Page 8B-13
Standard: If used, pavement markings for indicating the dynamic envelope shall conform to Part 3 and shall be a 100 mm (4 in) normal solid white line or contrasting pavement color and/or contrasting pavement texture. Guidance: If used, dynamic envelope pavement markings should be placed on the highway 1.8 m (6 ft) from the nearest rail, installed parallel to the tracks, unless the operating railroad company advises otherwise. The pavement markings should extend across the roadway as shown in Figure 8B-8.
The distance between rail and dynamic envelope pavement marking should be equal to 1.8 m (6 ft) unless otherwise advised by the operating railroad.
Sect. 8B.22
2003 Edition
Page 8C-1
Sect. 8C.01
2003 Edition
Page 8D-1
CHAPTER 8D. FLASHING-LIGHT SIGNALS, GATES, AND TRAFFIC CONTROL SIGNALS Section 8D.01 Introduction
Support: Active traffic control systems inform motorists, bicyclists, and pedestrians of the approach or presence of trains, locomotives, or other railroad equipment at highway-rail grade crossings. A composite drawing (see Figure 8D-1) shows a post-mounted flashing-light signal (two light units mounted in a horizontal line), a flashing-light signal mounted on an overhead structure, and an automatic gate assembly. Option: Post-mounted and overhead-mounted flashing-light signals may be used separately or in combination with each other as determined by an engineering study. Also, flashing-light signals may be used without automatic gate assemblies, as determined by an engineering study. Standard: The meaning of flashing-light signals and gates shall be as stated in the Uniform Vehicle Code (see Sections 11-701 and 11-703 of the UVC), which is available from the National Committee on Uniform Traffic Laws and Ordinances (see Page i for the address). Location and clearance dimensions for flashing-light signals and gates shall be as shown in Figure 8D-1. When there is a curb, a horizontal clearance of at least 0.6 m (2 ft) shall be provided from the face of the vertical curb to the closest part of the signal or gate arm in its upright position. When a cantileveredarm flashing-light signal is used, the vertical clearance shall be at least 5.2 m (17 ft) above the crown of the highway to the lowest point of the signal unit. Where there is a shoulder, but no curb, a horizontal clearance of at least 0.6 m (2 ft) from the edge of a paved or surfaced shoulder shall be provided, with a clearance of at least 1.8 m (6 ft) from the edge of the traveled way. Where there is no curb or shoulder, the minimum horizontal clearance shall be 1.8 m (6 ft) from the edge of the traveled way. Guidance: Equipment housings (controller cabinets) should have a lateral clearance of at least 9 m (30 ft) from the edge of the highway, and where railroad property and conditions allow, at least 7.6 m (25 ft) from the nearest rail. If a pedestrian route is provided, sufficient clearance from supports, posts, and gate mechanisms should be maintained for pedestrian travel. When determined by an engineering study, a lateral escape route to the right of the highway in advance of the highway-rail grade crossing traffic control devices should be kept free of guardrail or other ground obstructions. Where guardrail is not deemed necessary or appropriate, barriers should not be used for protecting signal supports. The same lateral clearance and roadside safety features should apply to flashing-light signal and automatic gate locations on both the right and left sides of the roadway. Option: In industrial or other areas involving only low-speed highway traffic or where signals are vulnerable to damage by turning truck traffic, guardrail may be installed to provide protection for the signal assembly.
Page 8D-2
2003 Edition
Figure 8D-1. Composite Drawing of Active Traffic Control Devices for Highway-Rail Grade Crossings Showing Clearances
Length as specified
5.2 m (17 ft) MIN. CLEARANCE ABOVE CROWN OF ROADWAY Where gates are located in the median, additional median width may be required to provide the minimum clearance for the counterweight supports.
45 1.1 m (3.5 ft) MIN. 1.4 m (4.5 ft) MAX. 0.6 m (2 ft)
CROWN OF ROADWAY
For locating this reference line at other than curb section installation, see Section 8D.01.
Sect. 8D.02
2003 Edition
Page 8D-3
Flashing-light signals shall be placed to the right of approaching highway traffic on all highway approaches to a highway-rail grade crossing. They shall be located laterally with respect to the highway in conformance with Figure 8D-1 except where such location would adversely affect signal visibility. At highway-rail grade crossings with highway traffic in both directions, back-to-back pairs of lights shall be placed on each side of the tracks. On multi-lane one-way streets and divided highways, flashing light signals shall be placed on the approach side of the highway-rail grade crossing on both sides of the roadway or shall be placed above the highway. Each red signal unit in the flashing-light signal shall flash alternately. The number of flashes per minute for each lamp shall be 35 minimum and 65 maximum. Each lamp shall be illuminated approximately the same length of time. Total time of illumination of each pair of lamps shall be the entire operating time. Flashing-light units shall use either 200 mm (8 in) or 300 mm (12 in) nominal diameter lenses. Guidance: In choosing between the 200 mm (8 in) or 300 mm (12 in) nominal diameter lenses for use in highway-rail grade crossing flashing-light signals, consideration should be given to the principles stated in Section 4D.15. Standard: Highway-rail grade crossing flashing-light signals shall operate at a low voltage using storage batteries either as a primary or stand-by source of electrical energy. Provision shall be made to provide a source of energy for charging batteries. Option: Additional pairs of flashing-light units may be mounted on the same supporting post and directed toward vehicular traffic approaching the highway-rail grade crossing from other than the principal highway route, such as where there are approaching routes on highways closely adjacent to and parallel to the railroad.
Page 8D-4
2003 Edition
When activated, the gate arm light nearest the tip shall be illuminated continuously and the other lights shall flash alternately in unison with the flashing-light signals. The entrance gate arm mechanism shall be designed to fail safe in the down position. Guidance: The gate arm should ascend to its upright position in not more than 12 seconds. In its normal upright position, when no train is approaching or occupying the highway-rail grade crossing, the gate arm should be either vertical or nearly so (see Figure 8D-1). In the design of individual installations, consideration should be given to timing the operation of the gate arm to accommodate large and/or slow-moving vehicles. The gates should cover the approaching highway to block all motor vehicles from being driven around the gate without crossing the centerline. Option: Automatic gate installations may include median islands between opposing lanes on an approach to a highway-rail grade crossing. Where gates are located in the median, additional median width may be required to provide the minimum clearance for the counterweight supports.
2003 Edition
Page 8D-5
Figure 8D-2. Example of Location Plan for Flashing-Light Signals and Four-Quadrant Gates
Median island between gates (as determined by an engineering study)
7 3. m
(1
IN
ft) M
. IN M ft)
(1
K AC TR
TR AC K
3. 7
0 3.
IN
0 3.
(1
ft) M
IN
. IN M ft)
(1
ft) M
(1
. IN M ft)
TR AC K
3.
3. 0
(1
TR AC K
3.
IN
ft)
(1 2
(1
ft)
M IN
3.
OBTUSE ANGLE
Center of pavement
ACUTE ANGLE
3.7 m (12 ft) MIN. Lateral clearances shall be in accordance with Figure 8D-1 and Chapter 8D. Center of pavement Note: In an effort to simplify the figure to show typical location plans for flashing-light signals and fourquadrant gates, not all traffic control devices are shown on this figure.
RIGHT ANGLE
Center of pavement
Sect. 8D.05
Page 8D-6
2003 Edition
If the Dynamic Exit Gate Operating Mode is used, vehicle intrusion detection devices should be installed to control exit gate operation based on vehicle presence within the minimum track clearance distance. Regardless of which exit gate operating mode is used, the Exit Gate Clearance Time should be considered when determining additional time requirements for the Minimum Warning Time. If a Four-Quadrant Gate system is used at a location that is adjacent to an intersection that could cause vehicles to queue within the minimum track clearance distance, the Dynamic Exit Gate Operating Mode should be used unless an engineering study indicates otherwise. If a Four-Quadrant Gate system is interconnected with a highway traffic signal, backup or standby power should be considered for the highway traffic signal. Also, circuitry should be installed to prevent the highway traffic signal from leaving the track clearance green interval until all of the gates are lowered. At locations where sufficient space is available, exit gates should be set back from the track a distance that provides a safety zone long enough to accommodate at least one design vehicle between the exit gate and the nearest rail. Four-Quadrant Gate systems should include remote health (status) monitoring capable of automatically notifying railroad signal maintenance personnel when anomalies have occurred within the system. Option: Exit gate arms may fail in the down position if the highway-rail grade crossing is equipped with remote health (status) monitoring. Four-Quadrant Gate installations may include median islands between opposing lanes on an approach to a highway-rail grade crossing. Guidance: Where sufficient space is available, median islands should be at least 18 m (60 ft) in length.
2003 Edition
Page 8D-7
Guidance: The highway agency with jurisdiction, the regulatory agency with statutory authority, if applicable, and the railroad company should jointly determine the preemption operation at highway-rail grade crossings adjacent to signalized highway intersections. If a highway-rail grade crossing is equipped with a flashing-light signal system and is located within 60 m (200 ft) of an intersection or midblock location controlled by a traffic control signal, the traffic control signal should be provided with preemption in accordance with Section 4D.13. Coordination with the flashing-light signal system, queue detection, or other alternatives should be considered for traffic control signals located farther than 60 m (200 ft) from the highway-rail grade crossing. Factors to be considered should include traffic volumes, vehicle mix, vehicle and train approach speeds, frequency of trains, and queue lengths. Standard: If preemption is provided, the normal sequence of traffic control signal indications shall be preempted upon the approach of trains to avoid entrapment of vehicles on the highway-rail grade crossing by conflicting aspects of the traffic control signals and the highway-rail grade crossing flashing-light signals. This preemption feature shall have an electrical circuit of the closed-circuit principle, or a supervised communication circuit between the control circuits of the highway-rail grade crossing warning system and the traffic control signal controller. The traffic control signal controller preemptor shall be activated via the supervised communication circuit or the electrical circuit that is normally energized by the control circuits of the highway-rail grade crossing warning system. The approach of a train to a highway-rail grade crossing shall de-energize the electrical circuit or activate the supervised communication circuit, which in turn shall activate the traffic control signal controller preemptor. This shall establish and maintain the preemption condition during the time the highway-rail grade crossing warning system is activated, except that when crossing gates exist, the preemption condition shall be maintained until the crossing gates are energized to start their upward movement. When multiple or successive preemptions occur, train activation shall receive first priority. Guidance: If a highway-rail grade crossing is located within 15 m (50 ft) (or within 23 m (75 ft) for a highway that is regularly used by multi-unit vehicles) of an intersection controlled by a traffic control signal, the use of pre-signals to control traffic approaching the grade crossing should be considered. Standard: If used, the pre-signals shall display a red signal indication during the track clearance portion of a signal preemption sequence to prohibit additional vehicles from crossing the railroad track. Guidance: Consideration should be given to using visibility-limited signal faces (see Section 4A.02) at the intersection for the downstream signal faces that control the approach that is equipped with pre-signals. Option: The pre-signal phase sequencing may be timed with an offset from the signalized intersection such that the railroad track area and the area between the railroad track and the downstream signalized intersection is generally kept clear of stopped vehicles. Standard: If a pre-signal is installed at an interconnected highway-rail grade crossing near a signalized intersection, a STOP HERE ON RED (R10-6) sign shall be installed near the pre-signal or at the stop line if used. If there is a nearby signalized intersection with insufficient clear storage distance for a design vehicle, or the highway-rail grade crossing does not have gates, a NO TURN ON RED (R10-11) sign shall be installed for the approach that crosses the railroad track. Option: At locations where a highway-rail grade crossing is located more than 15 m (50 ft) (or more than 23 m (75 ft) for a highway regularly used by multi-unit vehicles) from an intersection controlled by a traffic control signal, a pre-signal may be used if an engineering study determines a need. If highway traffic signals must be located within close proximity to the flashing-light signal system, the highway traffic signals may be mounted on the same overhead structure as the flashing-light signals. Support: Section 4D.13 describes additional considerations regarding preemption of traffic control signals at or near highway-rail grade crossings.
Sect. 8D.07
Part 9
2003 Edition
Page TC9-1
Page TC9-2
2003 Edition
FIGURES CHAPTER 9B. SIGNS Figure 9B-1 Figure 9B-2 Figure 9B-3 Figure 9B-4 Figure 9B-5 Figure 9B-6 Figure 9B-7 Figure 9C-1 Figure 9C-2 Figure 9C-3 Figure 9C-4 Figure 9C-5 Figure 9C-6 Figure 9C-7 Figure 9C-8 TABLES CHAPTER 9B. SIGNS Table 9B-1 Minimum Sign Sizes for Bicycle Facilities.............................................................................9B-3 Sign Placement on Shared-Use Paths......................................................................................9B-2 Regulatory Signs for Bicycle Facilities...................................................................................9B-5 Warning Signs for Bicycle Facilities .......................................................................................9B-9 Guide Signs for Bicycle Facilities.........................................................................................9B-10 Example of Signing for the Beginning and End of a Designated Bicycle Route on a Shared-Use Path.............................................................................................................9B-11 Example of Signing for an On-Roadway Bicycle Route ......................................................9B-12 Examples of Signing and Markings for Shared-Use Paths ...................................................9B-13 Example of Intersection Pavement MarkingsDesignated Bicycle Lane with Left-Turn Area, Heavy Turn Volumes, Parking, One-Way Traffic, or Divided Highway .......................9C-2 Examples of Centerline Markings for Shared-Use Paths........................................................9C-3 Example of Bicycle Lane Treatment at a Right Turn Only Lane ...........................................9C-5 Example of Bicycle Lane Treatment at Parking Lane into a Right Turn Only Lane .............9C-6 Example of Pavement Markings for Bicycle Lanes on a Two-Way Street .............................9C-7 Example of Optional Word and Symbol Pavement Markings for Bicycle Lanes...................9C-8 Example of Bicycle Detector Pavement Marking ...................................................................9C-9 Example of Obstruction Pavement Marking .........................................................................9C-10
2003 Edition
Page 9A-1
CHAPTER 9A. GENERAL Section 9A.01 Requirements for Bicyclist Traffic Control Devices
Support: General information and definitions concerning traffic control devices are found in Part 1.
Page 9A-2
2003 Edition
2003 Edition
Page 9B-1
Page 9B-2
2003 Edition
When placement of STOP or YIELD signs is considered, priority at a shared-use path/roadway intersection should be assigned with consideration of the following: A. Relative speeds of shared-use path and roadway users; B. Relative volumes of shared-use path and roadway traffic; and C. Relative importance of shared-use path and roadway. Speed should not be the sole factor used to determine priority, as it is sometimes appropriate to give priority to a high-volume shared-use path crossing a low-volume street, or to a regional shared-use path crossing a minor collector street. When priority is assigned, the least restrictive control that is appropriate should be placed on the lower priority approaches. STOP signs should not be used where YIELD signs would be acceptable.
Section 9B.05 BEGIN RIGHT TURN LANE YIELD TO BIKES Sign (R4-4)
Option: Where motor vehicles entering an exclusive right-turn lane must weave across bicycle traffic in bicycle lanes, the BEGIN RIGHT TURN LANE YIELD TO BIKES (R4-4) sign (see Figure 9B-2) may be used to inform both the motorist and the bicyclist of this weaving maneuver. Guidance: The R4-4 sign should not be used when bicyclists need to move left because of a right-turn lane drop situation.
Sect. 9B.03 to 9B.05
2003 Edition
Page 9B-3
Sign
Stop Yield Bike Lane Bicycle Lane Supplemental Plaques Movement Restriction Begin Right Turn Lane Yield to Bikes Bicycle Wrong Way No Motor Vehicles No Bicycles No Parking Bike Lane Pedestrians Prohibited Ride With Traffic Plaque Bicycle Regulatory Shared-Use Path Restriction Push Button for Green Light To Request Green Wait on Symbol Railroad Crossbuck Turn and Curve Warning Arrow Warning Intersection Warning Stop,Yield,Signal Ahead Narrow Bridge Bikeway Narrows
MUTCD Code
R1-1 R1-2 R3-17 R3-17a,b R4-1,2,3,7 R4-4 R5-1b R5-3 R5-6 R7-9,9a R9-3a R9-3c R9-5,6 R9-7 R10-3 R10-22 R15-1 W1-1,2,3,4,5 W1-6,7 W2-1,2,3,4,5 W3-1,2,3 W5-2 W5-4a
Roadway
750 x 750 (30 x 30) 750 x 750 x 750 (30 x 30 x 30) 750 x 600 (30 x 24) 750 x 300 (30 x 12) 450 x 600 (18 x 24) 900 x 750 (36 x 30) 300 x 450 (12 x 18) 600 x 600 (24 x 24) 600 x 600 (24 x 24) 300 x 450 (12 x 18) 450 x 450 (18 x 18) 300 x 300 (12 x 12) 300 x 450 (12 x 18) 225 x 300 (9 x 12) 300 x 450 (12 x 18) 1200 x 225 (48 x 9) 600 x 600 (24 x 24) 900 x 450 (36 x 18) 600 x 600 (24 x 24) 750 x 750 (30 x 30) 750 x 750 (30 x 30) 750 x 750 (30 x 30)
Sect. 9B.05
Page 9B-4
2003 Edition
Sign
Hill Bump or Dip Bicycle Surface Condition Bicycle Surface Condition Plaque Advance Grade Crossing Bicycle Warning Pedestrian Crossing Low Clearance Playground Share the Road Plaque Diagonal Arrow Plaque Bicycle Guide Street Name Bicycle Parking Bike Route Bicycle Route Sign Interstate Bicycle Route Sign Bicycle Route Supplemental Plaques Route Sign Supplemental Plaques
MUTCD Code
W7-5 W8-1,2 W8-10 W8-10p W10-1 W11-1 W11-2 W12-2 W15-1 W16-1 W16-7p D1-1b D1-1c D4-3 D11-1 M1-8 M1-9 M4-11,12,13 M7-1,2,3,4,5,6,7
Roadway
600 x 600 (24 x 24) 600 x 600 (24 x 24) 600 x 600 (24 x 24) 300 x 225 (12 x 9) 375 Dia. (15 Dia.) 600 x 600 (24 x 24) 600 x 600 (24 x 24) 750 x 750 (30 x 30) 600 x 600 (24 x 24) 450 x 600 (18 x 24) 600 x 300 (24 x 12) 600 x 150 (24 x 6) 450 x 150 (18 x 6) 300 x 450 (12 x 18) 600 x 450 (24 x 18) 300 x 450 (12 x 18) 450 x 600 (18 x 24) 300 x 100 (12 x 4) 300 x 225 (12 x 9)
Sect. 9B.05
2003 Edition
Page 9B-5
R3-17a
R1-1
R1-2
R3-17
R3-17b
R4-1
R4-2
R4-3
R4-4
R4-7
R5-1b
R9-3c
R5-3
R5-6
R7-9
R7-9a
R9-3a
R9-5
R9-6
R9-7
R10-3
R10-22
R15-1
Sect. 9B.05
Page 9B-6
2003 Edition
Section 9B.06 Bicycle WRONG WAY Sign and RIDE WITH TRAFFIC Plaque (R5-1b, R9-3c)
Option: The Bicycle WRONG WAY (R5-1b) sign and RIDE WITH TRAFFIC (R9-3c) plaque (see Figure 9B-2) may be placed facing wrong-way bicycle traffic, such as on the left side of a roadway. This sign and plaque may be mounted back-to-back with other signs to minimize visibility to other traffic. Guidance: The RIDE WITH TRAFFIC plaque should be used only in conjunction with the Bicycle WRONG WAY sign, and should be mounted directly below the Bicycle WRONG WAY sign.
2003 Edition
Page 9B-7
Page 9B-8
2003 Edition
W1-1
W1-2
W1-3
W1-4
W1-5
W1-6
W1-7
W2-1
W2-2
W2-3
W2-4
W2-5
W3-1
W3-2
W3-3
W5-2
W5-4a
W7-5
W8-2
W10-1
2003 Edition
Page 9B-9
W11-1
W11-1
W11-2
OR
W12-2
W15-1
Page 9B-10
2003 Edition
D1-1b (R)
D1-1b (L)
D1-1c
D4-3
D11-1
M1-8
M1-9
M4-11
M4-12
M4-13
M7-1
M7-2
M7-3
M7-4
M7-5
M7-6
M7-7
2003 Edition
Page 9B-11
Figure 9B-5. Example of Signing for the Beginning and End of a Designated Bicycle Route on a Shared-Use Path
Shared-Use Path
D11-1 M4-12
30 m (100 ft)
R5-3
W11-1 (optional)
W11-1 (optional)
Sect. 9B.20
Page 9B-12
2003 Edition
In urban areas, signs typically should be placed approximately every 400 m (0.25 mi), at every turn in the route, and at all signalized intersections.
D11-1 D1-1
Sect. 9B.20
2003 Edition
Page 9B-13
R1-1
4.6 m (15 ft) Shared-Use Path W2-1 (if no stop, yield, or signal control on path)
Page 9B-14
2003 Edition
Option: Bicycle Route or Interstate Bicycle Route signs may be installed on shared roadways or on shared-use paths to provide guidance for bicyclists. The Bicycle Route Guide (D11-1) sign (see Figure 9B-4) may be installed where no unique designation of routes is desired.
Section 9B.21 Destination Arrow and Supplemental Plaque Signs for Bicycle Route Signs
Option: Destination (D1-1b and D1-1c) signs (see Figure 9B-4) may be mounted below Bicycle Route Guide signs, Bicycle Route signs, or Interstate Bicycle Route signs to furnish additional information, such as directional changes in the route, or intermittent distance and destination information. The M4-11 through M4-13 supplemental plaques (see Figure 9B-4) may be mounted above the appropriate Bicycle Route Guide signs, Bicycle Route signs, or Interstate Bicycle Route signs. Guidance: If used, the appropriate arrow (M7-1 through M7-7) sign (see Figure 9B-4) should be placed below the Bicycle Route Guide sign, Bicycle Route sign, or Interstate Bicycle Route sign. Standard: The arrow signs and supplemental plaques used with the D11-1 or M1-8 signs shall have a white legend and border on a green background. The arrow signs and supplemental plaques used with the M1-9 sign shall have a white legend and border on a black background.
2003 Edition
Page 9C-1
Page 9C-2
2003 Edition
Figure 9C-1. Example of Intersection Pavement MarkingsDesignated Bicycle Lane with Left-Turn Area, Heavy Turn Volumes, Parking, One-Way Traffic, or Divided Highway
Dotted lines are optinal
R3-7R
R4-4
Sect. 9C.03
2003 Edition
Page 9C-3
2.7 m (9 ft)
0.9 m (3 ft)
Passing permitted
3 m (10 ft)
0.3 m (1 ft)
Obstruction
Sect. 9C.03
Page 9C-4
2003 Edition
Standard: All object markers shall be retroreflective. Markers such as those described in Section 3C.01 shall also be used on shared-use paths, if needed. Obstructions in the traveled way of a shared-use path shall be marked with retroreflectorized material or appropriate object markers. On Type 3 markers, the alternating black and retroreflective yellow stripes shall be sloped down at an angle of 45 degrees toward the side on which traffic is to pass the obstruction.
2003 Edition
Page 9C-5
Figure 9C-3. Example of Bicycle Lane Treatment at a Right Turn Only Lane
R3-7R
Sect. 9C.06
Page 9C-6
2003 Edition
Figure 9C-4. Example of Bicycle Lane Treatment at Parking Lane into a Right Turn Only Lane
R3-7R
Sect. 9C.06
2003 Edition
Page 9C-7
Figure 9C-5. Example of Pavement Markings for Bicycle Lanes on a Two-Way Street
Minor intersection
R8-3a R3-17 15-60 m (50-200 ft) dotted line if bus stop or heavy right-turn volume
Normal solid white line Optional normal solid white line Normal solid white line R3-17 R7 series sign (as appropriate)
Signalized intersection
R8-3a R3-17 Dotted line for bus stops immediately beyond the intersection is optional; otherwise use normal solid white line 15-60 m (50-200 ft) dotted line 0.6 m (2 ft) line, 1.8 m (6 ft) space
Sect. 9C.06
Page 9C-8
2003 Edition
Figure 9C-6. Example of Optional Word and Symbol Pavement Markings for Bicycle Lanes
Normal white line = 100 mm x 100 mm (4 in x 4 in)
Directional arrow
1.8 m (6 ft)
1.8 m (6 ft)
Symbols
Sect. 9C.06
2003 Edition
Page 9C-9
150 mm (6 in)
125 mm (5 in)
50 mm (2 in)
150 mm (6 in)
Sect. 9C.06
Page 9C-10
2003 Edition
Direction of bicycle travel For metric units: L = 0.6 WS , where S is bicycle approach speed in kilometers per hour For English units: L = WS , where S is bicycle approach speed in miles per hour
Sect. 9C.06
2003 Edition
Page 9D-1
Part 10
2003 Edition
Page TC10-1
PART 10. TRAFFIC CONTROLS FOR HIGHWAYLIGHT RAIL TRANSIT GRADE CROSSINGS TABLE OF CONTENTS
Page CHAPTER 10A. GENERAL Section 10A.01 Section 10A.02 Section 10A.03 Section 10A.04 Section 10A.05 Section 10B.01 Section 10C.01 Section 10C.02 Section 10C.03 Section 10C.04 Section 10C.05 Section 10C.06 Section 10C.07 Section 10C.08 Section 10C.09 Section 10C.10 Section 10C.11 Section 10C.12 Section 10C.13 Section 10C.14 Section 10C.15 Section 10C.16 Section 10C.17 Section 10C.18 Section 10C.19 Section 10C.20 Section 10C.21 Section 10C.22 Section 10C.23 Section 10C.24 Section 10C.25 Introduction ...........................................................................................................................10A-1 Use of Standard Devices, Systems, and Practices ................................................................10A-1 Uniform Provisions ...............................................................................................................10A-2 Highway-Light Rail Transit Grade Crossing Elimination ....................................................10A-2 Temporary Traffic Control Zones..........................................................................................10A-2 Introduction............................................................................................................................10B-1 Purpose ..................................................................................................................................10C-1 Highway-Rail Grade Crossing (Crossbuck) Sign (R15-1) and Number of Tracks Sign (R15-2) ..........................................................................................................................10C-1 LOOK Sign (R15-8) ..............................................................................................................10C-2 STOP (R1-1) or YIELD (R1-2) Signs at Highway-Light Rail Transit Grade Crossings .....10C-2 DO NOT STOP ON TRACKS Sign (R8-8)..........................................................................10C-4 TRACKS OUT OF SERVICE Sign (R8-9)...........................................................................10C-4 STOP HERE ON RED Sign (R10-6)....................................................................................10C-4 STOP HERE WHEN FLASHING Sign (R8-10) ..................................................................10C-4 Light Rail Transit-Activated Blank-Out Turn Prohibition Signs (R3-1a , R3-2a)................10C-5 EXEMPT Highway-Rail Grade Crossing Signs (R15-3, W10-1a).......................................10C-5 Divided Highway With Light Rail Transit Crossing Signs (R15-7 Series) ..........................10C-5 No Vehicles On Tracks Signs (R15-6, R15-6a).....................................................................10C-5 Light Rail Transit Only Lane Signs (R15-4 Series)..............................................................10C-6 Do Not Pass Light Rail Transit Signs (R15-5, R15-5a)........................................................10C-6 Highway-Rail Grade Crossing Advance Warning Signs (W10 Series) ................................10C-6 Low Ground Clearance Highway-Rail Grade Crossing Sign (W10-5) ................................10C-8 Light Rail Transit Approaching-Activated Blank-Out Warning Sign (W10-7) ....................10C-8 Storage Space Signs (W10-11, W10-11a, W10-11b)............................................................10C-8 Skewed Crossing Sign (W10-12) ..........................................................................................10C-8 Light Rail Transit Station Sign (I-12) ...................................................................................10C-8 Emergency Notification Sign (I-13 or I-13a) ........................................................................10C-8 Illumination at Highway-Light Rail Transit Crossings .........................................................10C-9 Pavement Markings ...............................................................................................................10C-9 Stop Lines ..............................................................................................................................10C-9 Dynamic Envelope Markings ..............................................................................................10C-12
CHAPTER 10B. HIGHWAY-LIGHT RAIL TRANSIT GRADE CROSSING CONTROL SYSTEMS CHAPTER 10C. SIGNS, ILLUMINATION, AND MARKINGS
CHAPTER 10D. HIGHWAY-LIGHT RAIL TRANSIT ACTIVE TRAFFIC CONTROL GRADE CROSSING SYSTEMS Section 10D.01 Section 10D.02 Section 10D.03 Section 10D.04 Introduction ...........................................................................................................................10D-1 Flashing-Light Signals ..........................................................................................................10D-1 Automatic Gates ....................................................................................................................10D-1 Four-Quadrant Gate Systems ................................................................................................10D-2
Page TC10-2
2003 Edition
Traffic Control Signals ..........................................................................................................10D-3 Highway Traffic Signal Preemption Turning Restrictions....................................................10D-4 Use of Traffic Control Signals for Control of Light Rail Transit Vehicles at Grade Crossings ....10D-4 Pedestrian and Bicycle Signals and Crossings......................................................................10D-6
CHAPTER 10C. SIGNS, ILLUMINATION, AND MARKINGS Figure 10C-1 Figure 10C-2 Figure 10C-3 Figure 10C-4 Figure 10C-5 Figure 10C-6 Figure 10C-7 Figure 10C-8 Figure 10C-9 Figure 10C-10 Highway-Rail Grade Crossing (Crossbuck) Regulatory Signs .............................................10C-2 Regulatory Signs....................................................................................................................10C-3 Warning Signs and Light Rail Station Sign ..........................................................................10C-7 Emergency Notification Signs...............................................................................................10C-9 Example of Placement of Warning Signs and Pavement Markings at Highway-Light Rail Transit Grade Crossings .....................................................................10C-10 Examples of Highway-Light Rail Transit Grade Crossing Pavement Markings ................10C-11 Light Rail Transit Vehicle Dynamic Envelope ....................................................................10C-13 Typical Light Rail Transit Vehicle Dynamic Envelope Pavement Markings ......................10C-13 Example of Light Rail Transit Vehicle Dynamic Envelope Pavement Markings ...............10C-14 Example of Light Rail Transit Vehicle Dynamic Envelope Contrasting Color and/or Texture..................................................................................................................................10C-14
CHAPTER 10D. HIGHWAY-LIGHT RAIL TRANSIT ACTIVE TRAFFIC CONTROL GRADE CROSSING SYSTEMS Figure 10D-1 Figure 10D-2 Figure 10D-3 Figure 10D-4 Figure 10D-5 Figure 10D-6 Figure 10D-7 Figure 10D-8 Examples of Light Rail Transit Signals ................................................................................10D-5 Example of Light Rail Transit Flashing-Light Signal Assembly for Pedestrian Crossings...10D-7 Example of Pedestrian Gate Placement Behind the Sidewalk..............................................10D-8 Example of Pedestrian Gate Placement with Pedestrian Gate Arm .....................................10D-8 Examples of Placement of Pedestrian Gates.........................................................................10D-9 Example of Swing Gates .....................................................................................................10D-10 Example of Pedestrian Barriers at an Offset Highway-Light Rail Transit Crossing..........10D-10 Examples of Pedestrian Barrier Installation at an Offset Nonintersection Light Rail Transit Crossing...........................................................................................................10D-11
2003 Edition
Page 10A-1
Page 10A-2
2003 Edition
2003 Edition
Page 10A-3
Temporary traffic control operations should minimize the inconvenience, delay, and crash potential to affected traffic. Prior notice should be given to affected public or private parties, emergency services, businesses, and road users before the free movement of vehicles or light rail transit is infringed on or blocked. Temporary traffic control activities should not be permitted to extensively prolong the closing of a grade crossing. The width, grade, alignment, and riding quality of the highway surface at a light rail transit crossing should, at a minimum, be restored to correspond with the quality of the approaches to the highway-light rail transit grade crossing.
Sect. 10A.05
2003 Edition
Page 10B-1
CHAPTER 10B. HIGHWAY-LIGHT RAIL TRANSIT GRADE CROSSING CONTROL SYSTEMS Section 10B.01 Introduction
Support: The combination of devices selected or installed at a specific highway-light rail transit grade crossing is referred to as a Light Rail Transit Traffic Control System. For the safety and integrity of operations by highway and light rail transit users, the highway agency with jurisdiction, the regulatory agency with statutory authority, if applicable, and the light rail transit authority jointly determine the need and selection of traffic control devices and the assignment of priority to light rail transit at a highway-light rail transit grade crossing. The normal rules of the road and traffic control priority identified in the Uniform Vehicle Code govern the order assigned to the movement of vehicles at an intersection unless the local agency determines that it is appropriate to assign a higher priority to light rail transit. Examples of different types of light rail transit priority control include separate traffic control signal phases for light rail transit movements, restriction of movement of roadway vehicles in favor of light rail transit operations, and preemption of highway traffic signal control to accommodate light rail transit movements. Standard: Highway-light rail transit grade crossings in semiexclusive alignments shall be equipped with a combination of automatic gates and flashing-light signals, or flashing- light signals only, or traffic control signals, unless an engineering study indicates that the use of STOP, YIELD, or advance warning signs alone would be adequate. Option: Highway-light rail transit grade crossings in mixed-use alignments may be equipped with traffic control signals unless an engineering study indicates that the use of STOP, YIELD, or advance warning signs alone would be adequate. Support: Section 10C.04 describes the appropriate conditions for the use of STOP or YIELD signs alone at a highwaylight rail transit grade crossing.
Sect. 10B.01
2003 Edition
Page 10C-1
Section 10C.02 Highway-Rail Grade Crossing (Crossbuck) Sign (R15-1) and Number of Tracks Sign (R15-2)
Standard: The Highway-Rail Grade Crossing (R15-1) sign, commonly identified as the Crossbuck sign, shall be retroreflectorized white with the words RAILROAD CROSSING in black lettering, mounted as shown in Figure 10C-1. As a minimum, one Crossbuck sign shall be used on each highway approach to every highway-light rail transit grade crossing on a semiexclusive alignment, alone or in combination with other traffic control devices. Option: A Crossbuck sign may be used on a highway approach to a highway-light rail transit grade crossing on a mixed-use alignment, alone or in combination with other traffic control devices. Standard: If automatic gates are not present where a Crossbuck sign is being used and if there are two or more tracks at the highway-light rail transit grade crossing, the number of tracks shall be indicated on a supplemental Number of Tracks (R15-2) sign of inverted T shape mounted below the Crossbuck sign in the manner and at the height indicated in Figure 10C-1. Option: The supplemental Number of Tracks sign may also be used at highway-light rail transit grade crossings with automatic gates. Standard: If used, the Crossbuck sign shall be installed on the right side of the highway on each approach to the highway-light rail transit grade crossing. Where restricted sight distance or unfavorable highway geometry exists on an approach to a highway-light rail transit grade crossing, an additional Crossbuck sign shall be installed on the left side of the highway, possibly placed back-to-back with the Crossbuck sign for the opposite approach, or otherwise located so that two Crossbuck signs are displayed for that approach. A strip of retroreflective white material not less than 50 mm (2 in) in width shall be used on the back of each blade of each Crossbuck sign for the length of each blade, at all highway-light rail transit grade crossings, except those where Crossbuck signs have been installed back-to-back. A strip of retroreflective white material, not less than 50 mm (2 in) in width, shall be used on each support at passive highway-light rail transit grade crossings for the full length of the front and back of the support from the Crossbuck sign or Number of Tracks sign to within 0.6 m (2 ft) above the edge of the roadway, except on the side of those supports where a STOP (R1-1) or YIELD (R1-2) sign or flashing lights have been installed or on the back side of supports for Crossbuck signs installed on one-way streets. Guidance: If used, Crossbuck signs should be located with respect to the highway pavement or shoulder in accordance with the criteria in Chapter 2A and Figures 2A-1 and 2A-2, and should be located with respect to the nearest track in accordance with Figure 8D-2. The minimum lateral clearance for the nearest edge of the Crossbuck sign should be 1.8 m (6 ft) from the edge of the shoulder or 3.7 m (12 ft) from the edge of the traveled way in rural areas, and 0.6 m (2 ft) from the face of the curb in urban areas. Where unusual conditions make variations in location and lateral clearance appropriate, engineering judgment should be used to provide the best practical combination of view and safety clearances.
Sect. 10C.01 to 10C.02
Page 10C-2
2003 Edition
m m ) 00 in 12 (48
22 5 m m
225 mm (9 in)
225 mm (9 in) 675 mm (27 in) R15-1 (drilled for 90-degree mounting) R15-2 2.8 m* (9 ft) *Height may be varied as required by local conditions 0.6 m (2 ft) MAX ROADWAY LEVEL 50 mm (2 in) white retroreflective strip
(9 in )
Section 10C.04 STOP (R1-1) or YIELD (R1-2) Signs at Highway-Light Rail Transit Grade Crossings
Standard: For all highway-light rail transit grade crossings where STOP (R1-1) or YIELD (R1-2) signs are installed, the placement shall conform to the requirements of Sections 2B.06 and 2B.10. Stop Ahead (W3-1) or Yield Ahead (W3-2) Advance Warning signs (see Figure 2C-4) shall also be installed if the criteria for their installation given in Section 2C.29 is met. Guidance: The use of STOP or YIELD signs for road users at highway-light rail transit grade crossings should be limited to those crossings where the need and feasibility is established by an engineering study. Such crossings should have all of the following characteristics: A. The crossing roadways should be secondary in character (such as a minor street with one lane in each direction, an alley, or a driveway) with low traffic volumes and low speed limits. The specific thresholds of traffic volumes and speed limits should be determined by the local agencies. B. Light rail transit speeds do not exceed 40 km/h (25 mph). C. The line of sight for an approaching light rail transit operator is adequate from a sufficient distance such that the operator can sound an audible signal and bring the light rail transit vehicle to a stop before arriving at the crossing. D. The road user has sufficient sight distance at the stop line to permit the vehicle to cross the tracks before the arrival of the light rail transit vehicle.
Sect. 10C.02 to 10C.04
2003 Edition
Page 10C-3
R8-8
R8-9
R8-10
R10-6
R10-11a
R15-3
R15-4a
R15-4b
R15-4c
R15-5
R15-5a
R15-6
R15-6a
R15-7
R15-7a
R15-8
Sect. 10C.04
Page 10C-4
2003 Edition
E. If at an intersection of two roadways, the intersection does not meet the warrants for a traffic control signal as specified in Chapter 4C. F. The light rail transit tracks are located such that vehicles are not likely to stop on the tracks while waiting to enter a cross street or highway. If a STOP or YIELD sign is installed beyond the light rail transit crossing such that vehicle queues are likely to extend into the path of the light rail transit, a DO NOT STOP ON TRACKS sign (R8-8) should be posted in accordance with Section 10C.05. Option: If a STOP or YIELD sign is installed at a highway-light rail transit grade crossing, it may be installed on the Crossbuck post or on a separate post at the point where the vehicle is to stop, or as near to that point as practical.
2003 Edition
Page 10C-5
Section 10C.09 Light Rail Transit-Activated Blank-Out Turn Prohibition Signs (R3-1a, R3-2a)
Support: Light rail transit operations can include the use of activated blank-out sign technology for turn prohibition (R3-1a, R3-2a) signs (see Figure 10C-2). The signs are typically used on roads paralleling a semiexclusive or mixed-use light rail transit alignment where road users might turn across the light rail transit tracks. A blank-out sign displays its message only when activated. When not activated, the sign face is blank. Guidance: A light rail transit-activated blank-out turn prohibition sign should be used where an intersection adjacent to a highway-light rail transit crossing is controlled by STOP signs, or is controlled by traffic control signals with permissive turn movements for road users crossing the tracks. Option: A light rail transit-activated blank-out turn prohibition sign may be used for turning movements that cross the tracks. As an alternative to light rail transit-activated blank-out turn prohibition signs at intersections with traffic control signals, exclusive traffic control signal phases such that all movements that cross the tracks have a red indication may be used in combination with NO TURN ON RED (R10-11a) signs. Standard: Turn prohibition signs that are associated with preemption shall be visible only when the highwaylight rail transit grade crossing restriction is in effect.
Section 10C.11 Divided Highway with Light Rail Transit Crossing Signs (R15-7 Series)
Option: The Divided Highway With Light Rail Transit Crossing (R15-7) sign (see Figure 10C-2) may be used as a supplemental sign on the approach legs of a roadway that intersects with a divided highway where light rail transit vehicles operate in the median. The sign may be placed beneath a STOP sign or mounted separately. Guidance: The number of tracks shown on the R15-7 sign should be the same as the actual number of tracks. Standard: When the Divided Highway With Light Rail Transit Crossing sign is used at a four-legged intersection, the R15-7 sign shall be used. When used at a T-intersection, the R15-7a sign shall be used.
Page 10C-6
2003 Edition
Option: A No Vehicles On Tracks sign may be used to deter vehicles from driving on the trackway. It may be installed either on a 0.9 m (3 ft) flexible post between double tracks, on a post alongside the tracks, or overhead. Instead of the R15-6 symbol sign, a regulatory sign with the word message DO NOT DRIVE ON TRACKS (R15-6a) may be used (see Figure 10C-2). A reduced size of 300 x 300 mm (12 x 12 in) may be used if the R15-6 sign is installed between double tracks. Standard: The smallest size for the R15-6 sign shall be 300 x 300 mm (12 x 12 in).
Section 10C.13 Light Rail Transit Only Lane Signs (R15-4 Series)
Support: The Light Rail Transit Only Lane (R15-4 series) signs (see Figure 10C-2) are used for multi-lane operations, where road users might need additional guidance on lane use and/or restrictions. Option: Light Rail Transit Only Lane signs may be used on a roadway lane limited to only light rail transit use to indicate the restricted use of a lane in semiexclusive and mixed alignments. Guidance: If used, the R15-4a, R15-4b, and R15-4c signs should be installed on posts adjacent to the roadway containing the light rail transit tracks or overhead above the light rail transit only lane. Option: If the trackway is paved, preferential lane markings (see Section 3B.22) may be installed but only in combination with light rail transit only lane signs. Support: The trackway is the continuous way designated for light rail transit, including the entire dynamic envelope. Section 10C.25 contains more information regarding the dynamic envelope.
Section 10C.14 Do Not Pass Light Rail Transit Signs (R15-5, R15-5a)
Support: A Do Not Pass Light Rail Transit (R15-5) sign (see Figure 10C-2) is used to indicate that vehicles are not allowed to pass light rail transit vehicles that are loading or unloading passengers where there is no raised platform or physical separation from the lanes upon which other motor vehicles are operating. Option: The R15-5 sign may be used in mixed-use alignments and may be mounted overhead where there are multiple lanes. Instead of the R15-5 symbol sign, a regulatory sign with the word message DO NOT PASS STOPPED TRAIN (R15-5a) may be used (see Figure 10C-2). Guidance: If used, the R15-5 sign should be located immediately before the light rail transit boarding area.
Section 10C.15 Highway-Rail Grade Crossing Advance Warning Signs (W10 Series)
Standard: A Highway-Rail Grade Crossing Advance Warning (W10-1) sign (see Figure 10C-3) shall be used on each highway in advance of every highway-light rail transit grade crossing in semiexclusive alignments except in the following circumstances: A. On an approach to a highway-light rail transit grade crossing from a T-intersection with a parallel highway, if the distance from the edge of the track to the edge of the parallel roadway is less than 30 m (100 ft), and W10-3 signs are used on both approaches of the parallel highway; or B. On low-volume, low-speed highways crossing minor spurs or other tracks that are infrequently used and are flagged by transit crews; or C. In business districts where active highway-light rail transit grade crossing traffic control devices are in use; or D. Where physical conditions do not permit even a partially effective display of the sign.
Sect. 10C.12 to 10C.15
2003 Edition
Page 10C-7
W10-1
W10-1a
W10-2
W10-3
W10-4
I-12
W10-5
W10-11
W10-12
OR
OR
W10-11a
W10-11b
Placement of the Highway-Rail Grade Crossing Advance Warning sign shall be in accordance with Chapter 2A and Table 2C-4. Option: On divided highways and one-way streets, an additional W10-1 sign may be installed on the left side of the roadway. Standard: If the distance between the light rail transit tracks in a semiexclusive alignment and a parallel highway, from the edge of the tracks to the edge of the parallel roadway, is less than 30 m (100 ft), W10-2, W10-3, or W10-4 signs (see Figure 10C-3) shall be installed on each approach of the parallel highway to warn road users making a turn that they will encounter a highway-light rail transit grade crossing soon after making a turn, and a W10-1 sign for the approach to the tracks shall not be required to be between the tracks and the parallel highway. If the W10-2, W10-3, or W10-4 signs are used, sign placement in accordance with the guidelines for Intersection Warning signs in Table 2C-4 using the speed of through traffic shall be measured from the highway intersection. Guidance: If the distance between the light rail transit tracks and the parallel highway, from the edge of the tracks to the edge of the parallel roadway, is 30 m (100 ft) or more, a W10-1 sign should be installed in advance of the highway-light rail transit grade crossing, and the W10-2, W10-3, or W10-4 signs should not be used on the parallel highway.
Sect. 10C.15
Page 10C-8
2003 Edition
Section 10C.16 Low Ground Clearance Highway-Rail Grade Crossing Sign (W10-5)
Guidance: If the highway profile conditions are sufficiently abrupt to create a hang-up situation for long wheelbase vehicles or for trailers with low ground clearance, the Low Ground Clearance Highway-Rail Grade Crossing (W10-5) sign (see Figure 10C-3) should be installed in advance of the highway-light rail transit grade crossing. Support: Information regarding the use of the W10-5 sign is contained in Section 8B.17.
Section 10C.17 Light Rail Transit Approaching-Activated Blank-Out Warning Sign (W10-7)
Support: The Light Rail Transit Approaching-Activated Blank-Out (W10-7) warning sign (see Figure 10C-3) supplements the traffic control signal to warn road users turning across the tracks of an approaching parallel light rail transit vehicle. Option: A Light Rail Transit Approaching-Activated Blank-Out warning sign may be used at signalized intersections near grade crossings or at crossings controlled by STOP signs or automatic gates.
2003 Edition
Page 10C-9
I-13
I-13a
Page 10C-10
2003 Edition
Figure 10C-5. Example of Placement of Warning Signs and Pavement Markings at Highway-Light Rail Transit Grade Crossings
Stop line approximately 2.4 m (8 ft) from gate (if present) 1.8 m (6 ft) Light Rail Transit Dynamic Envelope Dynamic Envelope Pavement Marking (optional)
A three-lane roadway should be marked with a centerline for two-lane approach operation on the approach to a crossing.
1.8 m (6 ft)
0.6 m (2 ft)
On multi-lane roads, the transverse bands should extend across all approach lanes, and individual RXR symbols should be used in each approach lane.
See Chapter 2C, Table 2C-4 0.6 m (2 ft) 7.5 m (25 ft) 15 m (50 ft) Pavement Marking Symbol* See 7.5 m Figure 10C-6) (25 ft) * When used, a portion of the pavement marking symbol should be directly opposite the Advance Warning Sign (W10-1). If needed, supplemental pavement marking symbol(s) may be placed between the Advance Warning Sign and the crossing, but should be at least 15 m (50 ft) from the stop line.
0.6 m (2 ft)
(optional)
Note: In an effort to simplify the figure to show warning sign and pavement marking placement, not all required traffic control devices are shown.
Sect. 10C.24
2003 Edition
Page 10C-11
Figure 10C-6. Examples of Highway-Light Rail Transit Grade Crossing Pavement Markings
mm 400 in) 6 (1
2.4 m* (8 ft)
7m (23 ft)
Center of lane
Page 10C-12
2003 Edition
Sect. 10C.25
2003 Edition
Page 10C-13
Roadway or sidewalk
Roadway or sidewalk
Figure 10C-8. Typical Light Rail Transit Vehicle Dynamic Envelope Pavement Markings
Light rail transit vehicle dynamic envelope
Note: In an effort to simplify the figure to show the dynamic envelope pavement markings, not all pavement markings or other required traffic control devices are shown.
The distance between rail and dynamic envelope pavement marking should be equal to 1.8 m (6 ft) unless otherwise advised by the operating light rail transit authority.
Sect. 10C.25
Page 10C-14
2003 Edition
Figure 10C-9. Example of Light Rail Transit Vehicle Dynamic Envelope Pavement Markings
Additional clearance for light rail vehicle ends and middle ordinate overhang around curves
Figure 10C-10. Example of Light Rail Transit Vehicle Dynamic Envelope Contrasting Color and/or Texture
Legend Direction of travel
Additional clearance for light rail vehicle ends and middle ordinate overhang around curves
Sect. 10C.25
2003 Edition
Page 10D-1
CHAPTER 10D. HIGHWAY-LIGHT RAIL TRANSIT ACTIVE TRAFFIC CONTROL GRADE CROSSING SYSTEMS Section 10D.01 Introduction
Support: Active light rail transit traffic control systems inform motorists, bicyclists, and pedestrians of the approach or presence of light rail transit vehicles at highway-light rail transit grade crossings. These systems include fourquadrant gate systems, automatic gates, flashing-light signals, traffic control signals, actuated blank-out and variable message signs, and other active traffic control devices. Guidance: Where both traffic control signals and flashing-light signals (with or without automatic gates) are in operation at the same highway-light rail transit grade crossing, the operation of the devices should be coordinated to avoid any display of conflicting signal indications. If a pedestrian route is provided, sufficient clearance from supports, posts, and gate mechanisms should be maintained for pedestrian travel. Option: Audible devices may be operated in conjunction with the flashing lights or traffic control signals. Support: Light rail transit typically operates through grade crossings in semiexclusive and mixed-use alignments at speeds between 16 km/h (10 mph) and 105 km/h (65 mph). When light rail transit speed is cited in this Part, it refers to the maximum speed at which light rail transit vehicles are permitted to traverse a particular grade crossing.
Page 10D-2
2003 Edition
Traffic control signals may be used instead of automatic gates at highway-light rail transit grade crossings within highway-highway intersections where light rail transit speeds do not exceed 60 km/h (35 mph). Traffic control signals or flashing-light signals without automatic gates may be used where the crossing is at a location other than an intersection and where light rail transit speeds do not exceed 40 km/h (25 mph) and the roadway is a low-volume street where prevailing speeds do not exceed 40 km/h (25 mph). Automatic gates may be supplemented by cantilevered flashing-light signals (see Figure 8D-1) where there is a need for additional emphasis or better visibility. The effectiveness of gates may be enhanced by the use of channelizing devices or raised median islands to discourage driving around lowered automatic gates.
2003 Edition
Page 10D-3
If a Four-Quadrant Gate system is used at a location that is adjacent to an intersection that could cause vehicles to queue within the minimum track clearance distance, the Dynamic Exit Gate Operating Mode should be used unless an engineering study indicates otherwise. If a Four-Quadrant Gate system is interconnected with a highway traffic signal, backup or standby power should be considered for the highway traffic signal. Also, circuitry should be installed to prevent the highway traffic signal from leaving the track clearance green interval until all of the gates are lowered. At locations where sufficient space is available, exit gates should be set back from the track a distance that provides a safety zone long enough to accommodate at least one design vehicle between the exit gate and the nearest rail. Four-Quadrant Gate systems should include remote health (status) monitoring capable of automatically notifying light rail transit signal maintenance personnel when anomalies have occurred within the system. Option: Exit gate arms may fail in the down position if the highway-light rail transit grade crossing is equipped with remote health (status) monitoring. Four-Quadrant Gate system installations may include median islands between opposing lanes on an approach to a highway-light rail transit grade crossing. Guidance: Where sufficient space is available, median islands should be at least 18 m (60 ft) in length.
Page 10D-4
2003 Edition
Support: See Section 4D.13 for considerations regarding traffic control signals at or near highway-light rail transit grade crossings that are not equipped with highway-light rail transit grade crossing warning devices.
Section 10D.07 Use of Traffic Control Signals for Control of Light Rail Transit Vehicles at Grade Crossings
Guidance: Light rail transit movements in semiexclusive alignments at nongated grade crossings that are equipped with traffic control signals should be controlled by special light rail transit signal indications. Support: Examples of light rail transit traffic control signals, used to control light rail transit movements only, are shown in Figure 10D-1. Option: Standard traffic control signals may be used instead of light rail transit traffic control signals to control the movement of light rail transit vehicles (see Section 10D.05). Standard: If a separate set of standard traffic control signal indications (red, yellow, and green circular and arrow indications) is used to control light rail transit movements, the indications shall be positioned so they are not visible to motorists, pedestrians, and bicyclists (see Section 4D.17). If the light rail transit crossing control is separate from the intersection control, the two shall be interconnected. The light rail phase shall not be terminated until after the light rail transit vehicle has cleared the crossing. Option: Light rail transit signals may be used at grade crossings and at intersections in mixed-use alignments in conjunction with standard traffic control signals where special light rail transit signal phases are used to accommodate turning light rail transit vehicles or where additional light rail transit clearance time is desirable. Guidance: Light rail transit signal faces should be separated vertically or horizontally from the nearest highway traffic signal face for the same approach by at least 0.9 m (3 ft).
2003 Edition
Page 10D-5
Three-Lens Signal
Two-Lens Signal
STOP GO
Flashing
(1) (1),(2)
Notes: All aspects (or signal indications) are white. (1) Could be in single housing. (2) Go lens may be used in flashing mode to indicate prepare to stop.
Sect. 10D.07
Page 10D-6
2003 Edition
Sect. 10D.08
2003 Edition
Page 10D-7
Figure 10D-2. Example of Light Rail Transit Flashing-Light Signal Assembly for Pedestrian Crossings
AUDIBLE DEVICE
R15-8
PIPE POST
GROUND LEVEL
Sect. 10D.08
Page 10D-8
2003 Edition
AUDIBLE DEVICE
Figure 10D-4. Example of Pedestrian Gate Placement with Pedestrian Gate Arm
AUDIBLE DEVICE
0.6 m (2 ft) For locating this reference line at other than curb section installation, see Section 8D.01.
Sect. 10D.08
2003 Edition
Page 10D-9
C L
C L
Sect. 10D.08
Page 10D-10
2003 Edition
Legend Direction of travel Contrasting pavement color or texture C L 1.9 m (6 ft - 3 in) MIN.
Figure 10D-7. Example of Pedestrian Barriers at an Offset HighwayLight Rail Transit Crossing
Fence (1.1 m (3 ft - 7 in) MAX. height) 600 mm (2 ft) Fence (1.1 m (3 ft - 7 in) MAX. height) Legend Direction of travel Pedestrian path 600 mm (2 ft) 600 mm (2 ft)
Sect. 10D.08
2003 Edition
Page 10D-11
Figure 10D-8. Examples of Pedestrian Barrier Installation at an Offset Nonintersection Light Rail Transit Crossing
Legend Direction of travel Fence (1.1 m (3 ft - 7 in) MAX. height) Fence (1.1 m (3 ft - 7 in) MAX. height)
600 mm (2 ft)
600 mm (2 ft)
Appendix A1
2003 Edition
Page A1-1
CONGRESSIONAL LEGISLATION
PUBLIC LAW 102-240-DEC. 18, 1991 (INTERMODAL SURFACE TRANSPORTATION EFFICIENCY ACT OF 1991) Section 1077. REVISION OF MANUAL Not later than 90 days after the date of the enactment of this Act, the Secretary shall revise the Manual of Uniform Traffic Control Devices and such other regulations and agreements of the Federal Highway Administration as may be necessary to authorize States and local governments, at their discretion, to install stop or yield signs at any rail-highway grade crossing without automatic traffic control devices with 2 or more trains operating across the rail-highway grade crossing per day. PUBLIC LAW 102-388-OCT. 6, 1992 (DEPARTMENT OF TRANSPORTATION AND RELATED AGENCIES APPROPRIATIONS ACT, 1993) Section 406 The Secretary of Transportation shall revise the Manual of Uniform Traffic Control Devices to include (a) a standard for a minimum level of retroreflectivity that must be maintained for pavement markings and signs, which shall apply to all roads open to public travel; and (b) a standard to define the roads that must have a centerline or edge lines or both, provided that in setting such standard the Secretary shall consider the functional classification of roads, traffic volumes, and the number and width of lanes. PUBLIC LAW 104-59-NOV. 28, 1995 (NATIONAL HIGHWAY SYSTEM DESIGNATION ACT OF 1995) Section 205. RELIEF FROM MANDATES (c) METRIC REQUIREMENTS (1) PLACEMENT AND MODIFICATION OF SIGNS The Secretary shall not require the States to expend any Federal or State funds to construct, erect, or otherwise place or to modify any sign relating to a speed limit, distance, or other measurement on a highway for the purpose of having such sign establish such speed limit, distance, or other measurement using the metric system. (2) OTHER ACTIONS Before September 30, 2000, the Secretary shall not require that any State use or plan to use the metric system with respect to designing or advertising, or preparing plans, specifications, estimates, or other documents, for a Federal-aid highway project eligible for assistance under title 23, United States Code. (3) DEFINITIONS In this subsection, the following definitions apply: (A) HIGHWAY The term highway has the meaning such term has under section 101 of title 23, United State Code. (B) METRIC SYSTEM the term metric system has the meaning the term metric system of measurement has under section 4 of the Metric Conversion Act of 1975 (15 U.S.C. 205c). Section 306. MOTORIST CALL BOXES Section 111 of title 23, United States Code, is amended by adding at the end the following: (c) MOTORIST CALL BOXES (1) IN GENERAL Notwithstanding subsection (a), a State may permit the placement of motorist call boxes on rights-of-way of the National Highway System. Such motorist call boxes may include the identification and sponsorship logos of such call boxes. (2) SPONSORSHIP LOGOS (A) APPROVAL BY STATE AND LOCAL AGENCIESAll call box installations displaying sponsorship logos under this subsection shall be approved by the highway agencies having jurisdiction of the highway on which they are located. (B) SIZE ON BOXA sponsorship logo may be placed on the call box in a dimension not to exceed the size of the call box or a total dimension in excess of 12 inches by 18 inches. (C) SIZE ON IDENTIFICATION SIGNSponsorship logos in a dimension not to exceed 12 inches by 30 inches may be displayed on a call box identification sign affixed to the call box post.
Page A1-2
2003 Edition
(D) SPACING OF SIGNSSponsorship logos affixed to an identification sign on a call box post may be located on the rights-of-way at intervals not more frequently than 1 per every 5 miles. (E) DISTRIBUTION THROUGHOUT STATEWithin a State, at least 20 percent of the call boxes displaying sponsorship logos shall be located on highways outside of urbanized areas with a population greater than 50,000. (3) NONSAFETY HAZARDSThe call boxes and their location, posts, foundations, and mountings shall be consistent with requirements of the Manual on Uniform Traffic Control Devices or any requirements deemed necessary by the Secretary to assure that the call boxes shall not be a safety hazard to motorists. Section 353(a) SIGNS Traffic control signs referred to in the experimental project conducted in the State of Oregon in December 1991 shall be deemed to comply with the requirements of Section 2B-4 of the Manual on Uniform Traffic Control Devices of the Department of Transportation. Section 353(b) STRIPES Notwithstanding any other provision of law, a red, white, and blue center line in the Main Street of Bristol, Rhode Island, shall be deemed to comply with the requirements of Section 3B-1 of the Manual on Uniform Traffic Control Devices of the Department of Transportation.